Government of Bihar

BIHAR URBAN INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT CORPORATION

LIMITED
(for National Ganga River Basin Project, India)

NATIONAL COMPETITIVE BIDDING DOCUMENTS

SURVEY, REVIEW THE DESIGNS, REDESIGN WHERE NECESSARY AND

BUILD NEW SEWERAGE NETWORK OF ABOUT 180 KM LENGTH AND ALL
APPURTENANT STRUCTURES, AND OPERATION & MAINTENANCE OF
SEWERAGE NETWORK FOR A PERIOD OF 10 YEARS AT BEUR IN PATNA,
STATE OF BIHAR, INDIA

NGRBA/PP14-15/SPMG/BH/W/05B/145 Dt: 21.08.2015

ISSUED ON: 02.08.2015

Project : NATIONAL GANGA RIVER BASIN PROJECT

Owner : Managing Director

Bihar Urban Infrastructure Development Corporation Limited
#303, Third Floor, Maurya Tower, Mauryalok Complex, Budh Marg,
Patna-800001
Tele Phone: +91-0612-2210101 / 02
Tele Fax : +91-612-2210103

Government of Bihar
Page 1 of 385
 BIHAR URBAN INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT CORPORATION
LIMITED
NATIONAL COMPETITIVE BIDDING

SURVEY, REVIEW THE DESIGNS, REDESIGN WHERE NECESSARY AND

BUILD NEW SEWERAGE NETWORK OF ABOUT 180 KM LENGTH AND ALL
APPURTENANT STRUCTURES, AND OPERATION & MAINTENANCE OF
SEWERAGE NETWORK FOR A PERIOD OF 10 YEARS AT BEUR IN PATNA,
STATE OF BIHAR, INDIA

NGRBA/PP14-15/SPMG/BH/W/05B/145 Dt: 21.08.2015

PROJECT: NATIONAL GANGA RIVER BASIN PROJECT ___________________

EMPLOYER: BIHAR URBAN INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT
CORPORATION LIMITED

ISSUED : Managing Director

ON: Bihar Urban Infrastructure Development Corporation Limited
#303, Third Floor, Maurya Tower, Mauryalok Complex, Budh Marg,
02.08.2015 Patna-800001
Owner
Tele Phone: +91-0612-2210101 / 02
Tele Fax : +91-612-2210103

Page 2 of 385
 Bidding Documents

FOR A CONTRACT

SURVEY, REVIEW THE DESIGNS, REDESIGN WHERE NECESSARY AND

BUILD NEW SEWERAGE NETWORK OF ABOUT 180 KM LENGTH AND ALL
APPURTENANT STRUCTURES, AND OPERATION & MAINTENANCE OF
SEWERAGE NETWORK FOR A PERIOD OF 10 YEARS AT BEUR IN PATNA,
STATE OF BIHAR, INDIA

Page 3 of 385
 Invitation for Bids

For A Contract

SURVEY, REVIEW THE DESIGNS, REDESIGN WHERE NECESSARY AND

BUILD NEW SEWERAGE NETWORK OF ABOUT 180 KM LENGTH AND ALL
APPURTENANT STRUCTURES, AND OPERATION & MAINTENANCE OF
SEWERAGE NETWORK FOR A PERIOD OF 10 YEARS AT BEUR IN PATNA,
STATE OF BIHAR,

Page 4 of 385
 BIHAR URBAN INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT
CORPORATION LTD
[A Government of India Undertaking]

INVITATION FOR BIDS (IFB)

National Competitive Bidding

NATIONAL GANGA RIVER BASIN PROJECT (INDIA)

(WORLD BANK FUNDED)
Invitation for Bid
Loan No. 8065-IN, Credit No. 4955-IN

No: NGRBA/PP14-15/SPMG/BH/W/05B/145 Dt: 21.08.2015

1. The invitation for Bid follows the General Procurement Notice for this Project that appeared in
UNDB online on 30.03.2011 & updated last on 31.01.2014
2. The National Ganga River Basin Authority (NGRBA), Ministry of Water Resources, River
Development & Ganga Rejuvenation, Government of India has received financing of US$ 1
billion from the World Bank towards the cost of the National Ganga River Basin Project and
intends to apply a part of the proceeds towards payments under the contract for work detailed
below.
3. The NMCG, State Governments of Uttarakhand, Uttar Pradesh, Bihar, Jharkhand and West
Bengal and the ULB have entered into a Memorandum of Agreement for implementation of the
NGRBA programme in the respective states.
4. The State Government of Bihar, Bihar Urban Infrastructure Development Corporation (BUIDCo),
Patna Municipal Corporation and Government of India have entered into a Memorandum of
Understanding towards the implementation of this project forming a part of the NGRBA
Programme.
5. Qualification requirements as listed briefly below are required to be fulfilled by the bidder. [Bidders
are advised to refer to the bidding documents for complete details]
Financial:

(a) Net worth of INR 581 Million in each of the last 3 financial years (i.e.2012-2013 to
2014-2015.).

(b) Cash credit facility of INR 194 Million

Technical:(a) Experience of design, build & commissioning, of at least one Sewerage

Network of 90 Km Length of Sewerage Network of which 15% should be above 400 mm during
the last 7 Years.

Page 5 of 385
 (b) Operating and maintaining one Sewerage Network of 90 Km length for a period of 01
year
(c) Experience of design, build and commissioning sewer line of minimum 2.5 Km of
length using trenchless technology during last 07 Years

6. Bidding will be conducted through the National Competitive Bidding Procedure as

specified in the World Bank‘s Guidelines: - Procurement of Goods, Works and Non-
consulting Services under IBRD Loans and IDA Credits & Grants, January 2011, revised
July, 2014, and is open to all eligible bidders as defined in the Guidelines. In addition,
please refer to paragraphs 1.6 and 1.7 of the Guidelines setting forth the World Bank‘s
policy on conflict of interest.
7. The Tender for and on behalf of the Owner in the State of Bihar, India invites sealed bids from
eligible bidders for the works detailed in the table below.
Cost of
Name of the Work Bid Security Bidding Period
Document
Survey, review the designs, redesign Design, Build, Test and
where necessary and build new sewerage Commissioning period
network of about 180 km length and all of 03 Years and
appurtenant structures, and operate & Rs. 23 million Rs.15000/
Operation and
maintain new sewerage network for a Maintenance period of
period of 10 years in Beur, State of 10 years.
Bihar, INDIA
8. Interested eligible bidders may obtain further information from and inspect the bidding documents
at the office of The Managing director, BUIDCo, Patna, at the address given below during
office hours i.e. 10:00 to 17:30 hours.
9. A complete set of bidding documents will be available on the BUIDCo‘s website [Link]
w.e.f. 02.09.2015. The bidders who are interested to participate in the bidding process can
download the bid documents from the website for their reference. Bidders are advised to obtain
the hard copy of the bidding document for preparation of their bids.
10. The bidders who download the documents from the website and use the same for submission of
the bids should note that if there is any discrepancy between the downloaded document and the
hard copy of the document issued to the bidders, the hard copy shall be treated as final and shall
prevail over the downloaded documents.
11. The bidders who download the documents shall have to pay along with their bid submission, the
non-refundable cost of Rs. [Link] VAT in the form of a Certified Cheque/Demand
Draft issued by a nationalized bank / foreign bank listed with the Reserve Bank of India having its
branches in India, payable to the Managing Director, BUIDCo, Patna payable at Patna, Bihar
12. Bidders can also purchase the bid documents commencing from 02.09.2015 on payment of
Rs.15000 including VAT in the form of a Demand Draft issued by a nationalized bank / foreign
bank listed with the Reserve Bank of India having its branches in India, payable to the Managing
Director, BUIDCo, Patna payable at Patna, State of Bihar. Bid documents requested by post shall

Page 6 of 385
 be sent through speed post / registered post on payment of an extra amount of Rs. 3000/. The
BUIDCo will not be held responsible for the postal delay if any, in the delivery of the documents
or non-receipt of the same.
13. The bidders may also note that the pre-bid proceedings, corrigendum if any will also be uploaded
on the website mentioned hereinabove.
14. All bids must be accompanied by Bid Security of the amount specified in the table above, drawn
in favour of The Managing Director, BUIDCo, Patna.
15. Bids must be delivered to The_ Managing Director, BUIDCo, Patna on or before 15:00. hours on
06.10.2015Electronic Bidding will not be permitted. Bids will be opened on the same day at
15:30 hours, in the presence of the bidders‘ representatives who choose to attend. If the office
happens to be closed on the last date for receipt of the bids as specified, the bids will be received
and opened on the next working day at the same time and venue. Late bids will be rejected.

Add: __
Managing Director,
Bihar Urban Infrastructure Development Corporation Ltd (BUIDCo),
303,Mourya Tower, Mouryalok Complex,_,
Budh Marg,Patna-800001,Bihar_, India
Phone No. _+91-0612-2210101/02
Tel Fax:+91-612-2210103,
Email: [email protected]_,
Sd/-
(N. K. Singh)

Managing Director
BUIDCo

Page 7 of 385
 BIHAR URBAN INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT
CORPORATION LTD
[A Government of India Undertaking]

INVITATION FOR BIDS (IFB)

National Competitive Bidding

NATIONAL GANGA RIVER BASIN PROJECT (INDIA)

(WORLD BANK FUNDED)

National Competitive Bidding

1. The Urban Infrastructure Development Corporation Ltd (BUIDCo),. for and on behalf of the
Owner in the State of Bihar., India invites sealed bids (to be submitted in hard copy only)
from eligible Bidders for the work comprising survey, review the designs, redesign where
necessary and build new sewerage network of about 180 km length and all appurtenant
structures, and operation & maintenance of sewerage network for a period of 10 years in
Beur, Patna, State of Bihar., India. Period for redesign, build, test and commissioning is 03
years, and Operation and Maintenance period is 10 years.
2. Detailed Invitation for Bid which includes instructions for submission of bids and all other
relevant information is available on BUIDCo‘s. website i.e. [Link]. Bidding
Documents will be available w.e.f. 02.09.2015
3. The last date & time of bid submission is 06.10.2015 at 15:00 hours. The bids will be opened
on the same day at 15:30. hours. E-bidding is not permitted.
4. The interested eligible bidders may participate in the bidding process as per instructions given
in the bidding documents.

Address:
Managing Director,
Bihar Urban Infrastructure Development Corporation Ltd (BUIDCo),
303,Mourya Tower, Mouryalok Complex,_,
Budh Marg,Patna-800001,Bihar_, India
Phone No. _+91-0612-2210101/02
Tel Fax:+91-612-2210103,
Email: [email protected]_,

Sd/-
(N. K. Singh)
Managing Director

BUIDCo

Page 8 of 385
 INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS
FOR A CONTRACT

SURVEY, REVIEW THE DESIGNS, REDESIGN WHERE NECESSARY AND

BUILD NEW SEWERAGE NETWORK OF ABOUT 180 KM LENGTH AND ALL
APPURTENANT STRUCTURES, AND OPERATION & MAINTENANCE OF
SEWERAGE NETWORK AND FOR A PERIOD OF 10 YEARS AT BEUR IN
PATNA, STATE OF BIHAR

Page 9 of 385
 Table of Clauses

Section Description Page

1.1 Source of Funds & Scope of work 12
1.2 Eligible Bidders 13
1.3 Eligible Materials, Equipment, and Services 15
1.4 Inspection and Audit 15
1.5 Cost of Bidding 15
2.1 Content of Bidding Documents 16
2.2 Clarification of Bidding Documents 17
2.3 Site Visit 17
2.4 Data Room and Background Information 18
2.5 Pre-Bid Meeting 18
2.6 Amendment of Bidding Documents 18
2.7 Contact with the Owner for the Purpose of Clarification 18
2.8 Information Provided by the Owner/Bidders Due Diligence 19
2.9 Timetable 19
3.1 Language of Bid 20
3.2 Documents Comprising the Bid 20
3.3 Technical Section – Part I – Technical and Staffing Information 20
3.4 Technical Section – Part II – Bid Security 23
3.5 Technical Section – Part III – Bid Form and Qualification 24
Information
3.6 Technical Section – Part IV - Joint Venture Documents and 24
Requirements
3.7 Technical Section – Part V – Power of Attorney 24
3.8 Technical Section – Part VI – Commissions and Gratuities 25
3.9 Technical Section – Part VII – Pre-Printed Literature 25
3.10 Financial Section – Price Schedules 25
3.11 Financial Section – Bid Prices 25
3.12 Financial Section – Bid Currencies 28
3.13 Bidding of Alternatives not to be Considered 28
3.14 Period of Validity of Bid 28
Page 10 of 385
3.15 Format and Signing of Bid 28
4.1 Sealing and Marking of Bids 30
4.2 Deadline for Submission of Bids 30
4.3 Late Bids 30
4.4 Modification and Withdrawal of Bids 30
5.1 Opening of Bids by Owner 31
5.2 Clarification of Bid 32
5.3 Preliminary Examination of Bids 32
5.4 Conversion to Single Currency 33
5.5 Technical Evaluation 33
5.6 Price Evaluation and Comparison of Bids 34
5.7 Qualification of the Bidder 34
5.8 Contacting the Owner 34
6.1 Award Criteria 35
6.2 Owner‘s Right to Accept or Reject and Waive Irregularities 35
6.3 Notification of Award 35
6.4 Signing the Form of Contract 35
6.5 Performance Security 35
6.6 Failure to Sign the Form of Contract, provide the Performance 36
Security or provide evidence of incorporation and capitalisation of
the SPV
6.7 Adjudicator 36
6.8 Fraud and Corruption 36

Page 11 of 385
 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

Section 1. Introduction
1.1. Source of Funds & Scope of work
a. The Borrower named in the Bid Data Sheet has received loan/credit (hereafter
called ―loan‖) from the International Bank for Reconstruction and Development
(IBRD) (hereafter interchangeably called ―the Bank‖) of the U.S. dollar amount
indicated in the Bid Data Sheet. The loan will be used in various currencies toward
the cost of the Project named in the Bid Data Sheet. The Borrower intends to apply
a portion of the proceeds of this loan to eligible payments under the contract for
which these Bidding Documents are issued.
b. The State and Urban Local Body (ULB) named in the Bid Data Sheet shall, provide
a portion of the capital cost and Operation and Maintenance cost for the Operations
Period as per the provisions of this Contract.
c. Payment by the Bank will be made only at the request of the Borrower and upon
approval by the Bank, in accordance with the terms and conditions of the loan
agreement, and will be subject in all respects to the terms and conditions of that
agreement. The loan agreement prohibits a withdrawal from the loan account for the
purpose of any payment to persons or entities, or for any import of Plant and
Equipment, if such payment or import, to the knowledge of the Bank, is prohibited by
a decision of the United Nations Security Council taken under Chapter VII of the
Charter of the United Nations. No party other than the Borrower shall derive any
rights from the loan agreement or have any claim to the loan proceeds.
d. Scope of work: The bidder‘s scope of work shall include survey, review the designs,
redesign where necessary and build the Sewerage Network of length indicated in the
Bid Data Sheet and all allied infrastructure and operate and maintain the new
Sewerage Network for a period of 10 years after successful commissioning and
testing of the Sewerage Network at the place and State indicated in the Bid Data
Sheet.
e. The Owner named in the Bid Data Sheet shall make available the Right of Way for
the Sewerage Network and all appurtenant structures as indicated in the Bid Data
Sheet.
f. The Owner shall make available all the designs and drawings pertaining to the
proposed Sewerage Network including alignment, peripheral land.
g. The selected bidder shall conduct field survey, review the available designs, redesign
where necessary the Sewerage Network based on the survey, ensuring that the design
standards and the performance standards as specified in the Contract are satisfied
along with other conditions as may be applicable as per the law.
h. If the selected bidder (Operator) redesigns where necessary, he shall obtain Owner‘s
approval of the redesigned component and work shall be carried out as per the revised
approved design. Payments will be made for the actual quantities as per rates quoted
by the bidder and incorporated in the Contract. Rates for items not found in the

Page 12 of 385
 original BOQ or variations in quantities from the original BOQ will be regulated as
per provisions of the Contract.
1.2. Eligible Bidders
1.2.1 A bidder may be a firm that is a private entity, a government-owned entity—subject
to ITB 1.2.5 — or any combination of such entities in the form of a joint venture (JV)
under an existing agreement or with the intent to enter into such an agreement
supported by a letter of intent. In the case of a joint venture, all members shall be
jointly and severally liable for the execution of the Contract in accordance with the
Contract terms. The JV shall nominate a Representative who shall have the authority
to conduct all business for and on behalf of any and all the members of the JV during
the bidding process and, in the event the JV is awarded the Contract, during contract
execution. Unless specified in the BDS, there is no limit on the number of members
in a JV.
1.2.2 Bidder shall not have a conflict of interest. Any Bidder found to have a
conflict of interest shall be disqualified. A Bidder may be considered to have a
conflict of interest for the purpose of this bidding process, if the Bidder:
(a) directly or indirectly controls, is controlled by or is under common
control with another Bidder; or
(b) receives or has received any direct or indirect subsidy from another
Bidder; or
(c) has the same legal representative as another Bidder; or
(d) has a relationship with another Bidder, directly or through common
third parties, that puts it in a position to influence the bid of another
Bidder, or influence the decisions of the Owner regarding this bidding
process; or
(e) participates in more than one bid in this bidding process. Participation
by a Bidder in more than one Bid will result in the disqualification of
all Bids in which such Bidder is involved. However, this does not limit
the inclusion of the same subcontractor in more than one bid; or
(f) any of its affiliates participated as a consultant in the preparation of the
design or technical specifications of the works that are the subject of
the bid; or
(g) any of its affiliates has been hired (or is proposed to be hired) by the
Owner or Borrower as Engineer for the Contract implementation; or
(h) would be providing goods, works, or non-consulting services resulting
from or directly related to consulting services for the preparation or
implementation of the project specified in the BDS ITB 1.1 (a) that it
provided or were provided by any affiliate that directly or indirectly
controls, is controlled by, or is under common control with that firm; or
(i) has a close business or family relationship with a professional staff of
the Borrower (or of the project implementing agency, or of a recipient of a part
of the loan) who: (i) are directly or indirectly involved in the preparation of the
bidding documents or specifications of the contract, and/or the bid evaluation
Page 13 of 385
 process of such contract; or (ii) would be involved in the implementation or
supervision of such contract unless the conflict stemming from such
relationship has been resolved in a manner acceptable to the Bank throughout
the procurement process and execution of the contract.
1.2.3 A Bidder may have the nationality of any country, subject to the restrictions pursuant
to ITB 1.2.7. A Bidder shall be deemed to have the nationality of a country if the
Bidder is constituted, incorporated or registered in and operates in conformity with
the provisions of the laws of that country, as evidenced by its articles of incorporation
(or equivalent documents of constitution or association) and its registration
documents, as the case may be. This criterion also shall apply to the determination of
the nationality of proposed sub-contractors or sub-consultants for any part of the
Contract including related Services.
1.2.4 A Bidder that has been sanctioned by the Bank in accordance with the ITB 6.8,
including in accordance with the Bank‘s Guidelines on Preventing and Combating
Corruption in Projects Financed by IBRD Loans and IDA Credits and Grants (―Anti-
Corruption Guidelines‖), shall be ineligible to be prequalified for, bid for, or be
awarded a Bank-financed contract or benefit from a Bank-financed contract,
financially or otherwise, during such period of time as the Bank shall have
determined. The list of debarred firms and individuals is available as specified in the
BDS.
1.2.5 Bidders that are Government-owned enterprises or institutions in the Owner‘s
Country may participate only if they can establish that they (i) are legally and
financially autonomous (ii) operate under commercial law, and (iii) are not
dependent agencies of the Owner. To be eligible, a government-owned enterprise
or institution shall establish to the Bank‘s satisfaction, through all relevant
documents, including its Charter and other information the Bank may request, that
it: (i) is a legal entity separate from the government (ii) does not currently receive
substantial subsidies or budget support; (iii) operates like any commercial
enterprise, and, inter alia, is not obliged to pass on its surplus to the government,
can acquire rights and liabilities, borrow funds and be liable for repayment of its
debts, and can be declared bankrupt; and (iv) is not bidding for a contract to be
awarded by the department or agency of the government which under their
applicable laws or regulations is the reporting or supervisory authority of the
enterprise or has the ability to exercise influence or control over the enterprise or
institution.
1.2.6 A Bidder shall not be under suspension from bidding by the Owner as the result of the
operation of a Bid–Securing Declaration.
1.2.7 Firms and individuals may be ineligible if so indicated in Schedule A - Part g and (a) as
a matter of law or official regulations, the Borrower‘s country prohibits commercial
relations with that country, provided that the Bank is satisfied that such exclusion does
not preclude effective competition for the supply of goods or the contracting of works or
services required; or (b) by an act of compliance with a decision of the United Nations
Security Council taken under Chapter VII of the Charter of the United Nations, the

Page 14 of 385
 Borrower‘s country prohibits any import of goods or contracting of works or services
from that country, or any payments to any country, person, or entity in that country.
1.2.8 A Bidder shall provide such evidence of eligibility satisfactory to the Owner, as the
Owner shall reasonably request.
1.3. Eligible Materials, Equipment, and Services
The materials, Equipment and services to be supplied under the Contract and financed by
the Bank may have their origin in any country, subject to the restrictions specified in
Schedule A - Part g - Eligible Countries, and all expenditures under the Contract will
not contravene such restrictions. At the Owner‘s request, Bidders may be required to
provide evidence of the origin of materials, equipment and services
1.4 Inspection and Audit
The Bank requires compliance with its policy in regard to corrupt and fraudulent
practices as set forth in Section 6.8. In further pursuance of this policy, Bidders shall
permit and shall cause its agents (whether declared or not), sub-contractors, sub-
consultants, service providers, or suppliers and any personnel thereof, to permit the Bank
to inspect all accounts, records and other documents relating to any prequalification
process, bid submission, and contract performance (in the case of award), and to have
them audited by auditors appointed by the Bank.

1.5. Cost of Bidding

The Bidder shall bear all costs associated with the preparation and submission of its bid,
and the Owner will in no case be responsible for these costs, regardless of the conduct or
outcome of the bidding process.

Page 15 of 385
Section 2. The Bidding Documents
2.1. Content of Bidding Documents
a. The nature of the services, the site and the plant that are to be designed, built,
operated and maintained by the Bidder, the procedures that are to be followed during
the bidding process and the contract terms and technical requirements are prescribed
in the Bidding Documents. The Bidding Documents consist of:
1. the Instructions to Bidders (ITB);
2. the Bid Data Sheet;
3. Schedule A to the Bidding Documents – Forms
a. Bidder‘s Bid Form
b. Bidder‘s Price Schedules
c. Form of Bid Security
d. Form of Performance Security
e. Format of Curriculum Vitae for Proposed Key Staff
f. Form for Clarification Questions
g. List of eligible Countries
h. Qualification Criteria
i. Information Forms
j. Declaration Format for Deemed Export Benefits
k. Form of Letter of Intent by JV Partners
l. Form of Power of Attorney for Joint Venture
m. Form of undertaking by JV Partners
4. Schedule B to the Bidding Documents – the contract (the ―Draft Contract‖)
consisting of:
i. Form of Contract;
ii. General Conditions of the Contract; and
iii. Schedules to the General Conditions,
5. Addenda to the documents listed in ITB Section 2.1 (a) (1) to (4), if any are
issued by the Owner.
The Invitation for Bids issued by the Owner is not part of the Bidding Documents.
2.1.1. The documents listed in ITB Section 2.1.a(1), (2), (3), (4), and (5) are collectively the
―Bidding Documents‖.
2.1.2. Each Bidder shall examine all instructions, terms and conditions, forms, specifications
and other information contained in the Bidding Documents. If the Bidder fails to provide
Page 16 of 385
 all documentation and information required by the Bidding Documents; or submits a Bid
which is not substantially responsive to the terms and conditions of the Bidding
Documents, such action is at the Bidder‘s risk and the Owner may determine that the Bid
is non-responsive to the Bidding Documents and may reject it.
2.2. Clarification of Bidding Documents
a. A prospective Bidder requiring any clarification of the Bidding Documents may
notify the Owner in writing by mail, courier, fax or hand delivery at the Owner‘s
mailing address indicated in the Bid Data Sheet. Similarly, if a Bidder feels that any
important provision in the Bidding Documents, such as those listed in ITB Section
3.3, will be unacceptable, such an issue must be raised during the clarification stage.
b. All such queries and requests for clarification shall be submitted using the Form for
Clarification Questions contained in Schedule A Part f to the Bidding Documents.
c. The Owner will respond in writing to any request for clarification or modification of
the Bidding Documents that it receives on the Form for Clarification Questions no
later than the date set out in the timetable in the Bid Data Sheet. Written copies of
the Owner‘s response, including an explanation of the query but not identification of
its source, (the ―Response to Questions Document‖) will be sent to all prospective
Bidders that have received the Bidding Documents. If similar or repeated queries are
made by Bidders, the Owner may list those queries as one query & respond to such
query only once.
2.3. Site Visit
a. Each Bidder is advised to visit and inspect the site/alignment of the Sewerage
Network (the ―Site Visit‖) and its surroundings and obtain for itself on its own
responsibility all information that may be necessary for preparing the Bid and
entering into the Contract. The Owner will schedule a time on or after the date set out
in the timetable specified in the Bid Data Sheet and develop a procedure for Bidders
to conduct a Site Visit. The costs of visiting the site shall be at the Bidder‘s own
expense.
b. Each Bidder and any of its personnel or agents will be granted permission by the
Owner to enter upon its premises and lands for the purpose of such a Site Visit, but
only upon the express condition that the Bidder, its personnel and agents will release
and indemnify the Owner, the Borrower and their personnel and agents from and
against all liability in respect thereof and will be responsible for death or personal
injury, loss of or damage to property and any other loss, damage, costs and expenses
incurred as a result of the Site Visit.

Page 17 of 385
2.4. Data Room and Background Information
Owner shall establish a data room (the ―Data Room‖) at the location specified in Bid
Data Sheet with a collection of relevant data to be accessible to Bidders or their
representatives from the date set out in the timetable specified in the Bid Data Sheet
until the deadline for submission of Bids (the ―Submission Deadline‖), in accordance
with a schedule established by the Owner.
2.5 Pre-Bid Meeting
Each prospective Bidder is invited to attend a Pre-Bid Meeting, which will take place at
the venue and time stipulated in the Bid Data Sheet. While attendance at the pre-bid
meeting is not mandatory, Bidders are strongly encouraged to attend. The purpose of the
pre-bid meeting is to provide a technical presentation and to clarify issues and answer
questions on any matter that may be raised at the meeting. Each prospective Bidder is
requested, as far as possible, to submit any question in writing to reach the Owner not
later than one week before the pre-bid meeting. It may not be practicable at the meeting
to answer questions received late, but questions and responses will be transmitted as
indicated hereafter. Minutes of the pre-bid meeting will be transmitted without delay to
all prospective Bidders that have been issued Bidding Documents. All responses to
questions raised at the pre-bid meeting will be included in the Response to Questions
Document. The proceedings of the pre-bid meeting, reply to the queries and corrigendum
if any will also be uploaded on the website specified in the Bid Data Sheet.
2.6. Amendment of Bidding Documents
a. At any time prior to the Submission Deadline, the Owner may, for any reason,
whether at its own initiative, or in response to a clarification requested by a
prospective Bidder, amend the Bidding Documents by addendum. No other
communications of any kind whatsoever, including, without limitation, the minutes of
the pre-bid meeting or the Response to Questions Document, shall modify the
Bidding Documents.
b. Addenda, if any, will be sent in writing by air mail, mail, courier or facsimile to all
prospective Bidders and will be binding on them. Bidders shall immediately
acknowledge receipt to the Owner of any such amendment, and it will be assumed
that the information contained therein has been taken into account by the Bidder in its
Bid. Such Addenda will also be uploaded on the website specified in the Bid Data
Sheet.
c. In order to afford prospective Bidders reasonable time in which to take the
amendment into account in preparing their Bids, the Owner may, at its discretion,
extend the Submission Deadline, in which case, the Owner will notify all prospective
Bidders in writing of the extended deadline.
2.7. Contact with Owner for the Purpose of Clarification
The prospective Bidders shall contact only the persons named at the addresses in the
Bid Data Sheet for the purpose of requesting information and clarification or for any
other purpose relating to the bidding process. The prospective Bidders shall not contact
any other person at the Owner during the bidding process. From the time of Bid opening

Page 18 of 385
 to the time of Contract award, if any Bidder wishes to contact the Owner on any matter
related to the bidding process, it may do so in writing.
2.8. Information Provided by the Owner/Bidders Due Diligence
a. Each Bidder is solely responsible for conducting its own independent research, due
diligence, and any other work or investigations and for seeking any other independent
advice necessary for the preparation of Bids, negotiation of agreements, and the
subsequent delivery of all services to be provided by the Bidder that has been
successful in the bidding process (the ―Successful Bidder‖).
b. No representation or warranty, express or implied, is made and no responsibility of
any kind is accepted by the Owner or its advisors, employees, consultants or agents,
for the completeness or accuracy of any information contained in the Bidding
Documents or the Response to Questions Document, or provided during the bidding
process or during the term of the Contract. The Owner and its advisors, employees,
consultants and agents shall not be liable to any person or entity as a result of the use
of any information contained in the Bidding Documents or the Response to Questions
Document, or provided during the bidding process or during the term of the Contract.
c. Bidders shall not rely on any oral statements made by the Owner or its advisors,
employees, consultants or agents.
d. All Bidders shall, prior to submitting their Bid, review all requirements with respect
to corporate registration and all other requirements that apply to companies that wish
to conduct business in the Owner‘s country. The Bidders are solely responsible for all
matters relating to their legal capacity to operate in the jurisdiction to which this
bidding process applies.
2.9. Timetable
a. The estimated timetable, from the issuance of the Bidding Documents to the
identification by the Owner of the Successful Bidder and the execution of the
Contract, is set out in the Bid Data Sheet.
b. The Owner may, in its sole discretion and without prior notice to the Bidders, amend
the estimated timetable specified in the Bid Data Sheet. Bidders shall not rely in any
way whatsoever on the estimated timetable specified in the Bid Data Sheet and the
Owner shall not incur any liability whatsoever arising out of amendments to the
estimated timetable. The Owner shall give notice of timetable changes, if any, by
addenda.

Page 19 of 385
Section 3. Preparation of Bids
3.1. Language of Bid
The Bid prepared by the Bidder, all correspondence and documents related to the Bid
exchanged by the Bidder and the Owner and the bidding process shall be written in the
language specified in the Bid Data Sheet, provided that any printed literature furnished
by the Bidder may be written in another language, as long as such literature is
accompanied by a translation of its pertinent passages in the language specified in the Bid
Data Sheet, in which case, for purposes of interpretation of the Bid, the translation shall
govern.
3.2. Documents Comprising the Bid
a. Each Bidder shall submit only one Bid which shall consist of,
1. One Technical Section which contains the following parts in the following order:
i. Part I – the information required by ITB Section 3.3;
ii. Part II – the Bid Security required by ITB Section 3.4;
iii. Part III – the Bid Form required by ITB Section 3.5(a), and the
information required by ITB Section 3.5(b) and Appendix to Bid
containing completed Table(s) of Schedule of Adjustment Data as
required by ITB Section 3.11 b;
iv. Part IV – where applicable, the joint venture documents required by ITB
Section 3.6;
v. Part V – the power of attorney required by ITB Section 3.7;
vi. Part VI – the declaration of commissions and gratuities required by ITB
Section 3.8;
vii. Part VII – Optional, separately bound pre-printed literature as per ITB
Section 3.9; and
2. One Financial Section which shall consist of the Price Schedules completed in
accordance with ITB Section 3.10.
b. Each Bidder shall also submit an initialled Draft Contract, in accordance with ITB
Section 3.15 (b), in the same envelope as its Technical Section.
3.3. Technical Section – Part I – Technical and Staffing Information
The bidder, while making his technical proposal shall consider the following aspects.
a. The owner shall make available the right of way for the Sewerage Network and
all appurtenant structures. The status of availability and ownership of the land is
specified in the Bid Data Sheet clause 1.1 (e).
b. Part-I of the Technical Section of the Bid shall consist of the following sub-parts
in the following order:
1. An Executive Summary of the Technical Section;

Page 20 of 385
2. A detailed work plan for conducting field survey, reviewing the designs
provided by the Owner, redesigning (where necessary or can submit a full
design but the specifications such as proposed pipe materials etc. remain the
same so that there will not be any need for revising BOQ etc. except
modifying some quantities) and build-work-plan comprising a detailed
program timetable (the ―Design-Build Work Plan‖) setting out the manner in
which the Bidder proposes to carry out the design-build services as defined in
the Draft Contract (the ―Design-Build Services‖) and meet the design-build
technical standards in accordance with the Schedule 10 of the Contract
(Technical Specifications). The Design-Build Work plan shall be divided into
the following sections:
i. A well-defined proposal for the configuration of Sewerage Network
proposed by the bidder along with the details of the manholes,
appurtenant structures etc..
ii. a section entitled ―Drawings‖ which consists of conceptual drawings
that are sufficiently detailed to communicate the Bidder‘s design
intent for all components of the proposed Sewerage Network.
iii. a detailed narrative in support of the conceptual drawings setting out
the Bidder‘s plan for compliance with the Design-Build Services
Schedule and the technical standards set out in Schedule 10 of the
Contract (Technical Specifications), to include construction quality
assurance and control;
iv. a detailed program and schedule setting out the proposed sequence of
works to be undertaken, including estimated start date, finish date
and time allocations for individual units of the works, proposed
resources to be allocated and the identification of all major
milestones, including the submission of schematic design documents,
design development documents, the Design-Build Documents and the
commissioning.
v. an itemized list of the principal codes of practice and standards
proposed to be used for the Design-Build Services; and
3. a section entitled ―Plant and Equipment and Operator‘s Equipment‖ which
consists of a list of proposed suppliers of major Plant and Equipment and
Operator‘s Equipment (Design-Build) and Operator‘s Equipment
(Operations), including:
i. plant and equipment;
ii. materials, including pipe work and principal construction materials.
For all items listed in ITB Section 3.3(b) (4), the Bidders shall provide either
catalogues or detailed information with respect to manufacturer and source,
model designation, primary specifications, and year of manufacture, as
applicable;
5. A detailed work plan (the ―Operations Work plan‖) setting out the manner in
which the Bidder proposes to carry out the operation of the Sewage Pumping
Page 21 of 385
 Station (If any) as set out in the Draft Contract (the ―Operations Services‖)
and meet the operating technical standards in accordance with Schedule 10 of
the Contract (Technical Specifications). The Operations Work plan shall
contain a section entitled ―Operation and Maintenance Plan‖ which provides
an outline contents and overview of the Bidder‘s proposed plans and
programs for Operation and Maintenance of Sewerage Network;
6. A detailed description of the Bidder‘s plans and methodologies to ensure that
the requirements of the applicable environmental safeguard measures for the
proposed Sewerage Network and allied services will be implemented and
monitored;
7. A detailed staffing plan (the ―Staffing Plan‖) setting out the Bidder‘s
proposed staffing arrangements for the carrying out of the Design-Build and
Operations Services. The Staffing Plan shall be divided into the following
sections:
i. two sub-sections, (one for the Design-Build Services and one for the
Operations Services) each entitled the ―Staffing Chart‖ and each
consisting of a chart setting out a list of all proposed Operator‘s
Personnel positions, the role of each position, the duration of
existence of the position, and the location of the staff person filling
the position during the periods of assignment to carry out the Design-
Build and Operations Services;
ii. a section entitled ―Summary of Staff Qualifications‖ which consists
of a summary table setting out,
a. for the Key Staff positions, the names of the Bidder‘s employees
who will occupy the Key Staff positions during Design-Build
Services; and
b. all proposed positions for the Operator‘s Key Personnel and the
qualifications, years of experience and areas of expertise, including a
clear indication of the expertise that the staff will provide consistent
with the requirements set out in the Bid Data Sheet for each of the
proposed positions; The Bidder‘s personnel as indicated in the bid
proposals shall not be changed during the period of the contract. In
case if the successful Bidder, intends to change the key staff, such
change will be subject to approval from the Owner on justification
provided by the successful Bidder. The replaced key staff shall have
to be of equivalent or higher qualification and experience.
iii. a section entitled, ―Curriculum Vitae‖ which contains the signed
curriculum vitae for each of the Key Staff, in the format set out in
Schedule A to the Bidding Documents;
8. For the purpose of ITB Section 3.3 (b) (7), ―Key Staff‖ means those
individuals that will fill the positions listed/referred to in the Bid Data
Sheet; and

Page 22 of 385
 9. A list of all nominated Sub-Contractors and sub-consultants and a detailed
description of the services to be carried out or the Plant and Equipment to be
provided by the nominated Sub-Contractors and sub-consultants. The Bidder
shall provide the name and nationality of all nominated Sub-Contractors and
sub-consultants. The Bidder shall ensure that all nominated Sub-Contractors
and sub consultants comply with ITB Section 1.2.1(a). The Bidder shall not
exceed the maximum percentage of subcontracting and sub consulting set out
in Bid Data Sheet.
3.4. Technical Section – Part II – Bid Security
a. In Part II of the Technical Section of its Bid, the Bidder shall furnish, as part of its
Bid, a Bid security in the amount and currency stipulated in the Bid Data Sheet.
The bid security of a Joint Venture must define as ―Bidder‖ all the Joint Venture
Partners and list them in the following manner:
―a Joint Venture consisting of ‗.......‘, ‗..........‘ and ‗............‘.
b. The Bid Security shall, at the Bidder‘s option, be in the form of a certified cheque,
but only if the certified cheque shows a validity date, letter of credit or a bank
guarantee from a reputable bank or insurance company selected by the Bidder and
located in any eligible country. If the institution issuing the security is located outside
the country of the Borrower, it shall have a correspondent financial institution located
in the country of the Borrower to make it enforceable. The format of any bank
guarantee provided by a Bidder shall be in accordance with the form of Bid Security
contained in Schedule A part c to the Bidding Documents. The Bidder shall ensure
that the Bid Security remains valid for a period of 45 days after the end of the
original Bid Validity Period, as defined in ITB Section 3.14(a), and 45 days after any
extension subsequently requested by the Owner in accordance with ITB Section
3.14(b).
c. Any Bid not accompanied by an acceptable Bid Security shall be rejected by the
Owner as being non-responsive. The Bid Security of a joint venture must be in the
name of all of the participants in the joint venture submitting the Bid.
d. The Owner will return the Bid Securities of the unsuccessful Bidders as promptly as
possible, upon the successful Bidder‘s signing the contract and furnishing the
required performance security.
e. The Bid Security of the Successful Bidder will be returned when the Bidder has
signed the Form of Contract pursuant to ITB Section 6.4 and has provided the
required Performance Security as set out in the Contract and ITB Section 6.5.
f. The Bid Security may, in the discretion of the Owner, be forfeited,
1. if the Bidder withdraws its Bid during the Bid Validity Period; or
2. in the case of the Successful Bidder, if the Successful Bidder fails within the
specified time limit,
i. to execute the Form of Contract in accordance with ITB Section 6.4; or
ii. to furnish the Performance Security to the Owner in accordance with ITB
Section 6.5.

Page 23 of 385
3.5. Technical Section – Part III – Bid Form and Qualification Information
a. In Part III of the Technical Section of its Bid, each Bidder shall provide a completed
Bid Form in the same form and substance as the Bid Form contained in Schedule A
Part a to the Bidding Documents.
b. In Part III of the Technical Section of its Bid, Bidders shall submit Information Forms
duly completed to evidence compliance with the Qualification Criteria provided in
the Schedule A – Part h of bidding documents. The Information Forms are provided
in the Schedule A Part i to the Bidding Documents.
3.6. Technical Section – Part IV - Joint Venture Documents and Requirements
a. Each Joint Venture Bidder shall submit, as Part IV of the Technical Section of its Bid,
a written commitment, in the form of a letter duly executed by an authorized officer
of each joint venture participant which,
1. Confirms each joint venture participant‘s commitment to the joint venture and
acceptance of the joint venture arrangements described in the Bid in accordance
with ITB Section 3.6(b);
2. Confirms each joint venture participant‘s willingness to provide a joint and
several guarantee to the Owner to underwrite the performance of the joint venture
in respect of the Contract; and
3. Identifies which joint venture participant,
i. will assume the leading role on behalf of the other joint venture participants;
and
ii. will have the authority to commit all joint venture participants.
b. A copy of the Joint Venture Agreement entered into by the Partners (JV Participants)
shall be submitted with the bid. Alternatively a Letter of Intent as per format provided
under Schedule A - Part K to execute a Joint Venture Agreement in the event of a
successful bid shall be signed by all partners and submitted with the bid together with
a copy of the proposed Agreement, clearly indicating the objectives of the joint
venture, the proposed management structure, the contribution of each participant to
the joint venture operations, the commitment of the participants to joint and several
liability for performance of the contract, recourse or sanctions within the joint venture
in the event of default or withdrawal of any participant, and arrangements for
providing the required indemnities.
c. If the Successful Bidder is a Joint Venture to whom the contract is awarded, each
partner of the Joint Venture shall sign and execute the contract with the Owner and
shall be jointly and severally responsible to Owner for the performance of the
contract.
3.7. Technical Section – Part V – Power of Attorney
Each Bidder shall provide, as Part V of the Technical Section of its Bid, a written power
of attorney in accordance with ITB Section 3.15(c).

Page 24 of 385
3.8. Technical Section – Part VI – Commissions and Gratuities
In Part VI of the Technical Section of its Bid, each Bidder shall provide detailed
information listing all commissions and gratuities, if any, paid or to be paid by the Bidder
to agents relating to this Bid or the Contract if the Bidder is awarded the Contract. The
Bidder shall list the name and address of any agents, the amount and currency paid or to
be paid to the agents and the purpose of the commission or gratuity. If no such
commissions and gratuities have been paid, the Bidder shall provide this information in
Part VI of the Technical Section of its Bid.
3.9. Technical Section – Part VII – Pre-Printed Literature
If the Bidder wishes to provide pre-printed literature about the Bidder or the joint venture
participants, that pre-printed literature shall be contained in Part VII of the Technical
Section of the Bid only and shall be separately bound.
3.10. Financial Section – Price Schedules
Each Bidder shall submit completed and properly executed Price Schedules in the forms
contained in Schedule A to the Bidding Documents. Bidders shall complete the Price
Schedules in full and shall not amend or change the form in any way. The Financial
Section of each Bidder‘s Bid shall consist of only completed and properly executed Price
Schedules.
3.11. Financial Section – Bid Prices
a. Bidders shall quote their Bid Price covering the total cost of Survey, Reviewing the
Designs, Redesigning where necessary, construction, testing, commissioning of the
Sewerage Network within the period indicated in the Bid Data Sheet and operation
and maintenance of the Sewerage Network (including pumping stations, if included
in the scope of services) for a further period of 10 years on a ―single responsibility‖
basis such that the total Bid Price covers all of the Operator‘s obligations mentioned
in or to be reasonably inferred from the Bidding Documents in respect of Survey,
Reviewing the Designs, Redesigning where necessary, construction, commissioning,
installation, testing, operation and maintenance etc. of the Sewerage Network
(including pumping stations, if applicable) and provisions mandated in
Environmental Management Plan as set out in the Contract.
b. The Bidders shall quote their Bid Price in the following components:
(i). Part A Bid Price for BOQ items:
The Bidder shall fill in rates and prices for all items of the Works described in
the Bill of Quantities (BOQ). Items against which no rate or price is entered
by the Bidder shall be deemed covered by the rates for other items in the Bill
of Quantities and will not be paid for separately by the Owner. An item not
listed in the priced Bill of Quantities shall be assumed to be not included in
the Bid, and provided that the Bid is determined substantially responsive
notwithstanding this omission, the average price of the item quoted by
substantially responsive bidders will be added to the bid price and the
equivalent total cost of the bid so determined will be used for price
comparison.

Page 25 of 385
 Part A bid prices shall remain firm and fixed and will not be subject to
price adjustment, unless otherwise provided in the BDS and the Conditions
of Contract.
In case the contract is subject to price adjustment, the Bidder shall furnish in
the Schedule of Adjustment Data (under Appendix to Bid) for the purpose of
Price Adjustment formulae, proposed weightings for various indices. The
Owner may require the Bidder to justify its proposed weightings.
(ii) Part B - Annual O&M Price

I. Sewerage Network

The bidder shall quote annual O&M prices for each of 10 years after
commencement of the Operations Period. These prices shall include costs of
skilled and unskilled manpower, establishment costs, replacements, routine
maintenance and periodic maintenance of the Sewerage Network in
compliance with the provisions of the Contract.

II. Sewage Pumping Stations (SPSs)

Following provisions shall be applicable, if SPSs are included in the scope of

work/services.

If O & M of the SPS(s) is included in the scope of work, the bidder shall for
the purpose of quoting O&M prices assume that (a) the SPS(s) will be
required to handle quantities of sewage in the respective years of the O&M
period as per ―Indicative Sewage Flow Rate for SPS‖ shown in the Appendix
to Bid (Indicative Sewage Flow Rate) and (b) full requirements of power
for operating the SPS shall be met by supply from the Electricity
Utility Company throughout the O&M period. The actual Payment of
O&M price to the Operator shall, however, be based on the actual
quantities of sewage handled by the SPS(s) and will also be subject to
adjustment (i) on account of variation in the electricity tariff in
accordance with the stipulation in sub-paragraph (c) below and (ii) for
the extra cost on account of Diesel consumption incurred by the
Operator for using the power supply from the back-up power supply
unit (DG set) when power from the Electricity Utility Company is not
available.

The bidder is advised to refer to Schedule 6 of the Contract - Terms and

Procedure of Payment and Schedule 8 of the Contract – Price Adjustment
while quoting the O&M prices.

c. O&M Prices (Part B) shall be subject to adjustment only on account of variation in

Electricity tariff evidenced by the electricity bills paid by the Operator for the Sewage
Pumping Station(s) to be operated and maintained by him as per Contract, with
Page 26 of 385
 reference to the ‗Base Rate of Electricity Tariff.‘ as stipulated in BDS. The
Bidder shall provide Guaranteed Energy Consumption per MLD of the sewage
handled by the Pumping Stations. However, adjustment of O&M prices shall be
applicable for the actual energy consumption evidenced by the electricity bills subject
to the ceiling as per guaranteed energy consumption level. – This clause is not
applicable, because SPSs are not included in the scope of the work/services.
d. For the purpose of submitting Bids, Bidders should note that the Bid Price shall
include all kinds of taxes, duties, levies or charges of the Owner‘s country in
accordance with the Contract.
Note:
Bidders may like to ascertain availability of excise/custom duty exemption benefits
available in India to the contracts financed under World Bank loan/credits. They are
solely responsible for obtaining such benefits which they have considered in their bid
and in case of failure to receive such benefits for reasons whatsoever, the Owner will
not compensate the bidder (Operator). The bidder shall furnish along with his bid a
declaration to this effect in the Declaration Format provided in Schedule A Part j of
the bidding documents.
Where the bidder has quoted taking into account such benefits, he must give all
information required for issue of certificates in terms of the Government of India
Central Excise Notification and Customs Notification as per form stipulated in
Schedule A Part j of the bidding documents. In case the bidder has not provided the
required information or has indicated to be furnished later on in the Declaration
Format, the same shall be construed that the goods/equipment for which certificate is
required is Nil.
To the extent the Owner determines the quantities indicated therein are reasonable
keeping in view the work schedule, construction programme and methodology, the
certificates will be issued and no subsequent changes will be permitted. The
certificate will be issued within 60days of signing of the contract for material,
equipment and machinery.
If the bidder has considered the customs/excise duty exemption for
materials/construction equipment to be bought for the work, the bidder shall confirm
and certify that the Owner will not be required to undertake any responsibilities of the
Government of India Scheme or the said exemptions being available during the
contract execution, except issuing the required certificate. Where such certificates are
issued by the Owner, excise duty will not be reimbursed separately.
The bids which do not conform to the above provisions or any condition by the bidder
which makes the bid subject to availability of customs/excise duty exemption for
materials/construction equipment or compensation on withdrawal of any variations to
the said exemptions will be treated as non-responsive and rejected.
Any delay in procurement of the construction equipment /machinery/goods as a result
of the above shall not be entertained as a reason for granting any extension of time.
e. Bidders are strongly encouraged to review GC Section 5.6 and the Terms and
Procedures of Payment Schedule (Schedule 6 of the Contract) prior to completing
their Price Schedules and submitting their Bid Prices.

Page 27 of 385
3.12. Financial Section – Bid Currencies
Bidders shall quote prices in Indian Rupees only.

3.13. Bidding of alternatives not to be considered

a. The Bidders shall base their Bids on the terms and conditions of the Bidding
Documents and, without limiting the generality of the foregoing, shall,
1. Submit their prices based on the terms and conditions in the Bidding Documents;
2. submit their Bids based on the assumption that the final Contract will be the same
as the Draft Contract and shall not base their Bids on the premise that they may
be able to change the Draft Contract; and
3. Include in their Bids a Form of Contract and Draft Contract initialled on each
page in accordance with ITB Section 3.15(b) (3).
b. No Bidder shall submit a Bid that contains statements that are inconsistent with the
Bidding Documents.
c. A Bidder shall not submit a Bid that proposes an arrangement between the Owner and
the Bidder which, in the discretion of the Owner, is different than the arrangement set
out in the Bidding Documents (an ―Alternative Bid‖). The Owner intends to enter
into a contract to design, build and operate a Sewerage Network based on the terms
and conditions of the Bidding Documents. If a Bidder submits an Alternative Bid it
will be returned to the Bidder and will not be considered, in any way, by the Owner.
3.14. Period of Validity of Bid
a. Bids shall remain valid for the period named in the Bid Data Sheet after the
Submission Deadline or any extension thereof prescribed by the Owner for the receipt
of Bids, pursuant to ITB Section 3.14(b). A Bid valid for a shorter period shall be
rejected by the Owner as being non-responsive.
b. In exceptional circumstances, the Owner may solicit the Bidders‘ consent to an
extension of the Bid Validity Period. The request and responses thereto shall be made
in writing and sent by air mail, courier or fax. If a Bidder accepts to prolong the Bid
Validity Period, the Bid Security shall also be suitably extended. A Bidder may refuse
the request without forfeiting its Bid Security. A Bidder granting the request will not
be required nor permitted to modify its Bid, except as provided in ITB Section 4.4.
3.15. Format and Signing of Bid
a. Each Bidder shall prepare and submit one signed and initialled original of its Bid and
the number of copies of the Bid as set out in the Bid Data Sheet, clearly marking
one each as ―Original Bid‖, ―Copy No. 1‖, or ―Copy No. 2‖, etc. as appropriate. In
the event of any discrepancy between the copies and the original, the original shall
govern.
b. The original and all copies of the Bid, each consisting of the documents listed in ITB
Section 3.2, shall be typed or written in indelible ink. The person or persons duly
authorized to bind the Bidder to the Bid and Contract shall sign the Bid by,
1. signing the original of the Bid Form;

Page 28 of 385
 2. initialling all of the pages of the original of the Bid, except for un-amended
printed literature; and
3. initialling the Form of Contract and initialling all pages of the Draft Contract.
c. The authority of the person or persons signing the Bid to bind the Bidder shall be
demonstrated by a written and duly notarized power of attorney included in the Bid
and submitted as Part V of the Technical Section of the Bid and which shall bind the
Bidder for the full length of the Bid Validity Period.
d. The Bid shall contain no alterations, omissions or additions, unless such corrections
are initialled by the person or persons signing the Bid.

Page 29 of 385
Section 4. Submission of Bids
4.1. Sealing and Marking of Bids
a. Each Bidder shall seal the original and each copy of the Bid in separate envelopes,
duly marking the envelopes as ―Original Bid‖ and ―Copy No….‖. The envelopes
shall then be sealed in an outer envelope.
b. The inner and outer envelopes shall:
1. be addressed to the Owner at the address specified in the Bid Data Sheet; and
2. bear the Contract name indicated in the Bid Data Sheet and the statement ―DO
NOT OPEN BEFORE _____________, …… Hrs‖, with the date and time
specified in the Bid Data Sheet pursuant to ITB Section 5.1.
c. The inner envelopes shall indicate the name and address of the Bidder so that the Bid
can be returned unopened in the event that it is declared ―late‖.
d. If the outer envelope or package is not sealed and marked as required by this ITB
Section 4.1, the Owner will assume no responsibility for the Bid‘s misplacement or
premature opening. If any of the outer envelope or package discloses the Bidder‘s
identity, the Owner will not guarantee the anonymity of the Bid but this disclosure
shall not constitute grounds for Bid rejection.
4.2. Deadline for Submission of Bids
a. Bids must be received by the Owner at the address specified in the Bid Data Sheet
no later than the time and date stated in the Bid Data Sheet as the Submission
Deadline.
b. The Owner may, at its discretion, extend the Submission Deadline by amending the
Bidding Documents in accordance with ITB Sections 2.6 and 2.9(b), in which case all
rights and obligations of Owner and Bidders will thereafter be subject to the
Submission Deadline as extended.
c. Each Bidder shall deliver its Bid by hand or by courier. A Bidder shall not submit a
Bid by facsimile or electronic means. Each Bidder shall be responsible for the timely
delivery of its Bid to the address set out in the Bid Data Sheet irrespective of any
delivery or local difficulties.
4.3. Late Bids
Any Bid received by the Owner after the Submission Deadline prescribed by the Owner,
pursuant to ITB Section 4.2, will be rejected and returned unopened to the Bidder.
4.4. Withdrawal, Substitution, and Modification of Bids
(1) A Bidder may withdraw, substitute, or modify its bid after it has been submitted by
sending a written notice, duly signed by an authorized representative,and shall
include a copy of the authorization in accordance with ITB Sections 3.15 b and
3.15 c, (except that withdrawal notices do not require copies). The corresponding
substitution or modification of the bid must accompany the respective written
notice. All notices must be prepared and substituted in accordance with ITB

Page 30 of 385
 Sections 3.15 and 4.1 (except that withdrawal notices do not require copies) and in
addition, the respective envelops shall be clearly marked ―Withdrawal‖,
―Substitution‖, ―Modification‖. Such notices shall be received by the Owner prior
to the deadline for submission of bids in accordance with ITB Section 4.2.

(2) Bids requested to be withdrawn in accordance with ITB Section 4.4 (1) shall be
returned unopened to the Bidders.

(3) No Bid may be modified, substituted or withdrawn in the interval between the
deadline for Bid Submission and the expiration of the Bid Validity Period.
Withdrawal of a Bid during this interval may result in the Bidder‘s forfeiture of its
Bid Security, pursuant to ITB Section 3.4(f).

Section 5. Bid Opening and Evaluation

5.1. Opening of Bids by Owner
(a) The Owner shall conduct the bid opening in public at the address, date and time
specified in the BDS.
(b) First, envelopes marked ―WITHDRAWAL‖ shall be opened and read out and the
envelope with the corresponding bid shall not be opened, but returned to the
Bidder. If the withdrawal envelope does not contain a copy of the ―power of
attorney‖ confirming the signature as a person duly authorized to sign on behalf
of the Bidder, the corresponding bid will be opened. No bid withdrawal shall be
permitted unless the corresponding withdrawal notice contains a valid
authorization to request the withdrawal and is read out at bid opening. Next,
envelopes marked ―SUBSTITUTION‖ shall be opened and read out and exchanged
with the corresponding Bid being substituted, and the substituted Bid shall not be
opened, but returned to the Bidder. No Bid substitution shall be permitted unless
the corresponding substitution notice contains a valid authorization to request the
substitution and is read out at bid opening. Envelopes marked ―MODIFICATION‖
shall be opened and read out with the corresponding Bid. No Bid modification
shall be permitted unless the corresponding modification notice contains a valid
authorization to request the modification and is read out at Bid opening. Only
envelopes that are opened and read out at Bid opening shall be considered
further.
(c) All other envelopes shall be opened one at a time, reading out: the name of the
Bidder and whether there is a modification; the Bid Prices, including any
discounts and alternative offers; the presence of a Bid Security or Bid-Securing
Declaration, if required; and any other details as the Owner may consider
appropriate. Only discounts and alternative offers read out at Bid opening shall
be considered for evaluation. No Bid shall be rejected at Bid opening except for
late bids, in accordance with ITB section 4.3.
(d) The Owner shall prepare a record of the Bid opening that shall include, as a
minimum: the name of the Bidder and whether there is a withdrawal,
substitution, or modification; the Bid Price, per lot if applicable, including any

Page 31 of 385
 discounts, and alternative offers if they were permitted; and the presence or
absence of a Bid Security. The Bidders‘ representatives who are present shall be
requested to sign the attendance sheet. A copy of the record shall be distributed
to all Bidders who submitted bids in time.
5.2. Clarification of Bids
During Bid evaluation, the Owner may, at its discretion, ask the Bidder for a clarification
of its Bid. The request for clarification and the response shall be in writing, and no change
in the price or substance of the Bid shall be sought, offered or permitted.
5.3. Preliminary Examination of Bids
a. The Owner will examine each Bid to determine whether it is complete, whether any
computational errors have been made, whether required securities have been
furnished, whether the documents have been properly signed, and whether the Bid is
generally in order.
b. Arithmetical errors in the Bids will be rectified on the following basis:
1. If there is a discrepancy between subtotals and the total price, the unit or subtotal
price shall prevail, and the total price shall be corrected; and
2. If there is a discrepancy between words and figures, the amount in words shall
prevail.
If the Bidder does not accept the correction of arithmetical errors, its Bid shall be
rejected.
c. The Owner may waive any minor informality, nonconformity or irregularity in a Bid
that does not constitute a material deviation, and that does not prejudice or affect the
relative ranking of any Bidder as a result of the technical and price evaluation
pursuant to ITB Sections 0 and 5.6.
d. Prior to the detailed evaluation, the Owner will determine whether each Bid is of
acceptable quality, is complete and is substantially responsive to the Bidding
Documents. For purposes of this determination, a substantially responsive Bid is one
that conforms to all the terms, conditions and specifications of the Bidding
Documents without material deviations, objections, conditionalities or reservations. A
material deviation, objection, conditionality or reservation is one,
1. that affects in any substantial way the scope, quality or performance of the
contract;
2. that limits in any substantial way, inconsistent with the Bidding documents, the
Owner‘s rights or the Successful Bidder‘s obligations under the contract; or
3. whose rectification would unfairly affect the competitive position of other
Bidders who are presenting substantially responsive Bids.
e. If a Bid is not substantially responsive, it will be rejected by the Owner, and may not
subsequently be made responsive by the Bidder by correction of the nonconformity.
The Owner‘s determination of a Bid‘s responsiveness is to be based on the contents
of the Bid itself without recourse to extrinsic evidence.

Page 32 of 385
5.4. Conversion to Single Currency
Not applicable
5.5. Technical Evaluation
a. The Owner will carry out a detailed evaluation of the Technical Sections previously
determined to be substantially responsive in order to determine on a pass/fail basis
whether the technical aspects are in accordance with the requirements set forth in the
Bidding Documents. Bidders acknowledge that, in order to reach such a
determination, the Owner will examine and analyse the technical aspects of each Bid
on the basis of the information supplied by Bidders, taking into account the
completeness, consistency and level of detail of the following factors:
1. with respect to the Design-Build construction plan,
i. the Bidder‘s ability to demonstrate how it will meet the Owner‘s project
objective and requirements, the technical standards and the
Environmental Management Plan;
ii. the soundness of the proposed methodology and approach, and the extent
to which the Design-Build Work plan demonstrates an understanding of
the local conditions and specific project requirements;
2. with respect to the Operation and Maintenance Work plan,
i. the extent to which the Operations Work plan addresses all of the
Operations Services that are to be provided in accordance with the
Contract;
ii. the soundness of the proposed methodology and approach, and the extent
to which the Operations Work plan demonstrates an understanding of the
local conditions and specific project requirements; and the Bidder‘s
ability to demonstrate how it will meet the technical standards; and
3. with respect to the Staffing Plan,
i. the qualifications and competence of the Key Staff; and
ii. the overall quality of the Staffing Plan, including the depth and
organisational strength demonstrated by the Plan and the extent to which
it meets the requirements set out in the BDS under ITB 3.3 (b) (8).
b. For the purpose of ITB Section 0(a) (3)(ii), the evaluation of the overall quality of the
Staffing Plan shall be based on,
1. the clarity, comprehensiveness and level of detail of the Staffing Plan;
2. the extent to which the expertise required as per BDS under ITB 3.3 (b) (8) is
included in the Staffing Plan; and
3. the extent to which the Staffing Plan addresses the specific Services that are
required by the Design-Build and Operations Services Schedules to the General
Conditions.

Page 33 of 385
5.6. Price Evaluation and Comparison of Bids
a. The Owner shall examine each Bidder‘s Financial Section to determine whether such
Financial Section is complete and substantially responsive to the Bidding Documents.
b. The Financial Sections, which are substantially responsive to the Bidding Documents,
shall be evaluated to determine the lowest evaluated bid.
c. The Owner shall evaluate the bid prices (after conversion of the quoted prices to a
single currency in case of ICB in accordance with Section 5.4) by determining and
adding various components of cost and prices as under:
i. Price adjustment for correction of arithmetic errors in accordance with
Section 5.3(b); plus
ii. Part A Bid Price for BOQ items and quantities; plus
iii. NPV of the yearly payments due on account of Part B - O & M Prices over
10 years of O&M without considering any price adjustment on account of the
adjustment applicable in terms of Section 3.11c. For the purpose of
determining the NPV discount factor of 10 % per annum shall be applicable.
iv. For the purpose of evaluation, if operation of SPS is included in the scope of
work, O&M charges referred to in iii above will be determined on the basis
of sewage flow projected by the Owner being pumped by SPS, as detailed
year wise in the price schedule and termed as ―Indicative Flow‖.
d. The Owner shall compare the Bid Prices of all substantially responsive bids to
determine the lowest evaluated bid.
5.7. Qualification of the Bidder
a. The Owner shall determine to its satisfaction whether the Bidder that is selected as
having submitted the lowest evaluated and substantially responsive bid meets the
Qualification Criteria specified in Schedule A – Part h of bidding documents.
b. The determination shall be based upon an examination of the documentary evidence
of the Bidder‘s qualifications submitted by the Bidder, pursuant to Section 3.5 (b).
c. An affirmative determination shall be a prerequisite for award of the Contract to the
Bidder. A negative determination shall result in disqualification of the bid, in which
event the Owner shall proceed to the next lowest evaluated bid to make a similar
determination of that Bidder‘s qualifications to perform satisfactorily.
5.8. Contacting the Owner
a. From the time of bid opening to the time of Contract award, if any Bidder wishes to
contact the Owner, it must do so in writing.
b. Any effort by a Bidder to influence the Owner, its advisors, employees, consultants or
agents, in the Owner‘s Bid evaluation, Bid comparison, or Contract award decision
may, in the discretion of the Owner, result in rejection of the Bidder‘s Bid.

Page 34 of 385
Section 6. Award of Contract
6.1. Award Criteria
Subject to ITB Section 6.2, the Owner will award the Contract to the Bidder whose Bid
has been determined, by the technical and price evaluation, to be substantially responsive,
has received a ―pass‖ in the technical evaluation, and has the lowest evaluated Bid Price,
provided further that the bidder is determined to be qualified to perform the contract
satisfactorily.
6.2. Owner‟s Right to Accept or Reject and Waive Irregularities
a. The Owner reserves the right to,
1. accept any Bid;
2. reject any Bid;
3. annul the bidding process and reject all Bids;
4. annul the bidding process and commence a new process; and
5. waive irregularities, minor informalities, or minor non-conformities which do not
constitute material deviations in the submitted Bids from the Bidding Documents,
at any time prior to the award of the Contract without incurring any liability to
the affected Bidder or Bidders and without any obligation to inform the affected
Bidder or Bidders of the grounds for the Owner‘s actions.
b. Nothing in ITB Section 6.2(a) is intended to permit the Owner to refuse to provide
reasons for rejection to an unsuccessful Bidder.
6.3. Notification of Award
Prior to the expiration of the Bid Validity Period, the Owner shall notify the Successful
Bidder in writing by courier that its Bid has been accepted by the Owner (the
―Notification of Award‖). The effectiveness of the Contract shall be as of the date of the
Owner‘s signing of the Contract contingent on final approval by the Bank.
6.4. Signing the Form of Contract
a. At the same time as the Owner sends the Successful Bidder the Notification of
Award, the Owner shall send the Successful Bidder,
1. Form of Contract; and
2. the other Contract Documents.
b. Not later than 30 days after the Successful Bidder‘s receipt of the Notification Award,
the Form of Contract and the other Contract Documents pursuant to ITB Sections 6.3
and 6.4(a), the Successful Bidder shall sign and date the Form of Contract and initial
each page of the Contract and return them to the Owner.
6.5. Performance Security
a. No later than 30 days after the Successful Bidder‘s receipt of the Notification of
Award, the Successful Bidder shall provide the Owner with the performance security
in the amount given in the Bid Data Sheet and in the substance and form set out in
Page 35 of 385
 Schedule A Part d or in another form approved by the Owner. The Performance
Security of a Joint Venture shall be in the name of Joint Venture.
b. In case if the Owner finds from the break-up of costs contained in Price Schedule Part
A, that the prices indicated therein are unbalanced, the successful bidder shall have to
provide additional performance guarantee as may be required by the Owner for such
unbalanced bid prices.
6.6. Failure to Sign the Form of Contract, provide the Performance Security or provide
evidence of incorporation and capitalisation of the SPV
If the Successful Bidder fails to comply with the provisions of ITB Sections 6.4(b) or 6.5,
this failure shall constitute sufficient grounds for annulment of the award and forfeiture of
the Bid Security, and in which event the Owner may make the award to the next lowest
evaluated Bidder or call for new bids.
6.7. Adjudicator
The Owner proposes that the person named in the Bid Data Sheet be appointed as
Adjudicator under the contract, at a fee stated in the Bid Data Sheet. A résumé of the
named person is attached to the Bid Data Sheet, as well as a description of the expenses
that would be considered reimbursable. If a Bidder does not accept the Adjudicator
proposed by the Owner, it should so state in its Bid Form and make a counterproposal of
an Adjudicator and an hourly fee. If, on the day the Form of Contract is signed, the
Owner and the Operator have not agreed on the appointment of the Adjudicator, the
Adjudicator shall be appointed, at the request of either party, by the Appointing Authority
specified in the Special Conditions of Contract.
6.8. Fraud and Corruption
It is the Bank‘s policy to require that Borrowers (including beneficiaries of Bank loans),
bidders, suppliers, Operators and their agents (whether declared or not), sub-contractor,
sub-consultants, service providers or suppliers, and any personnel thereof, observe the
highest standard of ethics during the procurement and execution of Bank-financed
contracts.1 In pursuance of this policy, the Bank:
(a) defines, for the purposes of this provision, the terms set forth below as follows:
(i) ―corrupt practice‖ is the offering, giving, receiving, or soliciting, directly
or indirectly, of anything of value to influence improperly the actions of
another party;2
(ii) ―fraudulent practice‖ is any act or omission, including a misrepresentation,
that knowingly or recklessly misleads, or attempts to mislead, a party to
obtain a financial or other benefit or to avoid an obligation;3

1
In this context, any action to influence the procurement process or contract execution for undue advantage
is improper.
2
For the purpose of this sub-paragraph, ―another party‖ refers to a public official acting in relation to the
procurement process or contract execution. In this context, ―public official‖ includes World Bank staff and
employees of other organizations taking or reviewing procurement decisions.

Page 36 of 385
 (iii) ―collusive practice‖ is an arrangement between two or more parties
designed to achieve an improper purpose, including to influence
improperly the actions of another party; 4
(iv) ―coercive practice‖ is impairing or harming, or threatening to impair or harm,
directly or indirectly, any party or the property of the party to influence
improperly the actions of a party;5
(v) "obstructive practice" is
(aa) deliberately destroying, falsifying, altering, or concealing of evidence
material to the investigation or making false statements to investigators in
order to materially impede a Bank investigation into allegations of a
corrupt, fraudulent, coercive or collusive practice; and/or threatening,
harassing or intimidating any party to prevent it from disclosing its
knowledge of matters relevant to the investigation or from pursuing the
investigation, or
(bb) acts intended to materially impede the exercise of the Bank‘s inspection
and audit rights provided for under paragraph 1.16(e) below.
(b) will reject a proposal for award if it determines that the bidder recommended for
award, or any of its personnel, or its agents, or its sub-consultants, sub-Operators,
service providers, suppliers and/or their employees, has, directly or indirectly,
engaged in corrupt, fraudulent, collusive, coercive, or obstructive practices in
competing for the contract in question;
(c) will declare misprocurement and cancel the portion of the loan allocated to a
contract if it determines at any time that representatives of the Borrower or of a
recipient of any part of the proceeds of the loan engaged in corrupt, fraudulent,
collusive, coercive, or obstructive practices during the procurement or the
implementation of the contract in question, without the Borrower having taken
timely and appropriate action satisfactory to the Bank to address such practices
when they occur, including by failing to inform the Bank in a timely manner at the
time they knew of the practices;
(d) will sanction a firm or individual, at any time, in accordance with the prevailing
Bank‘s sanctions procedures,6 including by publicly declaring such firm or

3
For the purpose of this sub-paragraph, ―party‖ refers to a public official; the terms ―benefit‖ and
―obligation‖ relate to the procurement process or contract execution; and the ―act or omission‖ is intended
to influence the procurement process or contract execution.
4
For the purpose of this sub-paragraph, ―parties‖ refers to participants in the procurement process (including
public officials) attempting either themselves, or through another person or entity not participating in the
procurement or selection process, to simulate competition or to establish bid prices at artificial, non-
competitive levels, or are privy to each other‘s bid prices or other conditions.
5
For the purpose of this sub-paragraph, ―party‖ refers to a participant in the procurement process or contract
execution

Page 37 of 385
 individual ineligible, either indefinitely or for a stated period of time: (i) to be
awarded a Bank-financed contract; and (ii) to be a nominated7 sub-Operator,
consultant, manufacturer or supplier, or service provider of an otherwise eligible
firm being awarded a Bank-financed contract;
(e) will require that a clause be included in bidding documents and in contracts
financed by a Bank loan, requiring bidders, suppliers and Operators, and their sub-
Operators, agents, personnel, consultants, service providers, or suppliers, to permit
the Bank to inspect all accounts, records, and other documents relating to the
submission of bids and contract performance, and to have them audited by auditors
appointed

6
A firm or individual may be declared ineligible to be awarded a Bank financed contract upon: (i) completion
of the Bank‘s sanctions proceedings as per its sanctions procedures, including, inter alia, cross-debarment as
agreed with other International Financial Institutions, including Multilateral Development Banks, and
through the application the World Bank Group corporate administrative procurement sanctions procedures
for fraud and corruption; and (ii) as a result of temporary suspension or early temporary suspension in
connection with an ongoing sanctions proceeding. See footnote 14 and paragraph 8 of Appendix 1 of these
Guidelines.
7
A nominated sub-contractor, consultant, manufacturer or supplier, or service provider (different names are
used depending on the particular bidding document) is one which has either been: (i) included by the bidder
in its pre-qualification application or bid because it brings specific and critical experience and know-how
that allow the bidder to meet the qualification requirements for the particular bid; or (ii) appointed by the
Borrower.
Page 38 of 385
 BID DATA SHEET
For

SURVEY, REVIEW THE DESIGNS, REDESIGN WHERE NECESSARY AND

BUILD NEW SEWERAGE NETWORK OF ABOUT 180 KM LENGTH AND
ALL APPURTENANT STRUCTURES, AND OPERATION &
MAINTENANCE OF SEWERAGE NETWORK FOR A PERIOD OF 10
YEARS AT BEUR IN PATNA, STATE OF BIHAR,

Page 39 of 385
 Bid Data Sheet
The following bid-specific data for the facility and services to be procured shall amend or supplement
the provisions in the Instructions to Bidders (ITB). Whenever there is a conflict, the provisions herein
shall prevail over those in the ITB.
ITB SECTION REQUIRED INFORMATION
REFERENCE
ITB 1.1(a) Name of the Borrower: Government of India

ITB 1.1(a) Credit number: 4955-IN

Loan number: 8065-IN
Total Loan & Credit amount: US$ 1 billion
ITB 1.1(a) National Ganga River Basin Project.
The Sewerage Network at Beur, in Patna, State of Bihar, India,, forms a
part of the above mentioned Project being undertaken by Ministry of
Water Resources, River Development & Ganga Rejuvenation,
Government of India.
ITB 1.1 (b) The State is: Bihar
The ULB is: Patna Municipal Corporation

ITB 1.1 (d) The Sewerage Network is about 180 Km in length; The work is to be
carried out at Beur in Patna city in the State of Bihar
The Existing Sewerage Network layout has been attached with bid
document. It has about 7.0 km of main trunk sewers and its lengths
diameter wise are mentioned below.

1200 mm dia of length 1400 m, 800 mm dia of length 5000 m, 600 mm

dia of length 600 m.
ITB 1.1 (e) Name of Owner: Bihar Urban Infrastructure Development
Corporation Ltd. (BUIDCo)

ITB 1.2.1 The number of members of a JV bidder shall be limited to four.

ITB 1.2.1(a) The electronic address of firms and individuals debarred by the Bank is:
[Link]
ITB 2.2(a) Address of Owner: The Managing Director,
Bihar Urban Infrastructure Development Corporation Limited,
#303, Third Floor, Maurya Tower, Mauryalok Complex,
Budh Marg, Patna-800001,
Bihar, India.

ITB 2.2 c A request for clarification of the Bidding Documents shall be received no
later than 15 days prior to the deadline for submission of bids indicated in
the BDS under ITB 4.2

Page 40 of 385
ITB SECTION REQUIRED INFORMATION
REFERENCE
ITB 2.4 Data Room: will be available from the date of bid invitation
Data Room is at the following location
Bihar Urban Infrastructure Development Corporation Limited,
#303, Third Floor, Maurya Tower,
Mauryalok Complex,
Budh Marg, Patna-800001
ITB 2.5 Venue and time of pre-bid meeting:
Conference Room, Bihar Urban Infrastructure Development
Corporation Limited,
#303, Third Floor, Maurya Tower,
Mauryalok Complex,
Budh Marg, Patna-800001
Date : 11.09.2015 Time: 14.00 Hrs.
The website where proceedings of the pre-bid meeting, reply to the
queries and corrigendum if any will also be uploaded is [Link]

Page 41 of 385
ITB SECTION REQUIRED INFORMATION
REFERENCE
ITB 2.6 (b) [Link]

ITB 2.7 Address of Owner, telephone, email and facsimile of contact persons:
The Managing Director,
Bihar Urban Infrastructure Development Corporation Limited,
#303, Third Floor, Maurya Tower,
Mauryalok Complex,
Budh Marg, Patna-800001
Bihar, India.
Website [Link]
Tel Fax: +91-612-2210103
Telephone: 91-0612-2210101 / 02
e mail: tenders@[Link]
ITB 2.9(a), 2.2(c), The estimated timetable
2.3(a), 2.4, 2.9(b)
(a) Issue of Bidding Documents: [From 02.09.2015 to 06.10.2015]
(b) Bidders to submit preliminary Queries on
Bidding Documents [10.09.2015]
(c) Site Visits [From 10.09.2015 to 11.09.2015]
(d) Pre-Bid Meeting [11.09.2015]

(e) Last Day for Bidders to Submit Supplementary Questions[15.09.2015]

(arising out of Site Visits only)
(f) Issue of Response to Questions Document [22.09.2015]

(g) Deadline for Submission of Bids [06.10.2015]

(Bid Submission Date) [Link]noon local time
(h) Opening of Bids [06.10.2015]
[Link]p.m. local time
(i) Identification of Successful Bidder [03.11.2015]
(j) Notification of Award [10.11.2015]
(k) Contract Signature [20.11.2015]
(l) Design-Build- Starting Date [30.11.2015]
(m) Completion of Sewerage Network [29.11.2018]
ITB 3.1 Language of Bid is English.
ITB 3.3 (a) Not Applicable

Page 42 of 385
ITB SECTION REQUIRED INFORMATION
REFERENCE
ITB 3.3(b)(2)(ii)(b) Works to be specified in layout plan
1. Primary and Trunk sewerage network
2. Secondary and collector lines on the sewerage network;
3. Inspection chambers and manholes;
4. Any other facility as shall be specified by the Owner
ITB 3.3(b)(7)(ii)(b) Language capabilities for Bidder‘s Personnel: English
ITB 3.3(b)(7)(ii)(b), List of Key Staff to be deployed by the Operator during the Design build
3.3(b)(8) services as stipulated in SCC 8.3 is reproduced here.

[Link] Staff No Minimum Qualifications

*
A Graduate in Civil Engineering with
Project not less than 10 years‘ experience in
1 1
Manager construction of Sewerage networks /
water supply networks
A Civil Engineer (Graduate Engineer)
with not less than five years‘ experience
Civil
2 2 in construction of similar engineering
Engineer
works or Diploma in Civil Engineering
with 8 years‘ experience
A Electro /Mechanical Engineer
(Graduate Engineer) with not less than 5
Electro
years‘ experience in construction of
3 Mechanical 1
similar engineering works or Diploma in
Engineer
Civil Engineering with 7 years‘
experience
Diploma in Civil Engineering with
Civil
4 4 minimum 2 years‘ experience in
Supervisors
Construction of Civil Engineering works
Degree in Environmental Engineering /
Science / Planning or allied subjects with
Environmen minimum of 5 years of experience of
5 1
tal Engineer which at least 3 years‘ experience shall
be in environmental management works
of urban infrastructure projects.
CVs of key staff shall be submitted along with the bid and shall be subject
to approval of Owner. Bidder‘s attention is drawn to Article 7.2 of
Schedule 2 (Design Build Services Schedule) of the Contract which shall
be applicable, if the Operator proposes to replace any Key Staff during
Design & build services period.

Page 43 of 385
ITB SECTION REQUIRED INFORMATION
REFERENCE
For O&M services, qualifications and experience of the Key Staff have
been specified in Article 2.3 of Schedule 3 (Operations and Maintenance
Services) of Contract. The bidder shall take the same into account while
submitting the Staffing Plan for O&M services with its bid.
ITB 3.3 (b)(9) Maximum percentage of sub-contracting the design-build services is 25%.
However the nominated sub-contractor whose experience and
qualification have been claimed for meeting the qualification criteria in
accordance with stipulations in Schedule A part h shall be excluded while
applying the ceiling of 25 %.
ITB 3.4(a) Amount of Bid Security: Rs. INR 23 Million (Rupees Twenty Three
Million only)
ITB 3.11 a Period for Survey, Review of designs, redesign where Necessary,
construction, testing, commissioning etc of the Sewerage system
and all appurtenant structures and allied works is: 3 (Three) years
ITB 3.11 b The prices quoted by the Bidder for BOQ items, i.e. Part A of the
Bid Prices shall be subject to adjustment during the performance of
the Contract. Price adjustment shall be carried out in accordance
with Schedule 8 of Contract.
ITB 3.11 c The prevailing Electricity Tariff referred to as ‗Base Rate of
Electricity Tariff‘ is Rs. 6.5per KWh.
ITB 3.14(a) Bid Validity Period: 120 days

ITB 3.15(a), 4.1(a) Original and one copy

ITB 4.1(b)(1), Address of Bid submission:
4.1(b)(2), 4.2(a), Bihar Urban Infrastructure Development Corporation Limited,
4.2(c) #303, Third Floor, Maurya Tower,
Mauryalok Complex,
Budh Marg, Patna-800001
Bihar, India
Date : 15.09.2015 Time: 15.00 [Link]
In the event specified date is declared as a holiday for the Owner, bids will
be received up to the appointed time on the next working day.
ITB 4.1(b)(2), Name of Contract:
Survey, review the designs, redesign where necessary and build new
sewerage network of about 180km length and all appurtenant structures,
and Operation & Maintenance of sewerage network for a period of 10
years at Beur in Patna, State of Bihar, India.
ITB 4.1(b)(2), 4.2(a), Location, date and time of opening of Bid:
5.1(a)2 Bihar Urban Infrastructure Development Corporation Limited,
#303, Third Floor, Maurya Tower,

Page 44 of 385
ITB SECTION REQUIRED INFORMATION
REFERENCE
Mauryalok Complex,
Budh Marg, Patna-800001
Bihar, India
Date: 15.09. 2015 Time: 15.30. Hrs. IST.
In the event specified date is declared as a holiday for the Owner, bids will
be opened on the appointed time on the next working day.
ITB 6.5 Amount of Performance Security:
10 % of the total Contract Price, i.e. BOQ Price (Part A) plus total O&M
Price (Part B) for the O&M period of 10 years.
ITB 6.7 Name of the Adjudicator proposed by the Owner:
[Link] Tiwari, Retd. Chief Engineer, Public Health Engineering
Department, Government of Bihar.
(Daily fee for the Adjudicator: Rs.10,000/day of effective hearing +
reimbursements towards travel, transportation, lodging, boarding
etc)
[CV of the proposed Adjudicator is attached.]

Page 45 of 385
 Schedule A to the Bidding Documents
a. Bidder‘s Bid Form & Appendix to Bid
b. Bidder‘s Price Schedules
c. Form of Bid Security
d. Form of Performance Security
e. Format of Curriculum Vitae for Proposed Key Staff
f. Form for Clarification Questions
g. List of Eligible Countries
h. Qualification Criteria
i. Information Forms
j. Declaration Format for Deemed Export Benefits
k. Form of Letter of Intent by JV Partners
l. Form of Power of Attorney for Joint Venture
m. Form of undertaking by JV Partners

Page 46 of 385
 Schedule A – Part a
BIDDER‟S BID FORM

[NAME OF PROJECT]: NATIONAL GANGA RIVER BASIN PROJECT

Date:
Loan/Credit No: 8065-IN/4955-IN
Contract No:
[Name of Contract]: Survey, review the designs, redesign where necessary and build new sewerage
network of about 180 km length and all appurtenant structures, and operation & maintenance
of sewerage network for a period of 10 years at Beur in Patna, State of Bihar, India

To:
The Managing Director,
Bihar Urban Infrastructure Development Corporation Limited,
#303, Third Floor, Maurya Tower,
Mauryalok Complex,
Budh Marg, Patna-800001
Bihar, India.
Gentlemen,
Having examined the Bidding Documents, including Addendum Numbers [insert numbers], the
receipt of which is hereby acknowledged, we, the undersigned, offer to Review the Design, Build,
Test, pre-commission and commission the Sewerage Network and perform the subsequent Operation
and Maintenance services under the above-named Contract in full conformity with the said Bidding
Documents for the following amounts in accordance with the Bidder‘s Price Schedules attached
herewith and are made part of this Bid:
Table 1
Grand Summary

No. Component Price

1. Price Schedule: Part A – Design-Build Price

2. Price Schedule: Part B Total O & M Price for

10 years (NPV)

Total Bid Price

Amount in Words

Figures in Table 1 are arrived at from figures in Tables 2 to 3

Page 47 of 385
 Table 2

Part A - BOQ Price against Survey, reviewing the Designs, redesigning where
necessary, build, test, and successful commissioning of the Sewerage Network, etc

Sl. Description Amount (Rs.)

No. In figures In Words
A Undertaking preparatory
survey, review the design
and redesign for the
Sewerage Network
B Providing Sewerage
Network including all
appurtenant structures and
commissioning including
rehabilitation/ resurfacing
and restoration of roads/
services etc
C Providing House
Connections, including
construction of collection
pits and their further joining
with main sewer line and
Supervising consumer
connections
D Relocation of utilities

E Providing lateral/ branch/

main/ trunk Sewers by
trenchless technology.
TOTAL

Offer of the Bidder

regarding Rebate / Discount

GRAND TOTAL AFTER

REBATE

Page 48 of 385
 Table 3
Part B - O&M Price for Operation and Maintenance of the Sewerage Network for 10 years of the
Operations Period as provided in the table below: (The NPV of the quoted O&M prices in the Table
below are based on the figures given in the bidder‘s Price Schedule under Table 4 of Schedule A –
Part b)

NPV of Annual Operation and Maintenance

Year of Operations Price for Network (Rs.)
In figures In words
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Total at NPV

We meet the eligibility requirements and have no conflict of interest in accordance with ITB 1.2.2.
We have not been suspended nor declared ineligible by the Employer based on execution of a Bid
Securing Declaration in the Owner‘s country in accordance with ITB 1.2.6.
We undertake, if our Bid is accepted, to commence the construction of Sewerage Network and to
achieve Completion within the respective times stated in the Bidding Documents.
If our Bid is accepted, we undertake to provide an advance payment security and the Performance
Security in the form, in the amounts, and within the times specified in the Bidding Documents.
We are not participating, as a Bidder or as a subcontractor, in more than one bid in this bidding
process in accordance with ITB 1.2.2(e), other than alternative bids submitted in accordance with ITB
3.13;
We, including any of our subcontractors or suppliers for any part of the contract, have not been
declared ineligible by the Bank, under the Owner‘s country laws or official regulations or by an act of
compliance with a decision of the United Nations Security Council;
We are not a government owned entity/We are a government owned entity but meet the requirements of
ITB 1.2.5;

Page 49 of 385
We have paid, or will pay the following commissions, gratuities, or fees with respect to the bidding
process or execution of the Contract:
Name of Recipient Address Reason Amount
-------------------------- ---------------------- -------------------- --------------
-------------------------- ---------------------- -------------------- --------------
-------------------------- ---------------------- -------------------- --------------
-------------------------- ---------------------- -------------------- --------------
(If none has been paid or is to be paid, indicate ―none.‖)
We accept the appointment of
[Link] Tiwari, Retd. Chief Engineer, Public Health Engineering Department, Government
of Bihar.
] as the Adjudicator.
or
We do not accept the appointment of
[Link] Tiwari, Retd. Chief Engineer, Public Health Engineering Department, Government
of Bihar.
as the Adjudicator, and we propose instead that [name] be appointed as Adjudicator, whose résumé
and hourly fees are attached.
We agree to abide by this Bid, which consists of this letter and the other documents listed in
ITB Section 3.2, for the period identified in the Bid Data Sheet as the length of the Bid Validity
Period, and it shall remain binding upon us and may be accepted by you at any time before the
expiration of that period.
Until a formal contract is prepared and executed between us, this Bid, together with your written
acceptance thereof and your notification of award, shall constitute a binding contract between us.
We hereby certify that we have taken steps to ensure that no person acting for us or on our behalf will
engage in any type of fraud and corruption.
We understand that you are not bound to accept the lowest or any Bid you may receive.

Dated this day of , [Year].

[signature]
In the capacity of
[position]
Duly authorized to sign this bid for and on behalf of
[name of Bidder]

Page 50 of 385
 Appendix to Bid
Schedule of Adjustment Data

Bidders‘ attention is drawn to the following definition and other details provided in Schedule 8 of the
Contract.
Base Date: For the purpose of Price Adjustment Clause, ‗Base Date‘ shall be the date 28 days prior to
the deadline for submission of bids for the contract.
In the Table below, the Bidder shall indicate its proposed weightings within the range indicated
therein such that the total weighting = 1.00.

Table
Bidder‟s
Index Index description Source of index
proposed
code
weighting
A Nonadjustable - 0.15

B Labour - Consumer price Labour Bureau, Ministry of

index for industrial Labour & Employment,
workers for ........centre Government of India

C Cement - All India Office of the Economic

Wholesale Price Index for Advisor to the Govt. of India,
grey cement Ministry of Commerce and
Industry
D Steel - All India Office of the Economic
Wholesale Price Index for Advisor to the Govt. of India,
steel rebars Ministry of Commerce and
Industry
E Bitumen - Average IOC depot at...............
official retail price of
bitumen

F POL - average official Retail outlet of IOC at...........

retail price of High Speed
Diesel

G Plant & Machinery Spares Office of the Economic

- All India Wholesale Advisor to the Govt. of India,
Price Index for Ministry of Commerce and
Construction machinery Industry

H Other materials - All India Office of the Economic

Wholesale Price Index for Advisor to the Govt. of India,
all commodities Ministry of Commerce and
Industry
Total 1.00

Page 51 of 385
 Schedule A – Part b
BIDDER‟S PRICE SCHEDULES
PREAMBLE TO THE PRICE SCHEDULES
1.1 The Price Schedules do not give a full description of Survey, Reviewing the Design,
redesigning where necessary, and Building, Testing and Commissioning Sewerage Network,
Operation and Maintenance of Sewerage Network and the services to be performed under
each item. Bidders are deemed to have read the Draft Contract, including the Technical
Specifications Schedule consisting of the Design-Build Services Schedule, Operations
Services Schedule and Technical Standards Schedule, and other sections of the Bidding
Documents to ascertain the full scope of the requirements of the Contract included in each
item prior to filling in the prices. The entered prices are deemed to include the full scope as
aforesaid, including overheads and profit.
1.2 If Bidders are unclear or uncertain as to the scope of any item, they shall seek clarification in
accordance with the Instructions to Bidders in the Bidding Documents prior to submitting
their Bid.
1.3 Prices shall be filled in indelible ink, and any alterations necessary due to errors shall be
initialled by the Bidder. As specified in the Bid Data Sheet, prices shall be fixed and firm for
the duration of the Contract, except if as adjusted in accordance with the Contract.
1.4 The Bid Price shall be quoted in the manner indicated and in the currencies specified in the
Instructions to Bidders in the Bidding Documents. For each item, Bidders shall complete each
appropriate column in the respective Schedules, giving the price breakdown as indicated in
the Schedules.
1.5 Bidder shall submit with its bid details evidencing that the cost claimed for the payment is
based on a realistic assessment of setting up the Sewerage Network. The owner shall have the
option to seek further details including details of costs of similar contracts executed by the
Bidder in the past.
1.6 Prices given in the Schedules Part A and Part B against each item shall be for the scope
covered by that item as detailed in the Draft Contract or elsewhere in the Bidding Documents.
1.7 The Bidder shall provide separate table giving details of taxes, duties, levies and other
applicable taxes considered by him and included in the prices offered under Parts A & B.
Service Tax shall not be included in the prices and the same shall be paid separately by the
Owner if applicable against proof of applicability and payment.
Table 1 - Bid Price Summary (Network)
No. Component Price
1. Price Schedule: Part A 1 – Design-Build Price
2. Price Schedule: Part B – NPV of Total O & M
Price for 10 years
Total Bid Price in figures = (1) + (2)
Total Bid Price in words

Page 52 of 385
 Bills of Quantities
Prices quoted by the Bidder
Abstract of Comprehensive Tendered Cost - Table 2
Part A - BOQ Price against Survey, reviewing the Designs, redesigning where
necessary, build, test, and successful commissioning of the Sewerage Network

Part B – O&M Price for Operation and Maintenance of the Sewerage Network, for
each of the 10 years of the Operations Period
Sl. Description Cost of Complete Work - Amount (Rs.)
No. In figures In Words

Part A – Construction of Civil Works

A Undertaking preparatory survey,

review the design and redesign for
the Sewerage Network
B Providing Sewerage Network
including all appurtenant structures
and commissioning including
rehabilitation/ resurfacing and
restoration of roads/ services etc
C Providing House Connections,
including construction of collection
pits and their further joining with
main sewer line and Supervising
consumer connections
D Relocation of utilities

E Providing lateral/ branch/ main/

trunk Sewers by trenchless
technology.
TOTAL
Offer of the Bidder after Rebate /
Discount
GRAND TOTAL AFTER REBATE
(Construction Cost of network )

Part B – 10 years O&M

10 years O & M Cost of sewer network,

Total (Bid Price)

Figures in Table 2 are derived from figures in Tables below.

Page 53 of 385
 SEWERAGE NETWORK

TABLE 3
BILL OF QUANTITIES OF CIVIL WORKS
Part-1 Construction Civil Works
Rate
S. No. Item of Work Quantity Unit Total Amount
In Figure

1 2 3 4 5 6

A Sewerage Network For Beur

1 Undertaking preparatory survey, review the design and redesign for the
1 LS
Sewerage Network

Sub Total (1)

2 Providing Sewerage Network including all appurtenant structures and

commissioning including Rehabilitation / resurfacing and restoration of roads /
services etc.

2.1 Earth work in excavation in foundation trenches or drains (not exceeding 1.5
m in width or 10 sqm on plan) including dressing of sides and ramming of
bottoms, lift up to 1.5 m, including getting out the excavated soil and disposal
1153751 Cum
of surplus excavated soil as directed, within a lead of 50m. and any other item
required for the completeness of work in all respect as per specification and as
directed by the Design Build Operations Engineer . . All kind of soil

2.2 286712 Cum

Extra for every additional lift of 1.5 m or part thereof depth exceeding 1.5m

Page 54 of 385
 but not exceeding 3.0m in all kinds of soils for item above

2.3 Extra for every additional lift of 1.5 m or part there of depth exceeding 3.0m
124176 Cum
but not exceeding 4.5m in all kinds of soils for item above

2.4 Extra for every additional lift of 1.5 m or part thereof depth exceeding 4.5m
48334 Cum
but not exceeding 6.0m in all kinds of soils for item above

2.5 Extra for every additional lift of 1.5 m or part thereof depth exceeding 6.0m
19480 Cum
but not exceeding 7.5m in all kinds of soils for item above

2.6 Extra for every additional lift of 1.5 m or part thereof depth exceeding 7.50m
3316 Cum
but not exceeding 9.0 m in all kinds of soils for item above

2.7 Supplying and making compacted granular material/ Concrete bedding with
fine /coarse granular / mooram material such as ballast/ gravel / stone hips /
sand of approved quality for making bedding with minimum thickness of one
fourth the outside Dia of pipe but not less than 10 cm as per design and for top
of the pipes as necessitated at site at all depths and for all size of pipe and any
other item required for the completeness of work in all respect as per
specification and as directed by the Design Build Operations Engineer . .

a Granular / Mooram 20648 Cum

b [Link](1 Cement:4coarse sand 8 graded stone aggregate 40 mm nominal size) 4005 Cum

2.8 Filling available excavated earth (excluding rock) in trenches, plinth, sides of
foundations etc. in layers not exceeding 20 cm in depth: consolidating each
1065766 Cum
deposited layer by ramming and watering lead. with all lead and lift, complete
as per specification and as directed by the Design Build Operations Engineer .

Page 55 of 385
2.9 Carriage of materials by mechanical transport including loading, unloading and
stacking of surplus soil.

a up to 1 km 26397 Cum

b up to 2 km 26397 Cum

c up to 3 km 17598 Cum

d up to 4 km 8799 Cum

e up to 5 km 8799 Cum

2.10 Road cutting for trench excavation Earth work in excavation in foundation
trenches or drains (not exceeding 1.5 m in width or 10 sqm on plan) including
dressing of sides and ramming of bottoms, lift up to 1.5 m, including getting out
the excavated soil and disposal of surplus excavated soil as directed, within a 134426 Cum
lead of 50m and any other item required for the completeness of work in all
respect as per specification and as directed by the Design Build Operations
Engineer .

2.11 Carriage of materials by mechanical transport including loading, unloading and

stacking of Rubbish .

a Up to 1 km 40328 Cum

b Up to 2 km 40328 Cum

c Up to 3 km 26886 Cum

Page 56 of 385
 d Up to 4 km 13443 Cum

e Up to 5 km 13443 Cum

2.12 Providing & Laying Non Pressure (NP2) R.C.C Pipes : Supplying RCC NP2
Pipes (Spigot & Socketed) , conveying to site, lowering into trenches at all
levels, aligning, laying & jointing of pipes for as per IS: 458 - 1988 (Amended
up to date) with Rubber gaskets (EPDM) as per IS: 5382 (Amended up to date) ,
including cost of Rubber gaskets, lubricants, necessary fittings as per drawing,
hydro testing the pipe line with supplying and conveyance of water to site etc.,
complete as per specifications and as directed by Design Build Operations
Engineer

a 200 mm dia 110991 Metre

b 250 mm dia 5068 Metre

c 300 mm dia 4347 Metre

d 350 mm dia 3008 Metre

e 400 mm dia 4338 Metre

f 450 mm dia 2480 Metre

g 500 mm dia 2969 Metre

2.13 Providing & Laying Non Pressure (NP3) R.C.C Pipes : Supplying RCC NP3
Pipes (Spigot & Socketed) , conveying to site, lowering into trenches at all
levels, aligning, laying & jointing of pipes for as per IS: 458 - 1988 (Amended

Page 57 of 385
 up to date) with Rubber gaskets (EPDM) as per IS: 5382 (Amended up to date) ,
including cost of Rubber gaskets, lubricants, necessary fittings as per drawing,
hydro testing the pipe line with supplying and conveyance of water to site etc.,
complete as per specifications and as directed by Design Build Operations
Engineer.

a 600 mm dia 2682 Metre

b 700 mm dia 1175 Metre

c 800 mm dia 89 Metre

d 900 mm dia 1197 Metre

e 1000 mm dia 409 Metre

f 1200 mm dia 1655 Metre

g 1600 mm dia 649 Metre

2.14 Providing and Supplying in standard length HDPE pipes for non pressure
underground sewerage with smooth internal and corrugated (profiled) external
surface with Anti rodent property confirming to ISO-21138-3:2007 with
necessary jointing material like mechanical connector i.e. thread/insert
joint/quick release coupler/compression fitting joint/ or flanged joint including
all loacal and central taxes, transportation and freight charges, inspection
charges, loading and unloading charges, conveyance to the departmental
stores/ site and stacking the same in closed shade duly protecting from sunrays
and rains etc complete as per specifications and as directed by Design-Build-

Page 58 of 385
 Operations Engineer.

a 200 mm dia 36997 Metre

b 250 mm dia 1690 Metre

2.15 Encasing CI/GI/RCC/SW pipes all around including bed concrete with 150mm
cement concrete [Link](1 Cement: 2 coarse sand:4 graded stone aggregate 40 mm
nominal size) excluding form work etc ,complete as per drawing and as directed
by Design Build Operations Engineer .

a 200 mm dia 3750 Cum

b 250 mm dia 195 Cum

c 300 mm dia 146 Cum

d 350 mm dia 134 Cum

e 400 mm dia 210 Cum

f 450 mm dia 131 Cum

g 500 mm dia 170 Cum

h 600 mm dia 181 Cum

i 700 mm dia 91 Cum

Page 59 of 385
 j 800 mm dia 8 Cum

k 900 mm dia 121 Cum

L 1000 mm dia 47 Cum

M 1200 mm dia 232 Cum

n 1600 mm dia 128 Cum

2.16 Centering and shuttering including strutting, propping etc. and removal of
form work for : Foundations, footings, bases for columns, complete as per
specification and as directed by Design Build Operations Engineer .

a Depth not exceeding 1.5 m 7505 Sqm

b Depth exceeding 1.5m. But not exceeding 3m 8121 Sqm

c Depth exceeding 3 m. But not exceeding 4.5m 2967 Sqm

d Depth exceeding 4.5m. But not exceeding 6m 1882 Sqm

e Depth exceeding 6m. But not exceeding 7.5m 919 Sqm

f Depth exceeding 7.5 m. But not exceeding 9.0 m 687 Sqm

2.17 Providing, transportation, lowering and fixing Precast RCC circular type
manhole 0.91m internal dia at bottom and 0.56m dia at top made up of precast 3451 Each
monolithic base, modular riser, and top cone in M-40 grade Cement Concrete
placed, reinforcement as per drawing (minimum 100Kg/ Cum of Concrete) and

Page 60 of 385
 aligned to provide vertical sides, with O ring rubber gasket at each joint, water
tight and adjustment rings over top cone, complete with GRP/ FRP (Heavy
Duty) type manhole cover, orange colour safety foot rest of minimum 6 mm
thick plastic encapsulated as per IS : 10910 on 12mm dia steel bar conforming
to IS : 1786 having minimum cross section as 23 mmx25mm and over all
minimum length 263 mm and width as 165mm with minimum 112 mm space
between protruded legs having 2 mm tread on top surface by ribbing or
chequering besides necessary and adequate anchoring projections on tail length
on 138 mm as per standard drawing and suitable to with stand the bend test and
chemical resistance test as per specifications and having manufacture's
permanent identification mark to be visible even after fixing as per drawing and
all connections shall have a watertight seal between the pipe and the manhole
complete as per standard design for depth of 0.91m including benching cement
concrete of 1 : 2 : 4 (1 cement : 2 sand : 4 stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size)
as per site requirements. Complete as per specification and drawing and as
directed by the Design Build Operations Engineer .

2.18 Extra depth for circular type manhole 0.91m internal dia (at bottom) beyond
1393 Metre
0.91m but less than 1.67 m For Item above

2.19 Providing, transportation, lowering and fixing Precast RCC circular type
manhole 1.22m internal dia at bottom and 0.56m dia at top made up of precast
monolithic base, modular riser, and top cone in M-40 grade Cement Concrete
placed, reinforcement as per drawing (minimum 100 kg/cum of concrete) and
aligned to provide vertical sides, with O ring rubber gasket at each joint, water 1553 Each
tight and adjustment rings over top cone, complete with GRP/ FRP (Heavy
Duty) type manhole cover, orange colour safety foot rest of minimum 6 mm
thick plastic encapsulated as per IS : 10910 on 12mm dia steel bar (minimum
100Kg/ Cum of Concrete) conforming to IS : 1786 having minimum cross

Page 61 of 385
 section as 23 mmx25mm and over all minimum length 263 mm and width as
165mm with minimum 112 mm space between protruded legs having 2 mm
tread on top surface by ribbing or chequering besides necessary and adequate
anchoring projections on tail length on 138 mm as per standard drawing and
suitable to with stand the bend test and chemical resistance test as per
specifications and having manufacture's permanent identification mark to be
visible even after fixing as per drawing and all connections shall have a
watertight seal between the pipe and the manhole complete as per standard
design for depth of 1.68 m including benching cement concrete of 1 : 2 : 4 (1
cement : 2 sand : 4 stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size) as per site requirements

2.20 Extra depth for circular type manhole 1.220m internal dia (at bottom) beyond
468 Metre
1.68M AND UPTO 2.29M for item above

2.21 Providing, transportation, lowering and fixing Precast RCC circular type
manhole 1.52m internal dia at bottom and 0.56m dia at top made up of precast
monolithic base, modular riser, and top cone in M-40 grade Cement Concrete
placed, reinforcement as per drawing (minimum 100Kg/ Cum of Concrete) and
aligned to provide vertical sides, with O ring rubber gasket at each joint, water
tight and adjustment rings over top cone, complete with GRP/ FRP (Heavy
Duty) type manhole cover, orange colour safety foot rest of minimum 6 mm
thick plastic encapsulated as per IS : 10910 on 12mm dia steel bar conforming to 2523 Each
IS : 1786 having minimum cross section as 23 mmx25mm and over all minimum
length 263 mm and width as 165mm with minimum 112 mm space between
protruded legs having 2 mm tread on top surface by ribbing or chequering
besides necessary and adequate anchoring projections on tail length on 138 mm
as per standard drawing and suitable to with stand the bend test and chemical
resistance test as per specifications and having manufacture's permanent
identification mark to be visible even after fixing as per drawing and all

Page 62 of 385
 connections shall have a watertight seal between the pipe and the manhole
complete as per standard design for depth of 2.30 m including benching cement
concrete of 1: 2: 4 (1 cement: 2 sand: 4 stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size) as
per site requirements. Complete as per specification and drawing and as directed
by the Design Build Operations Engineer

2.22 Extra depth for circular type manhole 1.52m internal dia (at bottom) beyond
3630 Metre
2.30M for Item above

2.23 Providing, transportation, lowering and fixing Precast RCC circular type
manhole 1.82m internal dia at bottom and 0.56m dia at top made up of precast
monolithic base, modular riser, and top cone in M-40 grade Cement Concrete
placed, reinforcement as per drawing (minimum 100 kg/cum of concrete)and
aligned to provide vertical sides, with O ring rubber gasket at each joint, water
tight and adjustment rings over top cone, complete with GRP/ FRP (Heavy
Duty) type manhole cover, orange colour safety foot rest of minimum 6 mm
thick plastic encapsulated as per IS : 10910 on 12mm dia steel bar (minimum
100Kg/ Cum of Concrete) conforming to IS : 1786 having minimum cross
section as 23 mmx25mm and over all minimum length 263 mm and width as 69 Each
165mm with minimum 112 mm space between protruded legs having 2 mm
tread on top surface by ribbing or chequering besides necessary and adequate
anchoring projections on tail length on 138 mm as per standard drawing and
suitable to with stand the bend test and chemical resistance test as per
specifications and having manufacture's permanent identification mark to be
visible even after fixing as per drawing and all connections shall have a
watertight seal between the pipe and the manhole complete as per standard
design for depth of 2.30 m including benching cement concrete of 1 : 2 : 4 (1
cement : 2 sand : 4 stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size) as per site
requirements. Complete as per specification and drawing and as directed by the

Page 63 of 385
 Design Build Operations Engineer .

2.23( Extra depth for circular type manhole 1.82m internal dia (at bottom) beyond
50 Metre
a) 2.30M for Item 2.23

2.24 Providing, transportation, lowering and fixing Precast RCC circular type
manhole 2.42 m internal dia at bottom and 0.56 m dia at top made up of precast
monolithic base, modular riser, and top cone in M-40 grade Cement Concrete
placed, reinforcement as per drawing (minimum 100 kg/cum of concrete) and
aligned to provide vertical sides, with O ring rubber gasket at each joint, water
tight and adjustment rings over top cone, complete with GRP/ FRP (Heavy
Duty) type manhole cover, orange colour safety foot rest of minimum 6 mm
thick plastic encapsulated as per IS : 10910 on 12mm dia steel bar (minimum
100Kg/ Cum of Concrete) conforming to IS : 1786 having minimum cross
section as 23 mmx25mm and over all minimum length 263 mm and width as
165mm with minimum 112 mm space between protruded legs having 2 mm 26 Each
tread on top surface by ribbing or chequering besides necessary and adequate
anchoring projections on tail length on 138 mm as per standard drawing and
suitable to with stand the bend test and chemical resistance test as per
specifications and having manufacture's permanent identification mark to be
visible even after fixing as per drawing and all connections shall have a
watertight seal between the pipe and the manhole complete as per standard
design for depth of 2.30 m including benching cement concrete of 1 : 2 : 4 (1
cement : 2 sand : 4 stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size) as per site
requirements. Complete as per specification and drawing and as directed by the
Design Build Operations Engineer .

2.25 Extra depth for circular type manhole 2.42 m internal dia (at bottom) beyond
160 Metre
2.30M for Item above

Page 64 of 385
2.26 Providing sand cast iron drop connection externally for 60 cm drop from branch
sewer line to main sewer manhole including inspection and cleaning eye with
chain and lid, sand' cast iron drop pipe and bend encased. all-round with cement
concrete [Link] (1 cement: 5 fine sand: 10 graded stone aggregate 40 mm
nominal size) with all centering and shuttering required, cutting holes in walls
and making good with brick work in cement mortar 1:4 (1 cement: 4 coarse
sand) plastered with cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement: 3 coarse sand) on inside of
the manhole wall lead caulked joints between sand cast iron pipes and fittings,
stiff cement mortar 1:1 (1 cement: 1 fine sand) joints between sand cast iron tee
and S.W. pipe, making required channels . complete as per specification and
drawing and as directed by the Design Build Operations Engineer .

a 200 mm sand cast iron drop connection 208 Each

b Extra for depths beyond 60 cm of sand cast iron drop connection complete 104 m

2.27 Close timbering in trenches including strutting. Shoring and packing cavities
(wherever required) complete. (Measurements to be taken of the face area
timbering):and as per specifications and direction of Design Build Operations
Engineer .

a Depth not exceeding 1.5 m 539158 Sqm

b Depth exceeding 1.5m. But not exceeding 3m 203164 Sqm

c Depth exceeding 3 m. But not exceeding 4.5m 81615 Sqm

2.28 Close steel in trenches including strutting. Shoring and packing cavities
(wherever required) complete. (Measurements to be taken of the face area Steel)

Page 65 of 385
 and as per specifications and direction of Design Build Operations Engineer .

a Depth exceeding 4.5m. But not exceeding 6m 31608 Sqm

b Depth exceeding 6m. But not exceeding 7.5m 10880 Sqm

c Depth exceeding 7.5 m. But not exceeding 9.0 m 2095 Sqm

2.29 Construction of granular sub base by providing close graded material

conforming to specifications mixing in a mechanical mix plant at OMC, carriage
of mixed material by tippers to work site, for all leads & lift, spreading in
uniform layers of specified thickness with motor grader on prepared surface and
compacting with vibratory power roller to achieve the desired density, complete
as per specification and direction of Design Build Operations Engineer . .

GSB @ 200mm thick With material conforming to Grade -I (size range 75mm
55605 Cum
to .075mm) having CBR value-30

2.30 Providing and laying , spreading and compacting graded stone aggregate (size
rang 53mm to .075mm) to wet mix macadam (WMM) specification including
premixing the material with water at OMC in mechanical mix plant , carriage of
mixed material by tipper to site ,for all leads & lift laying in uniform layers with
mechanical paver finisher in sub base / base course on well prepared surface and
compacting with vibratory roller of 8 to 10 tonne capacity to achieve the
desired density complete as per specification and directions of Design Build
Operations Engineer . .

WMM / WBM @ 150mm thick 42484 Cum

2.31
Providing and laying Bituminous macadam using crushed stone aggregates of
Page 66 of 385
 specified grading premixed with bituminous binder, transported to site by
tippers, laid over a previously prepared surface with paver finisher equipped with
electronic sensor to the required grade, level and alignment and rolling with
smooth wheeled, vibratory and tandem rollers as per as per specifications and
directions of Design Build Operations Engineer . .

BM @ 50mm thick. 50-100mm average compacted thickness with bitumen

of grade [email protected]%(percentage by weight of total mix)prepared in Batch 16026 Cum
Type Hot Mix Plant of 100-120 THP capacity

2.32 Providing and laying Semi dense Bituminous concrete using crushed stone
aggregates of specified grading, premixed with bituminous binder and filler,
transporting the hot mix to work onsite by tippers, laying with paver finisher
equipped with electronic sensor to the required grade, level and alignment and
rolling with smooth wheeled, vibratory and tandem rollers to achieve the desired
compaction and density as per specification, complete and as per directions of
Design Build Operations Engineer . .

SDBC @ 25mm thick. 25mm compacted thickness with bitumen of grade VG-
30@5% (percentage by weight of total mix) and lime filler@2% (percentage by
812446 Sqm
weight of aggregate) prepared in Batch Type Hot Mix plant of 100-120 THP
capacity.

2.33 Pumping out water caused by spring, tides or river seepage, broken water mains
or drains or like (Provisional) and as per specifications and direction of Design 1584284 KL
Build Operations Engineer .

Note: Joint record of all such pumping to be kept for payment in the form of
logbook duly sign by client & contractor

Page 67 of 385
2.34 Demolishing R.C.C work manually /by mechanical means including stacking of
steel bar and disposal of unserviceable material with all lead and lift and as per 8987 Cum
specifications and direction of Design Build Operations Engineer . .

2.35 Demolishing Brick work manually /by mechanical means including stacking of
serviceable material and disposal of unserviceable material with all lead and lift 8987 Cum
and as per specifications and direction of Design Build Operations Engineer . .

Sub total (2) (Sr. no.2.1 to 2.35 above)

3 Providing House connections, Including construction of collection pits and its

further joining with main sewer line with PVC pipe of 160 mm dia.
Construction of collection pit 230 mm thick Brick Masonry in CM 1:4,
including plastering 15mm thick in CM 1:4 for both outside & inside (neat
cement finish inside), 100 mm thick coping around property chamber walls in
M-20 concrete, PCC M 15 for bed of 150 mm thick & benching 75mm thick,
Precast Concrete cover and frame (Medium duty) As per IS 12592 to be
provided.

The work includes excavation, refilling of excavated material with compaction,

Connection between manholes in the streets and collection pit. supply, delivery
and laying of polyvinyl chloride (PVC) Pipes of 160 mm dia with ISI mark
intended for underground (buried) non pressure gravity drain and sewer
applications conforming to relevant IS with latest amendments as per drawing
and store in closed shed duly protected from sun rays, should be completed as
per specifications, drawing and as per directions of Design Build Operations
Engineer

Page 68 of 385
3..1 For collection pit, with clear inside opening of900 x 800 mm, depth 450mm, 21000 Each

3.2 For collection pit, with clear inside opening of 1200 x 900 mm, depth 900mm, 16400 Each

3.3 For road width less than 3.0 m, directly connected to Manhole pvc pipe
9297 Each
without constructing connecting chamber

4 Relocation of utilities LS job

5 Environmental Mitigation and Monitoring Cost (Pre construction / Post

construction) which includes all environmental e.g. LS job
Air,water,Noise,soil,Metrological Data etc.

6 Supply & Laying of lateral/branch/trunk Sewers by trenchless method

Supply & Laying of lateral/branch/trunk Sewers by trenchless

[Link] of product pipe / Casing Pipe by suitable method including
making of entry and exit pits, all related civil works like excavation, shoring /
strutting, etc., shielded excavation through suitable process lowering of pipe
segments in the pit, laying and jointing of product pipeline through suitable
process from the pit .Excavation of Shafts in soil inclusive of all shuttering,
strutting, and shoring and maintaining the shaft during constriction operation and
backfilling the same after the completion of works and restoration of site after
project completion. for sections / locations details as below, for depths more
than 3.0m

a 350 mm Diameter 513 m

b 400 mm Diameter 639 m

Page 69 of 385
c 450 mm Diameter 592 m

d 500 mm Diameter 707 m

e 600 mm Diameter 1107 m

f 700 mm Diameter 760 m

g 1600 mm Diameter 1000 m

Sub Total 3 to 6

Total Civil Works Network (A) (1 to 6)

Total Amount in Words

Signature of the Bidder Signature of the Engineer

Name of the Bidders Name of the Engineer

Rubber stamp with Designation Designation

Date: Date:

Page 70 of 385
 PART B – Annual O&M Prices

O&M Prices for Sewerage Network

Table 4
Annual Operation and NPV Factor NPV of O&M
Maintenance Price (Rs.) Price
(Based on
Year of
discount factor of
Operations
In Figures In words 10% p.a.) Col 5 = Col 2 *
Col 4

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

1 0.909
2 0.826
3 0.751
4 0.683
5 0.621
6 0.564
7 0.513
8 0.467
9 0.424
10 0.386
Total
Figures in Table 4 are derived from Figures in Table 5.
Note:

1. The bidder shall furnish break-up of the O&M prices as under for each year along with the respective
calculation sheets in support of the Part B (lump-sum) prices quoted in the Table above.
[i] O&M charges for as applicable for each size of sewerage line separately on per Km basis;
[ii] O& M charges for other assets, if any.
2. The break-up of charges quoted by the bidder (Operator) shall be basis for determining the variation in the
O&M payments for any period during which the scope of O&M services of the Operator is varied by the
Owner owing to variation in the lengths of sewerage lines to be operated and maintained during the contract
term, (Please refer Article 2 of Schedule 6 to the contract relating to Terms and procedure of Payment.)
3. The Bidder shall provide along with the price schedule a separate table giving details of taxes, duties, levies
and other applicable taxes considered by him and included in the prices offered under Part A & Part B.
Service Tax shall not be included in the prices and the same shall be paid separately by the Owner, if
applicable, against proof of applicability and payment.

Page 71 of 385
Page 72 of 385
Price for Operation & Maintenance of 180 km (Zone II) sewerage network for 10 years – Table 5

Sl. Description Lump Sum Price

No. 1ST Year 2nd Year 3rd Year 4th Year 5th Year 6th Year 7th Year 8th Year 9th Year 10th
Year
1 Total Price for O&M of sewer
network for the 1st to 10th year
including T& P charged &
spares, Manpower, Cost of civil
works, repair & maintenance
including preventive
maintenance, Cost of operating
jetting cum suction machine
including silt disposal and any
other cost.

Page 73 of 385
 Schedule A – Part c

FORM OF BID SECURITY (BANK GUARANTEE)

WHEREAS, ...........................(name of Bidder including names of all Joint Venture Participants) (hereinafter called
―the Bidder‖) has submitted its Bid (hereinafter called the ―Bid‖) dated (date) for the performance of (name of
Contract).

KNOW ALL PEOPLE by these presents that We .................... (name of Bank) of

.................... (name of country) having our registered office at .................... (hereinafter called ―the Bank‖) are bound
unto .................... (hereinafter called ―the Owner‖) in the sum of ....................for which payment well and truly to be
made to the said Owner, the Bank binds itself, its successors, and assigns by these presents.

[The Bidder should insert the amount of the guarantee in words and in figures. This figure should be the same
amount as set out in ITB Section 3.4(a) and the Bid Data Sheet. The details related to the Bid Security are set
out in the same ITB Section 3.4.]
The CONDITIONS of this obligation are:
a. if the Bidder withdraws its Bid during the Bid Validity Period; or
b. if the Bidder, having been notified of the acceptance of its Bid by the Owner during the period of Bid validity,
1. fails to sign the Form of Contract in accordance with and when required by ITB Section 6.4; or
2. fails to provide the performance security to the Owner in accordance with and when required by ITB Section
6.5.
We undertake to pay to the Owner up to the above amount upon receipt of its first written demand, without the Owner
having to substantiate its demand, provided that in its demand the Owner will note that the amount claimed by it is due
to it owing to the occurrence of one or more of the conditions set out above, specifying the occurred condition or
conditions.
This Guarantee will remain in full force up to and including 45 days after the expiry of the Bid Validity Period and it
may be extended by the Owner in accordance with the Bidding Documents, notice of which extension(s) to the Bank
is hereby waived. Any demand in respect of this Guarantee should reach the Bank not later than the above date or the
extended date.
This guarantee is subject to the Uniform Rules for Demand Guarantees (URDG) 2010 Revision, ICC
Publication No. 758 except that the supporting statement under Article 15(a) is hereby excluded.

SEALED with the Common Seal of the said

Bank this ....... day of ...................., [Year].

_________________________ ___________________________
WITNESS SIGNATURE OF THE BANK

Page 74 of 385
(signature, name and address) SEAL

Name:

Position:

Page 75 of 385
 Schedule A – Part d
FORM OF PERFORMANCE SECURITY
[Bank’s Name, and Address of Issuing Branch or Office]
Beneficiary: [Name and Address of Owner]
Date:
PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE NO.:
We have been informed that [name of Bidder] (hereinafter called ―the Bidder‖) has entered into Contract No.
[reference number of the contract] dated with you, concerning a contract to design, build, operate and transfer
Sewerage Network in ________(hereinafter called ―the Contract‖).
Furthermore, we understand that, according to the conditions of the Contract, a performance guarantee is required.
At the request of the Operator, we [name of Bank] hereby irrevocably undertake to pay you any sum or sums not
exceeding in total an amount of [amount in figures] ( ) [amount in words], upon receipt by us of your first
demand in writing accompanied by a written statement stating that the Operator is in breach of its obligations under
the Contract, without your needing to prove or to show grounds for your demand or the sum specified therein.
This guarantee shall expire no later than the earlier of:
(a) six months after the End Date, as defined in the Contract; or
(b) six months after the date of termination of the Contract pursuant to its terms.
Consequently, any demand for payment under this guarantee must be received by us at this office on or before that
date.
This guarantee is subject to the Uniform Rules for Demand Guarantees (URDG) 2010 Revision, ICC Publication No.
758 except that the supporting statement under Article 15(a) is hereby excluded.
Yours truly,
[Name of Bank]

Authorised Signature

Page 76 of 385
 Schedule A – Part e
FORMAT OF CURRICULUM VITAE (CV) FOR PROPOSED KEY STAFF

Proposed Position:
Name of Firm:
Name of Staff:
Profession:
Date of Birth:
Years with Firm/Entity: Nationality:
Membership in Professional Societies:

Detailed Tasks Assigned:

Key Qualifications:
[Give an outline of staff member’s experience and training most pertinent to tasks on assignment. Describe degree of
responsibility held by staff member on relevant previous assignments and give dates and locations. Use about half a
page.]

Education:
[Summarize college/university and other specialized education of staff member, give names of schools, dates attended,
and degrees obtained. Use about one quarter of a page.]

Employment Record:
[Starting with present position, list in reverse order every employment held. List all positions held by staff member
since graduation, giving dates, names of employment organizations, titles of positions held, and locations of
assignments. For experience in last ten years, also give types of activities performed and client references, where
appropriate. Use about two pages.]

Languages:
[For each language indicate proficiency: excellent, good, fair or poor in speaking, reading and writing.]

Page 77 of 385
Certification:

I, the undersigned, certify that to the best of my knowledge and belief, these data correctly describe me, my
qualifications, and my experience. I also certify that I have only given permission for my CV to be included in the Bid
submitted by

[Fill in name of Bidder here.]

Date:
[Signature of staff member and authorized representative of the firm] Day/Month/Year

Full name of staff member:

Full name of authorized representative:

Page 78 of 385
 Schedule A – Part f
FORM FOR CLARIFICATION QUESTIONS
Bidder‘s Name:
Bidder‘s Address: Date Submitted:
Item No. Section Reference Page No. Section or Question / Query /
Article No. Clarification / Comment
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Page 79 of 385
 Schedule A – Part g
Eligible Countries

Eligibility for the Provision of Goods, Works and Non Consulting Services in
Bank-Financed Procurement
In reference to ITB 1.2 and 1.5, for the information of the Bidders, at the present time firms, goods and services from
the following countries are excluded from this bidding process:
Under ITB 1.5 (b) and 1.5 (c) (1): None
Under ITB 1.5 (b) and 1.5 (c) (2): None

Page 80 of 385
 Schedule A – Part h
QUALIFICATION CRITERIA

Section 1. QUALIFICATION CRITERIA

1.1. General
a. Evaluation of the Bidders‘ qualifications will be based on compliance with all the following minimum
pass-fail criteria regarding their general design, build, construct, operation and maintenance
experience of Sewage Network, financial strength, personnel and management capabilities, and other
relevant information as demonstrated by the Bidders‘ responses in the Information Forms that they
submit as per the attached Bid Forms. Additional requirements for joint ventures are given in Section
2.
b. Bidders may submit the Bid either as,
1. A stand-alone firm, company, legal entity formed as per the applicable law; or
2. A joint venture of up to a maximum of 4 partners,
provided that they meet the requirements of the Bidding Documents. For the purpose of assessing
some qualification criteria, the qualifications and experience of Sub-Contractors may be included and
the specific provisions in this regard are set out in Section 1.3.
1.2. Subcontracting
a. Bidders will be evaluated based on the qualifications of,
1. the Bidder; and
2. nominated Sub-Contractors and sub-consultants only with respect to the experience evaluation as
set out in Section 1.4 and only if the Sub-Contractors and sub-consultants are nominated for the
purpose of this bid.
For the purposes of Section 1.6, Bidders may nominate personnel of Sub-Contractors and sub-
consultants to fill the key positions, during the Design-Build Period and O&M period, as
listed/referred to in the BDS - ITB 3.3 (b) (8).
b. The Bidder shall provide a detailed list of all nominated Sub-Contractors and sub-consultants and a
record of their experience and qualifications in the applicable Information Forms. The Operator under
the Contract shall be prohibited from entering into a contract or contracts that will result in the
Operator exceeding the maximum percentage of subcontracting and sub-consulting permitted by the
Owner, as set out in the BDS - ITB 3.3(b)(9).
c. Bidders will not be permitted to change the Sub-Contractors and sub-consultants nominated in their
Bid.
1.3. Operator‟s Responsibility
After award of the Contract, the subcontracting of any part of the work, except for those Sub-Contractors
and sub consultants nominated in the Bid, shall require the prior written consent of the Owner.
Notwithstanding such consent, the Operator shall remain responsible for the acts, defaults, and neglects of
all Sub-Contractors and sub consultants during Contract implementation.
1.4. Experience in Construction and Operation and Maintenance of Sewage Network

―Sewerage Network‖ means the pipe line network laid for collecting the Sewage from consumer
connections including ‗nallaha‘, main, trunk, secondary lines from the individual take over points of the
Page 81 of 385
 Consumers up to the Sewage Treatment Plant and pumping stations and all appurtenant structures
forming a part of both the New Sewerage Network and the Existing Sewerage Network.
(a) The bidder shall provide evidence that,
1. It has designed, developed, built, tested and commissioned at least one Sewerage Network of 90
Km Length of Sewerage Network of which_15 % should be above 400 mm during the last 07
years preceding the bid submission date.
And
2. It has operated and maintained at least one Sewerage Network of 90 Km length for a period of 01
year during last 07 years. It has designed, built and commissioned Sewerage Network minimum
2.5 km using trenchless technology during the last 07 years.
b. For the purpose of demonstrating its experience in accordance with Section 1.4 (a), the Bidder,
whether a single entity or a joint venture Bidder may claim the experience of its sub-contractors and
sub-consultants nominated in the Information Forms for 1.4(a) (2).
1.5. Financial Capabilities
a. The Bidder shall demonstrate that it possesses a net worth equivalent to minimum of INR 581 million
in each of the last three financial years preceding the date of submission of bid.
b. The Bidder shall demonstrate through a banker‘s certificate that it has available cash credit facility
equivalent to minimum INR 194 million as on the date of submission of bid.
c. The Bidder‘s audited balance sheets for the last five years shall be submitted and must demonstrate
the current soundness of the Bidder‘s financial position and indicate its prospective long-term
profitability. If deemed necessary by the Owner, the Owner shall have the authority to make inquiries
with the Bidder‘s bankers.
1.6. Personnel Capabilities
The Bidder shall supply general information on the management structure of the firm, and shall make
provision for suitably qualified personnel to fill the key positions listed/referred to in the BDS – ITB
3.3(b) (8), as required during Contract implementation. The Bidder shall supply information on a
candidate for each key position, who shall meet the experience requirements specified. The Bidder may
nominate personnel of Sub-Contractors and sub consultants to fill key positions listed/referred to in the
BDS – ITB 3.3(b) (8).
1.7. Litigation History and Legal Matters
The Bidder shall provide accurate information on the ―Historical Contract Non-Performance Form‖ about
contract non-performance and pending litigation with respect to contracts completed or ongoing under its
execution over the last five years. A consistent history of awards against the Bidder or any Partner of a
joint venture may result in rejection of the Bid.
1.8. Right to Waive
The Owner reserves the right to waive minor deviations in the qualification criteria if they do not
materially affect the capability of a Bidder to perform the Contract.

Section 2. JOINT VENTURES

2.1. Qualification Criteria
a. One of the Joint Venture partners shall satisfy the criteria specified in Section 1.4 (a) 1;

Page 82 of 385
 b. Anyone of the Joint Venture partners shall satisfy the requirements specified in clause 1.4 (a) 2 of
Qualification Criteria Schedule. However the JV may claim experience of a nominated sub-contractor
for satisfying the experience specified in Section1.4 (a) (2).
c. For the purpose of satisfying the qualification criteria set out in Section 1, Joint Venture (all partners
combined) must satisfy the following qualification criteria :
1. financial soundness as stated in Section 1.5 (a) and 1.5(c);
2. adequate sources to meet financial commitments as set out in Section 1.5 (b);
3. personnel capabilities as stated in Section 1.6; and
4. legal disclosure as stated in Section 1.7.
d. The Bidder shall include in its bid all information in respect of joint venture Partners that is required
to meet the qualification criteria in Section 1, in accordance with Section 2.1.
2.2. Lead Partner
One of the joint venture Partners who is responsible for performing a key function in contract
management or in executing a major component of the proposed Contract shall be nominated as being in
charge during the bidding process and, in the event of a successful bid, during Contract execution (the
―Lead Partner‖). The Lead Partner shall be authorized to incur liabilities and receive instructions for and
on behalf of any and all partners of the joint venture. This authorization shall be evidenced by the
submission of a power of attorney signed by legally authorized signatories of each of the joint venture
Partners as per proforma enclosed in Schedule A - Part L, as part of the Bid.
2.3 All Partners
All partners of the joint venture shall be liable jointly and severally for the execution of the Contract in
accordance with the Contract terms and a copy of the undertaking as per format provided under Schedule
A - Part M signed by the joint venture partners shall be submitted with the bid.

Page 83 of 385
 Schedule A – Part i
INFORMATION FORMS
Information Form (1)

General Information
All individual firms and each participant in a joint venture submitting the bids are required to complete the information in this form.
Nationality information should be provided for all bidders that are partnerships or individually owned firms.
If the Bidder proposes to use nominated Sub-Contractors or sub-consultants, the following information should also be supplied for
the Sub-Contractor(s) and sub-consultant(s).

1. Name of firm
2. Head office address

3. Telephone Contact
4. Fax Telex
5. Place of incorporation / registration Year of incorporation / registration

Nationality of owners1
Name Nationality
1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

1. To be completed by all owners of partnerships or individually owned firms.

Page 84 of 385
 INFORMATION FORM (2)
General Design, Build, Operation and Maintenance Experience Information
Name of Bidder or participant of a joint venture

All individual firms and all participants of a joint venture are requested to complete the information in this form with regard to their
experience in designing, building, operating, managing and maintaining Sewerage Networks
Description of Contract/ Sewerage Network
Components along with its Capacity and appurtenant
structures
Name of Joint Venture Participant Responsible
Name of City
Country
Population served
Contract Role (joint venture participant, Sub-
Contractor, sub consultant, lead, etc.) and percentage
share in the total contract
Nature, role and extent of participation (describe fully)

Date of contract commencement

Date of contract termination
Contract value (INR)
Individual for reference
Address,
Telephone,
Fax for reference

Page 85 of 385
 INFORMATION FORM (2A)
Ref. Schedule A Part h - Section 1.5

Financial Capability Information#

Name of Bidder or participant of a joint venture

All individual firms and all participants of a joint venture are requested to complete the information in this form with regard to their
experience in designing, building, operating, managing and maintaining Sewerage Network s. The information supplied should be the
annual turnover of the Bidder (or each member of a joint venture) in terms of the amounts billed to clients for each year for work in
progress or completed, converted to INR at the rate of exchange at the end of the period reported. The annual periods should be
calendar years, with partial accounting for the year up to the date of submission of Applications.
Use a separate sheet for each participant of a joint venture.
Bidders should not enclose testimonials, certificates, and publicity material with their Application as they will not be taken into
account in the evaluation of qualifications.
Annual financial data (in the area of infrastructure development and engineering construction).

Year Turnover Net Worth Net Cash Accruals

(Rs. Million.) (Rs. Million.) (Rs. Million.)
[Year]
[Year]
[Year]
[Year]
[Year]
# Instructions and Applicable Conditions:
1. The applicant shall provide details of its own financial capacity;
2. The Applicant / its constituent Joint Venture Members shall attach copies of balance sheets, financial statements and Annual
report for 5 (five) years preceding the Application due date. The financial statements shall:
a. Reflect the financial situation of the Bidder or Joint Venture members,
b. Be audited by a statutory auditor
c. Be complete including all notes to the Financial statements; and
d. Correspond to accounting periods already completed and audited (no statements for partial periods shall be
requested or accepted)
3. Net Worth (The definition of Net Worth shall be as follows: Based on the type of the Applicant whether a company,
partnership firm, etc. the net worth is defined as follow:
a. In case of a company registered under Companies Act, 1956: Net worth shall mean the sum of subscribed and paid
up equity share capital and reserves from which shall be deducted the sum of revaluation reserves, miscellaneous
expenditure not written off and reserves not available for distribution to equity share holders.
For the company = (Subscribed and Paid-up Equity + Reserves) less (Revaluation reserves + miscellaneous
expenditure not written off + reserves not available for distribution to equity share holders).
b. In case of a Partnership firm: Net worth shall mean the sum of Aggregate of partners' capital account and Reserves
from which the aggregate of drawings by partners and aggregate of advances to partners shall be deducted.
For Partnership Firm = Aggregate of partners' capital account + Reserves - Aggregate of drawings by partners -
Aggregate of advances to partners
c. In case of a Trust / Society: Net worth shall mean the sum of corpus and the returns not set aside for any particular
purpose.

Page 86 of 385
 For Trust / Society = corpus + returns not set aside for any particular purpose
4. Net Cash Accruals shall be defined as follows: Net Cash Accruals = Profit after Tax + Depreciation;
5. Year 1 will be the latest completed financial year, preceding the bidding. Year 2 shall be immediately preceding year 1 and
so on. In case the Bid Submission date falls within 3 (three) months of the close of the latest financial year of the applicant,
it shall ignore such financial year for the purpose of its bid and furnish all its information and certification with reference to
the 5 (five) years preceding its latest financial year. For the avoidance of doubt, financial year shall, for the purpose of the
Bid hereunder, mean the accounting year followed by the Bidder in the course of its normal business.
6. The Bidder shall provide an Auditor‘s Certificate specifying the Net Worth and Net Cash Accruals of the bidder and also
specifying the methodology adopted for calculating such net worth in accordance with the formula mentioned in point 3 and
4 above.
7. The Bidder shall provide from its concerned client (s) or Statutory Auditor, certificate(s) stating the payments made /
received or works commissioned, as the case may be, during the past 5 (five) years in respect of the projects specified in
Information Forms 2, 3A and 3B.

Page 87 of 385
 INFORMATION FORM (2B)
Joint Venture Summary

Names of all participants of a joint venture

1. Lead Participant

2. Participant

3. Participant

4. Participant

Annual turnover data (in the area of infrastructure development and engineering construction).
Information
Form (2A) page
Participant no. [Year] [Year] [Year] [Year] [Year]
1. Lead Participant
2. Participant
3. Participant
4. Participant
Totals

Bidders shall append to Form 2B:

a. A document confirming the percentage shareholding of each joint venture participant in the company to be
established including the financial stake of each member in the JV partnership; and
b. A description of the role and responsibility of each joint venture participant. (Bidders shall make the precise role
of each joint venture participant clear in this description).
Bidders are reminded to submit the appropriate powers of attorney as required by Section 2.2 of Schedule A Part h . The
Joint Venture Bidders may also note the requirements mentioned in ITB Section 3.6 for compliance while submitting
the Bid.

Page 88 of 385
 INFORMATION FORM (3A)
(ref. Schedule A Part h - Section 1.4)
Design, development, construction, testing and commissioning of Sewerage Network

Name of Bidder or participant of a joint venture

Description of Contract/ Sewerage Network

Name of Joint Venture Participant Responsible
Name of City
Country
Capacity of Sewerage Network
Population served
Contract Role (joint venture participant, Sub-Contractor, sub
consultant, lead, etc.) and percentage share in the total
contract
Nature, role and extent of participation (describe fully)

Date of contract commencement

Date of contract termination
Contract value in INR or equivalent to US$
Individual for reference
Address, Telephone,
Fax for reference
Provide a complete description of the services provided under this contract demonstrating that the definition of a
Sewerage Network in Section 1.4 of Schedule A Part h of bidding documents has been met.

Page 89 of 385
 Information Form (3b)
Successful experience in Operating and Maintaining Sewerage Network

Name of Bidder or participant of a joint venture

Description of Contract/ Sewerage Network

Name of Joint Venture Participant Responsible
Name of City/Urban area
Country
Capacity of Sewerage Network
Number of years operated (with period)
Population served
Contract Role (joint venture participant, SubContractor, sub
consultant, lead, etc.) and percentage share in the total
contract
Nature, role and extent of participation (describe fully)
Date of contract commencement
Date of contract termination
Contract value in INR or equivalent to US$
Individual for reference
Address,
Telephone,
Fax for reference
Provide a complete description of the services provided under this contract demonstrating that the definition of a
Sewerage Network in Section 1.4 of Schedule A Part h of bidding documents has been met.

Page 90 of 385
 Information Form (4)
Personnel Capabilities

Name of Bidder or participant of a joint venture

For specific positions noted below, Bidders must provide the names of a candidate qualified to meet the specified
requirements stated for each position. The data on their experience should be supplied on separate sheets using one
Form (4A) for each candidate.
Bidders may propose alternative management and implementation arrangements requiring different key personnel,
whose experience records should be provided.

1. Title of position*
Name of candidate
2. Title of position*
Name of candidate
3. Title of position*
Name of candidate
4. Title of position*
Name of candidate
5. Title of position*
Name of candidate
6. Title of position*
Name of candidate
*As listed in BDS - ITB 3.3 (8) in respect of Section 1.6 of Schedule A Part h of bidding documents. TB

Page 91 of 385
 Information Form (4A)
Candidate Summary

Name of Bidder or participant of a joint venture

Position Candidate
Candidate Name of Candidate Date of Birth
Information Professional qualifications
Present Employment Name of Employer
Address of Employer
Telephone Contact (manager/personnel officer)
Fax Telex
Job title of candidate Years with present employer
Summarize professional experience over the last twenty years, in reverse chronological order. Indicate particular
technical and managerial experience relevant to the project.
From To Company/Project/Position/Relevant technical and management experience

Page 92 of 385
 Information Form (4)

Financial Capabilities
Name of Bidder or participant of a joint venture

Bidders, including each partner of a joint venture, shall provide financial information to demonstrate that they meet the requirements
stated in the Schedule to ITB. Each Bidder or participant of a joint venture shall complete this form. If necessary, separate sheets shall
be used to provide complete banker information. A copy of the audited balance sheets shall be attached.

Banker Name of banker

Address of banker
Telephone Contact name and title
Fax Telex

Summarize actual assets and liabilities in INR or equivalent to U.S. dollar (at the rates of exchange current at the end of each year) for
the previous five calendar years. Based upon known commitments, summarize Projected assets and liabilities in INR or equivalent to
U.S. dollar for the next two calendar years, unless the withholding of such information by stock market listed public companies can
be substantiated by the Bidder.

Financial information in INR or Actual: Projected:

equivalent to US$ Previous five years Next two years
[Year] [Year] [Year] [Year] [Year] [Year] [Year]
1. Total assets
2. Current assets
3. Total liabilities
4. Current liabilities
5. Profits before taxes
6. Profits after taxes

Specify proposed sources of financing, such as liquid assets, unencumbered real assets, lines of credit, and other financial means, net
of current commitments, available to meet the total construction cash flow demands of the subject Contract or contracts as indicated
in Schedule to ITB 1.5(2).

Source of Financing Amount in INR or equivalent to US $

1.
2.
3.
4.

Attach audited financial statements—including, as a minimum, profit and loss account, balance sheet, and explanatory notes—for the
period stated in Section 1.5 of Annexure A Part h to Bidding documents (for the individual Bidder or each participant of a joint
venture).

If audits are not required by the laws of Bidders' countries of origin, partnerships and firms owned by individuals may submit their
balance sheets certified by a registered accountant, and supported by copies of tax returns.

Page 93 of 385
 Information Form (6)

Historical Contract Non-Performance

(Ref: Section 1.7 of Schedule A - Part h of Bidding documents)

[The following table shall be filled in for the Bidder and for each partner of a Joint Venture]
Bidder‘s Legal Name: [insert full name]
Date: [insert day, month, year]
Joint Venture Party Legal Name: [insert full name]
NCB No. and title: [insert NCB number and title]
Page [insert page number] of [insert total number] pages
Non-Performing Contracts in accordance with Section 1.7 of Schedule A Part h to ITB
Contract non-performance did not occur during the [number] years specified in Section 1.7 of Schedule A Part h to ITB
Contract(s) not performed during the [number] years specified in Section 1.7 of Schedule A Part h to ITB
Year Non performed Contract Identification Total Contract
portion of contract Amount (current
value in INR or
equivalent US$)
[insert [insert amount and Contract Identification: [indicate complete contract [insert amount]
year] percentage] name/number, and any other identification]
Name of Employer: [insert full name]
Address of Employer: [insert street/city/country]
Reason(s) for non performance: [indicate main reason(s)]
Pending Litigation, in accordance with Section 1.7 of Schedule A Part h of bidding documents
 No pending litigation in accordance with Section 1.7 of Schedule A Part h of bidding documents
 Pending litigation in accordance with Section 1.7 of Schedule A Part h of bidding documents

Page 94 of 385
 Schedule A – Part j
Declaration regarding customs/excise duty exemption for materials to be purchased for use in building the
sewerage network etc.

(Bidder‘s Name and Address)

To:
------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------
Dear Sir:
Ref: Survey, review the designs, redesign where necessary and build new sewerage network of about 180 km
length and all appurtenant structures, and operation & maintenance of sewerage network and pumping
stations for a period of 10 years at Beur in State of Bihar, India - Certificate for Import/Procurement of
Goods and materials/Construction Equipment.
1. We confirm that we are solely responsible for obtaining customs/excise duty waivers which we have considered in
our bid and in case of failure to receive such waivers for reasons whatsoever, the Owner will not compensate us.
2. We are furnishing below the information required by the Owner for issue of the necessary certificates in terms of the
Government of India Central Excise Notification No. 108/95 along with all subsequent amendments including the
amendment dt.01-03-2008 and Customs Notification No. 85/99.
3. The goods, equipment and materials for which certificates are required are as under:
Items Make/ Capacity Quantity Value State whether it Remarks
Brand [where will be procured regarding
Name/ applicable] locally or justification for
Class imported [if so the quantity and
from which their usage
country]
Goods
[a]

[b]

[c]

[d]

[e]

[f]

[g]

4. We agree that no modification to the above list is permitted after bids are opened.
5. We agree that the certificate will be issued only to the extent considered reasonable by the Owner for the work, based
on the bid submitted by us, construction programme and methodology furnished along with the bid.

Page 95 of 385
6. We confirm that the above goods will be exclusively used for the construction of the above work. We are aware that
exemption will be issued to only goods/material/equipment which form part of the work on permanent basis but not
for the goods/material/equipment which are used by the Operator for execution of project and after completion of the
project, the goods remain with the Operator being Owners of such goods for further deployment in other projects.
Date: ___________________ (Signature) ____________________
Place: __________________ (Printed Name) _________________
(Designation) __________________
(Common Seal) ________________

Page 96 of 385
 Schedule A - Part K

FORM OF LETTER OF INTENT BY JV PARTNERS

TO ENTER INTO JV AGREEMENT

THIS LETTER OF INTENT signed on this.......... day of........... Two Thousand and ................by....... a company
incorporated under the laws of ............. and having its Registered Office at .......................(hereinafter
called the "Party No.1" which expression shall include its successors, executors and permitted assigns) and M/s .............
a company incorporated under the laws of .......... and having its Registered Office at ...........(hereinafter called the
"Party No.2" which expression shall include its successors, executors and permitted assigns) and M/s.. .. .. .. . .. . . . . .. . ..
.. .... .. a Company incorporated under the laws of ................ and having its Registered Office at ...............
(hereinafter called the "Party No.3" which expression shall include its successors, executors and permitted assigns) for
the purpose of making a bid and entering into a contract [hereinafter called the "Contract" (in case of award) against the
work for the design and build Sewage Treatment Plant and Sewerage Network and all Appurtenant Structures and Allied
Works, and O & M of Complete Works associated with ……………….. ……………..(hereinafter called the "Owner").

WHEREAS the Party No.1, Party No.2 and Party No.3 intend to enter into a Joint Venture Agreement

AND WHEREAS the Owner invited bids as per the above mentioned Specification to design and build Sewage
Treatment Plant and Sewerage Network and all Appurtenant Structures and Allied Works, and O & M of Complete
Works stipulated in the bidding documents.

AND WHEREAS ITB Clause 3.6 and Schedule A Part h Qualification Criteria forming part of the bidding documents,
inter-alia, stipulates that two or more qualified partners, meeting the requirements of 'Qualification Requirement of the
Bidder', as applicable may bid, provided, they submit a Letter of Intent to enter into Joint Venture Agreement and the
Joint Venture Partners fulfill all other requirements under ITB Clause 5.7 ‗Qualification of the Bidder‘ and in such a
case, the Letter of Bid (Bid Form) shall be signed by the Partner - In Charge so as to legally bind all the Partners of the
Joint Venture, who will be jointly and severally liable to perform the Contract by entering into Joint Venture Agreement
as per proforma submitted with the Bid in accordance with ITB 3.6 which will be legally binding on all partners and all
obligations hereunder.

The above clause further states that this Letter of Intent shall be attached to the bid and the Contract
performance guarantee will be as per the format enclosed with the bidding document without any restrictions or
liability for either party.

AND WHEREAS the bid is being submitted to the Owner vide proposal No........dated...... by Party No.1 based on this
letter of Intent between all the parties; under these presents and the bid has been signed by all the parties.

NOW THIS UNDERTAKING WITNESSETH AS UNDER:

In consideration of the above premises and agreements all the parties of this letter of Intent do hereby declare
and undertake:

1. In requirement of the award of the Contract by the Owner to the Joint Venture Partners, we, the Parties do
hereby undertake that M/s......... the Party No.1, shall act as lead Partner and further declare and
Page 97 of 385
 confirm that we the parties to the Joint Venture shall jointly and severally be bound unto the Owner for
the successful performance of the Contract and shall be fully responsible for the design and build
Sewage Treatment Plant and Sewerage Network and all Appurtenant Structures and Allied
Works, and O & M of Complete Works accordance with the Contract for which we shall enter into
Joint Venture Agreement as per proforma submitted with the Bid which will be legally binding on all
partners:
2. If the Contract is awarded to Joint Venture then in case of any breach or default of the said Contract by
any of the parties to the Joint Venture, the party(s) will be fully responsible for the successful performance
of the Contract and to carry out all the obligations and responsibilities under the Contract in accordance
with the requirements of the Contract.
3. Further, if the Owner suffers any loss or damage on account of any breach in the Contract or any shortfall
in the performance of the equipment in meeting the performances guaranteed as per the specification in
terms of the Contract, the Party(s) of these presents will promptly make good such loss or damages caused
to the Owner, on its demand without any demur. It shall not be necessary or obligatory for the Owner to
proceed against lead Partner to these presents before proceeding against or dealing with the other
Party(s), the Owner can proceed against any of the parties who shall be jointly and severally liable for the
performance and all other liabilities/obligations under the Contract to the Owner.
4. The financial liability of the Parties of the Deed of Undertaking to the Owner in the event of award of
Contract on the Joint Venture, with respect to any of the claims a rising out of the performance or non-
performance of the obligations set forth in the Deed of Undertaking, read in conjunction with the relevant
conditions of the Contract shall, however not be limited in any way so as to restrict or limit the liabilities
or obligations of any of the Parties of the Deed of Undertaking.
5. It is expressly understood and agreed between the Parties to this Letter of Intent that the responsibilities and
obligations of each of the Parties shall be as delineated in Appendix (to be suitably appended by the
Parties along with this Letter of Intent in its bid). It is further undertaken by the parties that the above
sharing of responsibilities and obligations shall not in any way be a limitation of joint and several
responsibilities of the Parties under the Contract in the event of award on Joint Venture.
6. It is also understood that this Letter of Intent is provided for the purposes of undertaking joint and
several liabilities of the partners to the Joint Venture for submission of the bid and performance of the
Contract if awarded and that this Letter of Intent shall not be deemed to give rise to any additional
liabilities or obligations, in any manner or any law, on any of the Parties to this Letter of Intent or on the
Joint Venture, other than the express provisions of the Contract.
7. This Letter of Intent shall be construed and interpreted in accordance with the provisions of the
Contract.
8. In case of an award of a Contract, we the parties to this Letter of Intent do hereby agree that we shall
enter into Joint Venture Agreement as per proforma submitted with the Bid which will be legally binding
on all partners and we shall be jointly and severally responsible for furnishing a Contract performance
security from a bank in favor of the Owner in the currency/currencies of the Contract.
9. It is further agreed that this Letter of Intent shall be irrevocable and shall form an integral part of the bid. It
shall be effective from the date first mentioned above for all purposes and intents.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Parties to this Letter of Intent have through their authorized representatives
executed these presents and affixed Common Seals of their companies, on the day, month and year first mentioned
above.
Common Seal of ............................ has For Lead Partner (Party No.-1) For and on
been affixed in my/ our presence behalf of M/s
pursuant to Board of Director's
Resolution dated ...............
Name ........................................

Page 98 of 385
Designation ..................................
Signature ..................................... Signature of the authorized
representative)

WITNESS:

I…………………………………….

II…………………………………….

Common Seal of ............................ has For Party No.-2 For and on behalf of M/s
been affixed in my/ our presence
pursuant to Board of Director's
Resolution dated ...............
Signature ..................................... Signature of the authorized
representative)
WITNESS:

I…………………………………….

II…………………………………….

Common Seal of ...................... has been For Party No.-3 For and on behalf of M/s
affixed in my/ our presence pursuant to
Board of Director's Resolution
dated...............
Signature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Signature of the authorized
representative)
WITNESS:

I…………………………………….

II…………………………………….

Page 99 of 385
 Schedule A - Part L

FORM OF POWER OF ATTORNEY FOR JOINT VENTURE

(On Non-judicial Stamp Paper of Appropriate value, if required as per laws of the country of the bidder,
to be purchased in the Name of Joint Venture)

KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS THAT WE, the Partners whose details are given hereunder
................................................................................. have formed a Joint Venture under the laws of
........................................... (*)/ intend to form a Joint Venture (*) [(*) delete whichever is not
applicable] and having our Registered Office(s)/Head Office(s) at............................................... (hereinafter
called the 'Joint Venture' which expression shall unless repugnant to the context or meaning thereof,
include its successors, administrators andassigns)acting through M/s
....................................................... being the Partner in-charge do hereby constitute, nominate and appoint
M/s........................................................ a Company incorporated under the laws of
......................................................... and having its Registered/Head Office at ........................................... as
our duly constituted lawful Attorney (hereinafter called "Attorney" or "Authorized Representative" or "Partner
In-charge") to exercise all or any of the powers for and on behalf of the Joint Venture in regard to work for
the bids for which have been invited by ……………………………….., ……………………….. (hereinafter
called the ‗Owner‘) to undertake the following acts:

i) To sign and submit proposal and participate in the aforesaid Bid Specification of the Owner on
behalf of the "Joint Venture".
ii) To negotiate with the Owner the terms and conditions for award of the Contract pursuant to the
aforesaid Bid and to sign the Contract with the Owner for and on behalf of the "Joint Venture".
iii) To do any other act or submit any document related to the above.
iv) To receive, accept and execute the Contract for and on behalf of the "Joint Venture".

For the above purpose, the person(s) authorized by the Partner In-charge shall be the person(s) authorized to
act on behalf of the "Joint Venture" as per the Power of Attorney given to him/her/them by the Partner In-
Charge,

It is clearly understood that all the partners of the joint venture shall be liable jointly and severally for the
execution of the Contract in accordance with the Contract terms and the Partner In-charge (Lead Partner)
shall ensure performance of the Contract(s) and if one or more Partner fail to perform their respective portions
of the Contract(s), the same shall be deemed to be a default by all the Partners.
It is expressly understood that this Power of Attorney shall remain valid binding and irrevocable till
completion of the Design Build as well as the Operations and Maintenance Period in terms of the Contract.
The Joint Venture hereby agrees and undertakes to ratify and confirm all the whatsoever the said
Attorney/Authorized Representatives/Partner in-charge quotes in the bid, negotiates and signs the Contract
with the Owner and/or proposes to act on behalf of the Joint Venture by virtue of this Power of Attorney and
the same shall bind the Joint Venture as if done by itself.

IN WITNESS THEREOF the Partners Constituting the Joint Venture as aforesaid have executed these
presents on this ...........day of .......................under the Common Seal(s) of their Companies.

Page 100 of 385

 For and on behalf of the
Partners of Joint Venture

The Common Seal of the above Partners of the Joint Venture:

The Common Seal has been affixed there unto in the presence of: WITNESS

1. Signature......................................................
Name..........................................................
Designation.........................................................
Occupation.................................................
2. Signature.....................................................
Name.........................................................
Designation..............................................................
Occupation..........................................................

Page 101 of 385

 Schedule A - Part M

FORM OF UNDERTAKING BY THE JOINT VENTURE PARTNERS

(On Non-Judicial Stamp Paper of Appropriate Value, if required as per laws of the country of the bidder, to
be purchased in the Name of Joint Venture)

THIS JOINT DEED OF UNDERTAKING executed on this ..........day of .......Two

Thousand and ..................by ....... a company incorporated under the laws of ............... and having its Registered
Office at........................ (hereinafter called the "Party No.1.. which expression shall include its successors, executors
and permitted assigns) and M/s ............... a company incorporated under the laws of .................. and having its
Registered Office at ............... (hereinafter called the "Party No.2" which expression shall include its successors,
executors and permitted assigns) and M/s .......................... a Company incorporated under the laws of
.................... and having its Registered Office at ................ (hereinafter called the "Party No.3" which expression
shall include its successors, executors and permitted assigns) for the purpose of making a bid and entering into a
contract [hereinafter called the "Contract" (in case of award) against the work to design and build Sewage
Treatment Plant and Sewerage Network and all Appurtenant Structures and Allied Works, and O &
M of Complete Works associated with ……………………………… (hereinafter called the "Owner").

WHEREAS the Party No.1, Party No.2 and Party No.3 have entered into an Agreement dated................

AND WHEREAS the Owner invited bids as per the above mentioned Specification to desi gn and build Sewage
Treatment Plant and Sewerage Network and all Appurtenant Structures and Allied Works, and O &
M of Complete Works stipulated in the bidding documents.

AND WHEREAS ITB Clause 3.6 and Schedule A Part h Qualification Criteria forming part of the
bidding documents, inter-alia, stipulate that an undertaking of two or more qualified partners, meeting the
requirements of ‗ Q u a l i f i c a t i o n Criteria o f t h e Bidder', as applicable may bid, provided, the Joint Venture
fulfills all other requirements under Clause 5.7 ‗Qualification of the Bidder‘ and in such a case, the Letter of
Bid (Bid Form) shall be signed by the Partner - In Charge so as to legally bind all the Partners of the Joint
Venture, who will be jointly and severally liable to perform the Contract and all obligations hereunder.

The above clause further states that this Undertaking shall be attached to the bid and the Contract
performance guarantee will be as per the format enclosed with the bidding document without any
restrictions or liability for either party.

AND WHEREAS the bid is being submitted to the Owner vide proposal No........dated...... by Party No.1 based on this
Undertaking between all the parties; under these presents and the bid in accordance with the requirements of ITB
Clause 3.6 and Schedule A Part h Qualification Criteria, has been signed by all the parties.

NOW THIS UNDERTAKING WITNESSETH AS UNDER:

In consideration of the above premises and agreements all the parties of this Deed of Undertaking do hereby declare
and undertake:
1. In requirement of the award of the Contract by the Owner to the Joint Venture Partners, we, the Parties do hereby
undertake that M/s......... the Party No.1, shall act as Lead Partner and further declare and confirm that we the

Page 102 of 385

 parties to the Joint Venture shall jointly and severally be bound unto the Owner for the successful performance of
the Contract and shall be fully responsible to design and build Sewage Treatment Plant and Sewerage Network
and all Appurtenant Structures and Allied Works, and O & M of Complete Works in accordance with the
Contract.
2. In case of any breach or default of the said Contract by any of the parties to the Joint Venture, the parties do
hereby undertake to be fully responsible for the successful performance of the Contract and to carry out all the
obligations and responsibilities under the Contract in accordance with the requirements of the Contract.
3. Further, if the Owner suffers any loss or damage on account of any breach in the Contract or any shortfall in the
performance of the equipment in meeting the performances guaranteed as per the specification in terms of the
Contract, the Party(s) of these presents undertake to promptly make good such loss or damages caused to
the Owner, on its demand without any demur. It shall not be necessary or obligatory for the Owner to proceed
against Lead Partner to these presents before proceeding against or dealing with the other Party(s), the Owner can
proceed against any of the parties who shall be jointly and severally liable for the performance and all other
liabilities/obligations under the Contract to the Owner.
4. The financial liability of the Parties of this Deed of Undertaking to the Owner, with respect to any of the
claims arising out of the performance or nonperformance of the obligations set forth in this Deed of
Undertaking, read in conjunction with the relevant conditions of the Contract shall, however not be limited in any
way so as to restrict or limit the liabilities or obligations of any of the Parties of this Deed of Undertaking.
5. It is expressly understood and agreed between the Parties to this Undertaking that the responsibilities and
obligations of each of the Parties shall be as delineated in Appendix (to be suitably appended by the Parties along
with this undertaking in its bid). It is further undertaken by the parties that the above sharing of responsibilities
and obligations shall not in any way be a limitation of joint and several responsibilities of the Parties under the
Contract.
6. It is also understood that this Undertaking is provided for the purposes of undertaking joint and several
liabilities of the partners to the Joint Venture for submission of the bid and performance of the Contract if awarded
and that this Undertaking shall not be deemed to give rise to any additional liabilities or obligations, in any
manner or any law, on any of the Parties to this Undertaking or on the Joint Venture, other than the express
provisions of the Contract.
7. This Undertaking shall be construed and interpreted in accordance with the provisions of the Contract.
8. In case of an award of a Contract, we the parties to this Deed of Undertaking do hereby
agree that we shall be jointly and severally responsible for furnishing a Contract performance
security from a bank in favour of the Owner in the currency/currencies of the Contract.
9. It is further agreed that this Deed of Undertaking shall be irrevocable and shall form an integral part of the
bid and shall continue to be enforceable till the Owner discharges the same or upon the completion of the
Contract in accordance with its provisions, whichever is earlier. It shall be effective from the date first
mentioned above for all purposes and intents.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Parties to this Deed of Undertaking have through their authorized representatives
executed these presents and affixed Common Seals of their companies, on the day, month and year first mentioned
above.

Common Seal of ............................ has For Lead Partner (Party No.-1) For and on
been affixed in my/ our presence behalf of M/s
pursuant to Board of Director's
Resolution dated ...............
Name ........................................

Designation ..................................

Page 103 of 385

Signature ..................................... Signature of the authorized
representative)
For Party No.-2
For and on behalf of
M/s.......................

WITNESS:
I…………………………………….
II…………………………………….

Common Seal of ............................ has For Party No.-2 For and on behalf of M/s
been affixed in my/ our presence
pursuant to Board of Director's
Resolution dated ...............
Name ........................................

Designation ..................................
Signature ..................................... Signature of the authorized
representative)
WITNESS:
I…………………………………….
II…………………………………….

Common Seal of ............................ has For Party No.-3 For and on behalf of M/s
been affixed in my/ our presence
pursuant to Board of Director's
Resolution dated ...............
Name ........................................

Designation ..................................
Signature ..................................... Signature of the authorized
representative)
WITNESS:
I…………………………………….
II…………………………………….

Page 104 of 385

 Schedule B to the Bidding Documents

The Draft Contract

a. Form of Contract
b. General Conditions of the Contract
c. Schedules attached to the Contract

Page 105 of 385

 Government of Bihar
BIHAR URBAN INFRASTRUCTURE DEVELOPMENT CORPORATION
LIMITED

NATIONAL COMPETITIVE BIDDING

AGREEMENT NO. _____________________

For

SURVEY, REVIEW THE DESIGNS, REDESIGN WHERE NECESSARY AND

BUILD NEW SEWERAGE NETWORK OF ABOUT 180 KM LENGTH AND ALL
APPURTENANT STRUCTURES, AND OPERATION & MAINTENANCE OF
SEWERAGE NETWORK FOR A PERIOD OF 10 YEARS IN Beur, Patna, STATE
OF Bihar, INDIA

Managing Director
Bihar Urban Infrastructure Development Corporation Limited
#303, Third Floor, Maurya Tower, Mauryalok Complex, Budh Marg
Patna-800001

Page 106 of 385

SURVEY, REVIEW THE DESIGNS, REDESIGN WHERE NECESSARY AND BUILD NEW SEWERAGE
NETWORK OF ABOUT 180 KM LENGTH AND ALL APPURTENANT STRUCTURES, AND OPERATION
& MAINTENANCE OF SEWERAGE NETWORK FOR A PERIOD OF 10 YEARS AT BEUR IN PATNA,
STATE OF BIHAR, INDIA

FORM OF CONTRACT

THIS CONTRACT is made and entered into this ____ day of _______, [Year]

Between

Bihar Urban Infrastructure Development Corporation Ltd a corporation ________ under ______ law and having
its principal place of business at Bihar Urban Infrastructure Development Corporation Limited, #303, Third
Floor, Maurya Tower, Mauryalok Complex, Budh Marg, Patna-800001, Bihar
(hereafter the ―Owner‖)

– and –

[Name of Joint Venture formed by the Successful Bidder or the Individual successful Bidder goes here] with its
principal place of business at [Address of the Operator]
(hereafter the ―Operator‖)

WHEREAS:
a. The Owner has the jurisdiction to enter into the Contract, as defined in Section 1.1 below, pursuant to the
Applicable Law;
b. The Owner has received all requisite approvals necessary and has conformed with all requisite laws in accordance
with the Applicable Law to permit the Owner to enter into the Contract;
c. The Owner desires to engage the Operator to survey, review the designs, redesign where necessary and build new
sewerage network of about 18 km and all appurtenant structures, and operation & maintenance of sewerage
network for a period of 10 years, at Beur in Patna City and ensure the effectiveness and sustainability of the said
facility;
d. The Operator has represented to the Owner that it has the skills and ability to survey, review the designs, redesign
where necessary and build new sewerage network of about 180 km length and all appurtenant structures, and
operation & maintenance of sewerage network for a period of 10 years at Beur in Patna City and ensure the
effectiveness and sustainability of the said facility in an economical and effective manner and agrees to do so upon
and subject to the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents;
e. The Operator responded to the Bidding Documents dated [[Link]] organized by the Owner and was selected as
the recommended Operator to fulfil the Design-Build and Operating Services set out in the Technical Standards
Schedule;
f. The Operator has the corporate capacity and authority to enter into the Contract;

Page 107 of 385

NOW THEREFORE, in consideration of the mutual covenants and Agreements hereinafter set forth, the Owner and
the Operator agree as follows:

ARTICLE 1. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

1.1. Contract Documents
This Contract to survey, review the designs, redesign where necessary and build new sewerage network of
about 180 km length and all appurtenant structures, and operation & maintenance of sewerage network for
a period of 10 years at Beur, Patna, State of Bihar, India between the Owner, ULB and the Operator (the
―Contract‖) consists of the following documents (collectively, the ―Contract Documents‖), and each of the
following shall be read and construed as an integral part of the Contract:
a. Form of Contract
b. Letter of Acceptance
c. Corrigenda Nos. ___
d. Minutes of Pre bid conference dated _____
e. Special Conditions of Contract (Schedule 1 to GCC)
f. General Conditions of Contract
g. Schedule ―2‖ – Design Build Services (―the design Build Services Schedule‖)
h. Schedule ―3‖ – Operations and Maintenance Services (―the Operations and Maintenance Services
Schedule‖)
i. Schedule ―4‖ – Description of Site and Site Area
j. Schedule ―5‖ – Operator‘s Price Schedule
k. Schedule ―6‖ – Terms and procedure of Payment
l. Schedule ―7‖ – Liquidated Damages – Operations
m. Schedule ―8‖ – Price Adjustment
n. Schedule ―9‖ – Schedules for Performance Guarantee & Advance Payment Guarantee
o. Schedule ―10‖ – Technical Specifications
p. Schedule ―11‖ – MoU signed between the Central Government, State Government and the ULB.
[Deleted]
q. Schedule ―12‖ – Allowed and Suggested alignments / locations for design of the Sewerage Network
1.2. Order of Precedence
a. In the event of any ambiguity or conflict between the Contract Documents listed in Section 1.1 of this
Form of Contract, the order of precedence shall be the order in which the Contract Documents are
listed in Section 1.1 of this Form of Contract.
b. Notwithstanding Section 1.2(a) of this Form of Contract and any other term or condition in the
Contract Documents, if any statement or provision in Schedule 5 – Operator‘s Bid incorporated in the
Contract is not consistent with or conflicts with any other term or condition in the remainder of the
Contract Documents, the remainder of the Contract Documents shall govern.
1.3. Definitions
Capitalized words and phrases used herein shall have the same meanings as are ascribed to them in the
General Conditions of Contract and various Schedules attached to the Contract.

ARTICLE 2. OPERATOR‟S COMPENSATION AND TERMS OF PAYMENT

Page 108 of 385

2.1. Operator‟s Compensation
The Owner hereby agrees to pay to the Operator the Contract Price, in consideration of the performance
by the Operator of its obligations hereunder, and the Contract Price is specified in Schedule 5 of the
contract (Operator‘s Price Schedule.)
2.2. Terms of Payment
The terms and procedures of payment by which the Owner will compensate the Operator are set out in the
General Conditions of the Contract.

ARTICLE 3. EFFECTIVE DATE AND STARTING DATES

3.1. Effective Date and Starting Date
The Effective Date, the Design-Build Starting Date and Operations Starting Date for the Contract shall be
determined in accordance with the General Conditions of the Contract.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF the Owner and the Operator have caused this Form of Contract to be duly
executed by their duly authorized representatives.
EXECUTED as of the date first written above.
[OWNER]
By: ____________________________________ Name:
____________________________________ Title:
____________________________________ Witness:
____________________________________
[Operator]
By: ____________________________________ Name:
____________________________________ Title:
____________________________________ Witness:
____________________________________

Page 109 of 385

 The Draft Contract

NATIONAL GANGA RIVER BASINPROJECT

UNDER WORLD BANK FINANCE
AGREEMENT NO. ____________________

General Conditions of Contract (GCC)

GENERAL CONDITIONS
FOR A CONTRACT

SURVEY, REVIEW THE DESIGNS, REDESIGN WHERE NECESSARY AND BUILD NEW SEWERAGE
NETWORK OF ABOUT 180 KM LENGTH AND ALL APPURTENANT STRUCTURES, AND
OPERATION & MAINTENANCE OF SEWERAGE NETWORK FOR A PERIOD OF 10 YEARS AT BEUR
IN PATNA, STATE OF BIHAR, INDIA

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page 110 of 385

 Table of Content

A. CONTRACT AND INTERPRETATION .........................................................

ARTICLE 1 - CONTRACT AND INTERPRETATION .................................................. 115
1.1 Definitions........................................................................................................................................... 115
1.2 Contract Documents ............................................................................................................................ 118
1.3 Interpretation ....................................................................................................................................... 119
1.3.1 Language .................................................................................................................................................... 119
1.3.2 Singular or Plural ........................................................................................................................................ 119

1.3.3 Headings ..................................................................................................................................................... 119

1.3.4 Persons........................................................................................................................................................ 119
1.3.5 Incoterms .................................................................................................................................................... 120
1.3.6 Entire Agreement ........................................................................................................................................ 120
1.3.7 Amendment ................................................................................................................................................ 120

1.3.8 Number of Days .......................................................................................................................................... 120

1.3.9 Independent Operator ................................................................................................................................. 120
1.3.10 Joint Venture............................................................................................................................................. 120
1.3.11 Non-waiver ............................................................................................................................................... 121
1.3.12 Severability ............................................................................................................................................... 121
1.3.13 Country of Origin...................................................................................................................................... 121

1.3.14 Survival of Obligations ............................................................................................................................. 121

1.4 Notice .................................................................................................................................................. 121

1.5 Governing Law ................................................................................................................................... 122
1.6 Settlement of Disputes ........................................................................................................................ 122
1.6.1 Adjudicator ................................................................................................................................................. 122

1.6.2 Arbitration .................................................................................................................................................. 123

1.6.3 Obligations During Arbitration ................................................................................................................... 123

1.7 Assignment ......................................................................................................................................... 123

1.8 Contract Records, Accounting and Auditing ...................................................................................... 123
1.8.1 Contract Records ........................................................................................................................................ 123

1.8.2 Accounting.................................................................................................................................................. 124

1.8.3 Auditing the Operator‘s Own Accounts and the Contract Records ............................................................. 124
1.8.4 Operator‘s Audited Accounts ..................................................................................................................... 124
1.8.5Inspection and Audit by Bank .......................................................................................... 124

1.9 Operator‘s Claims During the Design-Build Period ........................................................................... 125

B. SUBJECT MATTER OF THE CONTRACT ........................................................

ARTICLE 2 - CONTRACT TERM, TIMING AND COMPLETION .............................. 127
Page 111 of 385
 2.1 General ................................................................................................................................................ 127
2.1.1 Effectiveness of Contract ............................................................................................................................ 127
2.1.2 Expiration of Contract ................................................................................................................................ 127

2.1.3 Commencement of Services ....................................................................................................................... 127

2.2 Design-Build Period and New Operations Period ............................................................................... 127

2.3 Design-Build Period – Commencement, Delays and Suspension ....................................................... 127
2.3.1 Commencement of the Design-Build Services ........................................................................................... 127
2.3.2 Time for Completion .................................................................................................................................. 127
2.3.3 Design-Build Time Schedule ...................................................................................................................... 128

2.3.4 Extension of the Time for Completion........................................................................................................ 128

2.3.5 Rate of Progress .......................................................................................................................................... 129
2.3.6 Delay of Completion – Liquidated Damages - Delay ................................................................................. 129
2.3.7 Design-Build Period – Special Operations Requirements ........................................................................... 130

2.4 New Operations Period ....................................................................................................................... 130

2.4.1 Commencement of the Operations - Services ............................................................................................. 130
2.4.2 Services After the End Date........................................................................................................................ 130
2.4.3 Extension of the Contract ........................................................................................................................... 130

ARTICLE 3 - OBLIGATIONS OF THE OPERATOR ..................................................... 131

3.1 General – Services and Standards of Performance.............................................................................. 131
3.2 Law Governing Services ..................................................................................................................... 131
3.3 Conflict of Interest .............................................................................................................................. 131
3.4 Plant and Equipment, Operator‘s Equipment (Design-Build) and Operations Equipment (Operations)132
3.5 Site Information and Investigation ...................................................................................................... 132
3.6 Access to the Site andSewerage Network ........................................................................................... 133

ARTICLE 4 - OBLIGATIONS OF THE OWNER ................ .................................................

4.1 Owner’s Assistance to the Operator ..................................................... 134
4.2 Access to the Site and Sewerage Network .......................................................................................... 134
4.3 Reviews and Approvals of Submissions ............................................................................................. 134

C. PAYMENT ...............................................................................................................
ARTICLE 5 - CONTRACT PRICE AND PAYMENT ..................................................... 135
5.1 Contract Price ...................................................................................................................................... 135
5.2 Terms of Payment ............................................................................................................................... 135
5.3 Performance Incentive Compensation ................................................................................................ 135
5.4 Liquidated Damages - Operations ....................................................................................................... 135
5.5 Securities ............................................................................................................................................. 135
5.5.1 Performance Security .................................................................................................................................. 135
5.5.2 Advance Payment Security ......................................................................................................................... 136

5.6 Taxes and Duties ................................................................................................................................ 136

Page 112 of 385

D. INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY .............................................................................
ARTICLE 6 - COPYRIGHT – DESIGN-BUILD DOCUMENTS.................................... 137
6.1 Copyright – Design-Build Documents ................................................................................................ 137
6.2 Confidentiality .................................................................................................................................... 137

E. EXECUTION OF THE SERVICES .......................................................................

ARTICLE 7 - CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION AND SUPERVISION DURING THE DESIGN-
BUILD AND NEW OPERATIONS PERIODS .........................................
7.1 General ................................................................................................................................................ 139
7.2 Design-Build Supervision ................................................................................................................... 139
7.2.1 Supervision During the Design-Build Period.............................................................................................. 139
7.2.2 Design-Build Engineer‘s Duties and Authority (Design-Build Period) ...................................................... 139
7.2.3 Delegation by the Design-Build Engineer .................................................................................................. 140
7.2.4 Instructions of the Design-Build Engineer .................................................................................................. 140
7.2.5 Replacement of the Design-Build Engineer ................................................................................................ 140
7.2.6 Determinations by the Design-Build Engineer ........................................................................................... 141

7.3 Operations Supervision ....................................................................................................................... 141

7.3.1 Supervision During the New Operations Period ......................................................................................... 141
7.3.2 Operations - CSCU‘s Duties and Authority ................................................................................................ 141

ARTICLE 8 - REPRESENTATIVES, STAFF AND SUBCONTRACTING ..................... ....

8.1 Representatives ..................................................................................... 142
8.1.1 Owner‘s Representative .............................................................................................................................. 142
8.1.2 Operator‘s Representative........................................................................................................................... 142

8.2 Operator‘s Superintendence ................................................................................................................ 143

8.3 Operator‘s Personnel ........................................................................................................................... 144
8.4 Replacement of Operator‘s Personnel ................................................................................................. 144
8.5 Existing Staff ...................................................................................................................................... 144
8.6 Subcontractors ..................................................................................................................................... 145

F. LIABILITY AND RISK DISTRIBUTION ............................................................

ARTICLE 9 - LIABILITY AND RISK DISTRIBUTION ................................................ 146
9.1 Defect Liability ................................................................................................................................... 146
9.2 Limitation of Liability ......................................................................................................................... 146
9.3 Transfer of Ownership and Existing Equipment and Materials .......................................................... 146
9.3.1 Transfer of Ownership ................................................................................................................................ 146
9.3.2 Existing Equipment and Materials .............................................................................................................. 147

9.4 Care of the Site and Sewerage Network .............................................................................................. 147

9.5 Indemnification ................................................................................................................................... 148
Page 113 of 385
 9.6 Insurance ............................................................................................................................................. 149
9.7 Unforeseeable Physical Conditions ..................................................................................................... 149
9.8 Force Majeure ..................................................................................................................................... 150
9.9 War Risks ............................................................................................................................................ 152
9.10 Change in Laws and Regulations ........................................................................................................ 153
9.11 Patent Indemnity ................................................................................................................................. 153
9.11.1 Indemnity by Operator .............................................................................................................................. 153
9.11.2 Notice of Claim......................................................................................................................................... 154

9.11.3 Indemnity by Owner ................................................................................................................................. 154

9.12 Functional Guarantees ......................................................................................................................... 154

G. CHANGE IN CONTRACT ELEMENTS..............................................................

ARTICLE 10 - CHANGE IN CONTRACT ELEMENTS ................................................ 156
10.1 Change to the Design-Build Services .................................................................................................. 156
10.1.1 Introducing a Change ................................................................................................................................ 156
10.1.2 Changes Originating from Owner ............................................................................................................. 156
10.1.3 Changes Originating from Operator.......................................................................................................... 158
10.1.4 Payment in Applicable Currencies ............................................................................................................ 158
10.1.5 Design-Build Period ................................................................................................................................. 158

10.2 Change to the Operations Services...................................................................................................... 158

ARTICLE 11 - SUSPENSION AND TERMINATION ..........................................................

11.1 Suspension .......................................................................................................................................... 159
11.1.1 Suspension by the Owner .......................................................................................................................... 159
11.1.2 Suspension by the Operator ...................................................................................................................... 159

11.2 Termination ......................................................................................................................................... 160

11.2.1 Termination for Owner‘s Convenience ..................................................................................................... 160
11.2.2 Payment upon Termination by the Owner for Convenience ..................................................................... 161
11.2.3 Termination for Operator‘s Default .......................................................................................................... 161

[Link] Corrupt or Fraudulent practices ............................................................................................................. 163

11.2.4 Payment upon Termination for Operator‘s Default................................................................................... 164
11.2.5 Termination by Operator........................................................................................................................... 165
11.2.6 Payment upon Termination by Operator ................................................................................................... 166
11.2.7 General Provisions - Termination ............................................................................................................. 167

Page 114 of 385

GENERAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT
ARTICLE 1. CONTRACT AND INTERPRETATION
1.1. Definitions
Unless the context otherwise requires, the following terms wherever used in this Contract have the
following meanings:
―Adjudicator‖ means the person that is named in the SCC;
―Applicable Law‖ means the laws and any other instruments having the force of law in the Country
specified in the SCC, as they may be issued and in force from time to time, including any decree of
the President or government of the Country;
―Appointing Authority‖ is the authority specified in the SCC;
―Authorities‖ means the Owner, ULB and the Country as specified in the SCC;
―Background Information Document‖ means the Background Information Document provided to
the Operator by the Owner during the bidding process that preceded this Contract;
―Bank‖ means the World Bank;
―Bidding Documents‖ means the documents issued by the Owner in respect of the bidding process
for the selection of an operator to design, build and operate the Sewerage Network and to perform
the Services;
―Change‖ is defined in GC Section 10.1.1(1);
―Change Order‖ is defined in GC Section 10.1.2(4);
―Completion‖ means that the Sewerage Network and all Design-Build Services have been
completed operationally and structurally and put in a tight and clean condition in accordance with
the Technical Standards Schedule, and the Operator is entitled to have a Completion Certificate
issued in respect of the Sewerage Network, or part thereof, in accordance with DBSS Section 5;
―Completion Certificate‖ means a certificate issued by the Design-Build Engineer in accordance
with DBSS Section 5.2;
―Contract‖ means the agreement between the Owner and the Operator which consists of the
Contract Documents;
―Contract Documents‖ means the Form of Contract, General Conditions, and all Schedules to the
General Conditions as set out in GC Section 1.2;
―Contract Price‖ is defined in Section 2.1 of the Form of Contract;
―Contract Records‖ is defined in GC Section 1.8.1(1);
―Contract Term‖ means the term of the Contract, including any renewals approved by the Owner,
commencing on the Effective Date and continuing to, and including, the End Date;
―Costs‖ means all expenditures reasonably incurred, or to be incurred, by the Operator including
overhead but excluding profit;
―Country‖ means the country specified in the SCC;

Page 115 of 385

―Country of Origin‖ means the countries and territories eligible under the rules of the World Bank
as defined under the Guidelines: Procurement under IBRD Loans and IDA Credits& Grants 2011,
revised July 2014;
―Customers‖ mean all persons to which the Operator provides services, including those customers
in existence as of the Operations Starting Date and persons who become customers after the
Operations Starting Date;
―Data Room‖ means the data room which may be established by the Owner in the bidding process
as set out in the Bidding Documents;
―DBSS Section‖ means Design-Build Services Schedule Section;
―Design-Build Documents‖ means the plans, specifications, designs, models, electronic models and
other documents and materials relating to the design and construction of the Site and Sewerage
Network as may be set out or contemplated in the Design-Build Services Schedule or agreed to by
the Parties from time to time during the Contract Term;
―Design-Build Engineer‖ means the consultant or Owner‘s representative retained by the Owner to
supervise the Operator, in accordance with the Contract Documents, in carrying out the Design-
Build Services;
―Design-Build Period‖ is defined in GC Section 2.2(a);
―Design-Build Services‖ means the design-build services to be performed by the Operator as
contemplated by the General Conditions and the Design-Build Services Schedule;
―Design-Build Starting Date‖ is defined in GC Section 2.1.3(1);
―Effective Date‖ means the date on which this Contract comes into force and effect pursuant to GC
Section 2.1.1;

―End Date‖ is defined in GC Section 2.1.2;

“Environmental Management Plan” – A set of mitigation measures to be implemented by the

Operator as indicated in [Appendix 1] of the DBSS, which shall be implemented by the contractor;
―Extension Date‖ is defined in GC Section 2.4.3;
“Existing Sewerage Network” shall mean the existing Sewerage Network in location specified in
SCC and of length indicated in SCC that is included in the scope of work for repair and
refurbishment/ integration with proposed network as a part of the Contract.
―Force Majeure‖ is defined in GC Section 9.8(1);
―GC Section‖ means General Conditions of Contract Section;
―IDA‖ means the International Development Agency;
―IBRD‖ means International Bank for Reconstruction and Development;
―including‖ means including without limitation and ―includes‖ means includes without limitation,
unless expressly stated otherwise;
“Indicative Flow” means the rate of sewage flow which is projected by the Owner to be available
for handling in the respective SPS for each of the 10 years of the O&M period.

Page 116 of 385

―Liquidated Damages – Delay‖ is defined in GC Section 2.3.6(2);
―Liquidated Damages – Operations‖ is as defined in GCC Clause 5.4 read with SCC clause 5.4;
―Manager‖ is defined in GC Section 8.2(3); “New Sewerage Network” shall mean the new
Sewerage Network at Beur in Patna of appox [Link] length and all appurtenant structures which
shall be designed and built by the Operator as a part of the Contract.
―Operations Period‖ is defined in GC Section 2.2(b);
―Operations Starting Date‖ is defined in GC Section 2.1.3(2);
―Operational Acceptance‖ means the acceptance by the Owner of the Sewerage Network, or part
thereof, in accordance with DBSS Section6.3;
―Operations Services‖ means the Operations Services to be performed by the Operator as
contemplated by the General Conditions and the Operations Services Schedule;
―Operator‖ means the Sewerage Network Operator retained by the Owner to carry out the Services
and is the Party named as the Operator in the Form of Contract;
―Operator‟s Equipment (Design-Build)‖ means all machinery, apparatus, vehicles and other
equipment required for the execution and completion of the Design-Build Services and the
remedying of any defects, but does not include material, machinery, apparatus and other equipment
forming part of the Plant and Equipment of the Sewerage Network;
―Operator‟s Equipment (Operations)‖ means all things of any kind whatsoever, including the
equipment, materials, supplies, vehicles and consumables required to operate, maintain and repair
the Site and Sewerage Network;
―Operator‟s Personnel‖ is defined in GC Section 8.3(1);
―Operator‟s Representative‖ is defined in GC Section 8.1.2(1);
―OSA Section‖ means Operations Services Schedule Section;
―Owner‖ means the Party named as Owner in the Form of Contract;
―Owner‟s Representative‖ is defined in GC Section 8.1.1(1);
―Party‖ means the Owner or the Operator, as the case may be, and ―Parties‖ means both of them;
―Performance Security‖ is defined in GC Section 5.5.1(1);
―Plant and Equipment‖ means the permanent plant, equipment, machinery, apparatus, articles and
things of all kinds to be provided and intended to permanently form or forming part of the Sewerage
Network;
―Project Facility‖ means the Sewerage Network to be Designed, Built, Refurbished, Operated and
Maintained by the Operator pursuant to this Contract;
―Monthly Operations Payment‖ is defined in SCC Clause 17;
―Services‖ means the Design-Build Services and the Operations Services to be performed by the
Operator as set out in the General Conditions and the Schedules to the General Conditions;
“Sewage” or “Wastewater” means the night soil and other discharges from water closets, latrines,
privy, urinals, cesspools or drains and polluted water from sinks, bathroom, stables, cattle sheds and

Page 117 of 385

other like places (like drains) and includes domestic sewage and wastewater effluents and discharges
from manufacturers of all kinds;
“Sewerage Network” shall mean the pipe line network laid for collecting the Sewage from
consumer connections including ‗nallaha‘, main, trunk, secondary lines from the individual take
over points of the Consumers up to the Sewage Treatment Plant and including Sewage lifting and
pumping stations and all appurtenant structures forming a part of both the New Sewerage Network
and the Existing Sewerage Network;
―Site‖ means the physical area as set out in the Site Schedule identified for the location of the
Sewerage Network;
―Site Information‖ is defined in GC Section 3.5(1);
―Subcontract‖ means any contract, whether written or verbal, entered into by the Operator and a
Sub-Contractor for the performance of any part of the Services;
―Sub-Contractor‖ means any person or entity to which the Operator subcontracts or sub-consults
any part of the Services in accordance with the provisions of GC Section 8.6, including any person
or entity engaged for the supply of any Plant and Equipment, Operator's Equipment (Design-Build)
or Operator's Equipment (Operations) or for the provision of any Services;
―Submission Deadline‖ means the last date for the submission of bids, as stated in the Bidding
Documents;
―Subsequent Operator‖ means the operator that is to assume the provision of the Services upon
termination or completion of the Contract and may include one of the Authorities;
―Taxes‖ is defined in GC Section 5.6;
―Technical Standards‖ is defined in the Technical Standards Schedule;
―Tests on Completion‖ means those tests set out in Article 5 to Schedule 10 of the Contract
(Technical Specifications) as conducted pursuant to DBSS Section 5.2(1);
“Testing, Trial and Commissioning Period” shall have the meaning as defined in Clause 2.3.2 of
Special Conditions of Contract, Schedule 2;
―Third Party‖ means any person or entity other than the Parties;
―Time for Completion‖ is defined in GC Section 2.3.2;
―Time Schedule‖ is defined in GC Section 2.3.3(1);
―Transition Assistance‖ is defined in GC Section 2.4.2;
―TSS Section‖ means Technical Specifications specified in Schedule 10 of the Contract;
―Unforeseeable‖ means not reasonably foreseeable on the Submission Deadline by an experienced
operator that conducted or should have conducted the inspections and examinations or who knew or
should have known the information described in GC Section 3.5; and
―War Risks‖ is defined in GC Section 9.9(1).
1.2. Contract Documents
Subject to the Form of Contract provisions, all documents forming part of the Contract, and all parts
thereof, are intended to be correlative, complementary and mutually explanatory. The Contract shall

Page 118 of 385

be read as a whole. The following schedules which are incorporated by reference into the Contract
shall be referred to as follows:
Schedule ―1‖ – Special Conditions of Contract (the ―SCC‖)
Schedule ―2‖ – Design Build Services (―the design Build Services Schedule‖)
Schedule ―3‖ – Operations and Maintenance Services (―the Operations and Maintenance
Services Schedule‖)
Schedule ―4‖ – Description of Site and Site Area
Schedule ―5‖ – Operator‘s Price Schedule
Schedule ―6‖ – Terms and procedure of Payment
Schedule ―7‖ – Liquidated Damages – Operations
Schedule ―8‖ – Price Adjustment Formula
Schedule ―9‖ – Schedules of Performance Guarantee & Advance Payment Guarantee
Schedule ―10‖ – Technical Specifications
Schedule ―11‖ – MoU signed between the Central Government, State Government and the
ULB. And State Government Guarantee to pay the operator in case ULB
defaults for two consecutive payments. [Deleted]
Schedule ―12‖ – Allowed and Suggested alignments / locations of the Sewerage Network

1.3. Interpretation
1.3.1. Language
(1) All Contract Documents, all correspondence and communications to be given, and
all other documentation to be prepared and supplied under the Contract shall be
written in the language specified in the SCC and the Contract shall be construed and
interpreted in accordance with that language.
(2) If any of the Contract Documents, correspondence or communications are prepared
in any language other than the governing language under GC Section 1.3.1(1), the
translation of such documents, correspondence or communications into the
governing language shall prevail in matters of interpretation.
1.3.2. Singular or Plural
The singular shall include the plural and the plural shall include the singular except
where the context otherwise requires.
1.3.3. Headings
The headings in the Contract Documents are included for ease of reference and shall
neither constitute a part of the Contract nor affect its interpretation.
1.3.4. Persons
Words importing persons or entities shall include firms, corporations and government
entities.

Page 119 of 385

1.3.5. Incoterms
Unless inconsistent with any provision of the Contract, the meaning of any trade term
and the rights and obligations of the Parties there under shall be prescribed by Incoterms
2010. Incoterms means international rules for interpreting trade terms published by the
International Chamber of Commerce, 38 Cours Albert 1er, 75008 Paris, France.
1.3.6. Entire Agreement
This Contract constitutes the entire agreement between the Owner and the Operator with
respect to the subject matter of the Contract and supersedes all communications,
negotiations and agreements, whether written or oral, made by the Parties with respect
thereto made prior to the date of the Contract.
1.3.7. Amendment
No amendment or other variation of the Contract shall be effective unless it is in
writing, is dated, expressly refers to the Contract and is signed by a duly authorised
representative of each Party to the Contract.
1.3.8. Number of Days
Except as expressly stated to the contrary elsewhere herein, in computing the number of
days for the purposes of the Contract all days shall be counted, including Saturdays,
Sundays and legal holidays in the Country, provided, however, that if the final day of
any period shall fall on a Saturday, Sunday, or legal holiday in the Country, then the
final day shall be deemed to be the next day which is not a Saturday, Sunday or legal
holiday in the Country.
1.3.9. Independent Operator
(1) The Operator shall be an independent Operator in its performance of the Contract.
The Contract does not create any agency, partnership, joint venture or other joint
relationship between the Owner and the Operator or its Shareholders.
(2) Subject to the provisions of the Contract, the Operator shall be solely responsible for
the manner in which the Contract is performed. All employees, agents,
representatives or Sub Contractors engaged by the Operator in connection with the
performance of the Contract shall be under the complete control of the Operator and
shall not be deemed to be employees of the Owner, and nothing contained in the
Contract, or in any Subcontract awarded by the Operator, shall be construed to
create any contractual relationship or legal obligation between the Operator‘s
employees, agents, representatives or Sub Contractors and the Owner.
1.3.10. Joint Venture
(1) If the Operator consists of a joint venture of more than one person, all the Partners
hereby authorise the representative named in the SCC to act on their behalf in
exercising all the Partner‘s and Operator‘s rights and obligations toward the Owner
under this Contract, including the receiving of approvals, consents, orders,
certificates, instructions and payments from the Owner, amendment of the Contract
and in all other matters under the Contract, including the settlement of disputes.
(2) If the Operator is a joint venture of two or more Partners, each Partner of the joint
venture, shall be jointly and severally bound to the Owner for the fulfilment of the
provisions of the Contract by the Operator.

Page 120 of 385

 (3) The composition, control or constitution of the Operator shall be in accordance with
the Operator‘s Bid and shall not be altered without the prior consent of the Owner.
1.3.11. Non-waiver
(1) Subject to GC Section 1.3.11(2), no relaxation, waiver, forbearance, delay or
indulgence by either Party in enforcing any of the terms and conditions of the
Contract or the granting of time by either Party to the other shall prejudice, affect or
restrict the rights of that Party under the Contract, nor shall any waiver by either
Party of any breach of Contract operate as waiver of any subsequent or continuing
breach of Contract.
(2) To be a valid waiver, any waiver of a Party‘s rights, powers or remedies under the
Contract shall,
(a) be in writing;
(b) be dated and signed by the Owner‘s or Operator‘s Representative, whichever is
granting such waiver; and
(c) specify the right, power or remedy being waived and the extent to which it is
being waived.
1.3.12. Severability
If any provision or condition of the Contract is prohibited or rendered invalid or
unenforceable, such prohibition, invalidity or unenforceability shall not affect the
validity or enforceability of any other provisions and conditions of the Contract.
1.3.13. Country of Origin
―Origin‖ means the place where the materials, equipment and other supplies for the
Sewerage Network are mined, grown, produced or manufactured, and from which the
services are provided.
1.3.14. Survival of Obligations
Upon the termination or expiration of the Contract pursuant to the Contract, all rights
and obligations of the Parties hereunder shall cease, except those noted in the SCC.
1.4. Notice
(1) All notices to be given under the Contract shall be in writing and shall be sent by
personal delivery, courier or facsimile to the address for notice of the relevant Party
as set out in the SCC and the following provisions apply:
(a) Any notice sent by facsimile shall be confirmed by the sender no later than two
days after dispatch by a notice sent by courier;
(b) Any notice sent by courier shall be deemed to have been delivered 10 days after
dispatch. In proving the fact of dispatch, it shall be sufficient to show that the
envelope containing such notice was properly addressed, with proper payment
for the courier, and conveyed to the courier service for transmission; and
(c) Any notice delivered personally or sent by facsimile shall be deemed to have
been delivered on the date of dispatch.
(2) A Party may change its address for notice pursuant to this Contract by giving the
other Party notice of change in accordance with this GC Section 1.4.
(3) The Operator‘s address for the purpose of giving notice pursuant to this GC Section
1.4 shall be in the Country named in the SCC.

Page 121 of 385

 (4) Notices shall be deemed to include any approvals, consents, instructions, orders,
certificates and similar communications to be given under the Contract.
1.5. Governing Law
This Contract, its meaning and interpretation, and the relation between the Parties shall
be governed by the Applicable Law.
1.6. Settlement of Disputes
1.6.1. Adjudicator
(1) If any dispute of any kind whatsoever arises between the Owner and the Operator in
connection with or arising out of the Contract including,
(a) any question regarding the existence, validity or termination of the Contract;
and
(b) any matter related to the performance of the Services,
the Parties shall seek to resolve any such dispute or difference by mutual consultation.
If the Parties fail to resolve such a dispute or difference by mutual consultation, the
dispute shall be referred in writing, by either the Operator or the Owner, to the
Adjudicator with a copy to the other Party or Parties.
(2) GC Section 1.6.1(1) shall apply,
(a) during the execution of the Services and after the completion of the Services;
and
(b) before and after the termination, abandonment or breach of the Contract.
(3) The Adjudicator shall give its decision in writing to both Parties no later than 30
days after the referral of a dispute. If the Adjudicator has rendered its decision
within the 30 day time limit, and no notice of intention to commence arbitration has
been given by either the Owner or the Operator prior to the expiration of 60 days
after the reference of the dispute to the Adjudicator, the Adjudicator‘s decision shall
become final and binding upon the Owner and the Operator. Any decision that has
become final and binding shall be implemented by the Parties forthwith.
(4) The Adjudicator shall be paid a fee at the rate specified in the SCC plus reasonable
expenditures incurred in the execution of its duties as Adjudicator, and these costs
shall be divided equally between the Owner and the Operator.
(5) If the Adjudicator resigns or dies, or the Owner and the Operator agree that the
Adjudicator is not fulfilling its functions in accordance with the provisions of the
Contract, a new Adjudicator shall be jointly appointed by the Owner and the
Operator. If the Owner and the Operator cannot agree on a new Adjudicator within
30 days after the resignation, death or removal of the existing Adjudicator, the new
Adjudicator shall be appointed at the request of either Party by the Appointing
Authority specified in the SCC.

Page 122 of 385

1.6.2. Arbitration
(1) If either the Owner or the Operator is dissatisfied with the Adjudicator‘s decision, or
if the Adjudicator fails to give a decision within 30 days after a dispute being
referred to it, then either the Owner or the Operator may, within 60 days after such
reference, give notice to the other Party, with a copy for information to the
Adjudicator, of its intention to commence arbitration, as hereinafter provided, as to
the matter in dispute, and no arbitration in respect of this matter may be commenced
unless such notice is given.
(2) Any dispute in respect of which a notice of intention to commence arbitration has
been given, in accordance with GC Section 1.6.2(1), shall be finally settled by
arbitration.
(3) Arbitration proceedings shall be conducted in accordance with the rules of
procedure designated in the SCC.
1.6.3. Obligations during Arbitration
Notwithstanding any reference to the Adjudicator or arbitration herein,
(a) the Parties shall continue to perform their respective obligations under the
Contract unless they otherwise agreed; and
(b) the Owner shall pay the Operator any monies due to the Operator.
1.7. Assignment
(1) The Operator shall not assign to any Third Party the Contract, or any part thereof, or
any right, benefit, obligation or interest therein or thereunder without the prior
consent of the Owner, which consent may not be unreasonably withheld.
(2) The Operator may assign, absolutely or by way of charge, any monies due and
payable to it or that may become due and payable to it under the Contract.
(3) To be a valid assignment which has been approved by the Owner pursuant to GC
Section 1.7(1), the assignment must,
(a) be in writing;
(b) be dated and signed by the Owner‘s Representative; and
(c) state the specific details of the assignment.
1.8. Contract Records, Accounting and Auditing
1.8.1. Contract Records
(1) Except as provided in GC Section 6.1, all data, information, documentation,
account, plans, programs, reports, surveys and guidelines of any kind whatsoever
(the ―Contract Records‖) prepared by the Operator in performing the Services shall
become and remain the property of the Owner and the Operator shall deliver all
Contract Records and a detailed inventory of those Contract Records to the Owner
no later than the date of termination or expiration of the Contract, except in respect
of such Contract Records that are required to be delivered at an earlier date.
(2) The Contract Records shall include,
(a) information of any kind whatsoever related to the finances, revenues or
expenditures of the Owner‘s operations;
(b) all files, documents, plans, drawings, specifications, notes, minutes of meetings
and minutes of conversations;
(c) all the plans, programs, reports, surveys and guidelines prepared by the
Operator in carrying out the Operations Services;
Page 123 of 385
 (d) the accounts of the Sewerage Treatment operations at the Sewerage Network;
(e) all manuals, reports, condition surveys, safety records, audit records,
inventories, laboratory test results, procurement records, customer information,
financial information, financial statements, invoices, accounting records,
subcontracts and personnel records; and
(f) the Design-Build Documents, whether stored in hard copy or electronically.
(3) The Operator shall provide the Owner with unrestricted access to the Contract
Records during the term of the Contract, including the right to make and retain
copies.
(4) The Operator may retain a copy of the Contract Records but shall not use them for
purposes unrelated to this Contract without the prior approval of the Owner. This
GC Section 1.8.1(4) does not in any way relieve the Operator of its obligation of
confidentiality pursuant to GC Section 6.2.
(5) Except as provided in GC Section 6.1, the Operator acknowledges that the Owner,
as owner of the Contract Records, may deal with the Contract Records in any way it
determines, including making the Contract Records publicly available and making
them available to prospective bidders who may be involved in the process to select a
Subsequent Operator.
1.8.2. Accounting
The Operator shall keep accurate and systematic accounts in respect of the Services and
the Contract in accordance with internationally accepted accounting principles.
1.8.3. Auditing the Operator‘s Own Accounts and the Contract Records
(1) The Owner may, in its sole discretion, audit,
(a) the Operator‘s own accounts, financial information, financial statements and
technical information at any reasonable time and with 24 hours‘ notice to the
Operator; and
(b) the Contract Records and Design-Build Documents at any reasonable time and
without notice to the Operator,
in respect of any matters related to the Contract.
(2) The Owner may complete the audit or audits itself or may retain an independent
auditor, at the Owner‘s expense, to complete the audit or audits.
1.8.4. Operator‘s Audited Accounts
The Operator shall submit to the Owner, no later than 90 days after the end of the
Operator‘s fiscal year, the annual audited accounts of its own finances for each of the
Operator‘s fiscal years that occur during the Contract Term.
1.8.5. Inspections and Audit by the Bank
The Operator shall permit the Bank and/or persons appointed by the Bank to inspect the
Site and/or the Owner‘s accounts and records relating to the performance of the Contract
and to have such accounts and records audited by auditors appointed by the Bank if
required by the Bank.

Page 124 of 385

1.9. Operator‟s Claims during the Design-Build Period
(1) If the Operator considers itself to be entitled to any extension of the Time for
Completion or any additional payment, under any section related to the Design-
Build Services of these General Conditions, the Operator shall give notice to the
Design-Build Engineer, describing the event or circumstance giving rise to the
claim. The notice shall be given as soon as practicable, and no later than 30 days,
after the Operator became aware, or should have become aware, of the event or
circumstance.
(2) If the Operator fails to give notice of a claim within such period of 30 days, the
Time for Completion shall not be extended, the Operator shall not be entitled to
additional payment, and the Owner shall be discharged from all liability in
connection with the claim. Otherwise, the following provisions of this GC Section
1.9 shall apply.
(3) The Operator shall also submit any other notices related to the Design-Build
Services which are required by the Contract, and supporting particulars for the
claim, that are relevant to such event or circumstance.
(4) The Operator shall keep such contemporary records as may be necessary to
substantiate any claim related to the Design-Build Services, either on the Site or at
another location acceptable to the Design-Build Engineer. Without admitting the
Owner‘s liability, the Design-Build Engineer may, after receiving any notice under
this GC Section 1.9, monitor the record-keeping or instruct the Operator to keep
further contemporary records. The Operator shall permit the Design-Build
Engineer to inspect all these records, and shall, if instructed, submit copies to the
Design-Build Engineer.
(5) No later than 42 days after the Operator became aware, or should have become
aware, of the event or circumstance giving rise to the claim, or within such other
period as may be proposed by the Operator and approved by the Design-Build
Engineer, the Operator shall send to the Design-Build Engineer a fully detailed
claim which includes full supporting particulars of the basis of the claim and of the
extension of time or additional payment claimed. If the event or circumstance
giving rise to the claim has a continuing effect,
(a) this fully detailed claim shall be considered as interim;
(b) the Operator shall send further interim claims at monthly intervals, giving the
accumulated delay or amount claimed, and such further particulars as the
Design-Build Engineer may reasonable require; and
(c) the Operator shall send a final claim no later than 30 days after the end of the
effects resulting from the event or circumstance, or within such other period as
may be proposed by the Operator and approved by the Design-Build Engineer.
(6) No later than 42 days after receiving a claim or any further particulars supporting a
previous claim, or within such other period as may be proposed by the Design-
Build Engineer and approved by the Operator, the Design-Build Engineer shall
respond with approval, or with disapproval and detailed comments. The Design-
Build Engineer may also request any necessary further particulars, but shall
nevertheless give his response on the principles of the claim within such time.

Page 125 of 385

(7) Each invoice sent by the Operator shall include such amounts for any claim as have
been reasonably substantiated as due under the relevant provision of the Contract.
Unless and until the particulars supplied are sufficient to substantiate the whole of
the claim, the Operator shall only be entitled to payment for such part of the claim
as it has been able to substantiate.
(8) The Operator shall proceed in accordance with GC Section 7.2.6 to request,
(a) an extension, if any, of the Time for Completion before or after its expiry in
accordance with GC Section 2.3.4; or
(b) an additional payment, if any, to which the Operator believes it is entitled under
the Contract.
(9) The requirements of this GC Section 1.9 are in addition to those of any other
provision which may apply to a claim. If the Operator fails to comply with this or
another provision in relation to any claim, any extension of or additional payment
shall take account of the extent, if any, to which the failure has prevented or
prejudiced proper investigation of the claim, unless the claim is excluded under GC
Section 1.9(2).
(10) This GC Section 1.9 shall apply only in respect of the Design-Build Services
excluding the Existing Operations Services.

Page 126 of 385

ARTICLE 2. CONTRACT TERM, TIMING AND
COMPLETION
2.1. General
2.1.1. Effectiveness of Contract
The Form of Contract shall be signed by the Operator, and all partners, if the Operator is
a joint venture company, prior to its signing by the Owner. The Contract shall come
into force and effect on the date the Form of Contract is signed by the Owner (the
―Effective Date‖), contingent on final approval by the Bank.
2.1.2. Expiration of Contract
This Contract shall terminate on either,
(1) the specified number of months after the Operations Starting Date named in the
SCC;
(2) the Extension Date pursuant to GC Section 2.4.3; or
(3) the date of Contract termination pursuant to GC Section 11.2,
(the ―End Date‖), whichever is applicable.
2.1.3. Commencement of Services
(1) Unless otherwise stated in the SCC, the Design-Build Starting Date shall be no
later than 30 days after the Effective Date and the Owner shall give the Operator
at least seven days prior notice of the Design-Build Starting Date.
(2) The ―Operations Starting Date‖ shall be the date of the Operational Acceptance
Certificate.
2.2. Design-Build Period and Operations Period
The Contract Term shall be divided into two periods as follows:
(a) the period commencing on the Effective Date and ending on the day
immediately prior to the Operations Starting Date (the ―Design-Build Period‖);
and
(b) the period commencing on the Operations Starting Date and ending on the End
Date (the ―Operations Period‖), namely the date of completion of the Operation
and Maintenance period of 10 years, commencing from the date of Operational
Acceptance of the Sewerage Network.
2.3. Design-Build Period – Commencement, Delays and Suspension
2.3.1. Commencement of the Design-Build Services
The Operator shall commence the Design-Build Services no later than the Design-Build
Starting Date, and shall then proceed with the Design-Build Services with due
expedition and without delay.
2.3.2. Time for Completion
The Operator shall complete the whole of the Design-Build Services in accordance with
the time for completion set out in the SCC (―Time for Completion‖) for the Design-
Build Services including,
(a) successfully completing the Tests on Commissioning; and
Page 127 of 385
 (b) completing all of the Design-Build Services such that the completed Sewerage
Network can be used as a fully operational Sewerage Network in accordance
with the Contract.
2.3.3. Design-Build Time Schedule
(1) The Operator shall submit a detailed time programme (the ―Time Schedule‖) to the
Design-Build Engineer no later than 30 days after the Design-Build Starting Date.
The Operator shall also submit a revised Time Schedule whenever the previous
Time Schedule is inconsistent with actual progress or with the Operator‘s
obligations. Each Time Schedule shall include a description of,
(a) the order in which the Operator intends to carry out the Design-Build Services,
including the anticipated timing of each stage of design, Design-Build
Documents, procurement, manufacture, inspection, delivery to the Site,
construction, erection, testing and commissioning;
(b) the periods for review and any other submissions, approvals and consents
specified in the Contract;
(c) the sequence and timing of inspections and tests specified in the Contract;
(d) the scheduled Time for Completion, the planned Time for Completion and the
planned Operations Starting Date;
(e) all major events and activities in the production of Design-Build Documents;
and
(f) all major phases and milestones of the Design-Build Services.
(2) The Design-Build Engineer shall review each Time Schedule and provide
comments to the Operator as to whether the Time Schedule complies with the
Contract. If the Design-Build Engineer fails to provide such comments prior to
the expiration of 21 days after receiving a Time Schedule, the Operator shall
proceed in accordance with the Time Schedule, subject to its other obligations
under the Contract. The Operator shall be entitled to rely upon the Time Schedule
when planning its activities.
(3) The Operator shall promptly give notice to the Design-Build Engineer of specific
probable future events or circumstances which may adversely affect the Design-
Build Services or delay the execution of the Design-Build Services. The Design-
Build Engineer may require the Operator to submit an estimate of the anticipated
effect of the future event or circumstances, or a proposal under GC Section 10.1.3.
(4) If, at any time, the Design-Build Engineer gives notice to the Operator that a Time
Schedule fails, to the extent stated, to comply with the Contract or to be consistent
with actual progress and the Operator‘s stated intentions, the Operator shall
submit a revised Time Schedule to the Design-Build Engineer in accordance with
this GC Section 2.3.3.
2.3.4. Extension of the Time for Completion
(1) The Time for Completion shall be extended if the Operator is delayed or impeded
in the performance of the Design-Build Services by reason of any of the
following:
(a) a Change, unless the Parties have already agreed to an adjustment to the Time
for Completion as part of the applicable Change;

Page 128 of 385

 (b) an occurrence of Force Majeure as provided in GC Section 9.8, Unforeseeable
physical conditions as provided for in GC Section 9.7, or loss or damage as a
result of the occurrences set out in GC Section 9.4(2);
(c) any suspension order given by the Owner pursuant to GC Section 11.1.1;
(d) any change in the Applicable Law in accordance with GC Section 9.10;
(e) any default or breach of the Contract by the Owner or any activity, act or
omission of any other Operators employed by the Owner; or
(f) any other matter specifically mentioned in the Contract.
by such period as shall be fair and reasonable in all the circumstances and as shall fairly
reflect the actual delay or impediment sustained by the Operator.
(2) The Operator shall submit, to the Design-Build Engineer, any notice of a claim for
an extension of the Time for Completion in accordance with GC Section 10.1.3.
(3) The Operator shall, at all times, use reasonable efforts to minimize any delay in
the performance of its obligations under the Contract.
2.3.5. Rate of Progress
(1) If, at any time, the Operator‘s progress in respect of the Design-Build Services,
(a) is too slow to complete the Design-Build Services in accordance with the Time
for Completion; or
(b) has fallen, or will fall, behind the current Time Schedule
other than as a result of a cause listed in GC Section 2.3.4, then the Design-Build
Engineer may instruct the Operator to submit a revised Time Schedule and supporting
report describing the revised methods which the Operator proposes to adopt in order to
expedite progress and complete the Design-Build Services.
(2) Unless the Design-Build Engineer notifies otherwise, the Operator shall adopt the
revised methods referred to in GC Section 2.3.5(2), which may require increases in,
(a) the working hours or in the numbers of Operator‘s Personnel, or both; or
(b) Plant and Equipment,
at the risk and cost of the Operator. If these revised methods cause the Owner to incur
additional costs, the Operator shall, subject to GC Section 1.9, pay these costs to the
Owner, in addition to delay damages, if any, under GC Section 2.3.6.
2.3.6. Delay of Completion – Liquidated Damages - Delay
(1) The Operator guarantees that it shall attain Completion of the Sewerage
Network in accordance with the Time for Completion specified in the SCC and
GC Section 2.3.2 or in accordance with an extension of the Time for
Completion granted to the Operator in accordance with GC Section 2.3.4.
(2) If the Operator fails to attain Completion of the Sewerage Network within the
Time for Completion, or any extension thereof in accordance with GC Section
2.3.4, the Operator shall pay to the Owner liquidated damages in the amount
specified in the SCC (―Liquidated Damages-Delay‖). The aggregate amount of
Liquidated Damages - Delay shall in no event exceed the amount specified as
―Maximum‖ in the SCC. The Owner may terminate the Contract pursuant to
GC Section 11.2.3 if the Operator reaches the ―Maximum‖ level for Liquidated
Damages – Delay.

Page 129 of 385

 (3) The payment or payments by the Operator of Liquidated Damages – Delay shall
completely satisfy the Operator‘s obligation to attain Completion of the
Sewerage Network within the Time for Completion or any extension thereof
pursuant to GC Section 2.3.4.
(4) The payment or payments by the Operator of Liquidated Damages – Delay shall
not in any way relieve the Operator of its obligations to complete the Sewerage
Network or any other obligations and liabilities of the Operator under the
Contract.
(5) If the Operator attains Completion of the Sewerage Network before the Time
for Completion or any extension thereof pursuant to GC Section 2.3.4, and if the
Owner intends to pay a bonus to the Operator for early completion, the amount
of the bonus is as set out in the SCC. The aggregate amount of such bonus shall
in no event succeed the amount specified as ―Maximum‖ in the SCC.
2.3.7. Design-Build Period –(Special operation requirements) Deleted
2.4. Operations Period
2.4.1. Commencement of the Operations - Services
The Operator shall commence the Operations Services no later than the Operations
Starting Date and shall then proceed with the Operations Services with due exception
and without delay.
2.4.2. Services after the End Date
The Operator, upon written request by the Owner no later than 60 days prior to the End
Date, shall provide assistance to the Owner, at no cost to the Owner, during a
transitional period of up to 60 days after the End Date (the ―Transition Assistance‖).
The purpose of the Transition Assistance is to ensure a smooth transition between the
Operator and a Subsequent Operator of the Sewerage Network. The Transition
Assistance shall be related to only transition services and shall not be the full range of
Services as set out in the Operations Services Schedule.
2.4.3. Extension of the Contract
If both Parties agree, this Contract may be extended for a period of up to 5 years after
the End Date. The Owner shall notify the Operator no later than 6 months prior to the
End Date if it wishes to enter into negotiations in order to extend the duration of the
Contract. The date on which the Contract is to expire as a result of an extension shall be
the Extension Date.

Page 130 of 385

ARTICLE 3. OBLIGATIONS OF THE OPERATOR
3.1. General – Services and Standards of Performance
The Operator shall,
(a) perform the Design-Build Services set out in the Design-Build Services
Schedule;
(b) perform the Operations Services set out in the Operations Services Schedule;
and
(c) perform the Design Build and Operations Services in accordance with the
Technical Standards set out in the Technical Standards Schedule,
3.2. Law Governing Services
The Operator shall comply with the Applicable Law and shall ensure that the Operator‘s
Personnel and Sub Contractors comply with the Applicable Law. The Operator shall
indemnify and hold harmless the Owner from and against any and all liabilities,
damages, claims, fines, penalties and expenses of whatever nature arising or resulting
from violation of the Applicable Law by the Operator, the Operator‘s Personnel the Sub
Contractors and the Sub Contractors‘ personnel.
3.3. Conflict of Interest
(1) The compensation of the Operator pursuant to GC Article 5 shall constitute the
Operator‘s sole compensation in connection with this Contract and, except as
provided in GC Article 5, the Operator shall not accept for its own benefit any trade
commission, discount or similar payment in connection with activities pursuant to
this Contract or in the discharge of its obligations hereunder, and the Operator shall
use its best efforts to ensure that the Operator‘s Personnel, Sub Contractors, and the
Sub Contractors‘ employees and agents, similarly shall not receive any such
additional remuneration.
(2) The Operator, Sub Contractors and any entity affiliated with the Operator or the Sub
Contractors, shall be disqualified, during the Contract Term from providing goods,
works or services, other than the Services, with respect to,
(a) the goods, works and services purchased from the Contingency Fund; and
(b) the Capital Investment Program.
(3) The Operator, Operator‘s Personnel, Sub Contractors and the employees and
affiliates of the Sub Contractors shall not engage, either directly or indirectly, in any
business or professional activities which would conflict with the activities assigned
to them under this Contract.
(4) The Operator and its Shareholders shall not participate in any discussions or work
and shall not provide any services or advice to the Owner related to,
(a) Except with respect to their responsibilities as set out in the Operations Services
Schedule, institutional restructuring or reorganisation of the Owner or a utility
or department of the Owner;
(b) The development or review of bidding documents to retain any Subsequent
Operator; or
(c) The preparations for the procurement process to retain any Subsequent
Operator.

Page 131 of 385

 (5) Failure of the Operator or the Shareholders to comply with this GC Section 3.3, in
addition to constituting a breach of this Contract, may result in the disqualification
of the Operator and the Shareholders from bidding in the procurement process to
retain any Subsequent Operator.
3.4. Plant and Equipment, Operator‟s Equipment (Design-Build) and Operations
Equipment (Operations)
(1) Any Plant and Equipment, Operator's Equipment (Design-Build) and Operator's
Equipment (Operations) that will be incorporated in or be required for the Site and
Sewerage Network or the Operation Services shall have their origin as specified
under GC Section 1.1 (―Country of Origin‖).
(2) The Operator shall prepare a list of all Operator's Equipment (Design-Build) and
Operator's Equipment (Operations) (the ―Operator‘s Equipment Lists‖). The
Operator shall update the Operator‘s Equipment Lists on an annual basis and shall
provide the updated Operator‘s Equipment Lists to the Owner no later than 30 days
after the end of each of the Operator‘s fiscal years during the Contract Term.
3.5. Site Information and Investigation
(1) The Operator acknowledges that the Owner made available to the Operator, during
the bidding process, either directly or by placing the data in the Data Room and
Background Information Document, all available data on hydrological and sub-
surface conditions of the Site, and studies on environmental impact that had been
obtained by or on behalf of the Owner from investigations in anticipation of the
Design-Build and Operations Services (the ―Site Information‖). The Operator shall
be responsible for interpreting all data about the Site that is provided to it by the
Owner.
(2) The Operator shall be deemed to have inspected and examined the Site, its
surroundings, the Site Information and other available information, and to have
satisfied itself before entering into the Contract, as to,
(a) the form and nature of the Site, including the sub-surface conditions;
(b) the applicable hydrological, hydro-geological and climatic conditions;
(c) the extent and nature of the work, Plant and Equipment, Operator's Equipment
(Design-Build) and Operator's Equipment (Operations) necessary for the
execution and completion of the Services, and the remedying of any defects;
and
(d) the Operator‘s requirements for access to the Site, accommodation, personnel,
power, transport, water and other services.
(3) The Operator shall be deemed to have obtained all necessary information as to risks,
contingencies and all other circumstances that may influence or affect the
performance of its obligations under the Contract.

Page 132 of 385

 (4) To the extent the Operator did not make any of the interpretations, investigations or
examinations, or did not satisfy itself, or did not obtain such information as called
for in this GC Section 3.5, the Operator represents and warrants that it is willing to
assume and does hereby assume responsibility for any and all loss and damage from
any cause whatsoever which the Operator‘s interpretations, investigations,
examinations and obtaining of information may have avoided and agrees to
indemnify the Owner from all risk thereof and from conditions arising or developing
in the course of performing the Services which may make the performance of the
Services more onerous and more expensive to fulfil or perform than was
contemplated on the Effective Date. Notwithstanding anything in the Contract to
the contrary, the Operator acknowledges and declares that in entering into the
Contract it did not and does not rely upon any information or report provided by or
on behalf of the Owner or its agents, representatives or employees.
3.6. Access to the Site and Sewerage Network
(1) The Operator shall, during both the Design-Build Period and the Operations Period,
provide free and open access to the Site and the Sewerage Network at the Owner‘s
request. The Owner shall make reasonable efforts to provide reasonable notice to
the Operator prior to the Owner‘s access but such notice is not mandatory. The
Owner‘s representative on the Site, or at the Sewerage Network shall observe all
safety and health regulations and reasonable instructions of the Operator.
(2) The Operator shall give all reasonable access to any other Operators employed by
the Owner on or near the Site to carry out their work.
(3) If the Operator makes available to other Operators any roads or ways the
maintenance for which the Operator is responsible, permits the use by such other
Operators of the Operator's Equipment (Design-Build) and Operator's Equipment
(Operations), or provides any other service of whatsoever nature for such other
Operators, the Owner shall fully compensate the Operator for any loss or damage
caused or occasioned by such other Operators in respect of any such use or service,
and shall pay to the Operator reasonable remuneration for the use of such equipment
or the provision of such services.
(4) The Operator shall also arrange to perform its work so as to minimize, to the extent
possible, interference with the work of other Operators. The Design-Build Engineer
shall determine the resolution of any difference or conflict that may arise between
the Operator and other Operators and the workers of the Owner in regard to their
work.
(5) The Operator shall notify the Design-Build Engineer, as applicable, promptly of any
defects in the other Operators‘ work that come to its notice, and that could affect the
performance of the Services by the Operator. The Design-Build Engineer, as
applicable, shall determine the corrective measures, if any, required to rectify the
situation after inspection of the Site and the Sewerage Network. Decisions made by
the Design-Build Engineer, as applicable, shall be binding on the Operator.

Page 133 of 385

ARTICLE 4. OBLIGATIONS OF THE OWNER
4.1. Owner‟s Assistance to the Operator
The Owner shall use reasonable efforts to,
(a) provide the Operator, Sub Contractors and Operator‘s Personnel with work
permits and such other documents as shall be necessary to enable the
Operator, Sub Contractors or Operator‘s Personnel to perform the Services;
(b) arrange for Operator‘s Personnel and, if appropriate, their eligible
dependants to obtain promptly all necessary entry and exit visas, residence
permits, exchange permits and any other documents required for their stay
in the Country;
(c) Facilitate the prompt clearance through customs of any property required
for the Services and of the personal effects of the Operator‘s Personnel and
their eligible dependants; and
(d) Issue to officials, agents and representatives of the Owner all such
instructions as may be necessary or appropriate for the prompt and effective
implementation of the Services.
4.2. Access to the Site and Sewerage Network
the Owner shall be responsible for acquiring and providing legal and physical
possession of the Site and access thereto and for providing possession and access to all
other areas reasonably required for the proper execution of the Contract including all
requisite rights of way. The Owner shall provide the Operator, free of charge, full
possession of the Site and the Sewerage Network during the term of the Contract.
4.3. Reviews and Approvals of Submissions
(1) Except as otherwise provided in the Contract, if the Operator submits a plan, report
or other documentation to the Owner in writing, and the Owner, or the Design-Build
Engineer, is required to approve that submission, the Design-Build Engineer as
applicable, shall review and either approve or provide written comment on the
Operator‘s submission no later than 14 days after the day of submission by the
Operator to the Design-Build Engineer.
(2) If the Design-Build Engineer, as applicable, fails to approve or refuses to approve
the Operator‘s submission in accordance with GC Section 4.3(1), the Operator shall
notify the Owner in writing that it has not received a response to its submission.
(3) If the Design-Build Engineer, as applicable, fails to respond to the Operator‘s
written notification pursuant to GC Section 4.3(2) within 14 days after the receipt by
the Design-Build Engineer, as applicable, of the Operator‘s written notification, the
Operator‘s submission shall be deemed to be approved.

Page 134 of 385

ARTICLE 5. CONTRACT PRICE AND PAYMENT
5.1. Contract Price
(1) The Contract Price shall be as specified in the Price Schedules offered by the
Operator and accepted by the Owner while awarding the Contract. These prices
have been incorporated in Schedule 5 of the Contract.
(2) Subject to GC Section 9.7, the Operator shall be deemed to have satisfied itself as to
the correctness and sufficiency of the Contract Price, which shall, except as
otherwise provided for in the Contract, cover all its obligations under the Contract,
including all costs and expenses for the Design, Building, Successful
Commissioning, Operation & Maintenance of the Project Facilities in accordance
with the provisions of this Contract.
5.2. Terms of Payment
(1) The Contract Price shall be paid as specified in SCC Clause 17.
(2) No payment made by the Owner herein shall be deemed to constitute acceptance by
the Owner of the Sewerage Network or any part thereof.
(3) In the event that the Owner fails to make any payment by its respective due date or
within the period of 60 days, the Owner shall pay to the Operator interest on the
amount of such delayed payment at the rate shown in the SCC and as specified in
the SCC for the period of delay until payment has been made in full.
(4) The currency or currencies in which payments are made to the Operator under this
Contract shall be specified in the SCC, subject to the general principle that
payments will be made in the currency or currencies in which the Contract Price has
been stated in the Operator‘s Bid.
(5) All payments shall be made in the currency or currencies specified in the Article 2
of the Contract.
5.3. Performance Incentive Compensation
If the Owner intends to pay the Operator performance incentive compensation, the
Owner will pay such compensation at the end of the Operations Period and in
accordance with the Performance Incentive Compensation Schedule 11.
5.4. Liquidated Damages - Operations
The Operator shall pay the Owner liquidated damages for failure to meet Technical
Standards as set out in the Schedule 3 – Operations and Maintenance Services and
Schedule 7 – Liquidated Damages Operations Schedule.
5.5. Securities
5.5.1. Performance Security
(1) The Operator shall each provide a security for the Operator‘s proper performance of
the Contract to the Owner no later than the date specified in the Bidding Documents
(the ―Performance Security‖).
(2) The Performance Security shall be,
(a) in the amount specified in the SCC;
(b) denominated in the currency or currencies of the Contract, or in a freely
convertible currency acceptable to the Owner; and

Page 135 of 385

 (c) shall be in the form specified in the Bidding Documents or in another form
approved by the Owner.
(3) The Performance Security is a bank guarantee and shall be issued by either,
(a) a bank or insurance company located in the Country; or
(b) a foreign bank or insurance company through a correspondent bank or
insurance company located in the Country.
(4) The Performance Security shall be valid until 180 days after the End Date, or any
extension to the End Date.
(5) The Owner shall return the Performance Security no later than 14 days after its
expiration.
(6) The cost of complying with this GC Section 5.5.1 shall be borne by the Operator.
5.5.2. Advance Payment Security
(1) The Operator shall provide a security in an amount equal to the advance payment
calculated in accordance with the Terms and Procedures of Payment Schedule and
in the same currency or currencies.
(2) The mobilization advance paid to the Operator by the owner shall be recovered
commencing from the date on which the payment to the Operator has reached 25%
of the Part A price and shall be fully recovered by completion of 90% of the time
for completing the works under Part A.
5.6. Taxes and Duties
(1) Except as otherwise specifically provided in the Contract, the Operator shall bear
and pay all taxes, duties, levies and charges (the ―Taxes‖) assessed on the Operator,
its Sub-Contractors or their employees by all municipal, state or national
government authorities in connection with the Services in and outside of the
Country.
(2) Service Tax if applicable shall be reimbursed by the owner against evidence of
applicability and payment.
(3) If any tax exemptions, reductions, allowances or privileges and benefits may be
available to the Operator in the Country, the same shall be passed on by the operator
to the Owner.

Page 136 of 385

ARTICLE 6. COPYRIGHT : DESIGN-BUILD DOCUMENTS
6.1. Copyright – Design-Build Documents
(1) As between the Parties, the Operator shall retain the copyright and other intellectual
property rights in the Design-Build Documents made by or on behalf of the
Operator.
(2) The Operator shall be deemed, by signing the Contract, to give the Owner a
non-terminable, transferable, non-exclusive, royalty-free licence to copy, use and
communicate the Design-Build Documents, including making and using
modifications of them. This licence shall,
(a) apply throughout the actual or intended working life, whichever is longer, of the
relevant parts of the Site or Sewerage Network;
(b) entitle any person in proper possession of the relevant part of the Site or
Sewerage Network to copy, use and communicate the Design-Build Documents
for the purposes of completing, managing, operating, maintaining, altering,
adjusting, and repairing the Sewerage Network;
(c) in the case of Design-Build Documents which are in the form of computer
programs and other software, permit their use on any computer on the Site or at
the Sewerage Network and other places as envisaged by the Contract, including
replacements of any computers supplied by the Operator; and
(d) entitle the Owner to make the Design-Build Documents available for inspection
by a prospective bidder who may be involved in the process to select a
Subsequent Operator.
(3) The Owner shall not, without the Operator‘s consent, use, copy or communicate the
Design-Build Documents to a Third Party by, or on behalf of, the Owner for
purposes other than those permitted under GC Section 6.1(2).
6.2. Confidentiality
(1) The Operator shall keep confidential and shall not, without the written consent of
the Owner, divulge to any Third Party any documents, data or other information
arising directly or indirectly from the performance of Services under the Contract,
whether such information has been furnished prior to, during or following
termination of the Contract. Notwithstanding this GC Section 6.2(1), the Operator
may furnish to its Sub-Contractors such documents, data and other information to
the extent required for the Sub-Contractors to perform their work under the
Contract, in which event the Operator shall obtain from such Sub-Contractors an
undertaking of confidentiality similar to that imposed on the Operator under this GC
Section 6.2(1).
(2) The Operator shall not use such documents, data and other information received
from the Owner for any purpose other than the Services as are required for the
performance of the Contract. The Operator shall not publish, permit to be
published, or disclose any particulars of the Services, Site or Sewerage Network in
any trade or technical paper or advertising materials without the prior written
consent of the Owner.

Page 137 of 385

(3) The obligations of the Operator under GC Sections 6.2(1) and 6.2(2), shall not apply
to that information which,
(a) now or hereafter enters the public domain through no fault of the Operator;
(b) can be proven to have been possessed by the Operator at the time of disclosure
and which was not previously obtained, directly or indirectly, from the Owner;
or
(c) otherwise lawfully becomes available to the Operator from a Third Party that
has no obligation of confidentiality.

Page 138 of 385

ARTICLE 7. CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION AND
SUPERVISION DURING THE DESIGN-BUILD
AND OPERATIONS PERIODS
7.1. General
The Parties acknowledge that two separate approaches to contract administration and
supervision will be in place during the Contract Term as follows:
(a) from the Effective Date until the Operations Starting Date, the Design-Build
Supervision approach will be put in place by the Owner; and
(b) from the Operations Starting Date until the End Date, the Operations
Supervision approach will be put in place by the Owner.
7.2. Design-Build Supervision
7.2.1. Supervision during the Design-Build Period
GC Section 7.2 shall apply only during the Design-Build Period.
7.2.2. Design-Build Engineer‘s Duties and Authority (Design-Build Period)
(1) The Owner shall appoint the Design-Build Engineer who shall be responsible for
day to day contract management and supervision during the Design-Build Period.
The Design-Build Engineer‘s staff shall include suitably qualified engineers and
other professionals who are competent to carry out these duties.
(2) The Design-Build Engineer shall have no authority to amend the Contract.
(3) Except, as specifically provided otherwise in the Contract, the Design-Build
Engineer may exercise the authority attributable to the Design-Build Engineer as
specified in or necessarily to be implied from the Contract. The Owner undertakes
not to impose further constraints on the Design-Build Engineer‘s authority, except
as agreed with the Operator.
(4) If the Design-Build Engineer is obligated to obtain the approval of the Owner before
exercising a specific authority, these restrictions shall be set out in the SCC. If the
Design-Build Engineer exercises a specified authority for which the Owner‘s
approval is required then, for the purposes of the Contract, the Owner shall be
deemed to have given approval.
(5) Except as otherwise stated in the Contract,
(a) if the Design-Build Engineer carries out duties or exercises authority, specified
in or implied by the Contract, the Design-Build Engineer shall be deemed to act
for the Owner;
(b) the Design-Build Engineer has no authority to relieve any Party of any duties,
obligations or responsibilities under the Contract; and
(c) any approval, check, certificate, consent, examination, inspection, instruction,
notice, proposal, request, test or similar act by the Design-Build Engineer,
including absence of disapproval, shall not relieve the Operator from any
responsibility it has under the Contract, including responsibility for errors,
omissions, discrepancies and non-compliances.

Page 139 of 385

7.2.3. Delegation by the Design-Build Engineer
(1) The Design-Build Engineer may from time to time assign duties and delegate
authority to assistants, and may also revoke such assignment or delegation. These
assistants may include a resident engineer, or independent inspectors appointed to
inspect or test items of Plant or Equipment. The assignment, delegation or
revocation shall be in writing and shall not take effect until copies have been
received by both Parties. Unless otherwise agreed by both Parties, the Design-Build
Engineer shall not delegate the authority to determine any matter in accordance with
GC Section 7.2.6.
(2) Assistants shall be suitably qualified persons, who are competent to carry out these
duties and exercise this authority, and who are fluent in the language for
communications defined in GC Section 1.3.1.
(3) Each assistant, to whom duties have been assigned or authority has been delegated,
shall only be authorized to issue instructions to the Operator to the extent defined by
the delegation. Any approval, check, certificate, consent, examination, inspection,
instruction, notice, proposal, request, test, or similar act by an assistant, in
accordance with the delegation, shall have the same effect as though the act had
been an act of the Design-Build Engineer. However,
(a) any failure to disapprove any work or Plant and Equipment shall not constitute
approval, and shall therefore not prejudice the right of the Design-Build
Engineer to reject the work or the Plant and Equipment; and
(b) if the Operator questions any determination or instruction of an assistant, the
Operator may refer the matter to the Design-Build Engineer, who shall promptly
confirm, reverse or vary the determination or instruction.
7.2.4. Instructions of the Design-Build Engineer
(1) The Design-Build Engineer may issue to the Operator, at any time during the
Design-Build Period, instructions which may be necessary for the execution of the
Design-Build Services and the remedying of any defects, all in accordance with the
Contract. The Operator shall only take instructions from the Design-Build
Engineer, or from an assistant to whom the appropriate authority has been delegated
under GC Section 10.1.
(2) The Operator shall comply with the instructions given by the Design-Build Engineer
or delegated assistant, on any matter related to the Contract. These instructions
shall be given in writing.
7.2.5. Replacement of the Design-Build Engineer
If the Owner intends to replace the Design-Build Engineer, the Owner shall, not less
than 42 days before the intended date of replacement, give notice to the Operator of the
name, address and relevant experience of the intended replacement Design-Build
Engineer. The Owner shall not replace the Design-Build Engineer with a person against
whom the Operator raises reasonable objection by notice to the Owner, with supporting
particulars.

Page 140 of 385

7.2.6. Determinations by the Design-Build Engineer
(1) Whenever the Contract provides that the Design-Build Engineer shall proceed in
accordance with this GC Section 7.2.6 to agree or determine any matter, the Design-
Build Engineer shall consult with each Party in an endeavour to reach agreement. If
agreement is not achieved, the Design-Build Engineer shall make a fair
determination in accordance with the Contract, taking due regard of all relevant
circumstances.
(2) The Design-Build Engineer shall give notice to the Parties of each agreement or
determination, with supporting particulars. Each Party shall give effect to each
agreement or determination unless and until revised under GC Section 1.9.
7.3. Operations Supervision
7.3.1. Supervision during the Operations Period
This GC Section 7.3 shall apply only during the Operations Period and the period of
time immediately after the End Date solely for the purpose of resolving transition issues
and any outstanding issues arising during the Operations Period.
7.3.2. The Owner shall appoint its Representative for supervision of the ―Operations‘ during
the O & M period of 10 years in accordance with SCC clause 8.1.1 (1) (b).

Page 141 of 385

ARTICLE 8. REPRESENTATIVES, STAFF AND
SUBCONTRACTING
8.1. Representatives
8.1.1. Owner‘s Representative
(1) The Owner‘s representative (the ―Owner‘s Representative‖) shall be as
follows:
(a) during the Design-Build Period, the Owner‘s Representative shall
be the Design-Build Engineer; and
(b) during the Operations Period, the Owner‘s Representative shall be
the as mentioned in SCC
(2) The Owner shall name its representative,
(a) no later than 14 days after the Effective Date for the Design-Build
Engineer; and
(3) The Owner may change its representative from time to time and shall
give notice of the change without delay. The Owner shall not change
its representative at a time and in such a manner as to impede the
progress of either the Design-Build Services or the Operations
Services.
(4) The Owner‘s Representative shall represent and act for the Owner at
all times during the performance of the Contract. All notices,
instructions, orders, certificates, approvals and all other
communications under the Contract by the Owner shall be given by the
Design-Build Engineer as applicable, except as herein otherwise
provided.
(5) All notices, instructions, information and other communications given
by the Operator to the Owner under the Contract shall be given to the
Design-Build Engineer as applicable, except as herein otherwise
provided.
8.1.2. Operator‘s Representative
(1) If the Operator‘s representative is not named in the SCC, the Operator
shall name its representative (the ―Operator‘s Representative‖) no later
than 14 days after the Effective Date and shall request the Owner to
approve the proposed Operator‘s Representative. If the Owner makes
no objection to the proposed Operator‘s Representative, the Operator‘s
Representative shall be deemed to have been approved.
(2) If the Owner objects to the proposed Operator‘s Representative before
the expiration of 14 days after the proposal, the Operator shall propose
a replacement no later than 14 days after receiving the Owner‘s
objection and reasons for the objection and GC Section 8.1.2(1) shall
apply to the proposed replacement.

Page 142 of 385

 (3) The Operator‘s Representative shall represent and act for the Operator
at all times during the performance of the Contract. All notices,
instructions, orders, certificates, approvals and all other
communications under the Contract by the Operator shall be given by
the Operator‘s Representative, except as herein otherwise provided.
(4) All notices, instructions, information, and other communications given
by the Owner to the Operator under the Contract shall be given to the
Operator‘s Representative as established pursuant to this GC Section
8.1.2.
(5) The Operator shall not revoke the appointment of the Operator‘s
Representative without the Owner‘s prior written consent, which shall
not be unreasonably withheld. If the Owner consents thereto, the
Operator shall appoint some other person as the Operator‘s
Representative, pursuant to the procedure set out in this GC Section
8.1.2.
(6) The Operator‘s Representative may, subject to the approval of the
Owner, which shall not be unreasonably withheld, at any time delegate
to any person any of the powers, functions and authorities vested in
him or her. Any such delegation may be revoked at any time. Any
such delegation or revocation shall be subject to a prior notice signed
by the Operator‘s Representative, and shall specify the powers,
functions and authorities thereby delegated or revoked. No such
delegation or revocation shall take effect unless and until a copy
thereof has been delivered to the Owner and the Design-Build
Engineer.
(7) Any act or exercise by any person of powers, functions and authorities
so delegated to him or her in accordance with GC Section 8.1.2(6)
shall be deemed to be an act or exercise by the Operator‘s
Representative.
8.2. Operator‟s Superintendence
(1) Throughout the term of the Contract, the Operator shall provide all
necessary superintendence to plan, arrange, direct, manage, inspect and
test the Services.
(2) Superintendence shall be given by a sufficient number of persons
having adequate knowledge of the language for communications as set
out in the SCC and of the operations to be carried out, including the
methods and techniques required, the hazards likely to be encountered
and methods of preventing accidents, for the satisfactory and safe
execution of the Services.
(3) The Operator‘s Representative shall appoint a suitable person as
construction or operations manager as applicable (the ―Manager‖).
The Manager shall supervise all work done at the Site and Sewerage
Network by the Operator and shall be present at the Site or Sewerage
Network through normal working hours except when on leave, sick or
absence connected with the proper performance of the Contract.
Whenever the Manager is absent from the Site Sewerage Network, a
suitable person shall be appointed to act as his or her deputy.
Page 143 of 385
8.3. Operator‟s Personnel
(1) The Operator shall provide and employ on the Site for the performance
of the Services such skilled, semi-skilled and unskilled labour as is
necessary for the proper and timely execution of the Contract (the
―Operator‘s Personnel‖). The Operator is encouraged to use local
labour that has the necessary skills. The Operator shall provide all
expertise needed to carry out the Services including the Key Staff with
the expertise specified in the SCC for the design build services.
(2) Unless otherwise provided in the Contract, the Operator shall be
responsible for the recruitment, employment, transportation,
accommodation and catering of all labour, local or expatriate, required
for the execution of the Contract and for all payments in connection
therewith.
(3) The Operator shall be responsible for obtaining all necessary permits
and visas from the appropriate authorities for the entry of all labour
and personnel to be employed on the Site into the Country.
(4) The Operator shall at its own expense provide the means of
repatriation to all of its and its Sub Contractor‘s personnel employed
on the Contract at the Site to their various home countries. It shall also
provide suitable temporary maintenance of all such persons from the
cessation of their employment on the Contract to the date programmed
for their departure. In the event that the Operator defaults in providing
such means of transportation and temporary maintenance, the Owner
may provide the same to such personnel and recover the cost of doing
so from the Operator.
(5) The Operator shall at all times during the progress of the Contract use
its best endeavours to prevent any unlawful, riotous or disorderly
conduct or behaviour by or amongst its employees and the labour of its
Sub Contractors.
(6) The Operator shall, in all dealings with its labour and the labour of its
Sub-Contractors currently employed on or connected with the
Contract, pay due regard to all recognized festivals, official holidays,
religious or other customs and all local laws and regulations pertaining
to the employment of labour.
8.4. Replacement of Operator‟s Personnel
The Owner or Design-Build Engineer may require the Operator to remove
and replace any member of the Operator‘s Personnel who,
(a) persists in any misconduct or lack of care;
(b) carries out duties incompetently or negligently;
(c) fails to comply with any provision of the Contract; or
(d) persists in any conduct which gives the Owner reasonable cause to
be dissatisfied with him or her.
8.5. Existing Staff
If the Operator is obliged to retain staff employed by the Owner as stated
in the SCC, it shall do so in accordance with the Existing Staff Schedule.

Page 144 of 385

8.6. Sub-Contractors
(1) The Operator shall not enter into any contract or contracts that will
result in the Operator exceeding the maximum percentage of
subcontracting permitted by the Owner in respect of the Design-Build
Services and the Operations Services, as set out in the Bidding
Documents.
(2) Except with respect to the Sub Contractors named in the Operator‘s
Bid, the Operator shall not enter into a contract with any Sub
Contractor without the prior consent of the Owner.
(3) The Operator shall be responsible for the observance by Sub-
Contractors of the terms and conditions of the Contract and shall
ensure that all relevant terms of the Contract are included in the
Operator‘s contracts with Sub-Contractors.
(4) Subcontracting by the Operator shall not relieve the Operator of any of
its obligations under the Contract and the Operator shall be responsible
for the acts, omissions and defaults of all Sub-Contractors, and the
Sub-Contractors, employees, agents and sub-Sub-Contractors, as fully
as if they were acts, omissions or defaults of the Operator or the
Operator‘s Personnel.

Page 145 of 385

ARTICLE 9. LIABILITY AND RISK
DISTRIBUTION
9.1. Deleted
9.2. Limitation of Liability
Except in cases of criminal negligence or wilful misconduct,
(a) the Operator shall not be liable to the Owner in contract, tort, or
otherwise, for any indirect or consequential loss or damage, loss
of use, loss of production, or loss of profits of interest costs,
provided that this exclusion shall not apply to any obligation of
the Operator to pay liquidated damages to the Owner; and
(b) the aggregate liability of the Operator to the Owner, whether
under the Contract, in tort or otherwise, shall not exceed the
aggregate of the total Contract Price (including the Monthly
payment during the Operations Period) and the total available
Performance Incentive Compensation, provided that this
limitation shall not apply to any obligation of the Operator to
indemnify the Owner with respect to patent infringement.
9.3. Transfer of Ownership and Existing Equipment and Materials
9.3.1. Transfer of Ownership
(1) Ownership of the Plant and Equipment, including spare parts, to be
imported into the Country shall be transferred to the Owner upon
delivery at the Site.
(2) Ownership of the Plant and Equipment procured in the Country shall
be transferred to the Owner when the Plant and Equipment are
brought on to the Site.
(3) Ownership of any Plant and Equipment in excess of the requirements
of the Sewerage Network shall revert to the Operator upon
Completion of the Sewerage Network or such earlier time if the
Owner and the Operator agree that the Plant and Equipment in
question are no longer required for the Sewerage Network.
(4) Subject to GC Section 9.3.1(5), ownership of the Operator's
Equipment (Design-Build) and Operator's Equipment (Operations),
including spare parts, shall remain with the Operator or its Sub-
Contractors.
(5) The Owner may, in its sole discretion, purchase as of the End Date
any of the Operator‘s Equipment (Operations), including spare parts,
at the fair market value of such Operator‘s Equipment (Operations) as
determined by an independent valuator and the Operator shall transfer
ownership and possession of such Operator‘s Equipment (Operations)
to the Owner as of the End Date.

Page 146 of 385

 (6) Notwithstanding the transfer of ownership of the Plant and
Equipment, the responsibility for care and custody of the Plant and
Equipment, Operator's Equipment (Design-Build) and Operator's
Equipment (Operations), together with the risk of loss or damage
thereto, shall remain with the Operator pursuant to GC Section 9.4
until the End Date.
9.3.2. (Existing Equipment and Materials) Deleted
9.4. Care of the Site and Sewerage Network
(1) Except as provided in GC Sections 9.9 and 9.4(2), the Operator shall
be responsible for the care and custody of the Site and Sewerage
Network or any part thereof until the End Date and shall make good
at its own cost any loss or damage that may occur to the Site or
Sewerage Network from any cause whatsoever during such period.
The Operator shall also be responsible for any loss or damage to the
Site or Sewerage Network caused by the Operator or its Sub
Contractors in the course of any work carried out, pursuant to GC
Section 9.1.
(2) If any loss or damage occurs to the Site or Sewerage Network or any
part thereof by reason of,
(a) insofar as they relate to the Country, nuclear reaction, nuclear
radiation, radioactive contamination, pressure wave caused by
aircraft or other aerial objects, or any other occurrences that an
experienced Operator or operator could not reasonably foresee, or
if reasonably foreseeable could not reasonably make provision for
or insure against, insofar as such risks are not normally insurable
on the insurance market and are mentioned in the general
exclusions of the policy of insurance, including War Risks, taken
out under GC Section 9.6;
(b) any use or occupation by the Owner or any Third Party, other
than a Sub-Contractor, authorized by the Owner of any part of the
Site or Sewerage Network; or
(c) any use of or reliance upon any design, data or specification
provided or designated by or on behalf of the Owner, or any such
matter for which the Operator has disclaimed responsibility
herein,

Page 147 of 385

 the Owner shall pay to the Operator all sums payable in respect of
the Site executed, notwithstanding that the same be lost,
destroyed or damaged. If the Owner requests the Operator in
writing to make good any loss or damage to the Plant thereby
occasioned, the Operator shall make good the same at the cost of
the Owner in accordance with GC Section [Link] the Owner does
not request the Operator in writing to make good any loss or
damage to the Sewerage Network thereby occasioned, the Owner
shall either request a change in accordance with GC Section 10.1,
excluding the performance of that part of the Sewerage Network
thereby lost, destroyed or damaged, or, where the loss or damage
affects a substantial part of the Sewerage Network, the Owner
shall terminate the Contract pursuant to GC Section 11.2.1.
(3) The Operator shall be liable for any loss of or damage to any
Operator's Equipment (Design-Build), Operator's Equipment
(Operations) or any other property of the Operator used or intended to
be used for purposes of the Site or the Sewerage Network, except
where such loss or damage arises by reason of any of the matters
specified in GC Sections 9.4(2)(b) and 9.9.
(4) With respect to any loss or damage caused to the Sewerage Network
or any part thereof, the Operator's Equipment (Design-Build) or the
Operator's Equipment (Operations) by reason of any of the matters
specified in GC Section 9.9(1), the provisions of GC Section 9.9(3)
shall apply.
9.5. Indemnification
(1) Subject to GC Section 9.5(5), the Operator shall indemnify and hold
harmless the Owner and its employees and officers from and against
any and all suits, actions or administrative proceedings, claims,
demands, losses, damages, costs, and expenses of whatsoever nature,
including attorney‘s fees and expenses, in respect of the death or
injury of any person or loss of or damage to any property, arising in
connection with the Operator‘s performance of the Services and by
reason of the negligence of the Operator or its Sub-Contractors, or
their employees, officers or agents, except any injury, death or
property damage caused by the negligence of the Owner, its
Operators, employees, officers or agents.
(2) If any proceedings are brought or any claim is made against the
Owner that might subject the Operator to liability under GC Section
9.5(1), the Owner shall promptly give the Operator a notice thereof
and the Operator may at its own expense and in the Owner‘s name
conduct such proceedings or claim and any negotiations for the
settlement of any such proceedings or claim.

Page 148 of 385

 (3) If the Operator fails to notify the Owner prior to the expiration of 30
days after receipt of a notice given pursuant to GC Section 9.5(2) that
it intends to conduct any such proceedings or claim, then the Owner
shall be free to conduct the same on its own behalf. Unless the
Operator has so failed to notify the Owner within the 30 day period,
the Owner shall make no admission that may be prejudicial to the
defence of any such proceedings or claim.
(4) The Owner shall, at the Operator‘s request, provide all available
assistance to the Operator in conducting such proceedings or claim,
and shall be reimbursed by the Operator for all reasonable expenses
incurred in so doing.
(5) The Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless the Operator and its
employees, officers and SubContractors from any liability for loss of
or damage to property of the Owner that is caused by fire, explosion
or any other perils, in excess of the amount recoverable from
insurances procured under GC Section 9.6, provided that such fire,
explosion or other perils were not caused by any act or omission of
the Operator.
(6) The Party entitled to the benefit of an indemnity under this GC
Section 9.5 shall take all reasonable measures to mitigate any loss or
damage which has occurred. If the Party fails to take such measures,
the other Party‘s liabilities shall be correspondingly reduced.
9.6. Insurance
The Insurance to be provided by the operator during his entire duration of
Contract Term has been specified in SCC.
9.7. Unforeseeable Physical Conditions
(1) In this GC Section 9.7, ―physical conditions‖ means natural physical
conditions and man-made and other physical obstructions and
pollutants, which the Operator encounters at the Site when performing
of the Design-Build Services, including sub-surface and hydrological
conditions but excluding climatic conditions.
(2) If the Operator encounters adverse physical conditions which it
considers to have been Unforeseeable, the Operator shall give notice
to the Design-Build Engineer as soon as practicable.
(3) The Operator‘s Notice pursuant to GC Section 9.7(2) shall describe
the physical conditions, so that they can be inspected by the Design-
Build Engineer, and shall set out the reasons why the Operator
considers them to be Unforeseeable. The Operator shall continue
performing the Design-Build Services, using such proper and
reasonable measures as are appropriate for the physical conditions,
and shall comply with any instructions which the Design-Build
Engineer may give. If an instruction constitutes a Change GC Section
10.1.3 shall apply.

Page 149 of 385

 (4) If and to the extent that the Operator encounters physical conditions
which are Unforeseeable, gives the notice required by GC Section
9.7(2), and suffers delay or incurs Cost due to these conditions, the
Operator shall be entitled subject to GC Section 1.9 to,
(a) an extension of time for any such delay, if completion is or will
be delayed, under GC Section 2.3.4; and
(b) payment of any such Cost, which shall be included in the
Contract Price.
(5) After receiving such notice and inspecting or investigating these
physical conditions, the Design-Build Engineer shall proceed in
accordance with GC Section 7.2.6 to agree or determine,
(a) whether and to what extent these physical conditions were
Unforeseeable; and
(b) the amount of delay or Cost, if any, pursuant to GC Section
9.7(4).
(6) Before additional Cost is finally agreed or determined under GC
Section 9.7(5), the Design-Build Engineer, pursuant to GC Section
7.2.6, may also review whether other physical conditions were more
favourable than could reasonably have been foreseen when the
Operator submitted the Bid. If and to the extent that these more
favourable conditions were encountered, the Design-Build Engineer
may proceed in accordance with GC Section 7.2.6 to agree or
determine the reductions in Cost which were due to these conditions,
which may be included, as deductions, in the Contract Price. The net
effect of all adjustments under GC Section 9.7(4)(b) and all these
reductions, for all the physical conditions encountered on the Site,
shall not result in a net reduction in the Contract Price.
(7) The Design-Build Engineer may take account of any evidence of the
physical conditions foreseen by the Operator when submitting the
Bid, which may be made available by the Operator, but shall not be
bound by any such evidence.
9.8. Force Majeure
(1) ―Force Majeure‖ shall mean any event,
(a) beyond the reasonable control of the Owner or of the Operator, as
the case may be; and
(b) which is unavoidable notwithstanding the reasonable care of the
Party affected.
(2) Force Majeure shall include the events listed below in this GC Section
9.8(2) if the conditions set out in GC Section 9.8(1)(a) and (b) are
satisfied:
(a) war, hostilities or warlike operations, whether a state of war be
declared or not, invasion, act of foreign enemy and civil war;
(b) rebellion, revolution, insurrection, mutiny, usurpation of civil or
military government, conspiracy, riot, civil commotion and
terrorist acts;

Page 150 of 385

 (c) confiscation, nationalization, mobilization, commandeering or
requisition by or under the order of any government or de jure or
de facto authority or ruler or any other act or failure to act of any
local state or national government authority;
(d) strike, sabotage, lockout, embargo, import restriction, port
congestion, lack of usual means of public transportation and
communication, industrial dispute, shipwreck, shortage or
restriction of power supply, epidemics, quarantine and plague;
(e) earthquake, landslide, volcanic activity, fire, flood or inundation,
tidal wave, typhoon or cyclone, hurricane, storm, lightning, or
other inclement weather condition, nuclear and pressure waves or
other natural or physical disaster; and
(f) shortage of labour, materials or utilities where caused by
circumstances that are themselves Force Majeure.
(3) If the Parties are prevented, hindered or delayed from or in performing
any of their obligations under the Contract by an event of Force
Majeure, then it shall notify the other in writing of the occurrence of
such event and the circumstances thereof within 14 days after the
occurrence of such event.
(4) The Party who has given such notice shall be excused from the
performance or punctual performance of its obligations under the
Contract for so long as the relevant event of Force Majeure continues
and to the extent that such Party‘s performance is prevented, hindered
or delayed. The Time for Completion shall be extended in accordance
with GC Section 2.3.4(1) for events of Force Majeure during the
Design-Build Period. If the Time for Completion is extended in
accordance with GC Section 2.3.4(1), the End Date shall be extended
for a period of time equal to the period of time during which the
relevant event of Force Majeure continued.
(5) The Party or Parties affected by the event of Force Majeure shall use
reasonable efforts to mitigate the effect thereof upon its or their
performance of the Contract and to fulfil its or their obligations under
the Contract, but without prejudice to either Party‘s right to terminate
the Contract under GC Sections 9.8(7) and 9.9(6).
(6) No delay or non-performance by either Party hereto caused by the
occurrence of any event of Force Majeure shall,
(a) constitute a default or breach of the Contract; or
(b) subject to GC Sections 9.4(2), 9.9(3) and 9.9(5), give rise to any
claim for damages or additional Cost occasioned thereby,
if and to the extent that such delay or non-performance is caused by the
occurrence of an event of Force Majeure.

Page 151 of 385

 (7) If the performance of the Contract is substantially prevented, hindered
or delayed for a single period of more than 60 days or an aggregate
period of more than 120 days on account of one or more events of
Force Majeure during the term of the Contract, the Parties will attempt
to develop a mutually satisfactory solution, failing which either Party
may terminate the Contract by giving a notice to the other, but without
prejudice to either Party‘s right to terminate the Contract under GC
Section 9.9(6).
(8) In the event of termination pursuant to GC Section 9.8(7), the rights
and obligations of the Owner and the Operator shall be as specified in
GC Sections 11.2.1(2) and 11.2.2(1).
(9) Notwithstanding GC Section 9.8(6), Force Majeure shall not apply to
any obligation of the Owner to make payments to the Operator herein.
9.9. War Risks
(1) ―War Risks‖ shall mean any event specified in GC Section 9.8(2)(a)
and (b) and any explosion or impact of any mine, bomb, shell,
grenade or other projectile, missile, munitions or explosive of war,
occurring or existing in or near the Country.
(2) Notwithstanding anything contained in the Contract, the Operator
shall have no liability whatsoever for or with respect to,
(a) destruction of or damage to the Site and Plant and Equipment or
any part thereof;
(b) destruction of or damage to property of the Owner or any Third
Party; or
(c) injury or loss of life,
if such destruction, damage, injury or loss of life is caused by any War
Risks, and the Owner shall indemnify and hold the Operator harmless from
and against any and all claims, liabilities, actions, lawsuits, damages, costs,
charges or expenses arising in consequence of or in connection with the
same.
(3) If the Site, Sewerage Network or any Plant and Equipment, Operator's
Equipment (Design-Build), Operator's Equipment (Operations) or any
other property of the Operator used or intended to be used for the
purposes of the Services sustains destruction or damage by reason of
any War Risks, the Owner shall pay the Operator for,
(a) any part of the Sewerage Network or the Plant and Equipment so
destroyed or damaged, to the extent not already paid for by the
Owner;
(b) replacing or making good any Operator's Equipment (Design-
Build), Operator's Equipment (Operations) or other property of
the Operator so destroyed or damaged; and
(c) so far as may be required by the Owner, and as may be necessary
for completion of the Services, replacing or making good any
such destruction or damage to the Site, Sewerage Network or the
Plant and Equipment or any part thereof.

Page 152 of 385

 (4) If the Owner does not require the Operator to replace or make good
any such destruction or damage to the Site or Sewerage Network, the
Owner shall either request a Change in accordance with GC Section
10.1 excluding the performance of that part of the Sewerage Network
thereby destroyed or damaged or, where the loss, destruction or
damage affects a substantial part of the Site or Sewerage Network,
shall terminate the Contract, pursuant to GC Section 11.2.1.
(5) Notwithstanding anything contained in the Contract, the Owner shall
pay the Operator for any increased Costs that are in any way
attributable to, consequent on, resulting from, or in any way
connected with any War Risks, if the Operator notifies the Owner in
writing of any such increased Cost as soon as practicable.
(6) If, during the term of the Contract, any War Risks occur that
financially or otherwise materially affect the execution of the
Contract by the Operator, the Operator shall use its reasonable efforts
to execute the Contract with due and proper consideration given to the
safety of its and its Sub-Contractors‘ personnel engaged in the work
on the Services. If the execution of the Services becomes impossible
or is substantially prevented for a single period of more than 60 days
or an aggregate period of more than 120 days on account of any War
Risks, the Parties will attempt to develop a mutually satisfactory
solution, failing which either Party may terminate the Contract by
giving a notice to the other.
(7) In the event of termination pursuant to GC Section 9.9(4) or 9.9(6),
the rights and obligations of the Owner and the Operator shall be as
specified in GC Section 11.2.1(2) and 11.2.2(1).
9.10. Change in Laws and Regulations
If, after a date which is 30 days prior to the Submission Deadline in the
Bidding Documents, in the Country, any law, regulation, ordinance, order
or by-law having the force of law is enacted, promulgated, abrogated or
changed, which shall be deemed to include any change in interpretation or
application by the competent authorities, that subsequently affects the costs
and expenses of the Operator or the Time for Completion, the Contract
Price shall be correspondingly increased or decreased, or the Time for
Completion shall be reasonably adjusted to the extent that the Operator has
thereby been affected in the performance of any of its obligations under the
Contract. Notwithstanding the foregoing, such additional or reduced costs
shall not be separately paid or credited if the same has already been
accounted for in the Contract Price adjustment provisions where
applicable, in accordance with the SCC if so provided.
9.11. Patent Indemnity
9.11.1. Indemnity by Operator
The Operator shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and its
employees and officers from and against any and all suits, actions or
administrative proceedings, claims, demands, losses, damages, costs, and
Page 153 of 385
 expenses of whatsoever nature, including attorney‘s fees and expenses,
which the Owner may suffer as a result of any infringement or alleged
infringement by the Operator, Sub-Contractors, or their employees, agents,
or representatives, of any patent, utility model, registered design,
trademark, copyright or other intellectual property right registered or
otherwise existing.
9.11.2. Notice of Claim
(1) If any proceedings are brought or any claim is made against the
Owner arising out of the matters referred to in GC Section 9.11.1, the
Owner shall promptly give the Operator a notice thereof, and the
Operator may at its own expense and in the Owner‘s name conduct
such proceedings or claim and any negotiations for the settlement of
any such proceedings or claim.
(2) If the Operator fails to notify the Owner no later than 30 days after
receipt of such notice that it intends to conduct any such proceedings
or claim, then the Owner shall be free to conduct the same on its own
behalf. Unless the Operator has so failed to notify the Owner no later
than the 30 day period, the Owner shall make no admission that may
be prejudicial to the defence of any such proceedings or claim.
(3) The Owner shall, at the Operator‘s request, give all available
assistance to the Operator in conducting such proceedings or claim,
and shall be reimbursed by the Operator for all reasonable expenses
incurred in so doing.
9.11.3. Indemnity by Owner
The Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless the Operator and its
employees, officers and Sub-Contractors from and against any and all
suits, actions or administrative proceedings, claims, demands, losses,
damages, costs, and expenses of whatsoever nature, including attorney‘s
fees and expenses, which the Operator may suffer as a result of any
infringement or alleged infringement by the Owner of any patent, utility
model, registered design, trademark, copyright or other intellectual
property right registered or otherwise existing at the Effective Date arising
out of or in connection with any design, data, drawing, specification, or
other documents or materials provided or designed by or on behalf of the
Owner.
9.12. Functional Guarantees
(1) The Operator guarantees that during the Tests and Inspection set out
in DBSS Article 5, the Sewerage Network and all parts thereof shall
attain the Functional Guarantees as required.

Page 154 of 385

 (2) If, for reasons attributable to the Operator, the minimum level of the
Functional Guarantees are not met either in whole or in part, the
Operator shall at its cost and expense make any such changes,
modifications or additions to the Sewerage Network or any part
thereof as may be necessary to meet at least the minimum level of the
Functional Guarantees. The Operator shall notify the Owner upon
completion of the necessary changes, modifications or additions, and
shall request the Owner to repeat the applicable Tests and Inspection
until the minimum level of the Functional Guarantees has been met.
If the Operator eventually fails to meet the minimum level of
Functional Guarantees, the Owner may consider termination of the
Contract, pursuant to GC Section 11.2.3.
(3) If, for any reasons attributable to the Operator, the Functional
Guarantees are not attained either in whole or in part, but the
minimum level of the Functional Guarantees is met, the Operator
shall, at the Operator‘s option, either
(a) make such changes, modifications or additions to the Sewerage
Network or any part thereof that are necessary to attain the
Functional Guarantees at its cost and expense, and shall request
the Owner to repeat the Tests and Inspection; or
(b) pay liquidated damages to the Owner in respect of the failure to
meet the Functional Guarantees in accordance with the provisions
of the Liquidated Damages.
The payment of liquidated damages under GC Section 9.12(3) up to the
limitation of liability specified in the SCC, shall completely satisfy the
Operator‘s guarantees under GC Section 9.12(3), and the Operator shall
have no further liability whatsoever to the Owner in respect thereof.

Page 155 of 385

ARTICLE 10. CHANGE IN CONTRACT ELEMENTS
10.1. Change to the Design-Build Services
10.1.1. Introducing a Change
(1) Subject to GC Sections 10.1.2(6) and 10.1.2(10), the Owner shall
have the right to propose, and subsequently require, that the Design-
Build Engineer order the Operator from time to time during the
performance of the Contract to make any change, modification,
addition or deletion to, in or from the Design-Build Services (the
―Change‖), provided that such Change falls within the general scope
of the Design-Build Services and does not constitute unrelated work
and that it is technically practicable, taking into account both the state
of advancement of the Design-Build Services and the technical
compatibility of the Change envisaged with the nature of the Design-
Build Services as specified in the Contract.
(2) The Operator may from time to time during its performance of the
Contract propose to the Owner, with a copy to the Design-Build
Engineer, any Change that the Operator considers necessary or
desirable to improve the quality, efficiency or safety of the Design-
Build Services. The Owner may at its discretion approve or reject
any Change proposed by the Operator.
(3) Notwithstanding GC Section 10.1.1(1) and 10.1.1(2), no change made
necessary because of any default of the Operator in the performance
of its obligations under the Contract shall be deemed to be a Change,
and such change shall not result in any adjustment of the Contract
Price or the Time for Completion.
(4) The procedure on how to proceed with and execute Changes is
specified in GC Section 10.1.2 and 10.1.3, and the Design-Build
Engineer shall provide Operator with further details and sample forms
on the Change procedures prior to the Design-Build Starting Date.
10.1.2. Changes Originating from Owner
(1) If the Owner proposes a Change pursuant to GC Section 10.1.1(1), it
shall send to the Operator a ―Request for Change Proposal,‖ requiring
the Operator to prepare and furnish to the Design-Build Engineer as
soon as reasonably practicable a ―Change Proposal,‖ which shall
include the following:
(a) brief description of the Change;
(b) effect on the Time for Completion;
(c) estimated cost of the Change; and
(d) effect on any other provisions of the Contract.
(2) Prior to preparing and submitting the Change Proposal, the Operator
shall submit to the Design-Build Engineer an ―Estimate for Change
Proposal,‖ which shall be an estimate of the cost of preparing and
submitting the Change Proposal.
(3) Upon receipt of the Operator‘s Estimate for Change Proposal, the
Owner shall,
Page 156 of 385
 (a) accept the Operator‘s estimate with instructions to the Operator to
proceed with the preparation of the Change Proposal;
(b) advise the Operator of any part of its Estimate for Change
Proposal that is unacceptable and request the Operator to review
its estimate; or
(c) advise the Operator that the Owner does not intend to proceed
with the Change.
(4) Upon receipt of the Owner‘s instruction to proceed under GC Section
10.1.2(3)(a) (the ―Change Order‖), the Operator shall, with proper
expedition, proceed with the preparation of the Change Proposal, in
accordance with GC Section 10.1.2(1).
(5) The pricing of any Change shall, as far as practicable, be calculated in
accordance with the prices included in the Contract. If such prices are
inequitable, the Parties thereto shall agree on specific rates for the
valuation of the Change.
(6) If, before or during the preparation of the Change Proposal, it
becomes apparent that the aggregate effect of compliance therewith
and with all other Change Orders that have already become binding
upon the Operator under this GC Section 10.1 would be to increase or
decrease the Contract Price by more than 15 per cent, the Operator
may give a written notice of objection thereto prior to furnishing the
Change Proposal. If the Owner accepts the Operator‘s objection, the
Owner shall withdraw the proposed Change and shall notify the
Operator in writing thereof.
(7) The Operator‘s failure to object pursuant to GC Section 10.1.2(6)
shall neither affect its right to object to any subsequent requested
Changes or Change Orders herein, nor affect its right to take into
account, when making such subsequent objection, the percentage
increase or decrease in the Contract Price that any Change not
objected to by the Operator represents.
(8) Upon receipt of the Change Proposal, the Owner and the Operator
shall mutually agree upon all matters therein contained. No later than
14 days after such agreement, the Owner shall, if it intends to proceed
with the Change, issue the Operator with a Change Order.
(9) If the Owner decides not to proceed with the Change for whatever
reason, it shall notify the Operator prior to the expiration of 14 days
after the agreement on the Change. Under such circumstances, the
Operator shall be entitled to reimbursement of all costs reasonably
incurred by it in the preparation of the Change Proposal, provided
that these do not exceed the amount given by the Operator in its
Estimate for Change Proposal submitted in accordance with GC
Section 10.1.2(2).
(10) If the Owner and the Operator cannot reach agreement on the price
for the Change, an equitable adjustment to the Time for Completion,
or any other matters identified in the Change Proposal, the Owner
may nevertheless instruct the Operator to proceed with the Change
by issue of a ―Pending Agreement Change Order.‖

Page 157 of 385

 (11) Upon receipt of a Pending Agreement Change Order, the Operator
shall immediately proceed with effecting the Changes covered by
such Order. The parties shall thereafter attempt to reach agreement
on the outstanding issues under the Change Proposal.
(12) If the Parties cannot reach agreement prior to the expiration of 60
days after the date of issue of the Pending Agreement Change Order,
then the matter may be referred to the Adjudicator in accordance
with the provisions of GC Section 1.6.1.
10.1.3. Changes Originating from Operator
(1) If the Operator proposes a Change pursuant to GC Section 10.1.1(2),
the Operator shall submit to the Design-Build Engineer a written
―Application for Change Proposal,‖ giving reasons for the proposed
Change and including the information specified in GC Section
10.1.2(1).
(2) Upon receipt of the Application for Change Proposal, the Parties
shall follow the procedures outlined in GC Sections 10.1.2(8) and
10.1.2(10). If the Owner chooses not to proceed, the Operator shall
not be entitled to recover the costs of preparing the Application for
Change Proposal.
10.1.4. Payment in Applicable Currencies
If the Contract provides for payment of the Contract Price in more than one
currency, then whenever a Change is agreed, approved or determined
pursuant to GC Section 10.1.2 or 10.1.3, the amount payable in each of the
applicable currencies shall be specified. For this purpose, reference shall
be made to the actual or expected currency proportions of the Cost of the
Change, and to the proportions of various currencies specified for payment
of the Contract Price.
10.1.5. Design-Build Period
GC Sections 10.1.1 to 10.1.4 shall apply during only the Design-Build
Period.
10.2. Change to the Operations Services
(1) Except as specifically provided in GC Section 10.2(2) or elsewhere
in the Contract, the Operator shall make no claim whatsoever for any
adjustment to the Contract Price during the Operations Period.
(2) The Operator or the Owner may request an adjustment to the
Monthly O & M Payment if the total sewer length to be maintained
exceeds 2% of the total sewer length included originally in the
Contract. In the event of such a change to the volume of sewage, the
Operator or the Owner, as applicable, shall be entitled to receive an
increase or decrease equal to the actual increase or decrease in Cost
demonstrated by the Operator.

Page 158 of 385

ARTICLE 11. SUSPENSION AND TERMINATION
11.1. Suspension
11.1.1. Suspension by the Owner
(1) The Owner may request the Design-Build Engineer, as applicable,
by notice to the Operator, to order the Operator to suspend
performance of any or all of its obligations under the Contract. Such
notice shall specify the obligation of which performance is to be
suspended, the effective date of the suspension and the reasons
therefore. The Operator shall thereupon suspend performance of
such obligation, except those obligations necessary for the care or
preservation of the Site or Sewerage Network, until ordered in
writing to resume such performance by the Design-Build Engineer as
applicable.
(2) If, by virtue of a suspension order given by the Design-Build
Engineer, as applicable, other than by reason of the Operator‘s
default or breach of the Contract, the Operator‘s performance of any
of its obligations is suspended for an aggregate period of more than
90 days, then at any time thereafter and provided that at that time
such performance is still suspended, the Operator may give a notice
to the Design-Build Engineer as applicable, requiring that the Owner
shall, no later than 30 days after the Owner‘s receipt of the notice,
order the resumption of such performance or request and
subsequently order a Change in accordance with GC Section 10.1,
excluding the performance of the suspended obligations from the
Contract.
(3) If the Owner fails to order the resumption of performance in
accordance with GC Section 11.1.1(2), the Operator may, by a
further notice to the Design-Build Engineer, elect to treat the
suspension, where it affects a part only of the Services, as a deletion
of such part in accordance with GC Section 10.1 or, where it affects
the whole of the Services, as termination of the Contract pursuant to
GC Section 11.2.1.
11.1.2. Suspension by the Operator
(1) If, the Owner has,
(a) failed to pay the Operator any sum due under the Contract within
the period specified in the Contract;
(b) failed to approve any invoice or supporting documents without
just cause under the Contract; or
(c) has committed a substantial breach of the Contract,
the Operator may give a notice to the Owner that requires payment of such
sum, with interest thereon as stipulated in GC Section 5.2(3) requires
approval of an invoice or supporting documents, or specifies a breach &
requires the Owner to remedy the same, as the case may be.

Page 159 of 385

 (2) If the Owner fails to pay the sums required by the Operator in
accordance with GC Section 11.1.2(1) or fails to remedy the breach
or take steps to remedy the breach no later than 14 days after receipt
of the Operator‘s notice, then the Operator may, upon giving 30
days‘ notice to the Owner, suspend performance of all or any of its
obligations under the Contract, or, in the case of the Design-Build
Services, reduce the Operator‘s rate of progress.
(3) If the Operator is unable to carry out any of its obligations under the
Contract for any reason attributable to the Owner, including the
Owner‘s failure to provide possession of or access to the Site or
other areas in accordance with GC Section 4.2, then the Operator
may, upon giving 30 days‘ notice to the Owner, suspend
performance of all or any of its obligations under the Contract, or, in
the case of the Design-Build Services, reduce the Operator‘s rate of
progress.
(4) If the Operator‘s performance of its obligations is suspended or the
rate of progress is reduced pursuant to this GC Section 11.1.2, then
the Time for Completion shall be extended in accordance with GC
Section 2.3.4, and additional Costs incurred by the Operator as a
result of such suspension or reduction shall be paid by the Owner to
the Operator in addition to the Contract Price, except in the case of
suspension order or reduction in the rate of progress by reason of the
Operator‘s default or breach of the Contract.
(5) During the period of suspension, the Operator shall not remove from
the Site or Sewerage Network any Plant and Equipment, Operator's
Equipment (Design-Build), Operator's Equipment (Operations), or
any part of the Sewerage Network, without the prior written consent
of the Owner.
11.2. Termination
11.2.1. Termination for Owner‘s Convenience
(1) The Owner may at any time terminate the Contract for any reason by
giving the Operator a notice of termination that refers to this GC
Section 11.2.1(1).
(2) Upon receipt of the notice of termination under GC Section
11.2.1(1),
(a) the Operator shall, either immediately or upon the date specified
in the notice of termination,
(i) cease all further work, except for such work as the Owner
may specify in the notice of termination for the sole
purpose of protecting that part of the Facility already
executed, or any work required to leave the Site in a clean
and safe condition;
(ii) terminate all Subcontracts; and
(iii) remove all Operator‘s Equipment (Design-Build) and,
except if the Owner asserts its rights pursuant to GC
Section 9.3.1(5), Operator‘s Equipment (Operations) from

Page 160 of 385

 the Site, repatriate the Operator‘s Personnel and its Sub-
Contractors‘ personnel from the Site, remove from the Site
any wreckage, rubbish and debris of any kind, and leave the
whole of the Site in a clean and safe condition; and
(b) the Operator, subject to the payment specified in GC Section
11.2.2, shall,
(i) deliver to the Owner the parts of the Sewerage Network
executed by the Operator and all materials which have been
paid for by the Owner up to the date of termination; and
(ii) deliver to the Owner all the Contract Records, including the
Design-Build Documents, prepared by the Operator or its
Sub-Contractors as at the date of termination.
11.2.2. Payment upon Termination by the Owner for Convenience
(1) Upon termination of this Contract pursuant to GC Section 11.2.1, the
Owner shall make only the following payments to the Operator,
(a) any portion of the Contract Price payable to the Operator for
Services satisfactorily performed prior to the date of termination
and calculated as set out in GC Section 5.2;
(b) the Costs reasonably incurred by the Operator in the removal of
the Operator‘s Equipment (Design-Build) and, except if the
Owner asserts its rights pursuant to GC Section 9.3.1(5),
Operator‘s Equipment (Operations) from the Site and in the
repatriation of the Operator‘s Personnel and its Sub--
Contractors‘ personnel;
(c) any amounts required to be paid by the Operator to its Sub-
Contractors in connection with the termination of any
Subcontracts, including any reasonable cancellation charges;
(d) the reasonable Costs incurred by the Operator in protecting the
Site, Existing Facility and Sewerage Network and leaving the
Site in a clean and safe condition pursuant to GC Section
11.2.1(2)(a)(i); and
(e) the reasonable Cost of satisfying all other obligations,
commitments and claims that the Operator may in good faith
have undertaken with Third Parties in connection with the
Contract and that are not covered by GC Section 11.2.2(1).
(2) The Operator acknowledges that the only payments to be made to the
Operator on termination by the Owner are set out in this GC Section
11.2.2. The Operator shall not make a claim for lost or foregone
profits, revenues, consequential damages or any other costs,
damages, expenses or losses of any kind as a result of or in
connection with the termination of this Contract.
11.2.3. Termination for Operator‘s Default
(1) The Owner, without prejudice to any other rights or remedies it may
possess, may terminate the Contract forthwith in the following
circumstances, by giving a notice of termination and its reasons
therefore to the Operator, referring to this GC Section 11.2.3(1):

Page 161 of 385

 (a) If the Operator becomes bankrupt or insolvent, has a receiving
order issued against it, compounds with its creditors, or, if the
Operator is a corporation, a resolution is passed or order is made
for its winding up, other than a voluntary liquidation for the
purposes of amalgamation or reconstruction, a receiver is
appointed over any part of its undertaking or assets, or if the
Operator takes or suffers any other analogous action in
consequence of debt;
(b) If the Operator assigns or transfers the Contract or any right or
interest therein in violation of the provision of GC Section 1.7;
or
(2) If the Operator,
(a) has abandoned or repudiated the Contract;
(b) has without valid reason failed to commence work on the Site or
Sewerage Network promptly or has suspended, other than
pursuant to GC Section 11.1.1(2), the progress of Contract
performance for more than 30 days after receiving a written
instruction from the Owner to proceed;
(c) persistently fails to carry out the Services in accordance with the
Contract or persistently neglects to carry out its obligations
under the Contract without just cause; or
(d) refuses or is unable to provide sufficient materials, services,
labour or personnel to perform the Services,
then the Owner may, without prejudice to any other rights it may possess
under the Contract, give a notice to the Operator stating the nature of the
default and requiring the Operator to remedy the same. If the Operator
fails to remedy or to take steps to remedy the same within 14 days after its
receipt of such notice, then the Owner may terminate the Contract
forthwith by giving a notice of termination to the Operator that refers to
this GC Section 11.2.3(2).
(3) Upon receipt of the notice of termination under GC Sections
11.2.3(1) or 11.2.3(2) the Operator shall, either immediately or upon
such date as is specified in the notice of termination,
(a) cease all further work, except for such work as the Owner may
specify in the notice of termination for the sole purpose of
protecting that part of the Site and Sewerage Network already
executed, or any work required to leave the Site and Sewerage
Network in a clean and safe condition;
(b) terminate all Subcontracts;
(c) deliver to the Owner the parts of the Sewerage Network
executed by the Operator up to the date of termination; and
(d) deliver to the Owner all Contract Records, including the Design-
Build Documents, prepared by the Operator or its Sub-
Contractors as of the date of termination.

Page 162 of 385

 (4) The Owner may enter the Sewerage Network and upon the Site,
expel the Operator, and, if the Sewerage Network is not completed,
the Owner may complete the Facility itself or by employing any
Third Party. The Owner may, to the exclusion of any right of the
Operator over the same, take over and use with the payment of a fair
rental rate to the Operator, with all the maintenance costs to the
account of the Owner and with an indemnification by the Owner for
all liability including damage or injury to persons arising out of the
Owner‘s use of such equipment, any Operator's Equipment (Design-
Build) and Operator's Equipment (Operations) owned by the
Operator and on the Site in connection with the Sewerage Network
for such reasonable period as the Owner considers expedient for the
completion of the Sewerage Network. Upon completion of the
Sewerage Network or at such earlier date as the Owner thinks
appropriate, the Owner shall give notice to the Operator that such
Operator‘s Equipment (Design-Build) and, except if the Owner
asserts its rights pursuant to GC Section 9.3.1(5), Operator‘s
Equipment (Operations) will be returned to the Operator at or near
the Site and shall return such Operator‘s Equipment (Design-Build)
and Operator‘s Equipment (Operations) to the Operator in
accordance with such notice. The Operator shall thereafter without
delay and at its cost remove or arrange removal of the same from the
Site.
[Link]. Corrupt or Fraudulent Practices
If the Owner determines, based on reasonable evidence, that the Operator
has engaged in corrupt, fraudulent, collusive or coercive practices, in
competing for or in executing the Contract, then the Owner may, after
giving 14 days‘ notice to the Operator, terminate the Contract and expel
him from the Site, and the provisions of Section 11.2 shall apply as if such
termination had been made under Section 11.2.3 [Termination for
Operator‘s Default].
Should any employee of the Operator be determined, based on reasonable
evidence, to have engaged in corrupt, fraudulent or coercive practice
during the execution of the work, then that employee shall be removed in
accordance with Section 8.4 [Replacement of Operator‘s Personnel].
For the purposes of this Sub-Clause:
(i) ―corrupt practice‖ is the offering, giving, receiving or soliciting,
directly or indirectly, of anything of value to influence improperly the
actions of another party;8

8
―Another party‖ refers to a public official acting in relation to the procurement process or
contract execution]. In this context, ―public official‖ includes World Bank staff and
employees of other organizations taking or reviewing procurement decisions.

Page 163 of 385

 (ii) ―fraudulent practice‖ is any act or omission, including a
misrepresentation, that knowingly or recklessly misleads, or attempts
to mislead, a party to obtain a financial or other benefit or to avoid an
obligation;9
(iii) ―collusive practice‖ is an arrangement between two or more parties
designed to achieve an improper purpose, including to influence
improperly the actions of another party; 10
(iv) ―coercive practice‖ is impairing or harming, or threatening to impair
or harm, directly or indirectly, any party or the property of the party
to influence improperly the actions of a party; 11
(v) ―obstructive practice‖ is
(i) deliberately destroying, falsifying, altering or concealing of
evidence material to the investigation or making false
statements to investigators in order to materially impede a
Bank investigation into allegations of a corrupt, fraudulent,
coercive or collusive practice; and/or threatening, harassing or
intimidating any party to prevent it from disclosing its
knowledge of matters relevant to the investigation or from
pursuing the investigation, or
(ii) acts intended to materially impede the exercise of the Bank‘s
inspection and audit rights provided for under Section 1.8.5
[Inspections and Audits by the Bank].

11.2.4. Payment upon Termination for Operator‘s Default

(1) If the Contract is terminated pursuant to GC Section 11.2.3 and,
subject to GC Section 11.2.4(2), the Operator shall be entitled to be
paid,
(a) any portion of the Contract Price payable to the Operator for
Services satisfactorily performed prior to the date of termination;
(b) the value of any unused or partially used Plant and Equipment
on the Site, except to the extent that such Plant and Equipment
have already been paid for by the Owner; and
(c) the Costs, if any, incurred by the Operator in protecting the Site
and Sewerage Network and in leaving the Site in a clean and
safe condition pursuant to GC Section 11.2.3(3)(a).

9
―Party‖ refers to a public official; the terms ―benefit‖ and ―obligation‖ relate to the
procurement process or contract execution; and the ―act or omission‖ is intended to
influence the procurement process or contract execution.
10
―Parties‖ refers to participants in the procurement process (including public officials)
attempting to establish bid prices at artificial, non competitive levels.
11
―Party‖ refers to a participant in the procurement process or contract execution
Page 164 of 385
 Any sums due the Owner from the Operator accruing prior to the date of
termination shall be deducted from the amount to be paid to the Operator
under this Contract.
(2) If the Owner completes the Sewerage Network pursuant to GC
Section 11.2.3(4), the cost of completing the Sewerage Network by
the Owner shall be determined, and, if the sum that the Operator is
entitled to be paid, pursuant to GC Section 11.2.4(1), plus the
reasonable costs incurred by the Owner in completing the Sewerage
Network, exceeds the Contract Price, the Operator shall be liable for
such excess as follows;
(a) if such excess is greater than the sums due the Operator under
GC Section 11.2.4(1), the Operator shall pay the balance to the
Owner; or
(b) if such excess is less than the sums due the Operator under GC
Section 11.2.4(1), the Owner shall pay the balance to the
Operator.
(3) The Parties shall agree in writing on the computation described in
GC Section 11.2.4(2) and the manner in which any sums shall be
paid.
11.2.5. Termination by Operator
(1) If,
(a) the Owner has,
(i) failed to pay the Operator any sum due under the Contract
within the specified period, has failed to approve any invoice
or supporting documents without just cause pursuant to the
corresponding Terms and Procedures of Payment Schedule,
or commits a substantial breach of the Contract, the Operator
may give a notice to the Owner that requires payment of
such sum, with interest thereon as stipulated in GC Section
5.2(3), requires approval of such invoice or supporting
documents, or specifies the breach and requires the Owner to
remedy the same, as the case may be; and
(ii) failed to pay such sum together with such interest, failed to
approve such invoice or supporting documents or give its
reasons for withholding such approval, failed to remedy the
breach or take steps to remedy the breach no later than 14
days after receipt of the Operator‘s notice; or
(b) the Operator is unable to carry out any of its obligations under
the Contract for any reason attributable to the Owner, including
the Owner‘s failure to provide possession of or access to the Site
or other areas,
then the Operator may give a notice to the Owner thereof, and if the Owner
has failed to pay the outstanding sum, to approve the invoice or supporting
documents, to give its reasons for withholding such approval, or to remedy
the breach no later than 30 days after receipt of such notice, or if the
Operator is still unable to carry out any of its obligations under the

Page 165 of 385

 Contract for any reason attributable to the Owner no later than 30 days
after receipt of the notice, the Operator may, by a further notice to the
Owner referring to this GC Section 11.2.5(1), forthwith terminate the
Contract.
(2) The Operator may terminate the Contract forthwith by giving a
notice to the Owner to that effect, referring to this GC Section
11.2.5(2),
(a) if the Owner becomes bankrupt or insolvent;
(b) has a receiving order issued against it, or compounds with its
creditors;
(c) being a corporation, if a resolution is passed or order is made for
its winding up, other than a voluntary liquidation for the
purposes of amalgamation or reconstruction; or
(d) a receiver is appointed over any part of its undertaking or assets,
or if the Owner takes or suffers any other analogous action in
consequence of debt.
(3) If the Contract is terminated under GC Section 11.2.5(1) or
11.2.5(2), then,
(a) the Operator shall immediately,
(i) cease all further work, except for such work as may be
necessary for the purpose of protecting that part of the Site
and Sewerage Network already executed, or any work
required to leave the Site in a clean and safe condition; and
(ii) terminate all Subcontracts; and
(b) the Operator, subject to the payment specified in GC Section
11.2.6, shall
(i) deliver to the Owner the parts of the Sewerage Network
executed by the Operator up to the date of termination; and
(ii) deliver to the Owner all Contract Records, including the
Design-Build Documents, in existence as of the date of
termination.
(4) Termination by the Operator pursuant to this GC Section 11.2.5 is
without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of the Operator that
may be exercised in lieu of or in addition to rights conferred by this
GC Section 11.2.5.
11.2.6. Payment upon Termination by Operator
If the Contract is terminated under GC Sections 11.2.5(1) or 11.2.5(2), the
Owner shall pay to the Operator all payments specified in GC Section
11.2.2(1), and reasonable compensation for all loss, except for loss of
profit, or damage sustained by the Operator arising out of, in connection
with or in consequence of such termination.

Page 166 of 385

11.2.7. General Provisions - Termination
(1) In this GC Section 11.2, the expression ―Sewerage Network
executed‖ shall include all work executed, Services provided, and all
Plant and Equipment acquired, or subject to a legally binding
obligation to purchase by the Operator and used or intended to be
used for the purpose of the performing the Services, up to and
including the date of termination.
(2) In this GC Section 11.2, in calculating any monies due from the
Owner to the Operator, account shall be taken of,
(a) any sum previously paid by the Owner to the Operator under the
Contract, including any advance payment paid pursuant to the
Terms and Procedures of Payment Schedule;
(b) any sum owing by the Operator to the Owner under the Contract,
including Liquidated Damages – Delay or liquidated damages
calculated pursuant to GC Section 5.4.

Page 167 of 385

 Schedule 1
Special Conditions of Contract

TO SURVEY, REVIEW THE DESIGNS, REDESIGN WHERE NECESSARY

AND BUILD NEW SEWERAGE NETWORK OF ABOUT 180 KM LENGTH
AND OPERATION & MAINTENANCE OF SEWERAGE NETWORK FOR A
PERIOD OF 10 YEARS AT BEUR IN PATNA, STATEOF BIHAR, INDIA.

Page 168 of 385

 SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT
The following Special Conditions of Contract (SCC) shall supplement the General
Conditions. Whenever there is a conflict, the provisions herein shall prevail over those
in the General Conditions of Contract (GCC). The corresponding article and section
numbers of the General Conditions are indicated in parentheses.
Article 1: Contract and interpretation
1. Definitions (GC Section 1.1) – No change.
2. Clause 1.3.1 – Language
The language shall be ―English”
3. Clause 1.3.14 – Survival of Obligations
Upon termination or expiration of the Contract, the following rights and
obligations of the Parties survive:
(a) Such rights and obligations as may have accrued or to which the Parties
may be entitled on the date of termination, and any rights which a Party
may have under Applicable Law;
(b) On termination or expiration of the contract, the rights and obligations of
the parties towards settlement of disputes through arbitration in the form of
an arbitration clause / agreement.
(c) The Operator‘s obligations with respect to Contract Records, accounting
and auditing set out in GC Section 1.8;
(d) The Operator‘s obligations with respect to Transition Assistance set out in
GC Section 2.4.2;
(e) The Parties‘ rights and obligations with respect to copyright set out in GC
Section 6.1;
(f) The Operator‘s obligations of confidentiality as set out in GC Section 6.2;
(g) The Parties‘ rights and obligations with respect to defect liability set out in
GC Section 9.1; and
(h) The Parties‘ rights and obligations with respect to indemnification set out
in GC Section 9.2.
4. Clause 1.4 – Notice
All notices to the relevant party shall be sent to the following address:
a. Operator
_________________________
__________________________
b. Owner
The Managing Director,
Bihar Urban Infrastructure Development Corporation Ltd,
#303, Third Floor, Maurya Tower, Mauryalok Complex,
Budh Marg, Patna-800001
Page 169 of 385
5. Clause 1.5– Governing Law
The Applicable Law will be the Laws of India as well as the laws prevailing in the
State of Bihar .
6. Clause 1.6.1 (4) - Adjudicator
The Adjudicator is: ................ [To be added at the time of signing of Contract]
[Name, address, telephone and facsimile numbers]
The adjudicator shall be paid a fee @ Rs. 10000_/- per day of effective hearing plus
actual expenditure towards travel, transportation, lodging, and boarding. The fees and
expenditure shall be shared equally by the operator and the owner.
7. Clause1.6.1 (5) - Adjudicator
The authority to appoint new adjudicator shall be with Chairman, Bihar State
Centre, Institution of Engineers (India), Patna.

8. Clause 1.6.2 – Arbitration

All disputes arising in connection with this contract shall be finally settled under the
arbitration rules of the United Nations Commission on International Trade Law
(UNICITRAL) by one or more arbitrators appointed in accordance with the rules.
However, if the contract is with the domestic Operator arbitration shall be conducted in
accordance with the Arbitration & Conciliation Act 1996.

The place of arbitration shall be (i) the location from where the Contract has been
issued if the contract is with a domestic Operator, or (ii) a neutral location if the
contract is with a foreign Operator. The arbitration shall be conducted in the language
for communications defined in GC Clause 1.3.1 [Language].
Article 2: Contract Term, Timing and Completion
9. Clause 2.1.2 (1) – Expiration of Contract
The Contract shall terminate 10 years after Operations Starting Date.
10. Clause 2.3.2 and Clause 2.3.6 (1) Time for Completion

The Time for completion of the Design – Build Services shall be 36 months from the
Effective Date.
11. Clause 2.3.2 Time for Completion and Clause 2.3.6 (2) Delay of Completion -
Liquidated Damages - Delay
Time is the essence of the Contract. The Operator shall be liable to pay Liquidated
Damages to the Owner in accordance with GCC clause 2.3.6 (2) if the Operator fails
to achieve the contracted activities for ensuring completion of the works as follows.

Page 170 of 385

S.N Activity/Milestone Target Liquidated damages per day
Completion Time for delay in completion of
activity/Milestone
1 2 3 4
1 Completion of works INR 1,20,000/
05 months
of 10% of Contract
value of Design Build
Services stipulated in
the signed contract
2 Completion of works INR 1,20,000/
10. months
of 20% (cumulative)
of Contract value of
Design Build Services
stipulated in the signed
contract
3 Completion of works INR 2,40,000/
18. months
of 40% (cumulative) of
Contract value of
Design Build Services
stipulated in the signed
contract
4 Completion of works INR 2,40,000/
24. months
of 60% (cumulative) of
Contract value of
Design Build Services
stipulated in the signed
contract
5 Completion of works INR 1,80,000/
30. months
of 75% (cumulative) of
Contract value of
Design Build Services
stipulated in the signed
contract
6 Completion of works 0.05 % (Zero point zero five
36. months
of contracted Design- Percent) of the Value of the
Build Services in all Design Build Services stipulated
respects in the signed contract for each
day of delay beyond the
Completion Time.

Note
1. The value of works stipulated in column 2 of the table above excludes
the value of materials intended for the works but not used or
incorporated in the works.
2. The target time for completion stipulated in column 3 will be subject to
revision, if justified, in the event of extension of time for completion
agreed under GCC clause 2.3.4.
Page 171 of 385
 Liquidated Damages recovered on account of delay in completion of an
activity/activities listed in serial number 1 to 5 of the table above, will qualify
for refund to the Operator, if the contracted works of the design-build services
part of the contract are completed in all respects within the stipulated period or
the revised completion period if so agreed to by the parties in accordance GCC
clause 2.3.4.
12. Clause 2.3.6 (2) – Maximum Liquidated Damages – Delay

The maximum Liquidated Damages – Delay shall be 10 % of the value of Design,

Build, and Commissioning services (Part A of Price Schedule).
13. Clause 2.3.6 (5)

This sub-paragraph is deleted.

Article 4: Obligations of the Owner
14. Clause 4.2 – Access to the Site and Sewerage Network

Delete the existing clause and replace it with the following clause:
(1) The Owner shall be responsible for providing access to all relevant sites
and all other areas along the selected alignment for the Sewerage Network,
reasonably required for the proper execution of the contract including all
rights of way.
(2) The Owner shall provide the Operator free of charge possession and access
of the above mentioned sites and right of way for the Sewerage Network
during the Contract Period, so as to ensure that the Operator shall achieve
progress of work consistent with the milestones, if laid down in SCC
clause 11.
(3) The Operator shall complete the work on the sites handed over to him from
time to time within in the specified time, as and when so instructed by the
Design-Build-Operations Engineer or advised by the Owner, so as to
minimize the inconvenience to the households and the public over
prolonged durations of time.
Article 5: Contract Price and Payment
15. Clause 5.1 (3) – Contract Price

Following sub-clauses may be added below Clause 5.1(3):

(a) The prices for the Design Build works and services (Part A of the
said Price Schedule) shall be subject to price adjustment during the
performance of the contract.
(b) Price adjustment for the O&M price (Part B of the Operator‘s
Price Schedule incorporated in Schedule 5 of the Contract) payable
during the O&M period shall apply only if operation of SPS
(if any) is included in the scope of work and the same shall be

Page 172 of 385

 determined in accordance with Article 2 of Schedule 6 of the
Contract.

16. Clause 5.2 – Terms of Payment

Provisions in Clause 5.2 (1), (3) and (4) shall be replaced with the following clauses:
(1) The Contract Price shall be paid in accordance with the provisions in
Schedule 5 – Operator‘s Price Schedule and Schedule 6 – Terms and
procedures of Payment of the Contract.
(3) In the event that the Owner fails to make any payment by within 60 days
from the date of submission of monthly statement of claim in accordance
with Schedule 5, the Owner shall pay to the Operator interest on the
amount of such delayed payment at the rate of 10% annually, for the
period of delay until payment has been made in full.
(4) The currency or currencies in which payments are made to the Operator
under this Operator shall be as per Operator‘s Price Schedule
incorporated in Schedule 5 of the Contract. In case of NCB, payment
shall be made in Indian Rupees.
17 Clause 5.3 - Performance Incentive Compensation
This Clause stands deleted.
18. Clause 5.4 – Liquidated Damages - Operations
The Operator shall pay the Owner liquidated damages for failure to meet Performance
Standards as set out in the Liquidated Damages – Operations Schedule, i.e. Schedule 7
of the Contract.
19. Clause 5.5.1 (2) (a) – Performance Security
The Operator shall provide a Performance Security of 10 % (Ten percent) of the total
contract price, i.e. value of Design, Build, and Commissioning services plus O& M
prices for 10 years‘ operation. (Part A Price + Part B Price of the Price Schedule given
in Schedule 5 of the Contract.)
20. Clause 5.5.2 (2) – Advance Payment Security
(2) The mobilization advance paid to the Operator by the owner shall be
recovered commencing from the date on which the payment to the
Operator has reached 20% of the Value of Design Build and
Commissioning Services and shall be recovered at the rate of 15% from
each bill submitted by the operator for payment. The entire amount of
mobilization advance shall be recovered latest by the time 90% of the
value of Design, Build and Commissioning Services has been claimed by
the operator.
Article 7: Contract administration and supervision during the Design-Build and
Operations Periods
21. Clause 7.2 Design-Build Supervision
7.2.1 Supervision during the Design-Build Period

Page 173 of 385

 GC Section 7.2 shall apply during the Design-Build Period and Operations
Period and immediately after the End date solely for the purpose of
resolving transition issues and any outstanding issues arising during the
Operations Period.
7.2.2 Design-Build-Operations Engineer‘s Duties and Authority (Design-Build and
Operations Period)
(1) The Owner shall appoint the Design-Build-Operations Engineer who
shall be responsible for day to day contract management and
supervision during the Design-Build Period and the Operations Period.
The Design-Build-Operations Engineer‘s staff shall include suitably
qualified engineers and other professionals who are competent to carry
out these duties.
(2) The Design-Build-Operations Engineer shall have no authority to
amend the Contract.
(3) Except, as specifically provided otherwise in the Contract, the Design-
Build-Operations Engineer may exercise the authority attributable to
the Design-Build-Operations Engineer as specified in or necessarily to
be implied from the Contract. The Owner undertakes not to impose
further constraints on the Design-Build-Operations Engineer‘s
authority, except as agreed with the Operator.
(4) The Design-Build-Operations Engineer is obligated to obtain the
approval of the for matters specified in the sub-clause 7.22 (5) (d) 0f
the SCC. If the Design-Build-Operations Engineer exercises a
specified authority for which the Owner‘s approval is required then,
for the purposes of the Contract, the Owner shall be deemed to have
given approval.
(5) Except as otherwise stated in the Contract,
(a) if the Design-Build-Operations Engineer carries out duties or
exercises authority, specified in or implied by the Contract, the
Design-Build-Operations Engineer shall be deemed to act for the
Owner;
(b) the Design-Build-Operations Engineer has no authority to relieve
any Party of any duties, obligations or responsibilities under the
Contract; and
(c) any approval, check, certificate, consent, examination, inspection,
instruction, notice, proposal, request, test or similar act by the
Design-Build-Operations Engineer, including absence of
disapproval, shall not relieve the Operator from any responsibility
it has under the Contract, including responsibility for errors,
omissions, discrepancies and non-compliances.
(d) The Design Build Operations Engineer shall obtain the approval
of the Owner before exercising its authority in the following
circumstances:
(a) approving assignment of the Contract, or any part thereof;
(b) determining an extension of the Time for Completion;

Page 174 of 385

 (c) certifying additional costs determined under GC Sections
1.9(8)(b); and
(d) issuing a Change Order, except:
a. in an emergency situation, as reasonably determined by
the Design-Build Engineer; or
b. if such Change Order would increase the Contract Price
by less than 1%.
7.2.3 Delegation by the Design-Build-Operations Engineer
(1) The Design-Build-Operations Engineer may from time to time assign
duties and delegate authority to assistants, and may also revoke such
assignment or delegation. These assistants may include a resident
engineer, or independent inspectors appointed to inspect or test items
of Plant or Equipment. The assignment, delegation or revocation shall
be in writing and shall not take effect until copies have been received
by both Parties. Unless otherwise agreed by both Parties, the Design-
Build-Operations Engineer shall not delegate the authority to
determine any matter in accordance with GC Section 7.2.6.
(2) Assistants shall be suitably qualified persons, who are competent to
carry out these duties and exercise this authority, and who are fluent in
the language for communications defined in GC Section 1.3.1.
(3) Each assistant, to whom duties have been assigned or authority has
been delegated, shall only be authorized to issue instructions to the
Operator to the extent defined by the delegation. Any approval, check,
certificate, consent, examination, inspection, instruction, notice,
proposal, request, test, or similar act by an assistant, in accordance
with the delegation, shall have the same effect as though the act had
been an act of the Design-Build-Operations Engineer. However,
(a) any failure to disapprove any work or Plant and Equipment shall
not constitute approval, and shall therefore not prejudice the right
of the Design-Build-Operations Engineer to reject the work or the
Plant and Equipment; and
(b) if the Operator questions any determination or instruction of an
assistant, the Operator may refer the matter to the Design-Build-
Operations Engineer, who shall promptly confirm, reverse or vary
the determination or instruction.
7.2.4 Instructions of the Design-Build-Operations Engineer
(1) The Design-Build-Operations Engineer may issue to the Operator, at
any time during the Design-Build Period, instructions which may be
necessary for the execution of the Design-Build Services and the
remedying of any defects, all in accordance with the Contract. The
Operator shall only take instructions from the Design-Build-
Operations Engineer, or from an assistant to whom the appropriate
authority has been delegated under GC Section 7.2.3. If an instruction
constitutes a Change, GC Section 10.1 shall apply.

Page 175 of 385

 (2) The Operator shall comply with the instructions given by the Design-
Build-Operations Engineer or delegated assistant, on any matter
related to the Contract. These instructions shall be given in writing.
7.2.5 Replacement of the Design-Build-Operations Engineer
If the Owner intends to replace the Design-Build-Operations Engineer, the
Owner shall, not less than 42 days before the intended date of replacement,
give notice to the Operator of the name, address and relevant experience of
the intended replacement Design-Build-Operations Engineer. The Owner
shall not replace the Design-Build-Operations Engineer with a person
against whom the Operator raises reasonable objection by notice to the
Owner, with supporting particulars.
7.2.6 Determinations by the Design-Build-Operations Engineer
(1) Whenever the Contract provides that the Design-Build-Operations
Engineer shall proceed in accordance with this GC Section 7.2.6 to
agree or determine any matter, the Design-Build-Operations Engineer
shall consult with each Party in an endeavour to reach agreement. If
agreement is not achieved, the Design-Build-Operations Engineer shall
make a fair determination in accordance with the Contract, taking due
regard of all relevant circumstances.
(2) The Design-Build-Operations Engineer shall give notice to the Parties
of each agreement or determination, with supporting particulars. Each
Party shall give effect to each agreement or determination unless and
until revised under GC Section 1.9.
22. Clause 8.1.2 (1) Operator‟s Representative
The Operator‘s Representative is: ______________________
23. Clause 8.3 Operator‟s Personnel

The Operator‘s Key Staff employed during the design build services shall have the
expertise and qualifications specified in the Table below.
[Link] Staff No Minimum Qualifications
A Graduate in Civil Engineering with
Project not less than 10 years‘ experience in
1 1
Manager construction of Sewerage networks /
water supply networks
A Civil Engineer (Graduate Engineer)
with not less than five years‘ experience
Civil
2 2 in construction of similar engineering
Engineer
works or Diploma in Civil Engineering
with 8 years‘ experience
A Electro /Mechanical Engineer
Electro
(Graduate Engineer) with not less than 5
3 Mechanical 1
years‘ experience in construction of
Engineer
similar engineering works or Diploma in
Page 176 of 385
 Civil Engineering with 7 years‘
experience
Diploma in Civil Engineering with
Civil
4 4 minimum 2 years‘ experience in
Supervisors
Construction of Civil Engineering works
Degree in Environmental Engineering /
Science / Planning or allied subjects with
Environmen minimum of 5 years of experience of
5 1
tal Engineer which at least 3 years‘ experience shall
be in environmental management works
of urban infrastructure projects.

24. Clause 8.5 Representatives

The Operator is not obliged to retain staff employed by the Owner.
25. Clause 8.6 (1) Maximum Percentage of Sub contracting
Maximum percentage of sub-contracting is 25% of the value of the design-
build services. However, the nominated Sub-contractor whose experience and
qualification have been claimed for meeting the qualification criteria in
accordance with stipulations in Schedule A part h shall be excluded while
applying the ceiling of 25 %.
26. Clause 9.1 (b) Defect Liability Period
This clause is deleted.
27. Clause 9.6 - Insurance
Delete the existing clause and replace it with the following clause:
In this Clause, ―insuring Party‖ means, for each type of insurance, the Party
responsible for effecting and maintaining the insurance specified in the
relevant Sub-Clause. Wherever the Operator is the insuring Party, each
insurance shall be affected with insurers and in terms approved by the Owner.
Wherever the Owner is the insuring Party, each insurance shall be affected
with insurers and in terms consistent with the details contained under this
contract. If a policy is required to indemnify joint insured, the cover shall apply
separately to each insured as though a separate policy had been issued for each
of the joint insured. If a policy indemnifies additional joint insured, namely in
addition to the insured specified in this Clause, (i) the Operator shall act under
the policy on behalf of these additional joint insured except that the Owner
shall act for Owner‘s Personnel, (ii) additional joint insured shall not be
entitled to receive payments directly from the insurer or to have any other
direct dealings with the insurer, and (iii) the insuring Party shall require all
additional joint insured to comply with the conditions stipulated in the policy.

Page 177 of 385

Each policy insuring against loss or damage shall provide for payments to be
made in the currencies required to rectify the loss or damage. Payments
received from insurers shall be used for the rectification of the loss or damage.
The relevant insuring Party shall, within 20 days of Effective Date, submit to
the other Party:
a) evidence that the insurances described in this Clause have been
effected, and
b) copies of the policies for the insurances described in Sub-Clause 9.6.2
(Insurance for works and Operator‘s Equipment) and Sub-Clause 9.6.3
[Insurance against Injury to Persons and Damage to Property].
When each premium is paid, the insuring Party shall submit evidence of
payment to the other Party. Whenever evidence or policies are submitted, the
insuring Party shall also give notice to the Design Build Operations Engineer.
Each Party shall comply with the conditions stipulated in each of the insurance
policies. The insuring Party shall keep the insurers informed of any relevant
changes to the execution of the Project and ensure that insurance is maintained
in accordance with this Clause. Neither Party shall make any material
alteration to the terms of any insurance without the prior approval of the other
Party. If an insurer makes (or attempts to make) any alteration, the Party first
notified by the insurer shall promptly give notice to the other Party.
If the insuring Party fails to effect and keep in force any of the insurances it is
required to effect and maintain under the Contract, or fails to provide
satisfactory evidence and copies of policies in accordance with this Sub-
Clause, the other Party may (at its option and without prejudice to any other
right or remedy) effect insurance for the relevant coverage and pay the
premiums due. The insuring Party shall pay the amount of these premiums to
the other Party, and the Contract Price shall be adjusted accordingly.
Nothing in this Clause limits the obligations, liabilities or responsibilities of the
Operator or the Owner, under the other terms of the Contract or otherwise. Any
amounts not insured or not recovered from the insurers shall be borne by the
Operator and/or the Owner in accordance with these obligations, liabilities or
responsibilities. However, if the insuring Party fails to effect and keep in force
an insurance which is available and which it is required to effect and maintain
under the Contract, and the other Party neither approves the omission nor
effects insurance for the coverage relevant to this default, any moneys which
should have been recoverable under this insurance shall be paid by the insuring
Party.
Payments by one Party to the other Party shall be subject to the provisions of
GCC & SCC as contained in this contract as applicable. The Operator shall be
entitled to place all insurance relating to the Contract (including, but not
limited to the insurance referred to Clause 9.6) with insurers from any eligible
source country.
9.6(2) Insurance for Works and Operator‟s Equipment

Page 178 of 385

The insuring Party shall insure the Works, Plant, Materials and Operator‘s
Documents for not less than the full reinstatement cost including the costs of
demolition, removal of debris and professional fees and profit. This insurance
shall be effective from the date by which the evidence is to be submitted under
sub-paragraph (a) of Sub-Clause 9.6.1 [General Requirements for Insurances],
until the End Date.
The insuring Party shall maintain this insurance to provide cover until the End
Date, for loss or damage for which the Operator is liable arising from a cause
occurring prior to the End Date, and for loss or damage caused by the Operator
in the course of any other operations.
The insuring Party shall insure the Operator‘s Equipment for not less than the
full replacement value, including delivery to Site. For each item of Operator‘s
Equipment, the insurance shall be effective while it is being transported to the
Site and until it is no longer required as Operator‘s Equipment.
Unless otherwise stated in the Particular Conditions, insurances under this Sub-
Clause:
a) shall be effected and maintained by the Operator as insuring Party,
b) shall be in the joint names of the Parties, who shall be jointly entitled
to receive payments from the insurers, payments being held or
allocated between the Parties for the sole purpose of rectifying the loss
or damage,
c) shall cover all loss and damage from any cause not listed in the GCC /
SCC of this contract.
d) shall also cover loss or damage to a part of the Project which is
attributable to the use or occupation by the Owner of another part of
the Works, and loss or damage from the Owner‘s risks listed in the
GCC / SCC excluding (in each case) risks which are not insurable at
commercially reasonable terms, with deductibles per occurrence of not
more than the amount stated in the Contract Data (if an amount is not
so stated, this sub-paragraph (d) shall not apply), and
e) may however exclude loss of, damage to, and reinstatement of: (i) a
part of the Works which is in a defective condition due to a defect in
its design, materials or workmanship (but cover shall include any other
parts which are lost or damaged as a direct result of this defective
condition and not as described in sub-paragraph (ii) below), (ii) a part
of the Works which is lost or damaged in order to reinstate any other
part of the Works if this other part is in a defective condition due to a
defect in its design, materials or workmanship, (iii) a part of the Works
which has been taken over by the Owner, except to the extent that the
Operator is liable for the loss or damage, and (iv) Goods while they are
not in the Country, subject to the provisions of GCC / SCC contained
in this contract as applicable.

Page 179 of 385

If, more than one year after the Base Date, the cover described in sub-
paragraph (d) above ceases to be available at commercially reasonable terms,
the Operator shall (as insuring Party) give notice to the Owner, with supporting
particulars. The Owner shall then (i) be entitled subject to provisions of GCC /
SCC contained in this contract as applicable. to payment of an amount
equivalent to such commercially reasonable terms as the Operator should have
expected to have paid for such cover, and (ii) be deemed, unless he obtains the
cover at commercially reasonable terms, to have approved the omission under
Sub-Clause 9.6.1 [General Requirements for Insurances ].
9.6 (3) Insurance against Injury to Persons and Damage to Property
The insuring Party shall insure against each Party‘s liability for any loss,
damage, death or bodily injury which may occur to any physical property
(except things insured under Sub-Clause 9.6(2) [Insurance for Works and
Operator‘s Equipment]) or to any person (except persons insured under Sub-
Clause 9.6(4) [Insurance for Operator‘s Personnel]), which may arise out of the
Operator‘s performance of the Contract and occurring before the issue of the
Performance Certificate.
The Insurance cover under this clause shall be as under and to be borne by the
Operator:
1. Loss of human life – Rs. 2.4 million or equivalent amount in convertible
currency and to be recouped as and when it is used.
2. Permanent Disability of human beings - Rs. 2.4 million or equivalent
amount in convertible currency and to be recouped as and when it is
used.
3. Human Body Injury not resulting into permanent disability -Rs0.10
million or equivalent amount in convertible currency and to be recouped
as and when it is used.
Unless otherwise stated in the Particular Conditions, the insurances specified in
this Sub-Clause:
a) shall be effected and maintained by the Operator as insuring Party,
b) shall be in the joint names of the Parties,
c) shall be extended to cover liability for all loss and damage to the
Owner‘s property (except things insured under Sub-Clause 18.2) arising
out of the Operator‘s performance of the Contract, and
d) may however exclude liability to the extent that it arises from:
i. the Owner‘s right to have the Project executed on, over, under, in
or through any land, and to occupy this land for the Project,
ii. damage which is an unavoidable result of the Operator‘s
obligations to execute the Works and remedy any defects, and

Page 180 of 385

 iii. a cause listed as Owner‘s Risks as contained in GCC / SCC, except
to the extent that cover is available at commercially reasonable
terms.
9.6 (4) Insurance for Operator‟s Personnel
The Operator shall effect and maintain insurance against liability for claims,
damages, losses and expenses (including legal fees and expenses) arising from
injury, sickness, disease or death of any person employed by the Operator or
any other of the Operator‘s Personnel. The Owner and the Design Build
Operate Engineer shall also be indemnified under the policy of insurance,
except that this insurance may exclude losses and claims to the extent that they
arise from any act or neglect of the Owner or of the Owner‘s Personnel.
The insurance shall be maintained in full force and effect during the whole
time that these personnel are assisting in the execution of the Works. For a
Subcontractor‘s employees, the insurance may be affected by the
Subcontractors, but the Operator shall be responsible for compliance with this
Clause
28. Clause 10.2 Change to Operations Services
(a) GCC sub-clause 10.2 (1) is amended to read as under:
―Except as specifically provided in Schedule 6 of the Contract (Terms
and Procedure of Payment) or elsewhere in the Contract, the Operator
shall make no claim whatsoever for any adjustment to the Contract
Price during the Operations Period.‖

(b) GCC sub-clause 10.2 (2) shall stand deleted.

Page 181 of 385

 Schedule 2

Design Build Services Schedule (DBSS)

TO SURVEY, REVIEW THE DESIGNS, REDESIGN WHERE NECESSARY AND

BUILD NEW SEWERAGE NETWORK OF ABOUT 180 KM LENGTH AND ALL
APPURTENANT STRUCTURES, AND OPERATION & MAINTENANCE OF
SEWERAGE NETWORK FOR A PERIOD OF 10 YEARS AT BEUR IN PATNA IN,
STATE OF _BIHAR, INDIA

Page 182 of 385

Article 1. General

1.1 Description of Design-Build Services

The Operator shall carry out and be responsible for the review of owner‘s
design and redesign where necessary; and construction of the Sewerage
Network including pipe network and all allied appurtenant structures and be
responsible for its performance. The Operator‘s work and services as part of
the ―Design-Build Services‖ shall cover all necessary or desirable services /
activities for the design and construction of the Sewerage Network and all
allied works in accordance with and as contemplated by the Design-Build
Documents and the Technical Standards including,
a) The redesign services in respect of Sewerage Network and allied
appurtenant structures such as manholes, vent shafts etc., including
design, alignment, layout, installation, all civil works, construction
drawings and environmental and social assessments; social, safety and
environmental safeguards; as set out in DBSS.
b) the building and construction work and services in respect of the
Sewerage Network and all allied works such as, road restoration etc as
set out in DBSS;
c) Refurbishment or replacement of existing sewerage network in
compliance to the conditions as set out in the DBSS.
d) Supervising connections to household or any other connections to the
network approved by the Owner to ensure such connections are
technically complied with necessary requirements for operations and
performance.

1.2 Supplementing the General Conditions

The provisions contained in this Design-Build Services Schedule are to be
read in conjunction with the General Conditions of Contract and Special
Conditions of contract as contained in this bid document for the purpose of
providing greater specificity of the Design-Build Services that the Operator
shall perform.

Article 2. DESIGN SERVICES

2.1 General
2.1.1 Design and Engineering
a) The Operator shall execute the basic and detailed design of Sewerage
Network and allied structures and its execution in compliance with the
Page 183 of 385
 technical specifications and requirements contained in the contract,
codes of practices as published by the Bureau of Indian Standard (BIS)
or its equivalent standard as well as the latest version of ―Manual on
Sewerage and Sewage Treatment‖ as published by the Central Public
Health Engineering Organization (CPHEEO) of the Ministry of
Urban Development, Government of India, New Delhi (draft or
approved but whichever is latest). Wherever, the codes, standards and
manual do not provide for the design and execution of some
component i.e. required to be designed and executed, the operator shall
follow the standard engineering practices as approved by Design Build
Operations Engineer.
b) Where the Owner provides detailed designs. The Operator shall review
owner‘s designs and come up with its own designs for the Sewerage
Network based on the alignment suggested/allowed by the Owner
under Schedule 12 (Allowed alignments/locations). The changes in the
suggested that include technical; allowed alignments etc shall be
considered only due to compelling site conditions or unforeseen
technical reasons, subject to the approval of the Owner or its
authorised representative.
c) The designs and drawings as formulated by the operator shall be
subject to approval by the Owner or its authorized representative.
d) The Operator shall be responsible for any discrepancies, errors or
omissions in the specifications, drawings and other technical
documents, desired output / performance of the Sewerage Network,
whether specifications, drawings and other documents have been
approved by the Owner or its representative or not, provided that such
discrepancies, errors or omissions are not because of inaccurate
information furnished in writing to the Operator by or on behalf of the
Owner. Normally it is expected that Operator will not deviate from the
specifications prescribed by the Owner unless the proposed changes
will result in better performance and cost effectiveness.
2.1.2 Codes and Standards
Wherever references are made in the Contract to codes and standards, in
accordance with which the Contract shall be executed, the edition or the
revised version of such codes and standards 30 days prior to the
Submission Deadline shall apply unless otherwise specified. During
Contract execution, any changes in such codes and standards shall be
applied after approval by the Owner/Owner‘s Representative and shall be
treated in accordance with GC Section 10.1.
2.1.3 Design Responsibilities
a) The Operator‘s design and design-related services shall include, but
not limited to the following:
i. A confirmatory topographical study covering the proposed
sites and the network alignment. Survey drawings are to be
Page 184 of 385
 submitted in hard and soft copy to the owner;
ii. Site investigation and data collection including geotechnical
assessment and soil analysis for the design and construction
of the structures required for the Sewerage Network;
iii. Operator uses the population data/ projections for future
supplied; and per capita wastewater production assumptions
by the Owner. Selection, adoption and detailed engineering
designs for the most appropriate techno economically
feasible cost effective pumping configuration, network
alignment and network installation process ensuring that the
sewerage system meets with the standards prescribed by the
MOEF / CPHEEO / CPCB as may be applicable. The
hydraulic designs use computer based approved/ proven
software.
iv. the preparation of Hydraulic Flow Diagram
(HFD)/schematic/preliminary design documents to illustrate
the scale and character of the Design-Build Services and how
the units of the process-adopted functionally relate to each
other;
v. Preparation of design development documents, based on the
approved HFD /schematic design documents accepted by the
Owner, consisting of drawings and other documents
appropriate to the size of the Pumping Stations to describe the
units and character of the entire proposed plant including
architectural, mechanical, civil works, and electrical systems,
materials, operations, landscaping, and such other elements as
may be appropriate ( if applicable);
vi. the preparation of Design-Build Documents setting forth in
detail the requirements for construction based on the design
development documents accepted by the Owner;
vii. obtaining all approvals, permits, including building permits,
and licenses for the Design-Build Services, necessary
compliances with occupational health and safety
requirements, except for those approvals, permits or licenses
that the Owner is explicitly required to obtain itself under
the Applicable Law in which case the Operator shall
prepare all documentation and provide assistance to the
Owner in obtaining such approval, permits or licenses;
viii. the coordination required to integrate all parts of the Design-
Build Services; such other Design-Build Services that may be
required from time to time that are agreed to by the Operator
and the Owner in writing; and
ix. the conducting of general reviews of the progress of the
design process, to the extent necessary, in order to
Page 185 of 385
 determine to the Operator‘s satisfaction that the design
services are performed in compliance with the requirements
of the Contract and Applicable Laws.

2.1.4 Design-Build Documents

a) The Operator shall prepare all the Design-Build Documents. The
Design Build Documents shall include the plans, designs,
drawings, as-built documents, operations manuals, specifications,
schematic design documents, design development documents, and all
modifications thereto required in order to properly and fully test for,
analyses for, plan, design and build the Sewerage Network and all
allied works as contemplated in the Technical Standards and the
remaining provisions of the Contract.
b) The Operator shall prepare all the Refurbishment / Replacement
drawings including sections and plans of the Sewerage Network to
be replaced / refurbished including schematic/ detailed drawings,
engineering drawings, construction drawings, design basis
documents, construction methodology and technical standards
adopted. The network and other systems built will be placed on a GI
based system at the end of construction and handed over to the
owner before operations commences. It also includes hydraulic
design system to help monitor and for future upgrades.
c) The Operator shall prepare any other document, as may be requested
by the Design-Build Engineer, that the Owner considers necessary to
monitor the progress of the Design-Build Services and assess the
Operator‘s compliance with the Contract.
d) The Operator shall provide the Owner with three sets of all of the
Design-Build Documents in reproducible form and shall modify
them to keep them up-to-date as requested by the owner acting in a
professionally reasonable manner. The Design-Build Documents,
with the exception of the as-built documents, shall be subject to the
review and approval of the owner prior to performing any of the
services set out in DBSS in respect of any Design-Build Document.
e) When the Operator notifies the Owner in accordance with DBSS, the
Operator shall provide to the owner one copy of the ―as built
Designs, Drawings/Documents‖ in reproducible form showing the
exact as built locations, sizes and details of the Sewerage Network
and the Design-Build Services as executed. The Sewerage
Network shall not be considered to have reached Completion for the
purposes of DBSS until such Design-Build Documents have been
provided. The Operator shall update the as built Designs,
Build Drawings/Documents as necessary for the correction of
defects or deficiencies contemplated by DBSS.
2.1.5 Design Considerations

Page 186 of 385

 In preparing the design for the Sewerage System and all allied works and
the Design-Build Documents, the Operator shall,
i. Protect public health and safety, including by the means set
out in DBSS
ii. Consider the existing infrastructure and the Sewerage
Network to be connected with the Trunk infrastructure.
iii. Ensure the Sewerage Network and all allied works has
the capacity to accommodate the anticipated sewage based
upon the verifications prepared by the Operator pursuant to
DBSS;

2.2 Implementation Responsibilities – On Site Issues

In preparing the design for the Sewerage Network and the Design-Build
Documents, the Operator shall ensure that the design,
i. makes adequate preparation and plans to ensure traffic
movement and safety during the laying of the network,
connecting service connections and construction of pump
stations.
ii. makes adequate preparation and plans and takes adequate
measures for controlling access to the Sewage Pumping
Station(SPS) site (if applicable) by animals and humans and
vehicular traffic at the perimeter of the SPS site, including
plans for plantings and vegetation, fencing, lockable gates at
vehicular access points, and the creation of an internal
(perimeter access corridor inside or, with appropriate local
and other approvals, surrounding the Site wherever
applicable;
iii. allied works like control valves chambers, anchor /thrust
/pedestal blocks, internal access roads within the site and
proposed units within the SPS site (if applicable);
iv. provides utilities services at the SPS site such as electricity,
telephone, potable water, non- potable water and sewage
collection and disposal (if applicable)

2.3 Sewerage Network Layout and operation sequence

The Operator shall be responsible for the planning and designing of the
area along the Sewerage Network, including,
a) Construction of 180 Km long Sewerage Network, and all allied
/ancillary works and then carry out Operation & Maintenance of the
Sewerage Network, Sewage and all allied / ancillary works for 10
years by way of other services. Operator shall verify these details as

Page 187 of 385

 per site condition.
b) Selection, adoption and detailed engineering designs for the most
appropriate techno economically feasible cost effective pumping
configuration, network alignment and network installation process
ensuring that the sewerage system meets with the standards prescribed
by the MOEF / CPHEEO / CPCB as may be applicable.
c) On completion of the 10 years O & M period, the operator shall have
to handover the facilities to the Owner in full working condition, as it
was on the date of commissioning of the Sewerage Network.
d) Construction including getting necessary approvals from the
concerned public authorities for installation of sewerage network on
road crossings, railway line crossings etc.; the Owner shall assist in
facilitating such approvals as and when so requested by the Operator.
e) Plans for disposal of excavated earth in a safe and environmentally
compliant manner.
f) Relocation of services within the network layout and restoration of
roads, including approvals for relocation of the services from
respective Authorities,
g) Plans for rehabilitation of excavated area / roads to its original
condition,
h) Plans for the traffic diversion, clearing and excavation of land,
disposal of excavated soil, dewatering, debris and other material at the
SPS area (if applicable) ; Site clearance, site surveys, topographical
surveys, soil investigation, submission of process design and
hydraulic design calculations, network alignment and SPS lay outs (if
applicable), hydraulic flow diagram (Process & Instrumentation
diagram), preparation & submission of specific detailed
Environmental Management Plan for the contract Impact
Assessment report that complies to the requirements of
Enviornmental Management Plan provided in [Appendix-1] of
DBSS and recommendations of Environmental and Social
Impact Assessment Report of the project, preparation &
submission of civil, architectural, General arrangement drawings
& structural design of all civil works, electrical & mechanical
equipment drawings including equipment installation drawings,
supporting calculations & technical information, instrumentation
& control system, construction and laying of Sewerage Network and
all allied /ancillary works of required capacity as per approved
designs, testing, commissioning, performance testing of process units
& trial run.
i) Preparation of BOQ in accordance with Schedule 6 of this Contract to
the satisfaction of the Owner.

Page 188 of 385

 j) O&M manual and as-built drawings for all civil, electrical &
mechanical works.
k) Supply and providing safety equipment namely gas mask, breathing
apparatus, Air hose respirator, portable lighting equipment, non-
sparking lighting equipment, portable air blowers, safety belts,
inhalators and diver suit at the commencement of O & M.
l) Mobilising necessary sewer cleaning equipment and maintaining such
equipment for timely maintenance of sewer network
m) The operator shall train the Owner‘s selected staff for on job training
during the specified 6 months of O & M period. A Maximum of
Fifteen (15) staff of Owner will be trained for a total period of 45
days.
n) Handing over of the Plant in good working condition with all relevant
documents such as as-built drawings, physical & operational
condition of the assets, rights on proprietary technologies, software,
systems, O&M manual, periodical reports along with soft copy to
Owner.

2.4 Other Design Responsibilities

The Operator shall carry out the following design or design-related
responsibilities:
a) the Operator shall prepare plans and designs for all temporary works
as required by the Operator‘s design and as required by the Contract
b) the Operators shall prepare plans and designs for landscaping of the
site;
c) the Operator shall prepare plans and designs for the acquisition of all
data and information necessary to prepare the design, including, but
not limited to, any intrusive site investigations, off-site surveys and
environmental baseline monitoring required or contemplated under
the Contract; and
d) the Operator shall prepare detailed plans and methodologies for the
testing and inspection of the Plant and Equipment.

Page 189 of 385

Article 3. BUILDING, CONSTRUCTION SERVICES

3.1 General
a) The Operator shall carry out all building, refurbishment and
construction of Sewerage Network pursuant to Articles of DBSS
b) The Operator shall provide all of the demolition, excavation,
building, co-ordination, repair, warranty, review, inspection, testing,
quality assurance and control, monitoring, scheduling, clean-up etc.
c) Station and all allied appurtenant structures as contemplated by
Design-Build Documents.
d) The Operator shall have total control of the laying and construction
services and shall effectively direct and supervise these services so as
to ensure conformity with the Design-Build Documents.
e) The Operator shall be solely responsible for installation methodology,
construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures
and for co-ordinating the various parts of the Design-Build Services
under the Contract.
f) Unless agreed with Owner, the operator has to establish casting RCC
pipes; preferably using vertical casting method within the vicinity of
the site of construction. Generally, procurement of RCC sewer lines
from outside manufacturers is discouraged. Owner will only consider
request for procurement from outside only on cases where quantity
required is not viable for setting up a plant.

3.2 Procurement and Transportation

a) Subject to GC Section 3.4, the Operator shall procure and transport
all the equipment in an expeditious and orderly manner to the Site.
b) The Operators shall at its own risk and expense for transport all
equipment, to the site.
c) The Operator shall be responsible for obtaining, if necessary,
approvals from the authorities for transportation of Equipment, to the
Site. The Operator shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner
from and against any claim for damage to roads, bridges or any
other traffic facilities that may be caused by the transport of the to the
Site.
d) The Operator shall, at its own expense, handle all imported
Equipment, at the point(s) of import and shall handle any formalities
for customs clearance. If the Applicable Law requires any application
or act to be made by or in the name of the Owner, the Owner shall

Page 190 of 385

 take all necessary steps to comply with such Applicable Law. In the
event of delays in customs clearance that are not the fault of the
Operator, the Operator shall be entitled to an extension in the Time
for Completion, pursuant to GC Section 2.3.4.
3.2.1 Temporary Supports, Structures and Utility Services
a) The Operator shall have the sole responsibility for the design,
erection, operation, maintenance, and removal of temporary
supports, structures and utility services and the design and execution
of construction methods required in their use.
b) The Operator shall engage and pay for registered professional
engineering personnel skilled in the appropriate disciplines to
perform those functions referred to in DBSS where required by law
or by the Design- Build Documents and in all cases where such
temporary supports, structures and utility services and their designs
and method of construction are of such a nature that professional
engineering skill is required to produce safe and satisfactory results
3.2.2 Document Review
The Operator shall review the Design-Build Documents and produce its
own designs duly addressing any inconsistency or omissions that the
Operator may discover. If the Operator does discover any error,
inconsistency or omission in the Design-Build Documents, the Operator
shall not proceed with the work affected until corrected designs (of such
errors or inconsistency or supplied any missing information) and these
corrections have been approved in writing by the Owner. The owner will
give decision on approval within 15 days of submission of corrected
designs
3.2.3 Plant and Equipment
a) The Operator shall provide and pay for labor, Plant and Equipment,
tools, construction and maintenance machinery and equipment,
materials and supplies, water, heat, light, power, transportation, and
all other facilities and services necessary for the performance of the
Design-Build Services in accordance with the Design-Build
Documents.
b) The Operator shall ensure that all Plant and Equipment provided are
new. Plant and Equipment which are not specified shall be of a
quality consistent with those specified and their use shall be
acceptable to the Owner.
3.2.4 Documents at the Site
The Operator shall keep one copy of the Design-Build Documents as up-
dated, submittals, reports and records of meetings at the Site, in good order
and shall make them available to the Owner upon request and at any
reasonable time.

Page 191 of 385

3.2.5 Alignment and Setting Out
a) The Operator shall be responsible for the true and appropriate
alignment of the network and setting-out of the Site and the Sewage
pumping Station in relation (if any) to benchmarks, reference marks,
existing Infrastructure and lines specified in the Design-Build
Documents.
b) If, at any time during the construction of the Sewerage Networketc.,
any error shall appear in the position, level or alignment of the
network or any of its components, the Operator shall forthwith notify
the Owner of such error and, at its own expense, immediately rectify
such error to the reasonable satisfaction of the Owner.
3.2.6 Quality Assurance
a) The Operator shall institute a quality assurance system to ensure
compliance with the requirements of the Design-Build aspects.
Compliance with the quality assurance system shall not relieve the
Operator of its duties, obligations or responsibilities.
b) The Operator shall submit for approval details of all quality
assurance procedures and documents relating to Operator‘s
compliance with the quality assurance system to the Owner before
each stage of the Design-Build Services is commenced as set out in
the Time Schedule. When any document is issued to the Owner, it
shall be accompanied by the signed quality statements for such
document, if any. The Owner may audit any aspect of the quality
assurance system and the Operator shall take any corrective action as
the Owner may deem appropriate.

3.2.7 Operator‘s Access Routes and Rights of Way during the Design-Build
Period
a) The Operator shall satisfy itself as to the suitability and availability of
the access routes it chooses to use during the Design-Build Period for
access to and from the Site. He shall, as between the Parties, be
responsible for the maintenance of access routes during the Design-
Build Period. The Owner will not be responsible for any claims which
may arise from the use or otherwise of any access route. The Owner
does not guarantee the suitability or availability of any particular
access route, and will not entertain any claim for any non-suitability
or non-availability for continuous use, during the Design-Build
Period, of any such route.
b) The Operator shall bear all costs and charges for special or temporary
rights-of- way required by it for access to the Site. The Operator shall
also provide, at its own cost, any additional facilities outside the Site
if required by it for the purposes of the Design-Build Services.
3.2.8 Site Regulations and Safety

Page 192 of 385

 a) The Operator shall establish Site regulations setting out the rules to be
observed in the execution of the Contract at the Site and shall comply
therewith. He shall prepare and submit to the Owner, proposed Site
regulations for the Owner‘s approval, which approval shall not be
unreasonably withheld. Such Site regulations shall include rules in
respect of security, safety of Plant, gate control, sanitation, medical
care, emergency preparedness, emergency response, on-site safety
training of employees and fire prevention.
b) The Operator shall comply with all applicable safety regulations in
providing the Design-Build Services and in occupying any part of the
Site, Unless otherwise stated in the Design-Build Documents, the
Operator shall, during the Design- Build Period, provide secure
fencing, lighting, guarding and watching; provide temporary
roadways, footways, guards and fences which may be necessary for
the accommodation and protection of its employees, Site visitors,
owners and occupiers of adjacent land, the public and others; carry
out safety briefings of applicable site regulations to all employees,
Sub-Contractors, agents, representatives and visitors to the Site prior
to permitting first access of the applicable person to the and at
regular intervals thereafter.
c) During the Design-Build Period, the Operator shall develop and
implement a comprehensive occupational health and safety program
for the protection of the Operator‘s Personnel and all other persons
who may attend at the site. The program shall include a description
of how the Operator will,
i. carry out all occupational health and safety responsibilities in
respect of the laying of sewerage network as required under
the Applicable Law;
ii. develop and manage all required occupational health and
safety reporting procedures; and
iii. manage all occupational health and safety claims.
3.2.9 Operator‘s Equipment (Design-Build) and Site Clearance
a) All Operator‘s Equipment (Design-Build) brought by the Operator
onto the Site shall be deemed to be intended to be used exclusively for
the execution of the Contract. The Operator shall not remove the
same from the Site without the Owner‘s consent that such Operator‘s
Equipment (Design-Build) is no longer required for the execution of
the Contract.
b) The Operator shall maintain the site of construction and installation in
a tidy condition and free from the accumulation of waste products and
debris. The Operator shall remove waste products and debris
resulting from the construction / laying and shall leave the Facility
clean and suitable for occupancy and performance of the
Operations Services before attainment of Substantial Completion.

Page 193 of 385

 The Operator shall remove products, tools, construction machinery,
and equipment, including the Operator‘s Equipment (Design-
Build), not required for the performance of the remaining Design-
Build Services.
c) Prior to notifying the Owner pursuant to DBSS 6.2(1), the
Operator shall remove products, tools, construction machinery and
equipment, and waste products and debris, including the Operator‘s
Equipment (Design-Build).
d) Upon the issue of any Completion Certificate, the Operator shall clear
away and remove, from the site, all Operators‘ Equipment (Design-
Build), surplus material, wreckage, rubbish and temporary work or
structures. The Operator shall ensure that the site is in a clean and
safe condition to the satisfaction of the Owner.
e) If the Operator fails to remove, no later than 30 days after the issue of
the Completion Certificate, any remaining Operator‘s Equipment
(Design-Build), surplus material, wreckage, rubbish and temporary
work or structures, the Owner may sell or otherwise dispose of such
items. The Owner shall be entitled to retain, from the proceeds of
such sale, a sum sufficient to meet the costs incurred in connection
with the sale or disposal, and in restoring the area around the
Sewerage network site. Any balance of the proceeds shall be paid to
the Operator. If the proceeds of the sale are insufficient to meet the
Owner‘s costs, the outstanding balance shall be recoverable from the
Operator by the Owner.
f) The Owner will, if requested, use reasonable efforts to assist the
Operator in obtaining any local, state or national government
permission required by the Operator for the export of the Operator‘s
Equipment (Design-Build) imported by the Operator solely for use in
the execution of the Contract that is no longer required for the
execution of the Contract.
3.2.10 Protection of the Environment
a) The Operator shall take all reasonable steps to protect the
environment, both on and off the Site, and to limit damage and
nuisance to people and property resulting from pollution, noise, dust
and other results of its Services, including,
i. adopting working practices that prevent or minimize the
transfer of any pollutant off-site; maintaining the access roads
in good repair;
ii. using appropriate dust suppressant methods;
iii. restricting trucking and loud machinery and equipment use to
daylight hours;
iv. using mufflers, silencers and other appropriate methods to
minimize the noise of the construction;
Page 194 of 385
 v. maintaining a clean SPS site (if applicable), that is free of
garbage.

b) The Operator shall, at all times during building and construction,

ensure that the Environmental Management Plan provided in the
Appindix 1 to the SCC is fully complied and the
recommendations of the Environmental and Social Impact
Assessment Study for the project are implemented.

3.2.11 Emergency Work

a) If, by reason of an emergency arising in connection with and during
the execution of the Design-Build Services, any protective or
remedial work is necessary as a matter of urgency to prevent damage
to the Sewerage Network infrastructure, the Operator shall
immediately carry out such work.
b) If the Operator is unable or unwilling to do such work immediately,
the Owner may do or cause such work to be done as the Owner may
determine is necessary in order to prevent damage to the Sewerage
Infrastructure. In such event the Owner shall, as soon as practicable
after the occurrence of any such emergency, notify the Operator in
writing of such emergency, the work done and the reasons therefore.
If the work done or caused to be done by the Owner is work that the
Operator was liable to do at its own expense under the Contract, the
reasonable costs incurred by the Owner in connection therewith shall
be paid by the Operator to the Owner. Otherwise, the cost of such
remedial work shall be borne by the Owner.

Page 195 of 385

Article 4. TEST AND INSPECTION

4.1 Tests and Inspection

a) The Operator shall at its own expense carry out at the place of
manufacture or on the Site all such tests and inspections of the Plant
& Equipment. The Operator shall, in addition to those tests and
inspections set out in the Contract, develop a plan for all testing and
inspection of the equipment that is required in order to complete the
Sewerage Network in accordance with the Technical Standards
Schedule and implement such quality assurance plan.
b) The Operator shall undertake such tests towards the Sewerage
Network (sewers, man-holes etc.) so as to ascertain the attainment of
self-cleansing velocity, leakage and completeness of the Sewerage
Network.
c) The Owner or their designated representatives shall be entitled to
attend any test or inspection, provided that the Operator shall bear all
costs and expenses incurred in connection with such attendance
including, but not limited to, all traveling and board and lodging
expenses.
d) Whenever the Operator is ready to carry out any test or inspection, the
Operator shall give a reasonable advance notice of such test or
inspection and of the place and time thereof to the Owner. The
Operator shall obtain from any relevant third party or manufacturer
any necessary permission or consent to enable the Owner or
their designated representatives to attend the test or inspection.
e) The Operator shall provide the Owner with a certified report of the
results of any test or inspection. The Operator will also maintain
photographic records with coordinates of all construction activities
and use it in support of quality of construction and to support
payments – more importantly shoring, bedding, bailing of water etc
have to be supported by photographic evidence with proper
referencing.
f) If the Owner, or their designated representatives, fails to attend the
test or inspection, or if it is agreed between the Parties that such
persons shall not do so, then the Operator may proceed with the test
or inspection in the absence of such persons, and shall provide the
Owner with a certified report of the results thereof.
g) The Owner may require the Operator to carry out any test or
inspection not required by the Contract, provided that the Operator‘s
reasonable costs and expenses incurred in the carrying out of such test
or inspection shall be added to the Contract Price. Further, if such test

Page 196 of 385

 or inspection impedes the progress of work on the Sewerage Network
or the Operator‘s performance of its other obligations under the
Contract, due allowance will be made in respect of the Time for
Completion and the other obligations so affected.
h) If any Plant and Equipment or any part of the Sewerage Network fails
to pass any test or inspection, the Operator shall either rectify or
replace such Plant and Equipment or part of the Sewerage Network
and shall repeat the test or inspection upon giving a notice under
DBSS Section 5.1(3).
i) If any dispute or difference of opinion arises between the Parties in
connection with or arising out of the test or inspection of the Plant and
Equipment or part of the Sewerage Network that cannot be settled
between the parties within a reasonable period of time, it may be
referred to an Adjudicator for determination in accordance with GC
Section 1.6.1(1).
j) The Operator shall give the Owner, at the Owner‘s expense, access at
any reasonable time to any part of the Sewerage Network or any place
where the Plant and Equipment are being manufactured or installed in
the Sewerage Network, in order to inspect the progress of the work
and the manner of manufacture or installation, provided that the
Owner shall give the Operator a reasonable prior notice.
k) The Operator agrees that neither the execution of a test or inspection
of Plant and Equipment or any part of the Site and the Sewerage
Network, nor the attendance by the Owner, nor the issue of any test
certificate pursuant to DBSS, shall release the Operator from any
other responsibilities under the Contract.
l) No part of the Sewerage Network, and foundations shall be covered
up on the Site without the Operator carrying out any test or inspection
required under the Contract. The Operator shall give a reasonable
notice to the Owner whenever any such part of the plant or
foundations is ready or about to be ready for test or inspection; such
test or inspection and notice thereof shall be subject to the
requirements of the Contract.

Page 197 of 385

Article 5. COMPLETION OF THE SEWERAGE
NETWORK

5.1 Monthly Progress Notice

a) The Operator shall submit to the Owner after the end of each month
six copies, each signed by the Operator‘s Representative named in
accordance with GC Section 8.1.2, a notice (the ―Monthly Progress
Notice‖) in such form as the Owner may from time to time prescribe,
showing the percentage of completion that the Operator considers it
has effected in the preceding month, in respect of the Design-Build
Services.
b) The Owner shall, no later than 30 days after receipt of the Monthly
Progress Notice, deliver to the Owner a statement (the ―Design-Build
Engineer‘s Statement‖) indicating, separately, the percentage of
completion of the Design-Build Services with documentary evidence
such as photographs etc. that the Owner considers the Operator has
effected in the applicable month.
c) If the Owner notifies the Operator of any defects or deficiencies, or
both, in any of the Design-Build Services, the Operator shall then
correct the defects or deficiencies, and shall repeat the procedure
described in DBSS Section 5.1(a).

5.2 Completion
a) As soon as the Design-Build Services have, in the opinion of the
Operator, been completed in accordance with the Technical Standards
Schedule (including restoration of services and roads cut to lay sewer
lines), excluding minor items not materially affecting the operation or
safety of the Sewerage Network, has satisfactorily passed all Tests on
Completion as set out in DBSS and Technical Standards Schedule,
the Operator shall so notify the Owner in writing (the ―Notice
of Completion‖) and provide the as-built Design-Build Documents
referred to in DBSS. It may be true that at times, parts of the networks
are commissioned and hence such completion should be notified to
Owner. However, final completion has to cover all such part
commissioned networks. Operation of such commissioned sub-
networks shall be the responsibility of the Operator.
b) The Owner shall, no later than 30 days after receipt of the Operator‘s
notice under DBSS Section 5.2(a), either issue a Completion
Certificate stating that the Sewerage Network has reached Completion
as of the date of the Operator‘s notice under DBSS Section 5.2(a), or
notify the Operator in writing of any defects or deficiencies or both.
Page 198 of 385
c) If the Owner is not satisfied that the Design-Build Services are
complete, the Owner shall notify the Operator in writing of any
defects or deficiencies no later than 14 days after receipt of the Notice
of Completion.
d) If the Owner notifies the Operator of any defects or deficiencies or
both, the Operator shall then correct such defects or deficiencies, and
shall repeat the procedure described in DBSS Section 5.2(a).
e) If the Owner is satisfied that the Design-Build Services have reached
Completion, the Owner shall, no later than 14 days after receipt of
the Operator‘s repeated Notice of Completion, issue a Completion
Certificate stating that the Design-Build Services have reached
Completion as of the date of the Operator‘s repeated Notice of
Completion.
f) If the Owner fails to issue the Completion Certificate and fails to
inform the Operator of any defects or deficiencies 14 days after
receipt of the Notice of Completion or 7 days after receipt of the
Operator‘s repeated Notice of Completion, then the Design- Build
Services shall be deemed to have reached Completion as of the date
of the Notice of Completion or repeated Notice of Completion as the
case may be.
g) As soon as possible after Completion, the Operator shall complete all
outstanding minor items so that the Sewerage Network are fully in
accordance with the requirements of the Contract, failing which the
Owner will undertake such completion and deduct the costs thereof
from any monies owing to the Operator.

Page 199 of 385

Article 6. COMMISSIONING AND OPERATIONAL ACCEPTANCE

6.1 Commissioning
Commissioning of the Sewerage Network shall be commenced by the
Operator immediately after issue of the Completion Certificate by the
Design-Build Engineer, pursuant to DBSS Section 5.2(b) or
immediately after issue of the deemed Completion, under DBSS
Section5.2(f).
6.2 Tests on Commissioning
a) The Tests on Commissioning as set out the Technical Standards
Schedule, and repeats thereof, shall be conducted by the
Operator during Commissioning of the Sewerage Network and all
allied works to ascertain whether the Sewerage Network or the
relevant part can attain the technical standards as required in the
contract. The Operator‘s and Design-Build Engineer‘s advisory
personnel shall attend the Tests on Commissioning, and shall advise
and assist the Owner. The Owner shall promptly provide the
Operator with such information as the Operator may reasonably
require in relation to the conduct and results of the Tests on
Commissioning, and any repeats thereof.
b) If for reasons not attributable to the Operator, the Tests on
Commissioning of the Sewerage Network cannot be successfully
completed within 21 days after the period from the date of
Completion specified in the SCC or any other period agreed upon by
the Owner and the Operator, the Operator shall be deemed to have
fulfilled its obligations with respect to the Tests on Commissioning.

6.3 Operational Acceptance

a) Operational Acceptance shall occur in respect of the Sewerage
Network when the Tests on Commissioning have been successfully
completed.
b) At any time after the successful completion of the Tests on
Commissioning, the Operator may give a notice to the Owner
requesting the issue of an Operational Acceptance Certificate in
respect of the Sewerage Network.
c) The Owner shall, after consultation with the Owner, and no later than
7 days after receipt of the Operator‘s notice, issue an Operational
Acceptance Certificate.
d) If within 7 days after receipt of the Operator‘s notice, the Owner fails
to issue the Operational Acceptance Certificate or fails to inform the
Operator in writing of the justifiable reasons why the Owner has not
Page 200 of 385
 issued the Operational Acceptance Certificate, the Sewerage Network
shall be deemed to have been accepted as of the date of the Operator‘s
said notice.
6.4 TAKING OVER

a. The network will be taken over by Owner on satisfactory completion

of the Operation & Maintenance of the the same provided that

i. The equipment and the network are in good, smooth running

condition.

ii. In case of major repairs /replacement of equipment, the

performance guarantee for such unit/equipment is extended by
six months from the date of putting back in to satisfactory
operation of such unit/equipment .

iii. All records of operation & maintenance are handed over to

Owner in proper condition.

iv. The Third Party Inspection of the plant viz: Civil units,
Mechanical units/equipment, Electrical units/equipment,
instruments, & all other Major & minor units/machines
(whichever applicable) has to be carried out & the defects
unsatisfactory working performances of the equipment/
machines are to be corrected by the Operator at his own cost.
The necessary Third Party inspection Charges are also to be
borne by the Owner.

v. The Operator should repaint the plant including all civil

structures, mechanical, electrical equipment/ units /structures
as per the tender specifications

vi. Operator shall repair and replace the equipment and ensure
that the equipment has adequate residual life.

b. In case taking over is delayed on account of Operator's failure, the

operation & maintenance period will be extended further till it meets
the requirement without any extra cost to Owner. The Operator will
also be penalized for such delays

Page 201 of 385

Article 7. REPORTING DURING THE DESIGN-BUILD PERIOD
7.1 Design-Build Progress Reports
a) The Operator shall prepare monthly progress reports of the Design-Build Services during the Design-Build Period and submit six copies
of the reports to the Design-Build Engineer. The first report shall cover the period up to the end of the calendar month after that in
which the Design-Build Starting Date occurred and reports shall be submitted monthly thereafter, each no later than 14 days after the
last day of the month to which it applies.
b) The Design-Build Services monthly reports shall include the following information:
i. photographs and detailed descriptions of progress, including each stage of design, procurement, manufacture, delivery to the
Sewerage Network site, construction, laying, erection, testing and commissioning;
ii. charts showing the status of Design-Build Documents, purchase orders, manufacture and construction;
iii. for the manufacture of each main item, equipment, machinery, floor or component of the Sewerage Network , the name of
manufacturer, manufacture location, percentage progress, and the actual or expected dates of commencement of manufacture,
Operator‘s inspections, tests and delivery relating thereto;
iv. detailed records of the Operator‘s Personnel and Operator‘s Equipment (Design- Build) on the Sewerage Network site and the actual
usage of the Operator‘s Equipment (Design- Build) during the reporting period and the tasks performed by the Operator‘s
Personnel;
v. copies of quality assurance documents, test results and certificates of the Plant and Equipment;
vi. all monitoring results;
vii. safety statistics, including details of any hazardous incidents and activities relating to environmental aspects and public relations;
viii. percentage completion achieved compared with the planned percentage completion for each activity; and
ix. Where any activity is behind in the scheduled completion, comments and likely consequences and a description of the corrective

Page 202 of 385

 action being taken.

7.2 Replacement of Key Staff deployed by the Operator during the Design build period
If replacement of any Key Staff during design & build services period becomes necessary, the Operator shall submit a proposal for Owner‘s
approval, advising therein the name of the replacement staff of equivalent or higher qualifications duly supported by his CV.
The overlap period of the new key staff and the staff to be replaced shall be minimum of one month.

Page 203 of 385

 APPENDIX 1
1.0 MITIGATION AND MANAGEMENT PLAN
1.1 Environmental Management Plan

Theenvironmental management plan identifies the potential issues of various activities that are anticipated in the design and development,
construction, and operation phases of the proposed sewer work in Beur area Patna. The Project Components Includes:
a) Sewerage network in Zone- VI of 97 km

The environmental management plan ensures to suggest appropriate mitigation measure against the issues/ concerns identified during the
environmental and social assessment study.

In general, the BUIDCO (with assistance from DBO Operator and Independent Engineer/Supervision Consultant) is the responsible entity for ensuring
that the mitigation measures as suggested in the ESMP. The roles and responsibilities of the involved institutes are described below.

1.1.1 Specific activities by Design Built Operate (DBO) Operator

The operator shall implement the mitigation measures as recommended in EMP attached to the bid document.

1.1.2 Implementation of EMP

Page 204 of 385

The DBO Operator shall have prime responsibility to implement the EMP. “The DBO engineer” shall monitor the compliance of the EMP. DBO
engineer and BUIDCo will have secondary responsibility for implementation of EMP.

The Operator shall ensure that:

 Ensure that sewer laying process does not create hazardous movement situation. Also ensure that public is pre-warned about the activities,
construction area is barricaded, all debris is well managed causing minimum inconvenience to public and other measures are implemented as
indicated under EMP.
 Specific area shall be earmarked for intermittent storage of biodegradable and non-biodegradable waste at SPS site (if applicable).
 Tree plantation (minimum two row) shall be made on the periphery of SPS (if applicable) to prevent spread of bad odour and undertake landscaping
to enhance aesthetic at SPS locations.

Table: Environmental Management Plan for Beur Sewerage Project

Activity Potential Negative Duration of Mitigation Measures Responsible

Impact/Concern impact Agency
Sewerage and Sanitation Investments
A. Design and Development Phase
Sewerage Accidental leakages/  Due to accidental Temporary  Designing sewers with adequate capacity and DBO Operator
burst or leakage of flow velocity

Page 205 of 385

Network bursts sewers, flooding of  Provision for Regular inspection and
(Trunk the nearby areas maintenance of the sewers
Sewer Line)  Backlogging due
Preparation of safety and Emergency
to unexpected
heavy flow rates Preparedness plan

B. Construction phase
Damage to Temporary  Identify existing underground other utility DBO Operator
structures, lines through available records and
underground utilities
Sewerage Excavation, cutting, in consultation with concerned authorities and
like water, gas line, plan construction activities accordingly to
(laying of back filling,
electricity and minimize damage to such utilities. These
sewers) compaction and
telephone conduits, underground utilities encountered in
construction excavating trenches carefully shall be
etc. due to
operations supported, maintained and protected from
construction
damage or interruption of service until backfill
activities.
is complete and settlement has taken place.

Accidents/ damages Temporary  Maintaining the excavation by Shoring trench DBO Operator
sides by placing sheeting, timber shores,
due to erosion/ trench jacks, bracing, piles, or other materials
sliding of vertical
sides of excavated Exposed surface shall be resurfaced and
trenches while stabilized. Exposed surface will be resurfaced
places the pipes and stabilized by making the sloping sides of
trench to the angle of repose at which the soil
will remain safely at rest.
Generation of Temporary  Top soil shall be preserved and may be used DBO Operator
for agricultural purpose or development of city

Page 206 of 385

substantial debris, parks.
top soil and muck  Soil and debris may be managed for planned
during construction land filling and landscaping;
Debris may be suitably stored to filling back the
excavated areas after placing the trunk sewer
lines.
Dust Generation (Air Temporary  Water sprinkling over excavated areas, DBO Operator
unpaved movement areas and stockpiles.
Pollution) due to
 Transportation of loose construction material
excavation, cutting, through covered trucks.
back filling and  Use dust curtains (polysheets/ sheets) around
compaction the construction area for containing dust
operations spread at building construction site.
 Construction equipment must comply with
pollution norms and carry Pollution Under
Control certificate.

Noise and vibration Temporary  Construction activities to be carried out in day DBO Operator
time with prior intimation to local residents
disturbances to and shop keepers.
residents and  Construction work near schools and colleges
businesses to be carried out during vacations and work
near hospitals to be completed on priority
basis (in shorter time period with alternate
provision of traffic, accessibility of exit/entry
gates etc.).
 Use of low noise and vibrating equipment
meeting prescribed noise standards.
 Provision of protective equipment (PPE) like

Page 207 of 385

 ear muffs and plugs for construction workers.
 Provision of noise barriers in inhabited areas,
particularly near sensitive zones like
hospitals, schools etc.
DG set to be fitted acoustic enclosure.
Temporary flooding Temporary  Stockpiled areas to be bordered by berms; DBO Operator
due to excavation Stockpiles to be done in high areas to avoid flow
during monsoons or in storm water run-off channels and erosion;
blockage of surface
drains
Increased traffic Temporary  Alternate traffic routing must be adopted in DBO Operator
inconvenience consultation with concerned traffic police
(emissions, authorities. Proper traffic planning be made
congestions, longer for narrow lane areas.
travel times,  Work should to be completed on priority near
blockage of access) business and market place to minimize
business loss.
 Care should be taken to minimize congestion
and negative impacts at schools and
hospitals. Safe access shall be maintained to
these places during construction.
Provide temporary crossing/ bridges as may be
required to facilitate normal life and business
Settlement of Temporary  The backfilling material shall be free from DBO Operator
petroleum products, slag, cinders, ash or
backfilled area after other material.
construction  Backfilling activity shall be completed within
five days of laying of sewer.

Page 208 of 385

 Proper compaction as per the soil condition and
retain the original level of alignment and grade.
Spillage of fuel and Temporary Care to be taken to store fuel and oil (if required) DBO Operator
oil at a place away from any drainage channel/nalla
preferably to be stored in drums mounted on a
concrete paved platform with slop draining to
small spills collection pit.
Nuisance due to Temporary  Provide two bins for recyclable and non- DBO Operator
recyclable wastes.
solid waste disposal
 Ensure that recyclable and non-recyclable
waste are collected in segregated manner in
theses bins before disposal. Recyclable
material should be sold. Non-recyclable
material should be disposed for designated
land fill area of the city.
Provide adequate sanitation facility for workers
at construction sites.
General: Accidents Safety hazards to Temporary  Comply with the Occupational health and DBO Operator
Safety act of India
safety labours and public
 Ensure that the contact details of the police or
during security company and ambulance services
construction nearby to the site.
 Ensure that the handling of equipment and
materials is supervised and adequately
instructed.
 Erect warning signs/ tapes and temporary
barriers and/or danger tape, marking flags,
lights and flagmen around the exposed

Page 209 of 385

 construction works warn the public and traffic
flow of the inherent dangers.
 Provide adequate safety precautions such as
helmets, safety shoes, gloves, dust masks,
gumboots, etc. to workers Monthly reporting
of all accidents and immediate reporting to
DBO engineer and owner.
 Monthly reporting of all accidents and immediate
reporting to DBO engineer and owner
C. Operation phase
Sewer line Leakage/ overflows Water pollution and Temporary  Regular monitoring of sewer line and DBO Operator
manholes for visible leakages/ overflows.
possibility of mixing
Immediate repair shall be carried out to plug
with water supply line the leakages. Restore the sewer and other
utility services if damaged due to leakages.
General Workers exposure  Serious/health/ Temporary  During cleaning/ maintenance operation, the DBO Operator
totoxic gases in safety hazards sewer line will be adequately vented to ensure
Safety
 The toxic gases that no toxic or hazardous gases are present
sewers and are likely to in the line.
contract  Ensure availability of PPE for maintenance
hazardous materials
communicable workers.
during sewer diseases from  Follow safety and Emergency Preparedness
maintenance work exposure to plan prepared at design stage
pathogens present Monthly reporting of all accidents and
in the sewage. immediate reporting to DBO engineer and
owner.

Page 210 of 385

 Schedule 3

Operation and Maintenance services

SURVEY, REVIEW THE DESIGNS, REDESIGN WHERE NECESSARY AND BUILD NEW
SEWERAGE NETWORK OF ABOUT 180 KM LENGTH AND ALL APPURTENANT
STRUCTURES, AND OPERATION & MAINTENANCE OF SEWERAGE NETWORK FOR A
PERIOD OF 10 YEARS AT BEUR IN PATNA STATE OF BIHAR, INDIA

Page 211 of 385

Article 1. Introduction
The Operator shall ensure the Operation and Maintenance of the Sewerage Network; and
other allied works in compliance to the guidelines contained in the Manual on ―Sewerage &
Sewage Treatment‖, latest edition as published by the Central Public Health Environmental
Engineering Organization (CPHEEO), Ministry of Urban Development, Government of
India, New Delhi and the prescription laid down hereunder.

Article 2. Scope of Work

2.1 Operate the Sewerage System, for a period of 10 years from the date of commissioning
as specified below:
1. The Operator shall operate and maintain the Sewer networks under the Contract
complete including the road works (liability of restored portions of roads is limited to 3
years only, however the operator will not be held responsible for road restoration required
on account of damage done by other agencies. utilities, landscaping, civil/structural,
mechanical components, instrumentation system, Electrical System, all utility and
ancillary buildings, SPS premises area, lift station,(whichever is applicable) for the period
of Ten (10) years from the date of successful completion of "Tests after Completion of the
Works".
2. The Operator shall make his own arrangements at his own cost for staff required for
operation and maintenance of networks and other assets, lubricants, diesel, spares, tools
and tackles, sewer cleaning vehicles and other equipment maintenance of all types such
as routine, breakdown, periodic and repair maintenance, replacement of damaged/
unserviceable sewers, maintenance of house service connections after building lanes,
screenings collection; desilted material collection, transportation and disposal; co-
ordination with Bihar State Pollution Control Board (BPCB), Bihar Power Corporation
Ltd. (BPCL) authorities and any other activity required for the operation and maintenance
of the constructed Works in full compliance with all applicable rules, regulations, laws,
codes, effluent quality requirements and any other limitations. The operator will also
maintain a Customer grievance redressal centre and ensure that O&M services meet the
standards of services/ service levels maintained as follows:

Page 212 of 385

Charter of Services

SN Nature of complaints Time for rectification

(in days)
Minimum Maximum
1 Sewerage overflow on the road 1 7
2 Choking at household premises 1 7
3 Replacement of missing manhole 1 7
cover
3. The operator ensures that there is a steady and uninterrupted flow of waste water/sewage
to STPs.
4. Identify and inform the Owner about the illegal connections on the Sewerage Network
within seven days of its being detected.
5. The Operator shall submit a weekly report to the Employer detailing the Operation and
Maintenance indicating the labour hours expended, Electrical Power Consumed and other
Consumables consumed and also problems faced and rectified.
6. The Operator shall submit detailed schedule/manual of all O& M activities with
references of equipment manufacturers‘ maintenance schedules/manuals to the Employer
for review and approval.
7. The Operator shall submit Guidelines and Instructions manual for the maintenance staff of
all levels for all the tools, plants and equipment and Operating Sewerage Network to
maintain the service levels within the standards prescribed within the contract;
8. The Operator shall carry out all O&M activities as per the approved Operation and
Maintenance Manuals.
9. If any consumer connection needs extension of sewer line during O&M period, from an
existing line, the same will be designed and estimated by the operator using prevailing
schedule of rates and market rates. Such costs will also include 15% towards supervision
charges. The owner will collect the same and pays to the Operator for executing the same
after the connection is formally approved. However, Owner will retain connection fee/
charges.
10. During the Operation and Maintenance period, the Operator shall ensure that the sewage
detention time in wet well not exceeds 30 min. and there is no backflow of sewage. The
operator is responsible for maintaining back up power arrangements at his cost to ensure
that the O&M services are not affected due to failure of power supply from the Public
Utility Company.
11. The Operator‘s responsibility shall also include the safety and security of the Works
during the course of Operation and Maintenance.

Page 213 of 385

 Nos.
S. N. Key Staff Minimum Qualifications
Required
Degree in Environmental / Civil Engineering / Post Graduate in Water
Supply & Sewerage Engineering Mechanical Engineering with
1 Manager 1
minimum 10 years‘ experience in Operating & Maintaining a
Sewerage Network)
Degree / Diploma in Civil Engineering / Mechanical Engineering /
Electrical Engineering with minimum 5 years‘ experience or ITI ‗C‘
2 Foreman 3
Certification with minimum 10 years experience in Operating &
Maintaining a Sewerage Network)
Experience in laying / maintaining and operating Sewerage Networks
3 Plumbers/ Fitters 3
and SPS for a minimum of 1 year.
Sewer cleaning
4 works and other 8 -
support staff
Security and
5 3 -
Housekeeping
12. During Operation and Maintenance period, the Operator shall appoint an Operator and
Electrical/Mechanical Technician. In addition, the Operator shall appoint suitable number
of operators, drivers, cleaners, fitters, electricians, helpers, gardeners, office peons,
security guards, laborers as required for the operation and maintenance of complete
proposed sewerage system for three shifts and adequate other staff / supporting personnel
during general Shift. Security of man-power, built structures, equipment and other system
components.

2.2 Undertaking capacity building measures:

Conduct a training and handholding assistance programme for six months in aspects of
Operation and Maintenance of the Project Facilities for maximum fifteen employees of the
ULB.

2.3 Staff:
1. The minimum personnel required for O & M is as given below. However, the Operator
shall mention the personnel required for O&M in his bid. The work shall be carried out on
a 24 hour basis without intermission and the staff deployed by the Operator shall be in
accordance with this contract.

2. The Operator shall give or provide all necessary superintendence during the O&M and as
long thereafter as the Owner may consider necessary. Such superintendence shall be given
by a competent person having adequate knowledge of the operation and Maintenance to be
carried out (including the methods and techniques required), the hazards likely to be

Page 214 of 385

 encountered and methods of preventing accident) as may be required for the satisfactory
working of the entire plant.
3. No labor below the age to 18 years shall be employed on the work. List of staff is to be
given by the agency to the Owner and advance intimation to be given before
deputing/removing any staff from site during the period of contract. Not more than one of
the Operator's key staff shall be absent from the project site at any given time. In case it is
necessary for more than one of the key personnel to be absent at a given time, the Operator
shall provide replacement of equivalent or better qualifications. The CVs of such key staff
replacements shall be got approved from Owner in advance.
4. Owner shall be authorized to direct the contracting agency to remove any or all staff
employed on O&M of the sewerage network if in his opinion continued presence of such
staff is detrimental to safety or proper O&M of the sewerage network. The Operator shall
comply with such directions & post suitable substitute(s) thereof. Whenever the Engineer
has to inform the Operator in writing that any person on the work is in his opinion
unsatisfactory or/incompetent or unfaithful or dishonest, untruthful or disorderly or to be
otherwise unsuitable/such person shall be discharged by the Operator from the work and
shall not be employed again on it.
2.4 Reporting and Record Keeping:
1. Maintain a periodical reporting system to provide access and retrieval of Project Facilities
operating data including all such information which is necessary to verify costs and
expenses incurred and otherwise to confirm that the Operator is in compliance with its
obligations under the terms and conditions of this Contract;
2. The Operator shall maintain a record for the entire Term of the following:
a. status or progress report of the operation and maintenance of each of the
Project Facilities;
b. record of all consumables, tools, equipment‘s manhole covers, etc. used /
replaced towards operations and maintenance of the Sewerage Network;
c. Daily readings of the meters at the Sewage pumping stations (if any);
d. identification and reporting of illegal connections on the sewerage network;
e. Nature and scope of any ancillary activities being carried out in accordance
with the terms and conditions of this Contract; and
f. Provide reports on accidents in respect of the Project Facilities, if any.
3. The Operator shall provide an accurate, complete and up-to-date record, report or
document in relation to any aspect of modernization, expansion, operation, maintenance
and management of the Project Facilities to Owner as and when a request is made as soon
as reasonably practicable and in any event within any time limit prescribed by Owner for
the production of such record, report or other document.

Page 215 of 385

 4. Provide a copy to Owner of its annual audited accounts of expenditure by the Operator in
the implementation of the Project as at the end of and for that accounting period.
5. Report to Owner regarding any litigation or material claims, disputes or actions,
threatened or filed, concerning the Project Facilities or the obligations to be performed by
the Operator under this Contract;
6. Report to Owner any refusal or threatened refusal to grant, renew or extend or any action
pending or threatened that might affect the granting, renewal or extension of any
Applicable Approval;
7. Report to Owner any material information concerning new or significant aspects of the
operations, maintenance and management of the Project Facilities, any material complaint
about the Project Facilities from any person or any other information received by the
Operator which is material to the Operation and Maintenance of the Project Facilities
2.5 Operation and maintenance manual
1. The Operator shall prepare a detailed program (referred to as O&M Manual)
covering the operation and maintenance of the Sewerage Network as a whole. This
program shall include the work and activities described in this Chapter, as relevant to the
specific items and technology.
2. The Operator shall provide 6 copies of draft O&M Manual to the Owner, at the time of the
commissioning of the project and on approval of draft, 10 copies of operation
&maintenance manual shall be supplied by the Operator.
3. The O&M Manual shall include the daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, half yearly and
annual checks and remedies if necessary to be performed for effective operation of
the plant, elaborate detail, all operating and maintenance procedures and policies which
are required, advisable and / or necessary for the Facility to achieve full compliance
with the operational guarantees and to achieve maintenance and repair standard for
the Facility which will ensure compliance with the maintenance specifications. The
O&M manual shall include interalia full explanation of all plant procedures and processes.
4. Without limiting the generality of the foregoing the O&M Manual shall include
descriptions, procedures; schedule of maintenance, and shall comply with the
requirements, set forth in the provisions of the Bid Documents.
5. The draft of the O&M Manual shall be subject to the review and approval of Owner,
which shall have the right to make any changes and revisions to the O&M Manual as it
may deem appropriate. The Operator shall revise such draft O&M Manual prior to the
commencement of the O&M period.
6. At the end of the construction period, the Operator shall revise the draft O&M Manual to
reflect any updates, changes or revisions it deems appropriate, inter-alia based on its
experience and as necessary to reflect any modifications or adjustments to the plant.
Without limiting the above, the Operator shall annually fully review, revise, update and

Page 216 of 385

 modify the draft O&M Manual as may be necessary or appropriate. Any revision to
the draft O&M Manual shall be subject to the review and approval of Owner.
7. Owner shall have the right to require revisions to the draft O&M Manual as it may deem
appropriate. The Operator shall prepare and submit to Owner, for its review and approval,
30 days prior to the proposed date of commencement of O&M, a revised draft O&M
Manual which reflects all changes, revisions and modifications. The Operator shall
prepare the O&M Manual, as approved by the Owner, prior to the start of O&M.
8. During the term of this Agreement, the Operator shall promptly notify Owner of any
revisions, additions or modifications which he, in his professional opinion, believes
should be made to the O&M Manual, whether as a result of additional experience in
operating and maintaining the Facility, changes in influent quality or volume, changes or
modifications to any equipment part, component or structure incorporated in the Facility.
9. Such notification shall set forth the reason for the proposed revision. Any proposed
revision shall be subject to the approval of the Owner. In addition, during the term of this
Agreement, Owner shall have the right to require relevant changes, revisions, or
additions to the O&M Manual as it, shall deem appropriate to ensure full compliance with
the O&M Standards.
10. The Operator shall submit 10 copies of the final O & M manual along with a soft copy in
Microsoft Word Format.

2.6 Maintenance schedules

1. The Operator shall prepare and follow a Maintenance plan, detailing the maintenance
activities scheduled for each of the component of the Sewerage Network on a periodic
approved by Design Build Operations Engineer and / or the Owner.
2. Every part of the works and all the materials to be used therein shall be subjected to such
tests from time to time during the execution of the work as the Owner may direct and the
whole of such tests shall in all cases be made at the Operator‘s sole expense.
3. The work shall be carried on and completed under the exclusive control direction and
supervision and to the satisfaction of the Owner. The Owner shall likewise have full
power to reject or condemn any work or material that he may deem unsuitable. In case of
any work or material being rejected by the Engineer in-charge, the Operator shall
immediately remove and replace the same to the satisfaction of the Owner or the Owner
shall have full powers to get the same removed and replaced and deduct the expenditure
incurred in the process from any amount due or that may become due to the Operator.
4. The Operator shall use only the original and genuine spares of the original equipment as
per recommendations given in the maintenance booklet of the manufactures/as per
directions of the Owner. Adequate stock of such spares is to be maintained by the
Operator. Test certificate of manufacturer is required for bearings along with supplies.
Test certificate of all major equipment will be submitted from the manufacturer.

Page 217 of 385

5. If any material brought to the site of works, be in the judgment of the Engineer, found
inferior or improper & not as per described standards, the said materials or workmanship
shall where required by the Owner shall be removed or amended by the Operator
forthwith or within such period for every breach by the Operator in this clause.
6. All the steel structures and machines, if installed in open areas, should be painted after
every monsoon period after cleaning the surface as per the instructions of the Engineer-
in-charge. Entire plant including all civil structures, mechanical equipment, HT panel and
Transformers etc. shall be repainted after every 2(1/2) years as per original painting
specifications.
7. All leakages should be attended and all network blockages shall be removed within three
days of them being identified and reported. All the valves/gates which are not used
regularly should be operated at least once a week and make sure that they are properly
lubricated /greased.
8. All safety valves should be checked daily and ensure that they are working properly. In
case of any fault the same should be attended immediately without any wait. The
maintenance of the plant shall be as per maintenance manuals of the manufacturer for all
equipment. Operator shall keep all the safety devices in working order.
9. The Operator should make sure that no unwanted material should float/grow in and
around different units. In case it is found the same shall be removed /cleaned
immediately. He shall also be responsible for cleaning/sweeping the plant buildings inside
and outside, roads, foot path etc.
10. Launders/Weirs etc. of reactors etc. to be maintained clean round the clock. During
preventive/ breakdown maintenance, the Operator has to visit the unit/units as and when
needed. The pumping units or other machineries required if any shall have to be arranged
by the Operator at his own costs for completing the work. In case of battery operated auto
system panels and also system alarm etc., batteries are required to be maintained and
replaced as and when needed by the Operator.
11. The Operator shall maintain the Supervision, Control and Data Acquisition System
(SCADA) in working condition for the 10 years of O & M period. The Operator shall not
remove/ shift any equipment/ machinery even temporarily without written
permission of the Owner or authorized representative. Though the Operator has to operate
and maintain all the equipment/machineries, lighting (plant area, boundary walls, gate
lightening etc.) but the machine of the equipment under warranty should not be
dismantled without prior permission of the Owner. The list of such equipment (Under
warranty), if any, will be given by the Operator.
12. Consumables such as Manhole covers, POL (petrol/Diesel Oil & Lubricants) etc. has to be
arranged by the Operator as and when needed as per manufactures recommendations for
periodical maintenance of entire Network. The Owner shall not provide such items.
13. The Operator shall carry out biannual cleaning of network before and after the monsoon
season including cleaning of all manhole chambers and collection network.

Page 218 of 385

14. In case of major repair due to normal wear and tear/break down, the Operator should bring
the same to the notice of the Owner immediately and necessary measures for its repair
should be taken simultaneously. Breakdown, all repairs of any kind are to be attended by
the Operator. Any unit/equipment being irreparable in the opinion of the Owner will be
replaced by the Operator at no cost to Owner. However, if there is any unexpected
population growth / high flows are observed due to urban growth, which warrants
replacement of sewer with higher diameters, such cases will be brought to the attention of
the owner. Upon owner‘s approval, at owner‘s cost, the same shall be executed and
commissioned by the Operator. In these cases no supervision or design and estimation
charges will be paid by the owner.
15. The Operator shall give his telephone no., contact addresses, etc. to the Owner as well as
shift duty shift to contact him during emergency/odd hours etc.

Page 219 of 385

 Schedule 4

SITE AND SITE AREA

SURVEY, REVIEW THE DESIGNS, REDESIGN WHERE NECESSARY AND BUILD NEW
SEWERAGE NETWORK OF ABOUT 180 KM LENGTH AND ALL APPURTENANT
STRUCTURES, AND OPERATION & MAINTENANCE OF SEWERAGE NETWORK FOR A
PERIOD OF 10 YEARS AT BEURIN PATNA STATE OF BIHAR, INDIA

Page 220 of 385

Schedule 4- Site and Site Area

1. General Project Background: Patna City

Patna is the capital of the of Bihar and the second largest city in Eastern India (in terms of population).
Patna is one of the oldest inhabitated & civilized places in the world. Ancient Patna, known as
Pataliputra, was the capital of the Magadha Empire under the Haryanka, Nanda, Mauryan, Sunga, Gupta,
Pala and Suri dynasties. Patna is located on the south bank of the Ganga River. Patna is approximately 25
km long and 9 km to 10 km wide. The city has grown up gradually from the ancient age with the name
‗Pataliputra‘. The geographical location of the Patna Urban Area is on the southern bank of River Ganges
between latitudes 25° 30‘N & 25° 40‘N and longitudes 85°0‘E &85° -15‘E. It is the 14th most populous
agglomeration in India and 168 in the world with a population of approximately 1.8 million. It is the
second largest city in eastern India, after Kolkata. Today, all major industries have a base in Patna
reflecting the growing importance of the city. There has been significant enhancement in GDP of Bihar in
the last decade. The growth of economy, urbanization & population trends are indicators that city shall
continue to develop rapidly in next two-three decades. It is also fast emerging as a hub of higher
education with institutes of national repute being started in Patna

2. History of Patna City

The history and tradition of Patna go back to the earliest dawn of civilization. The original name of Patna
was Pataliputra or Patalipattan and its history dates back to 600 B.C. Ancient Patna covers area of 42 sq
km. The name Patna has undergone many changes at its earliest stages like Pataligram, Kusumpur,
Patliputra, Azimabad, etc., ultimately terminating to the present one. Chandragupta Maurya made it his
capital in the 4 century A.D. Thereafter the city lost its importance until Sherkhan Suri rose to power in
the early 16th century A.D. Another version that comes to focus is that there existed a village named
Pattan or Patthan, which later turned into Patna. It has been said that Pataliputra was founded by
Ajatashatru. Patna, therefore, has become inextricably bound up with the ancient Pataliputra. The ancient
village was named ‗Patali‘ and the word ‗Pattan‘ was added to it. Greek history mentions ‗Palibothra‘
which perhaps is Pataliputra itself. Apart from being the administrative centre of the state and its historic
importance, the city is also a major educational and medical centre. The economy of Patna is based on the
local service industry. Ancient Patna, known as Pataliputra, was the capital of the Magadha Empire under
the Haryanka, Nanda, Mauryan, Sunga, Gupta, Pala and Suri dynasties. Pataliputra was also a famous
seat of learning and fine arts. Its population during the Maurya period (around 300 BCE) was about
400,000.

Page 221 of 385

 Google Image of Patna City

The walled old area, called Patna City by the locals, is a major trading centre. The Buddhist, Hindu, and
Jain pilgrim centres of Vaishali, Rajgir, Nalanda, Bodhgaya, and Pawapuri are nearby and Patna is also a
sacred city for Sikhs. Guru Gobind Singh, (December 22, 1666 – October 7, 1708), the tenth Guru of the
Sikhs, was born in Patna. His birthplace, Harmandir saheb, is one of the most sacred pilgrimages for
Sikhs. By 1620 the city of Patna was the great centre of Northern India - "the largest town in Bengal and
the most famous for trade". This was before the founding of the city of Calcutta. In present day India,
Patna has the distinction of giving Dr Rajendra Prasad, as the President of the Constituent
Assembly(1946-1949) & later, as the First President of the Republic of India. Image of Patna City is
shown in fig. below.

3. Topography

The district can be divided into two prominent natural features comprising:-

A narrow strip of somewhat high land about 8 km in width along the Southern bank of the Ganges having
very fertile soil & alluvial fertile plains in the remaining portions. Patna does not contain any hilly region.
It has an entirely alluvial and flat region.

Patna is located on the south bank of the Ganga River. The town is situated at an altitude of 48 - 51 m
above mean sea level.

Page 222 of 385

The land in the district is too fertile to be left for wild growth. The district is devoid of any forest wealth
of consequences. The alluvial text of land yields rice, sugarcane and other food grains. The area under
cultivation is studded with mango orchads and bamboo clumps. In the fields adjoining the Ganges weeds
such as ammannia, citriculari, hygrophile and sesbania grow. But palmyra and date palm and mango
orchards are found near habitations. Dry shrub jungles are sometimes seen in the villages away from the
rivers. Trees commonly met with are bel, siris, jack fruits and the red cotton tree.

4. Climate

The district by and large is homogenous. It is of moderate type characterized by quite hot summers to
moderately cold winters. The day temperature generally ranges from 21.1 ºC in January to 38.7 ºC in May
and night temperature from 7.3 ºC in December to 27.7 ºC in June. The summer begins in April and peaks
in June/July with the temperature soaring up to 43 °C till the moisture laden monsoon wind bring some
much-needed relief to the parched fields. The rains last through August & September and continue into
early October

5. Rainfall

The normal annual rainfall in the district is around 1230 mm. The timely and well-distributed rainfall
during Kharif and Rabi has a deciding influence on the land use and cropping pattern of the district.

6. Geomorphology & Soils

Patna district is a part of the Indo Gangetic alluvium. The district forming a part of the flood plains of the
Ganga has a monotonously flat relief. Patna region is underlain by alluvial sediments of quaternary age.
The quaternary sediments are deposited unconformable on the Archaean basement. The district has
mainly four types of soils ranging from moderately well drained to poorly drained, acidic to slightly
alkaline and medium to heavy textured. The land in the district is too fertile to be left for wild growth.
The district is devoid of any forest wealth of consequences. The alluvial text of land yields rice,
sugarcane and other food grains. The area under cultivation is studded with mango orchads and bamboo
clumps. In the fields adjoining the Ganges weeds such as ammannia, citriculari, hygrophile and sesbania
grow. But palmyra and date palm and mango orchards are found near habitations. Dry shrub jungles are
sometimes seen in the villages away from the rivers. Trees commonly met with are bel, siris, jack fruits
and the red cotton tree

7. Demography

The population of the Karamlichak zone is 2.29 lacs, 3.05 lacs, 3.44 lacs & 4.79 lacs for 2017, 2032 &
2047 respectively. Detailed projection is enumerated in subsequent chapters.

8. Seismicity

The project area falls in seismic zone – IV as per the BIS (1893, Part-1, 2002) category of seismic zoning
map of India.

Page 223 of 385

 9. Ground Water Scenario

Besides State Ground Water Investigation Department, Govt. of Bihar, CGWB has established a network
of observation wells under National Hydrograph Network (HNS) programme to ascertain fluctuation and
quality of groundwater in the district. There are about 12 HNS monitoring locations identified and being
monitored every year regularly during January, May, August and November. During pre-monsoon
season, the minimum and maximum water levels were observed as 3.00 and 8.57 m bgl respectively.
About 25 % of the wells have the water level in the range of 2 – 5 m bgl. In majority of the wells (76 %),
the water levels remain in the range of 5 – 10 m bgl. Below figures depict water level map of Patna
district post monsoon and pre monsoon in year 2006.

Page 224 of 385

 10. Transportation & Connectivity:

Patna was one of the first places in India to use horse-drawn trams for public
transport. Public transportation today is provided for by buses, auto rickshaws and
local trains. Auto rickshaws are said to be the lifeline of the city. BSRTC has started
City bus service on all major routes of Patna. Recently, radio cab facility has also
started.

Railway: The Patna Junction railway station is connected to most of the major cities
in India by the railway network. Patna lies in between New Delhi and Kolkata which
is one of the busiest rail route in India. The city is a major railway hub and is well
connected with Gaya, Jehanabad Biharsharif, Rajgir, Islampur with excessive train
services. The plan also includes the modernisation of Patna Junction.

Airways:There is an airport, Lok Nayak Jayaprakash Airport, which is classified as a

restricted international airport. The arrival of several low-cost carriers and a number
of new destinations have caused a growth in air traffic in recent years, as has an
improvement in the situation with regard to law and order. For the period April
toDecember 2009 the airport ranked first in a survey of 46 airports in the country in
terms of percentage growth of domestic passengers as well as domestic aircraft
movement.[44] New airport is expected to be built at Bihta. Flights are unable to land
at the Patna airport during a foggy weather.

Roadways: The city is served by several major road highways and state highways,
including National Highways 19, 30, 31, and 83. It is 1,015 kilometres (631 mi) from
Delhi, 1,802 kilometres (1,120 mi) from Mumbai and 556 kilometres (345 mi) from
Kolkata. Luxury bus service between Patna and several neighbouring cities is
provided by the Bihar State Tourism Development Corporation and the Bihar State
Road Transport Corporation.

Waterways: Patna has a fixed terminal on National Waterway No. 1 which was
established in October 1986. This 1,620 kilometres (1,010 mi) route of navigable
water runs from Haldia on the Bay of Bengal, across the extremity of Jharkhand
province, across the centre of Bihar and then to Allahabad in Uttar Pradesh.

11. State Level Authority

The Government of Bihar (GOB) through its Urban Development and Housing
Department (UD & HD) has been implementing the NGRBA program in the
[Link] Urban Infrastructure Development Corportion (BUIDCo) is the executing
agency for these programmes.

Page 225 of 385

 12. Bihar Urban Infrastructure Development Corporation Ltd.

BUIDCo is a Flagship company to implement and accelerate urban infrastructure

projects in the State of Bihar. These projects include basic infrastructure amenities
such as Solid Waste Management, Water Supply, Drainage Network and Sewerage &
Sewage Treatment. Also, projects of urban beautification like River Front
Development, Amusement Parks, Commercial works, Hotels etc. are also being
developed by the BUIDCo.

13. Sewerage System

The sewerage system in Patna was established in 1936. The city has four sewage
treatment plants located at Saidpur (45 MLD), Beur (35 MLD), Pahari (25 MLD) and
Karmali Chak (4 MLD) although the quantum of sewage reaching the plants is lower
than installed capacity. It can be clearly concluded that the majority of the city is
uncovered by sewer network. Inhabitants living in area without sewer network have
to rely on either decentralised collection system in form of inhouse septic tanks or on
unhygienic open defecation practise. Figure below depicts the existing sewerage
network (Shown by yellow lines on the map):

Existing sewerage and drainage

network of the city

PMC at present is sub divided into six sewerage zones namely; Digha Zone, Beur
Zone, Saidpur Zone, Pahari Zone kankarbagh and Karmali Chak Zone as depicted
below:

Although sewerage systems were first started in Patna city during the year 1936-39
but its penetration at present still lags behind other Indian cities of comparable
population and growth rates. The installed capacities of Sewage treatment plants is
109 MLD, but are receiving approximately 61 MLD of sewage, as the existing
scheme requires renovation/ maintenance to run the STPs at their installed capacity.
A ward wise summary of all the zones as per existing sewerage plan of PMC is
tabulated below:

Page 226 of 385

Out of the five sewerage zones depicted above, four have STPs in them whereas
sewage collected from Digha zone finds its way to the Beur STP.

14. Beur STP & Sewerage Network

This zone is in the south Western most of Patna City. The existing STP is
located at Beur

Important Locations

Important Locations

Phulwari Sharif, Chimney, Makhnaumpur, Nayan, Hasanpura, Harnichak, Power

Line, Bhiko Chak, Damaria, Gulab Chak, Sain Chak, Bhika Chak, Durga Chak,
Baharpur, Manas Mandir, Baimantola, Balmi Chak, Kaitha, Chitkora, PTO,
Jakanpura, Post Office, Gardan Bagh, Saristabagh, Billa, Nayatola, Narautanpur,
Shipra, Ghohpatpur.
.

Page 227 of 385

 Schedule 5

OPERATOR‟S PRICE SCHEDULE

SURVEY, REVIEW THE DESIGNS, REDESIGN WHERE NECESSARY

AND BUILD NEW SEWERAGE NETWORK OF ABOUT 180 KM LENGTH
AND ALL APPURTENANT STRUCTURES, AND OPERATION &
MAINTENANCE OF SEWERAGE NETWORK FOR A PERIOD OF 10
YEARS AT BEUR IN PATNA STATE OF BIHAR, INDIA.

Page 228 of 385

 Schedule 6

TERMS AND PROCEDURE OF PAYMENT

SURVEY, REVIEW THE DESIGNS, REDESIGN WHERE NECESSARY AND

BUILD NEW SEWERAGE NETWORK OF ABOUT 180 KM LENGTH AND
ALL APPURTENANT STRUCTURES, AND OPERATION &
MAINTENANCE OF SEWERAGE NETWORK FOR A PERIOD OF 10
YEARS AT BEUR IN PATNA STATE OF BIHAR, INDIA.

Page 229 of 385

ARTICLE 1. Payment of Design & Build Price
1. Mobilisation Advance:
1.1 Advance payment as an interest free loan for mobilisation and cash
flow support for an amount equal to 10 % of the Design-Build Price as
stipulated in the contract shall be paid to the Operator in two instalments
against ‗Bank Guarantee for Advance Payment‘ for the same amount subject
to the provisions of this Contract.
(i) 5% within 30 days of effective date of contract; and
(ii) 5% on mobilization at the site including setting up of the Operator‘s
office, deployment of manpower and machinery & equipments for
construction

Repayment of Mobilisation advance:

The Mobilization Advance paid to the Operator by the Owner shall be
recovered commencing from the date on which the payment to the Operator
has reached 20 % of the Value of Design, Build and Commissioning Services
and shall be recovered at the rate of 15 % from each bill submitted by the
Operator for payment. The entire amount of mobilization advance shall be
recovered latest by the time payments up to 90 % of the Value of Design,
Build and Commissioning Services have been claimed by the Operator.

1.2 Secured Advance for non-perishable materials (pipes, transformers, pumps,

motors, starters, cables, D.G. set, and electric panels) brought to site

Secured advance will be limited to 75% of invoice value or market value whichever
is lower and will be subject to following conditions:

a. The quantities of materials are not excessive and shall be

used within a reasonable time (not exceeding 3 months)
as determined by the Owner.

b. The materials are in accordance with the specifications.

c. The materials have been delivered to site and are

properly stored and protected against damage or
deterioration to the satisfaction of the owner.

d. The Operator‘s records of the requirement, orders,

receipt and use of materials are kept in a form approved
by the Owner and such records shall be available for
inspection by the Owner.

Page 230 of 385

 e. The Operator has submitted with his monthly statement,
the estimated value of the materials on site together with
such documents as may be required by the owner, for the
purpose of valuation of material and providing evidence
of ownership and payment thereof.

f. Ownership of such materials shall be deemed to vest in

the Owner for which the Operator has submitted an
indemnity bond in an acceptable format.

Repayment of Secured advance:

The secured advance shall be repaid from each succeeding monthly payments to the
extent the materials (for which advance was previously paid) have been incorporated
into the works.
2. Payment of Design-Build Price
2.1 The Operator shall submit to the Design Build Operations Engineer
monthly statements of the value of the work completed less the
cumulative amount certified previously along with details of
measurement of the quantity of works executed in a tabulated form as
approved by the Design Build Operations Engineer. The Design Build
Engineer will follow respective State‘s Public Works Department
procedures such as measurement, check measurements, approving
deviations etc and certify such invoices for payment. Further, a third
party QA Consultants will also review invoices, photographic evidence
for all the works, more importantly for shuttering, bedding, manholes,
depth of cutting etc. that are not visible for future verification; conduct
tests where required and certify the invoices.
The Operator shall include in the Monthly Statements only such items of
works which are described in the ‗Payment Break-up Schedule‘
appended at the end of this Schedule 6, provided such items have been
completed during the month.
2.2 The Design Build Operations Engineer shall check the details given in
the Operator's monthly statement and within 14 days certify the amounts
to be paid to the Operator after taking into account any credit or debit
for the month in question in respect of materials for the works in the
relevant amount and under conditions set forth in para 1.2 above,
deductions for advance payments, secured advance, other recoveries,
adjustment on account of Liquidated Damages - Operations, and other
adjustments in terms of the contract and deduction of taxes at source, as
applicable under the law.
2.3 The value of work executed shall be determined by the Design Build
Operations Engineer after due check measurement of the quantities
claimed as executed by the Operator, and only such items of works
included in the Monthly Statement will qualify for verification/payment
Page 231 of 385
 if these have been identified as such in the ‗Payment Break-up
Schedule‘ appended at the end of this Schedule 6. For items of works
not covered in the said ‗Break-up Schedule‘, payment as per rate quoted
and quantity executed shall be verified for payment.
2.4 The value of work executed shall comprise the value of the quantities of
the items in the Bill of Quantities completed.
2.5 The value of work executed shall include the valuation of Variations.
2.6 The Design Build Operations Engineer may exclude any item certified
in a previous certificate or reduce the proportion of any item previously
certified in any certificate in the light of later information.
2.7 The Operator shall submit his claim for the price adjustment, if
applicable to this contract as per SCC 5.1(1)(a), along with his claim for
payment for the work done during the month, and price adjustment will
be allowed as per formulae stipulated in Schedule 8 of the Contract.

ARTICLE 2. Payment of O&M Prices

1. Payment of O&M Prices for Operations and Maintenance of Sewerage
Network
a. Owner shall pay O&M prices on a Monthly basis, from the Operations
Starting Date to the Operator, as determined in accordance with the
provisions of this Clause and other relevant provisions of this Contract
Agreement. The Monthly prices in respect of Operations and Maintenance
services shall be paid for a period of 10 years as one twelfth of the quoted
annual O&M prices for the relevant year of operation.
b. If the scope of O&M services is varied by the Owner owing to variation in
the lengths of sewerage lines maintained by the Operator during any part of
the contract period, the Monthly O&M charges payable to the Operator shall
be subject to adjustment on the basis of unit O&M prices provided in the
Operator‘s Price Schedule incorporated in Schedule 5 of the Contract.
c. In the event that the occurrence of the Operations Starting Date is delayed for
any reasons, O&M prices shall be paid from the date of commencement of
the Operations till the end of the O&M period of 10 years.
d. O & M price for operation of the SPSs (if any) quoted in the Operator‘s
Price Schedule comprises fixed and variable components. The said variable
component shall be adjusted on the basis of actual quantity of sewage
handled by the respective SPS. The adjusted variable component will be
computed by multiplying the quoted Cost of Energy per MLD of sewage
pumped (Variable Price) with the actual quantity of sewage handled.

Page 232 of 385

2. Right to withhold
The Design-Build Engineer / Owner may refuse to approve any such payment,
because of subsequently discovered evidence as a result of subsequent inspections or
tests, nullify any such payment previously approved and pay to such extent as may be
necessary in the opinion of the Design Build Operations Engineer because (a) the
work is defective (b) third party claims have been filed or there is reasonable
evidence indicating probability of such claims (c) of the Operator‘s failure to make
payment properly to sub-Contractors or for labor, materials or equipment (d) of
damage to another Operator or to the property of others caused by the Operator (e) of
the Operator‘s neglect or unsatisfactory proceeding of the work (f) Operator owes a
liability or a sum to Owner.
When the grounds for withholding payments are removed, payments shall be made
for amounts withheld to the extent the Operator is entitled to payment.

Page 233 of 385

 PAYMENT BREAK UP SCHEDULE OF CIVIL WORKS (EXECUTION)
NOTE: THE FOLLOWING IS A TENTATIVE BREAKUP AND SHOULD BE
FINALISED BY AS PER REQUIREMENT

PART – I, GRAVITY SEWERS LAYING OPEN CUT METHOD

Sl. Description Component wise

No. Percentage payment per
linear meter
(A) PROVIDING SEWER BY OPEN EXCAVATION
1 Approval of Design & Drawing 2%
2 Dewatering where required, barricading, traffic diversion, 60%
Excavation, (excluding back filling), Timbering/Sheet piling,
Bedding of pipes, Supply, laying & jointing of pipes
3 Manholes 10%
4 Interconnecting of newly laid sewer with existing sewerage 3%
network if required, otherwise that percentage will be given after
reinstatement of road.
5 Back filling, disposal of surplus earth and Temporary reinstatement 5%
of roads
6 Temporary shifting and restoration of water mains/ sewer lines & 5%
Telephone lines/ cables and other utilities
Sub-Total(A) 85%
(B) TESTING & COMMISSIONING
1 Sectional Testing 5%
2 Final Testing & Commissioning sewer 10%
Sub: Total (B) 15%
Grand Total A+B 100%

PART- II ROAD REINSTATEMENT

A. Bituminous Roads
1. Up to WBM /WMM level
55%
2. WBM to load bearing crust level
35%
3. Testing of road after two years maintenance
10%
B. Cement Concrete Roads

1. Up to BOE level
15%
2. Up to M 10 grade Base Concrete
30%
3. Up to finished level with M20 grade cement concrete
45%
4. Testing of road after two years maintenance
10%
C. Interlocking tiles of Cement concrete blocks
Page 234 of 385
 1. 90% Payment will be released only against completed part of BOE
roads on square meter basis & rest 10% after two years maintenance.
D. Brick on edge (BOE) Roads

1. 90% Payment will be released only against completed part of BOE

roads on square meter basis & rest 10% after testing of roads after
two years maintenance.

Page 235 of 385

 BREAK UP OF PAYMENT FOR ELECTRO MECHANICAL WORKS

i. Payment to be made against supply & installation 85%

ii. Payment to be made after testing at Site 5%
iii. Amount to be paid after commissioning and three months of 10%
trial run
Total 100%

Signature of Operator Signature of Engineer:

Name of Operator Name of Engineer
Rubber stamp with Designation Designation
Date Date
Place : Place :

Page 236 of 385

 Schedule 7

LIQUIDATED DAMAGES - OPERATIONS

SURVEY, REVIEW THE DESIGNS, REDESIGN WHERE NECESSARY AND

BUILD NEW SEWERAGE NETWORK OF ABOUT 180 KM LENGTH AND
ALL APPURTENANT STRUCTURES, AND OPERATION &
MAINTENANCE OF SEWERAGE NETWORK FOR A PERIOD OF 10
YEARS AT BEUR IN PATNA, STATE OF BIHAR, INDIA.

Page 237 of 385

1. Liquidated Damages (GC Section 5.4)
In case the Operator fails to meet the Performance Standards listed in the
Table below, payments due to the Operator shall be subject to deduction on
account of liquidated damages for defaults exceeding the Acceptable Limits.
Such deductions shall be over and above the costs and compensation that
might be required by the Owner to pay to the affected people and parties in
the area where O&M of the sewerage network has been entrusted to the
Operator.
―Acceptable Limit‖ is the permissible number of instances of defaults or non-
adherence to a particular Set of Performance Standards during the Quarter for
which payment has been claimed by the Operator.
The Operator shall be required to meet all of the Performance Standards as
specified herein below. He shall ensure that defaults from compliance with
the said Standards shall not exceed the Acceptable Limit; otherwise
Liquidated damages as specified herein shall be applicable.
as% of quarterly O&M
Reduction in payment
Performance set

Performance
performance set

Acceptable limit
Description of

Standard
Charges

1% of the
Sewer Network pipeline breakages that
quarterly
Sewerage are not repaired within 24 hours (for
1 per payments for
Network sewers up 800 mm dia) and 48 hours
month / each default
Set A Pipeline (for all higher dia) of their being
50 km exceeding the
Breakages reported, will be considered as
Acceptable
‗Breakages‘.
Limit
1 per
Chokes, Rectify Chokes / blockages within 24
month /
Set B Blockages do hours of reporting / complaint /
10 km
and identification.
length
Rs 500 per
Replaceme
1 per number of
nt of Replace damaged or stolen manhole
Set C month / covers not
Manhole covers immediately. Max 24 hours.
10 km replaced in 48
Covers
hours

Page 238 of 385

 Schedule 8

Price Adjustment

SURVEY, REVIEW THE DESIGNS, REDESIGN WHERE NECESSARY

AND BUILD NEW SEWERAGE NETWORK OF ABOUT 180 KM LENGTH
AND ALL APPURTENANT STRUCTURES, AND OPERATION &
MAINTENANCE OF SEWERAGE NETWORK FOR A PERIOD OF 10
YEARS AT BEUR IN PATNA, STATE OF BIHAR_, INDIA.

Page 239 of 385

 SCHEDULE 8

1. GENERAL

1.1 This Schedule lays down the procedure for determining the price adjustment to
be applied to the following components of the contract price:

(i) Design-Build Price for the Network, if SCC 5.1 (3) stipulates that price
adjustment will apply to Design-Build Price.

(ii) Price for Operation & Maintenance of the Network.

1.2 For the purpose of Price Adjustment, ‗Base Date‘ shall be the date 28 days
prior to the deadline for submission of bids for the contract. Thus Base date
for this contract is............... [EA should insert the date at the time of signing
the contract.]

1.3 Weightings for labor and various materials to be used in the Price Adjustment
formulas laid down in the Tables under paragraph 3 of this Schedule shall be
based on the figures quoted by the Operator as part of its bid under the
Schedule of Adjustment Data (in the Appendix to Bid), and as accepted by the
Owner.

2. PRICE ADJUSTMENT FOR DESIGN BUILD PRICE

2.1 If this Clause applies, the amounts payable to the Operator shall be adjusted for
rises or falls in the cost of labour, goods and other inputs to the Design-Build
Services, by the addition or deduction of the amounts determined by the
formulae prescribed in this Clause. To the extent that full compensation for
any rise or fall in Costs is not covered by the provisions of this or other
Clauses, the Accepted Contract Amount shall be deemed to have included
amounts to cover the contingency of other rises and falls in costs.
2.2 The adjustment to be applied to the amount otherwise payable to the Operator,
as valued in accordance with the Contract prices incorporated in Schedule 5,
and certified by the Design-Build-Operations Engineer in Payment Certificates
(referred to as ‗Interim Payment Certificates‘) after examining the statements
of monthly claims, shall be determined from formulae for each of the
currencies in which the Contract Price is payable. No adjustment is to be
applied to work valued on the basis of cost or current prices. The formulae
shall be of the following general type:

Pn = a + b Ln/ Lo + c En/Eo + d Mn/Mo + ...... where:

Page 240 of 385

 ―Pn‖ is the adjustment multiplier to be applied to the estimated contract value
carried out in period ―n‖, this period being a month;
―a‖ is a fixed coefficient, stated in the relevant table of adjustment data,
representing the non-adjustable portion in contractual payments;
―b‖, ―c‖, ―d‖, … are coefficients representing the estimated proportion of each
cost element related to the execution of the Design-Build Services, as stated in
the relevant table of adjustment data; such tabulated cost elements may be
indicative of resources such as labour, equipment and materials;
―Ln‖, ―En‖, ―Mn‖, … are the current cost indices or reference prices for period
―n‖, expressed in the relevant currency of payment, each of which is applicable
to the relevant tabulated cost element on the date 49 days prior to the last day
of the period (to which the particular Payment Certificate relates); and
―Lo‖, ―Eo‖, ―Mo‖, … are the base cost indices or reference prices, expressed in
the relevant currency of payment, each of which is applicable to the relevant
tabulated cost element on the Base Date.
2.3 The cost indices or reference prices stated in the table of adjustment data shall
be used. If their source is in doubt, it shall be determined by the Design-Build-
Operations Engineer.
2.4 Until such time as each current cost index is available, the Design-Build-
Operations Engineer shall determine a provisional index for the issue of
Interim Payment Certificates. When a current cost index is available, the
adjustment shall be recalculated accordingly.
2.5 If the Operator fails to complete the Design-Build Services within the
stipulated Time for Completion, adjustment of prices thereafter shall be made
using either (i) each index or price applicable on the date 49 days prior to the
expiry of the specified Time for Completion, or (ii) the current index or price,
whichever is more favorable to the Owner.
2.6 The weightings (coefficients) for each of the factors of cost stated in the
table(s) of adjustment data shall only be adjusted if they have been rendered
unreasonable, unbalanced or inapplicable, as a result of Variations.
3. Determination of Price Adjustment Multiplier

3.1 The Price adjustment multiplier ―Pn‖ to be applied to the estimated value of
work done in a month, as certified in the Interim Payment Certificates shall be
determined using the coefficients/weightings and cost indices etc. as provided
in Table below.

Index Index description Source of index Weighting

code

A Nonadjustable - 0.15

Page 241 of 385

 B Labour - Consumer price Labour Bureau, Ministry of 0.33
index for industrial Labour & Employment,
workers for ........centre Government of India
C Cement - All India Office of the Economic 0.10
Wholesale Price Index for Advisor to the Govt. of India,
grey cement Ministry of Commerce and
Industry
D Steel - All India Office of the Economic 0.05
Wholesale Price Index for Advisor to the Govt. of India,
steel rebars Ministry of Commerce and
Industry
E Bitumen - Average IOC depot at............... 0.02
official retail price of
bitumen

F POL - average official Retail outlet of IOC at........... 0.05

retail price of High Speed
Diesel

G Plant & Machinery Spares Office of the Economic 0.12

- All India Wholesale Advisor to the Govt. of India,
Price Index for Ministry of Commerce and
Construction machinery Industry

H Other materials - All India Office of the Economic 0.18

Wholesale Price Index for Advisor to the Govt. of India,
all commodities Ministry of Commerce and
Industry
Total 1.00

4. PRICE ADJUSTMENT FOR O&M PRICES

4.1 Owner shall pay O&M prices to the Operator subject to adjustments as per
following sub-paragraphs.

4.2 Adjustment for Variation in Electricity Tariff

O&M prices shall be subject to adjustment on account of variation in the Electricity

Tariff during the O&M period with reference to ‗Base Rate of Electricity Tariff‘
specified at the time of invitation of bids, namely Rs 6.50 per KWh. The said
adjustment shall be determined on the basis of the actual electricity consumption and
the Tariff evidenced by the Electricity bills paid by the Operator to the Electricity
Utility Company, subject to the following provisions:

Page 242 of 385

a) Variation shall be limited to the Guaranteed Energy Consumption applicable for
the level of effluent pumped by the SPS during the quarter.

b) Guaranteed Energy Consumption for the actual level of effluent handled by each
SPS will be calculated based on the energy consumption/MLD for the relevant
year of the O&M period as quoted in the Operator‘s Price Schedule incorporated
in Schedule 5 of the Contract.

The variation applicable as per this sub-paragraph 4.2 shall be claimed by the
Operator on quarterly basis.

4.3 Determination of cost of Diesel used in DG set

The Operator shall use back-up power supply from the DG set referred to in the
preceding sub-paragraph during the period power supply from the Electricity Utility
Company is not available. The DG set which shall be equipped with standard
accessories will inter alia record (i) energy supplied/generated by it and (ii) total
period for which it was operated in a month/quarter. Cost of Diesel for which
Operator will be entitled to compensation on account of energy obtained from the
back-up power supply unit shall be determined as under:

(a) Operator‘s representative and the Design Build Operations Engineer shall jointly
take the readings from the meters and gauges (sealed jointly by them at the
commencement of the O&M period) of DG set every month to arrive at the total
number of energy units (kWh) = E1 obtained from the back-up power supply unit.

(b) Number of energy units (kWh) obtained from the back-up power supply unit
during the month for which Operator shall be entitled to compensation (referred
to as ‗adjusted units of back-up energy supply‘) shall be determined in a series
of steps that follow.

The Owner will first determine the short-fall in supply from the Electricity
Utility Company.

Short-fall in supply from the Electricity Utility Company (E2)

= Energy Requirement as per Guaranteed Energy Consumption applicable for

the level of effluent treated by STP, and for the level of effluent pumped by the
respective SPSs during the month

(-) Units of energy (kWh) available/obtained during the month from the
Electricity Utility Company as evidenced by the Bill of the Utility Company for
the corresponding month

If the ‗Short-fall in supply from the Electricity Utility Company‘ (E2) works out
to be a negative figure, Operator shall not be entitled to compensation for using
the energy supply from the back-up power supply unit.
Page 243 of 385
 If E2 is a positive figure, compensation shall be based on E1 or E2 whichever is
lower and this lower figure shall be termed as ‗adjusted units of back-up
energy supply‟.

(c) Rated specific fuel consumption of the DG set specified by the Manufacturer in
its Specifications will then be used for determining the estimated diesel
consumption during the month for producing the ‗adjusted units of back-up
energy supply‘.

(d) Cost of estimated Diesel consumption in a month shall then be calculated on the
basis of price of diesel prevailing at mid-point of the month in IOC or HPCL‘s
retail outlet in the city where the SPSs are installed. Cost figures of three months
shall be added to arrive at the Cost of Diesel consumption in a quarter.

4.4 Adjustment in O&M Price for energy taken from the back-up power
supply unit

O&M prices quoted in the Operator‘s Price Schedule incorporated in Schedule 5 take
into account energy requirements of SPSs being met fully by power supplied by the
Electricity Utility Company. Hence compensation payable to the Operator for Energy
supply taken from an alternate source, namely the back-up power supply Unit shall
be corrected as under:

Adjustment in quarterly O&M price = Cost of Diesel consumption in a quarter

determined in accordance with sub-paragraph 4.3 (d) above minus ‗adjusted units of
back-up energy supply‘ determined as per sub-paragraph 4.3 (b) as applicable for the
quarter multiplied by the ‗Base Rate of Electricity Tariff‘.

The variation in O&M price applicable as per sub-paragraphs 4.3 and 4.4 shall be
claimed by the Operator on quarterly basis.

Page 244 of 385

 Schedule 9

SCHEDULE OF PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE

SURVEY, REVIEW THE DESIGNS, REDESIGN WHERE NECESSARY AND

BUILD NEW SEWERAGE NETWORK OF ABOUT 180 KM LENGTH AND
ALL APPURTENANT STRUCTURES, AND OPERATION &
MAINTENANCE OF SEWERAGE NETWORK FOR A PERIOD OF 10
YEARS AT BEUR IN PATNA, STATE OF BIHAR, INDIA.

Page 245 of 385

 [Bank’s Name, and Address of Issuing
Branch or Office]
Beneficiary: [Name and Address of Owner]
Date:
PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE NO.:
We have been informed that [name of Bidder] (hereinafter called ―the
Bidder‖) has entered into Contract No. [reference number of the
contract] dated with you, concerning a contract to design, build,
refurbish and operate a Sewerage Network in [Name of Location] (hereinafter called
―the Contract‖).
Furthermore, we understand that, according to the conditions of the Contract, a
performance guarantee is required.
At the request of the Operator, we [name of Bank] hereby irrevocably
undertake to pay you any sum or sums not exceeding in total an amount of
[amount in figures] ( ) [amount in words], upon receipt by us of
your first demand in writing accompanied by a written statement stating that the
Contract is in breach of its obligations under the Contract, without your needing to
prove or to show grounds for your demand or the sum specified therein.
This guarantee shall expire no later than the earlier of:
(a) six months after the End Date, as defined in the Contract; or
(b) six months after the date of termination of the Contract pursuant to its
terms.
Consequently, any demand for payment under this guarantee must be received by us
at this office on or before that date.
This guarantee is subject to the Uniform Rules for Demand Guarantees (URDG)
2010 Revision, ICC Publication No. 758 except that the supporting statement under
Article 15(a) is hereby excluded.
Yours truly,
[Name of Bank]

Authorised Signature

Page 246 of 385

 FORM OF BANK GUARANTEE – ADVANCE PAYMENT
[Name of Contract]
To: [Name and address of Owner]
Dear Ladies and/or Gentlemen,
We refer to the Contract Agreement (―the Contract‖) signed on [date] between you
and [name of Operator] (―the Operator‖) concerning the Services set out in the
Contract to Design, Refurbish, Build and Operate a Sewerage Network.
Whereas, in accordance with the terms of the Contract, the Owner agreed to pay or
cause to be paid to the Operator an advance payment in the amount of [number]
percent (____%) of the Contract Price for the Design-Build, Refurbish, Commission,
Operate and Maintaining Sewerage Network for 10 years, namely a payment of:
[amount of foreign currency in words], [amount in figures], and [amount of local
currency in words], [amount in figures].
By this letter we, the undersigned, [name of Bank], a Bank (or company) organised
under the laws of [country of Bank] and having its registered/principal office at
[address of Bank], do hereby jointly and severally with the bidder irrevocably
guarantee repayment of the amounts upon the first demand of the Owner without
cavil or argument in the event that the bidder fails to commence or fulfil its
obligations under the terms of the Contract, and in the event of such failure, refuses
to repay all or part (as the case may be) of the advance payment to the Owner.
Provided always that the Bank‘s obligation shall be limited to an amount equal to the
outstanding balance of the advance payment, taking into account such amounts that
have been repaid by the Bidder from time to time in accordance with the terms of
payment of the Contract as evidenced by appropriate shipping documents or
payments certificates.
This Guarantee shall remain in full force from the date upon which the advance
payment is received by the bidder until the date upon which the bidder has fully
repaid the amount is advanced to the Owner in accordance with the terms of the
Contract. At the time at which the outstanding amount is nil, this Guarantee shall
become null and void, whether the original is returned to us or not.
Any claims to be made under this Guarantee must be received by the Bank during its
period of validity.
This guarantee is subject to the Uniform Rules for Demand Guarantees
(URDG) 2010 Revision, ICC Publication No. 758, except that the supporting
statement under Article 15(a) is hereby excluded.
Yours truly,
[Name of the Bank] & Authorized Signature

Page 247 of 385

 Schedule 10

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION AND OPERATION

AND MAINTENANCE PHASE

SURVEY, REVIEW THE DESIGNS, REDESIGN WHERE NECESSARY AND

BUILD NEW SEWERAGE NETWORK OF ABOUT 180 KM LENGTH AND
ALL APPURTENANT STRUCTURES, AND OPERATION &
MAINTENANCE OF SEWERAGE NETWORK FOR A PERIOD OF 10
YEARS AT BEUR IN PATNA, STATE OF BIHAR, INDIA.

Page 248 of 385

Section 1. General

1 The Sewerage Network to be Designed, Built, refurbished if applicable, operated and

maintained, as detailed in the ITB/BDS sections, Tested and Commissioned by the
Operator shall comply with the guidelines contained in ―Manuals on Sewerage and
Sewage Treatment - Part A - Engineering, Part B - O&M, and Part C - Management‖
Latest Edition(s) published by the Central Public Health & Environmental
Engineering Organization (CPHEEO), Ministry of Urban Development, Government
of India.

1.1. Documents Comprising the Technical Standards

The Technical Standards consist of Technical Specification to be followed during
Construction of Sewerage Network and other ancillary/ allied works for all Civil,
Mechanical, Electrical, and Instrumentation required to be executed under this
Contract. Notwithstanding the said Specifications, the Operator shall adopt and
follow necessary standards and approved Codes /specification wherever required for
fulfillment of all the works under this contract.

1.2. Supplementing the General Conditions and Design-Build and Operating

Services
The Technical Standards specified in Schedule 10 shall be read along with the GCC /
SCC and Design-Build and Operations Services Schedules for the purpose of
providing greater specificity of the technical standards which the Operator shall meet.

1.3. General Quality Standards

The term ―General Quality Standard‖ means a standard of performance which,

(a) Is competent, efficient, economical and in accordance with internationally
accepted techniques used in the sewer disposal and civil works construction
industries;
(b) Is in accordance with professional engineering, accounting and consulting
standards, as applicable, recognized by national or international professional
bodies;
(c) Is in accordance with sound management, commercial, technical, design and
engineering practices;
(d) Employs appropriate technology and safe and effective equipment,
machinery and methods;
(e) Is in accordance with national and local standards and codes in the Owner‘s
Country;
(f) Protects the interests of the Authorities;
(g) Is in accordance with the Applicable Law;
(h) Is in accordance with the technical specifications and design standards of the
Owner as provided to the Operator;

Page 249 of 385

 (i) Is in accordance with the applicable Environmental Assessment and
Environmental Management and Mitigation Plan; and
(j) Is in accordance with the Design-Build Documents as approved by the
Owner.
In the event of any conflict or inconsistency between any standards that comprise the
General Quality Standard, local and national standards in the Owner‘s Country shall
prevail over international standards.

The Operator shall, at all times, carry out the Services in accordance with the
Technical Standards as specified and, where a specific technical standard of quality
of performance has not been specified, the Operator shall perform the Services to the
standard of ―General Quality Standards‖.

If the Owner is subjected to fines or penalties as a result of the operator‘s breach of

these Technical Standards, such fines or penalties shall be paid by the Operator

1.4. Design-Build Services

In respect of the Design-Build Services, the operator shall ensure that the design of
the Sewerage Network is prepared by qualified designers who are professionally
recognized to design the Sewerage Network and allied services.
The Operator warrants that the operator and its designers have the experience and
capability necessary for the design. Planning of the entire system should be done in
such a manner so as to optimize capital and operational costs of treatment of sewage
and maintenance of the Plant on whole on sustainable basis.

Section 2. SCOPE OF WORK & CONTRACTUAL REQUIREMENTS

The scope of work under this contract shall include but not limited to the following
and as specified in Bill of Quantities.

2.1. Review of Owner‘s proposals and designs: The Operator has to (i) undertake field
survey of the entire area proposed for coverage with sewerage, (ii) check the actual
levels with the levels used in the owner‘s proposal, (iii) review designs of sewerage
system provided by the owner, (iv) re-design the sewers (using CAD Software) and
undertake detailed design of sewage pumping systems (if applicable) wherever
necessary and prepare revised drawings, (v) submit the revised designs & drawings
and obtain approval of the Owner. The payment will be made as per the quoted rates
in bill of quantities for conducting survey, reviewing and redesigning. The Bidder has
to consider this aspect and make provision, while quoting the rates for Sewer pipe
(less than 300mm), supply, laying and jointing item in the tender.
Conducting Survey for laying of lateral sewers (less than 300 mm diameter) for
proposed alignment and levels, at every 30 meters interval and other necessary
locations before execution of the work including all data required for generating L
section and GIS maps of sewer network. Submission of survey drawings showing L-
Sections, ground levels at every 30 meters interval and other necessary locations,

Page 250 of 385

 detailed strip plans showing adjacent structures etc., in AutoCAD for approval of the
Engineer before execution of the work.
Also, conducting Survey for laying of sewers (equal to or greater than 300 mm
diameter) for proposed alignment and levels, at every 30 meters interval and other
necessary locations before execution of the work including all data required for
generating L section and GIS maps of sewer network. Submission of survey drawings
showing L-Sections, ground levels at every 30 meters interval and other necessary
locations, detailed strip plans showing adjacent structures etc., in AutoCAD for
approval of the Engineer before execution of the work. The Operator shall take prior
approval of the Owner before surveying in any changes in locations or alignments
from the original proposals.

2.2. Earth work excavation for pipeline trenches and manhole chambers including
depositing on bank including, danger lighting and using sight rails and boning rods at
every 100 meters and wherever necessary, including shoring, strutting, bailing out
water, as directed with all lifts etc., complete & lead as per Bill of quantities for
different strata and depth ranges.
2.3. De-watering for Excavation in all classifications in watery situation or foul
conditions towards, including overnight recuperation for all depth ranges, with all
lead and lifts etc., complete.
2.4. Providing erecting and removing casurina pole three tier Barricading using poles of
7.50 to 10 cms. Dia. and 1.50m height above ground fixed vertically at intervals of
2.0 to 2.5 m C/C and horizontally at 0.50 m, above ground level, including fixing
poles in the ground for a minimum depth of 0.30 m and tied with coir rope firmly
including cost and conveyance of all materials, labour, lead and lift charges complete.
2.5. Carting of excavated Earth of all types to a lead distance detailed in bill of quantities
& stacking of earth at identified suitable site and re-carting back the stacked earth to
the same site by vehicle, including loading , unloading charges for to & fro, with all
lifts, labour, HOM of machinery etc. complete. Lead distance indicated is one side
distance only. Bidder shall quote the rate for to & fro lead distance.
2.6. Disposing off the excess excavated earth of all types to a distance detailed in bill of
quantities by vehicle, including neatly stacking, loading, unloading, with all lifts,
labour, HOM of machinery etc. complete
2.7. Providing and installing steel trench sheeting or sheet piling for both sides of the
trench with mild steel sheets not less than 6.5 mm thick, stronger knife edge, recessed
spreader sockets, 3" single or double wall shields, to be designed by the Operator to
withstand all types of soils, maximum depths of 6m to 12m, as per the design
drawing and or as approved by the Engineer-in-charge. Including labour charges for
installing and removing the sheet piling at various reaches of sewer line construction,
including loading, unloading, transporting to the suitable location etc complete as
directed by the Engineer-in-charge. (Measurement shall be taken one side only).
2.8. Manufacturing / Procurement, Supplying, Laying and Jointing the specified
diameters of following pipes, for sewers in Beur.. AREA:
2.8.1. Glazed Stoneware (GSW) pipes confirming to IS: 651 with latest revisions &
amendments, Spigot & Socket (S&S) type jointed with hemp yarn dipped in tar and
with CM 1:1.5 as per IS: 4127 or with rubber gaskets applied with approved glue
Page 251 of 385
 before inserting of gaskets at manufacturing site, as per standards EN:295, including
cleaning the socket & spigot ends with soap solution and applying talcum powder for
detecting cracks and jointing at site by pushing, etc. complete. (For cement joint
sulphate resisting cement shall be used)
2.8.2. RCC NP3 S&S RCC SPUN / VIBRATED CAST PIPES (REINFORCED) as
per IS:458, with latest revisions & amendments, and manufactured using Sulphate
Resisting Cement (SRC) confirming to IS 12330, with rubber rings as per IS:5382,
and laying as per IS:783 with latest revisions & amendments etc. complete.
2.8.3. DI K-7 class pressure pipes with CM lining using SRC as per IS: 8329 with latest
revisions & amendments, with rubber rings as per IS: 5382, and laying as per IS:
12288 with latest revisions & amendments, with matching specials, fittings and
jointing materials for sewers at road / railway crossings by trench less method etc.
complete.
2.8.4. Corrugated HDPE pipes conforming to BIS 16908- part 2-2013

Page 252 of 385

2.9. Construction of all appurtenant structures such as Wire cut Brick, RCC Cast in-situ /
Pre-cast manhole structures, using SRC (sulphate resisting cement confirming to IS
12330 with latest revisions) with SFRC frames & covers, plastic encapsulated M.S.
footsteps, drop manholes, ventilating shafts, pipe supports, drain and road crossings,
etc. as per Bill of Quantities, approved drawings and relevant IS codes including all
temporary works and safety measures.
2.10. Interlinking the existing sewer lines with proposed lines and vice versa.
2.11. The contract covers, Conducting Level Survey of proposed and Existing sewerage
system by Collecting ground levels, invert level of sewers, size and type(material of
construction) of Sewers and at every manhole, including depth of manhole and
measuring length in between manholes and safely closing the manhole cover,
preparation and submission of Drawings in AutoCAD with all particulars in complete
manner as per specification and as directed by the Engineer in charge for cross
verifying the adaptability of existing sewer network with the proposed, which will be
verified by Owner‘s engineers, and decision will be given to retain or reject the part
or whole of the existing sewer network.. Levels shall be carried from the nearest
Bench mark given by EMPLYER for conducting this survey.
2.12. Providing PVC / GSW pipes for House Service Connections from Manholes / Sewer
lines as per specifications and approved drawings and as directed by the Engineer etc.
including all materials such as connecting pipes, earthwork, pipe line laying and
jointing, bedding etc. complete as per Bill of Quantities items of work.
2.13. Construction of sewage pumping stations including Electro mechanical works if any.
2.14. Backfilling the trenches in layers of specified thickness, material as per detailed
specifications and items in bill of quantities.
2.15. Providing Road or Railway crossing by adopting Trench less Method (i.e. pipe
ramming method/ manual pipe jacking method)) as per items in bill of quantities at
locations shown in the approved drawings, specifications and as directed by the
Engineer.
2.16. Taking all measures for complying to the Environmental Management Plan and
monitoring the same as per detailed specifications.
2.17. Operator shall be responsible for providing insurance as provided in Contract data.
2.18. Testing and commissioning the sewers after laying and construction of manholes as
per detailed specifications.
2.19. Restoration of Bituminous road with WBM and 20mm thick premix carpet with
liquid seal coat as per MORTH specifications and cement concrete roads as per
specifications and as directed by the Engineer including preparation of sub-grade, all
construction materials, tools and plants etc., complete.
2.20. Submission of as built drawings of sewer lines & its appurtenances, including L-
sections and plans as per specifications including existing laterals for which the
Operator has conducted the existing system level survey showing the entire sewer
network in the scope of this contract. The scope also covers associated civil works
including protective works, encasing of pipes with concrete and RCC NP-3 / D.I. and
HDPE, PVC pipes at road crossings, all safety measures etc.
2.21. All works shall be done as per the specifications in Bill of Quantities and in
compliance to the Technical, Financial bids and as directed by the Engineer. The
work shall be executed on item rate basis. Indicative Drawings related to the works

Page 253 of 385

 to be done, are given for guidance of the Operator. For the execution of Works, exact
details will be given in construction drawings based on the alignment drawings given
by the Operator. The prospective bidder is expected to visit the site of works at his
own expense to fully study the local conditions and to familiarize with the working
area and local conditions and include all such factors in his quoted rates.
2.22. Trial run of the System:-After commissioning of works or a section of the completed
works, the Operator shall conduct trial run to demonstrate satisfactory performance to
the Engineer prior to declaring commencement of O&M.

Section 3. Operator‟s Inspection of Sites

The Operator is deemed to have visited the sites and familiarized himself of the
conditions and restrictions under which the work will be executed. The omission of
any details shall not relieve the Operator of his prima facie obligation and
responsibility under the Contract to carry out and successfully complete the contract.
The Owner will entertain no monetary or other claims, made by the Operator on the
grounds of ‗want of knowledge‘.
Section 4. Work plan

The Operator shall prepare the work plan for the execution of works, which includes
procurement of pipes before starting of the works. The Operator shall submit the
planning (Survey, reviewing and redesigning, Construction, Quality control, and
Commissioning) within 14 days after issue of letter of acceptance and take necessary
approvals for the same. The planning‘s shall be done on MS project and indicate,
resources such as material, manpower, cash-flow etc. to complete the works as per
agreed time. The planning shall include all allowances to guard against delays caused
due to inclement weather or its effects (such as floods or draughts), fire or industrial
disputes, unless such events could not reasonably have been foreseen by an
experienced Operator.
Section 5. Alignment Survey and the L-Sections
The Operator shall carry out the Survey work for laying of lateral sewers (less than
300 mm diameter) for proposed alignment and levels, at every 30 meters interval and
other necessary locations, before execution of the work, including all data required
for generating L section and GIS maps of sewer network. Operator shall submit the
survey drawings showing L-Sections, ground levels at every 30 meters interval and
other necessary locations, detailed strip plans showing adjacent structures etc., in
latest version of AutoCAD for approval of the Engineer before execution of the
work. The Operator shall be deemed to have considered this aspect and made
provision, while quoting the rates for Sewer pipe (less than 300mm), supply, laying
and jointing item in the tender. If the alignment and flow directions of the sewers are
to be changed according to the site conditions and the Engineer In-charge agrees to
that, the Operator has to redo the alignment and level survey at every 30 m and
junction points, and submit all the details in latest version of Auto Cad in soft form to
OWNER, for re-design of that particular stretch and take up the work on receipt of
approved designs from OWNER.

Page 254 of 385

 Also, the Operator shall carry out the Survey work for laying of branch/ sub-main
/main / trunk sewers (more than 300 mm diameter) for proposed alignment and
levels, at every 30 meters interval and other necessary locations, before execution of
the work, including all data required for generating L section and GIS maps of sewer
network. Operator shall submit the survey drawings showing L-Sections, ground
levels at every 30 meters interval and other necessary locations, detailed strip plans
showing adjacent structures etc., in latest version of AutoCAD for approval of the
Engineer before execution of the work. The Operator shall take prior approval for
location and length of the survey work for this paid item. The payment will be made
as per the quoted rates for conducting survey in bill of quantities. If the alignment
and flow directions of the sewers are to be changed according to the site conditions
and the Engineer In-charge agrees to that, the Operator has to redo the alignment and
level survey at every 30 m and junction points, and submit all the details in latest
version of Auto Cad in soft form to OWNER, for re-design of that particular stretch
and take up the work on receipt of approved designs from OWNER. The alignments,
L-section and location of manholes may be changed at site if required, and after
approval of the Engineer.

The Survey work for all the sewer lines (for all diameters of sewers) alignment shall
also include the following:
a) All the Survey works shall be carried out from G.T.S. Benchmarks, using Total
Station instrument of standard make, and by qualified survey personnel. The survey
shall consist of field data collection and related attribute information collection of all
the aspects using GPS and transferring to GIS map of sewer network before and after
laying of sewer pipes and allied structures, as required by OWNER.
b) Field attribute collection for Mapping with respect to existing sewerage network does
not require any digging in the field. The existing maps / OWNER field staff
knowledge can be utilized by the Operator to provide the data for mapping the said
network and it will be paid as per the survey work item in Bill of quantities.
c) Network entity‘s attribute information like pipe dia, pipe type, ground material, depth
of the pipe, manhole type; manhole size, manhole depth etc. shall be submitted.
d) The data pertaining to House Service Connections (connection to consumers) have to
be collected up to building footprint and submitted.
e) The Operator shall communicate regularly, with the OWNER regarding the GIS
mapping survey data and for clarifications.

Section 6. Applicable I.S. codes or other Standards

The Technical Standards and Specifications contained in this contract shall be read
along with the following standard specifications (latest versions) published by the
Bureau of Indian Standards listed below:
IS: 3764 with latest revisions & amendments ~ Excavation work- code of safety
IS: 12330 with latest revisions & amendments ~ Specification for Sulphate resisting
Portland cement.
IS: 8112 with latest revisions & amendments specification for 43 grade OPC cement

Page 255 of 385

IS: 651:1992 with latest revisions & amendments ~ Specification for Salt glazed
stone ware pipes & fittings.
IS: 4127:1967 with latest revisions & amendments ~ Code of practice for Laying of
Glazed Stoneware Pipes
EN: 295 with latest revisions & amendments ~ Specification for GSW pipes with
rubber gasket joints.
EN: 681 & ASTM C-425 with latest revisions & amendments ~ Specification for
Rubber gaskets and jointing of GSW pipes.
IS 458-1988, IS4350-1967 with latest revisions & amendments ~ Specification for
pre-cast Concrete Pipes.
IS: 783-1959 with latest revisions & amendments ~ Code of Practice for Laying of
Concrete Pipes
IS: 8329:2000 with latest revisions & amendments ~ Specification for Ductile iron
Pipes
IS: 12288 with latest revisions & amendments ~ Code of practice for use & laying of
ductile iron pipes
IS: 4984:1995 with latest revisions & amendments ~ Specification for HDPE Pipes
IS: 16098 (part 2): 2013 - Structured wall piping system for non-pressure drainage &
sewerage
IS: 4111 (Part 1 to 4) with latest revisions & amendments ~ Code of practice for
ancillary structures in sewerage system.
IS: 10910 with latest revisions & amendments ~ Specification for polypropylene &
its co-polymers coatings.
IS 12592 with latest revisions & amendments ~ Specification for manholes covers
and frames.
IS: 3597 with latest revisions & amendments ~Method of tests for concrete pipes.
IS: 5382 with latest revisions & amendments ~ specification for rubber sealing rings
for gas mains, water mains and sewers.
IS: 383-1970 with latest revisions & amendments ~ Aggregates of Concrete
IS 456:2000 with latest revisions & amendments ~ Code of practice for Plain &
reinforced concrete.
IS: 516 with latest revisions & amendments ~ Methods of test for strength of
concrete
IS: 2212-1962 with latest revisions & amendments ~ code of practice for Brickwork
IS: 1957 (Part-I) with latest revisions & amendments ~ Construction of Rubble Stone
Masonry.
IS: 1957 (Part-II) with latest revisions & amendments ~ Construction of Ashlar Stone
Masonry.
IS: 2250 with latest revisions & amendments ~ Code of practice for preparation and
use of masonry mortars
IS: 73 with latest revisions & amendments ~ Specification for Paving Bitumen.
IS: 215 with latest revisions & amendments ~ Specification for Road Tar.
IS: 217 with latest revisions & amendments ~ Specification for Cutback Bitumen.
IS: 460 (Part 1 to 3) with latest revisions & amendments ~ Specification for Test
Sieves.

Page 256 of 385

 IS: 2386 (Part 1 to 8) with latest revisions & amendments ~ Methods of test for
aggregates for concrete.
IS: 2720 with latest revisions & amendments ~ Method of Test for soils.
IS: 6241 with latest revisions & amendments ~ Method of test for determinations of
stripping value of road aggregates
IRC: 16 with latest revisions & amendments ~ specification for priming of Base
course with Bituminous Primers.
IRC: 17 with latest revisions & amendments ~ Tentative for single coat Bituminous
surface Dressing.
IRC: 19 with latest revisions & amendments ~ Standard specification and code of
practice for water bound macadam
IRC: 29 with latest revisions & amendments ~ Specification for bituminous concrete
for road pavement
IS 6280 – 1971 – Sewage Screens
IS 8413 – 1982 – Biological Treatment Equipment – Part II and its modifications
IS 10037 – Part I – 1981 & Part II & III – 1983 – Sludge dewatering equipments
IS 10261 – Requirements for settling tank for waste water
IS 105533 – Part I, II, III – Chlorination Plants
IS 5600 – 1970 - Sewage and Drainage Pumps
IS 6279 – 1971 – Grit Removal devices
The list is not exclusive and the operator shall be responsible to follow the
appropriate standards.
Section 7. Equivalency of Standards and Codes
Wherever reference is made in the Contract to specific standards and codes to be met
by the goods and materials to be furnished, and work performed or tested, the
provisions of the latest current edition or revision of the relevant standards and codes
in effect shall apply, unless otherwise stated in the Contract. Where such standards
and codes are national, or relate to a particular country or Region, other authoritative
standards which ensure an equal or higher quality than the standards and codes
specified will be acceptable subject to the Engineer's prior review and written
approval. Differences between the standards specified and the proposed alternative
standards must be fully described in writing by the Operator and submitted to the
Engineer at least 28 days prior to the date when the Operator desires the Engineer's
approval. In the event the Engineer determines that such proposed deviations do not
ensure equal or higher quality, the Operator shall comply with the standards specified
in the documents.
Section 8. Samples and Tests
a) The Operator shall be responsible to develop a quality control program and to
provide all necessary materials, apparatus, instruments, equipment, facilities, and
qualified staff for sampling, testing and quality control of all the materials used for
the works under this Contract.
b) The Operator shall obtain the approval of the Engineer for the quality control
programme developed by him and incorporate any modifications suggested by the
Engineer at no extra cost. Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, the
Operator shall either –establish a testing laboratory at the site of works which is

Page 257 of 385

 adequately equipped and staffed to carry out all sampling and testing in accordance
with the requirement set out in the Specifications and /or these Special Specifications
and provide all field equipment and apparatus as necessary to conduct all specified
in-situ tests and/or any Tests on Completion, or arrange for routine sampling, testing
and reporting, as required, through a certified independent testing laboratory
approved by the Engineer.
c) All costs of such sampling, testing and reporting of test results will be borne by the
Operator, and the Operator shall include sufficient provisions in his tendered rates to
allow for independent sampling and laboratory testing under the direction of the
Engineer of the required tests at no additional cost. The Operator shall furnish
certified copies of all test reports to the Engineer within 5 days of completion of the
specified tests ( The tests shall be conducted immediately prior/after delivery at site
as directed by the Engineer In-charge / on due date of sample testing, as per relevant
IS for In-situ items.)
d) The Operator shall, within 21 days after the date of the Letter of Acceptance, submit
to the Engineer for his consent a detailed description of the arrangements for
conducting the quality control program during execution of the Works, including
details of his testing Laboratory, equipment, staff and general procedures. If
following submission or at any time during the progress of Works, it appears to the
Engineer that the Operator's quality control programme is not adequate to ensure the
quality of the Works, the Operator shall produce a revised program as desired by the
Engineer, which will be adequate to ensure satisfactory quality control.
8.1. Tests during Construction
For ensuring the requisite quality of construction, the Materials and Works shall be
subject to the quality control tests as described in relevant IS as specified /applicable
and as directed by the Engineer. The testing frequencies set forth are desirable
minimum and the Engineer shall have full authority to get the additional tests carried
out by the Operator as frequently as he may deem necessary, to satisfy himself that
the Materials and Works comply with the appropriate Specifications. Where no
specific testing procedure is mentioned, the tests shall be carried out as per the
prevalent accepted Engineering practices as per the directions of the Engineer.
8.2. Third Party Inspections
The Operator shall, at his own or manufacturer‘s cost, at manufacturers premises,
provide the necessary gauges, supply and prepare all test pieces and supply all labour
and apparatus for testing which may be necessary for carrying out the tests as
required as per relevant latest Indian Standard for all materials specified.

The Owner appointed Third party inspection agency will inspect and certify the
quality of specified materials as per relevant latest Indian Standard with all
amendments. The inspection and certification charges will be paid directly by
OWNER to the Third Party Inspecting and certifying Agency. The Operator shall be
responsible to obtain permission and provide all facilities to carry out such testing as
required.

Page 258 of 385

 A mutually agreed quality assurance plan with, minimum requirements as specified
below will be developed which provides for inspection and certification by the Third
party inspection agency at specified times during the manufacture, fabrication and
installation at site of such items.

List of Items, which will be subject to, third party inspection and stages of
inspections are as tabulated below:

Sl. ITEMS STAGES OF INSPECTION

No.
1). RCC Pipes & 1. Visual and dimension check.
rubber rings. 2. Quality of raw materials as per IS: 458 with latest revision and
amendments.
3. Physical requirements as per IS: 458 with latest amendments.
4. Hydrostatic Test
5. Three edge bearing Test & permeability test as per IS: 458 with
latest amendments.
6. All other Tests as may be found necessary as per relevant Indian
standards.
7. Rubber ring for corrosion/elongation as per relevant IS Code and
8. All other tests as per relevant standards as mentioned in this
Technical specifications and approved QAP.
2). Stoneware 1. General Quality, Visual and dimension check as per as per
Pipes, specials IS: 651 with latest revision and amendments.
& rubber
2. Hydraulic and water Absorption test as per as per IS: 651
rings. with latest revision and amendments.
3. Acid and Alkali resistance test as per as per IS: 651 with
latest revision and amendments.
4. Crushing strength test as per as per IS: 651 with latest
revision and amendments.
5. EPDM Rubber rings for Elongation and other test as per
relevant standard.
6. All other tests as per relevant standards as mentioned in this
Technical specifications and approved QAP.
3). PVC pipes
1. General Quality, Visual and dimension check as per as per
and Specials relevant IS with latest revision and amendments.
2. Hydraulic test as per relevant IS with latest revision and
amendments.
3. Acid and Alkali resistance test as per as per relevant IS
with latest revision and amendments.
4. All other tests as per relevant standards as mentioned in this
Technical specifications and approved QAP.
4). DI Pipes,
1. Visual and Dimensions Check
rubber rings &2. Review of Chemical and Physical test certificates as per relevant

Page 259 of 385

 Sl. ITEMS STAGES OF INSPECTION
No.
Specials. IS standards.
3. Hydraulic Test
4. Checking of Cement Mortar lining/ coating for strength, thickness,
cracks etc,
5. Rubber Ring for Corrosion / Elongation as per IS code
6. Three edge bearing test / Bursting Test and
7. All other tests as per relevant standards as mentioned in this
Technical specifications and approved QAP.
5). HDPE Pipes,1. Visual and Dimensions Check
Corrugated 2. Review of Chemical and Physical test certificates as per
HDPE pipes relevant IS standards.
& Specials 3. Hydraulic Test and
4. All other tests as per relevant standards as mentioned in
this Technical specifications and approved QAP.
6). SFRC 1. Tests conforming to IS 12592 part I-1989 and part II-1991
manholes with latest amendments, Load test etc. and
covers and
2. All other tests as per relevant standards as mentioned in
frames (Heavy this Technical specifications and approved QAP.
Duty)
7). Valves. 1. Visual and dimension check
2. Review of material test certificate for valve body and internals.
3. Operational Smoothness.
4. Hydraulic test / leakage test as per applicable codes. and
5. All other tests as per relevant standards as mentioned in this
Technical specifications and approved QAP.
Section 9. Sign Board
The Operator shall provide sign boards at the sites of the Works of approved size and
design as directed by the Engineer, which provides (i) the name of the Project and the
financing agency (World Bank loan); (ii) the names and addresses of the Owner,
Operator and Consultants; (iii) short description of the Project, (iv) the Contract
amount (v) the starting and completion dates.
Such sign boards shall be located at specified places in the project coverage area as
directed by the Engineer. Operator shall take care of signboard and replace it in case
of loss, damage, theft etc., the sign boards may be in English or Hindi/ local language
or in both as directed by the Engineer.

Page 260 of 385

Section 10. Protection of Utilities
10.1. The Operator is required to examine carefully the locations of the works and their
alignments. Operator is to make enquiries and co-ordinate with all the departments
/authorities concerning all utility lines such as water pipes, sewers, gas pipe,
telephone (underground and /or overhead) lines, optic fibre cables, electric and
telecommunication cables (underground and /or overhead) , any other utility lines
etc.; to determine and verify to his satisfaction the character, sizes, position and
lengths of such utilities from authentic records.
10.2. The Operator shall be wholly responsible for the protection of such utilities as may
be required, and shall not make any claim for extra work or extra time that may be
required to protect such utilities. Any damage, to the Utilities shall be restored/
repaired at Operator‘s own cost. Shifting of any utilities if required will be taken up
by OWNER or any other agency separately after site inspection.
10.3. In case of water supply house Service connections, if the connections encountered in
the corridor of execution of the Bill of Quantities item of work of this package is
damaged even after taking all precautions by the Operators for the safety of the
structures, the cost of the item shall be paid to the Operator as per approved Bill of
Quantities item rates in the contract.
10.4. In case the alignment of the pipeline crosses the high tension electrical transmission
lines belonging to the other authorities/ departments, the Operator shall take all
precautions necessary to see that the work is carried out with care and safety, without
disturbing such transmission lines. The Operator will be responsible to carry out all
construction activities in such reaches in consultation with the owners of such
facilities. However, satisfactory completion of the entire work will be the
responsibility of the Operator.
Section 11. Performance Requirements:
The performance requirements have been spelt out in various parts of the Contract
specification. The Operator shall ensure that, he fully understands and complies with
all the requirements specified in the Contract. However, in the event of any
conflicting performance requirements spelt out in the documents, the Operator shall
promptly bring such matters in writing to the attention of the Engineer for Engineers
decision. The Engineer‘s decision will be conveyed to the Operator in writing and
which is final. The Operator shall fully comply with Engineer‘s decision on the
matter. The Operator is deemed to have read and understood all performance
requirements before bidding and he shall have no claim whatsoever with respect to
the Engineer‘s final decision on the matter.
Section 12. Operator‟s Obligations:
The Clauses in this section are meant to provide general guidelines and Compliance
requirements to the Operator. It does not however relieve the Operator from taking
every other step and precautions as deemed necessary to complete the works
successfully within the specified Contract period and bid amount. Also, compliance
to the approved Environmental management plan and monitoring the same is part of
the contract.

Page 261 of 385

 12.1. Environmental Management Plan and Monitoring.
The Operator shall be responsible for the mitigation measures to be taken for
complying to the Environmental management plan and monitor as described below.
12.2. Environmental Management Plan - Construction Phase
Attached as Appendix 1 to DBSS

Section 13. PENALTY ON ACCOUNT OF NON-COMPLIANCE

If the operator in the opinion of the engineer in-charge does not comply to the
environmental management plan and monitoring, the engineer in-charge reserves the
right to stop the work and any delay on account of this will be on the part of the
operator and penalty as per liquidated damages clause in conditions of contract and
contract data shall be imposed upon approval by the concerned engineer, owner.

Section 14. Confined Space Safety Procedure:

The Operator shall implement a well-prepared Space Entry Safety Procedure to work
in Confined areas / Elevated areas. Such procedures shall incorporate all aspects of
staff work activities, internationally adopted best practices, site staff and workmen
training, hazard awareness, first aid procedures, particularly applicable to workmen
in Elevated / Confined space, provision and use of appropriate safety equipment‘s,
personal hygiene, safety / emergency procedures, method of easy evacuation of
workers etc. The Operator has to develop and implement his own safety procedures.
He should also provide necessary insurance to the workers involved in the execution
of work.

Section 15. Special Traffic Precautions

Operator‘s Attention is specially drawn to the requirements by the traffic police and
road authorities and specification regarding traffic control, access and reinstatement
of road surface. It is necessary to obtain permission from traffic Inspector of Police
prior to taking up any stretch of road for excavation and sewer laying. It is necessary
to carry out the work in such a manner as to cause minimum interference with the
public use of roads, footpaths and other thoroughfares.

Section 16. Working in Restricted areas

In addition to the clause stated in other section of the special specification the
Operator shall determine prior to constructing the lengths of sewers where access to
properties commercial, domestic and institutional will be restricted.

The identification of these areas shall be agreed in consultation with the Engineer,
Police and Urban local body. In this case it may be necessary to operate one-way
traffic system or to close roads. The Operator shall be responsible for liaising with
the police and other local representatives to obtain permission to close roads or
Page 262 of 385
 restrict traffic movement. No additional time will be allowed for these pre-
construction activities. Where roads are closed alternative routes are to be
determined in conjunction with the authorities. Sign Boards are to be placed at both
junctions of the route indicating ―ROAD CLOSED & WORK UNDER
PROGRESS‖. The expense for the same shall be borne by the Operator. The
Operator shall discuss these arrangements with the occupants of houses affected to
ensure that their disruption is kept to a minimum. The Operator is to offer assistance
to residents who are infirm or need special arrangements for access during
construction.

In narrow roads and streets it may not be possible to operate excavation machinery in
such cases hand excavation is to be done. The method of operation, length of sewer
to be excavated, method of barricading, property access, dewatering, shoring, pipe
laying, backfilling and road reinstatement shall be stated in a ‗Method Statement‘ to
be submitted at least 4 weeks before work is scheduled to commence in a particular
location. The written agreement of the Engineer shall be obtained to the method
statement. If any additional safeguards are required by the Engineer these shall be
incorporated in the method statement at no extra cost and the method statement is to
be resubmitted.

The Operator will ensure that the noise created by his activities is suppressed.
Adequate silencers fitted to construction machinery, particularly compressors and
drills. Dust is to be kept to a minimum by using water sprinklers. Utility service
connections shall be maintained to every property throughout the construction phase
and thereafter. If any defect/ damage is caused it shall be repaired immediately and
at the Operator‘s expense. The disruption to the normal activities of residents and
other members of the public is to be kept to an absolute minimum. Providing
adequate noise control and other nuisances are kept to a minimum, extended working
hours may be permitted with the agreement of the Engineer and local residents. No
additional payment shall be made for any of these arrangements unless otherwise
specified. Adequate lighting shall be provided by the Operator at his cost if night
working is adopted.

Section 17. Interfaces with other packages

If this contract Package will have interface with other contracts, the Operator shall
only undertake the end connections of sewers at the interface points, after the sewer
has passed the hydraulic test on completion of end connections. The Operator shall
lay the bedding and backfill for sewers in normal manner.

Section 18. MEASUREMNTS & PAYMENTS

18.1. MEASUREMENTS
18.1.1. Quantities

Page 263 of 385

 The quantities set out in the Bill of Quantities are the estimated quantities for the
Works, and they are not be taken as the actual and correct quantities of the Works to
be executed by the Operator in fulfillment of his obligations under the Contract.
18.1.2. Works to be measured
The Engineer shall, except as otherwise stated, ascertain and determine by
measurement the value of the works in accordance with the contract and the Operator
shall be paid that value in accordance with applicable clauses of this contract. The
Engineer shall, when he requires any part of the works to be measured, give
reasonable notice to the Operator‘s authorized agent, who shall:
Forthwith attend or send a qualified representative to assist the Engineer or his
representative in making such measurement, and supply all particulars required by
the Engineer or his representative.
Should the Operator not attend, or neglect or omit to send such representative, then
the measurement made by the Engineer or his representative or approved by him
shall be taken to be the correct measurement for such part of the works. For the
purpose of measuring such Permanent Works as are to be measured by records and
drawings, the Engineer shall prepare such records and drawings as the work proceeds
as he deems necessary or appropriate and the Operator, as and when called upon to
do so in writing, shall within 14 days, attend to examine and agree such records and
drawings with the Engineer and shall sign the same when so agreed. If after
examination of such records and drawings, the Operator does not agree the same or
does not sign the same as agreed, they shall nevertheless be taken to be correct,
unless the Operator, within 14 days of such examination, lodges with the Engineer
notice of the respects in which such records and drawings are claimed by him to be
incorrect. On receipt of such notice, the Engineer shall review the records and
drawings and either confirm or vary them.

18.1.3. Method of Measurement

The Works shall be measured net, notwithstanding any general or local custom,
except where otherwise provided for in the Contract.

18.2. PAYMENTS
No part payments will be made for all items of works under this contract, except for
pipeline works, which will be paid as mentioned in contract data.

Section 19. Earthwork excavations

19.1. General
The Earthwork Excavation for laying of sewers shall be carried out as per applicable
IS specifications, specification in the Bill of quantities and applicable clauses in this
specifications.
The Operator shall make all excavations required for laying and jointing of the
pipeline and construction of pertinent structures as required by the project. Except
where otherwise required by the project or instructed by the Engineer, all excavation

Page 264 of 385

 shall be in open cut, to the specified widths and depths with shoring, strutting and
bracing. The Operator is advised to satisfy himself and shall be deemed to have
quoted rates accordingly with regard to the likely conditions that may be met with
during the execution of the works, with regard to the underground obstructions or
conditions, necessary dewatering requirements including well point system or other
means of dewatering the trenches before, during and after excavation, laying of
bedding material, laying and jointing sewers, hydraulic testing and till backfilling,
construction of manholes, pipe supports etc., in sub terrain underground water, rain
water, sewage and waste water etc.
Earth work excavation for pipeline trenches and manhole chambers including
depositing on bank including, danger lighting and using sight rails and boning rods,
including shoring, strutting, bailing out water at every 100 metres wherever necessary
as directed in the various strata with lead upto 30 meters and all lifts etc., complete. A
minimum of three numbers of sight rails are to be maintained at all times during pipe
laying between manholes, including barricading as per directions of Engineer In-
charge of work. (The Excavation cost should include the cost of shoring, strutting to
facilitate for laying, jointing & testing of sewers, manholes).
19.1.1. Classification of Excavation
All Soils includes the following,
(a) Soft clay, soft murrum, gravel shale etc. including. Stiff heavy clay, hard shale or
compact murrum requiring drifting tool or pick axe or both and shovel closely
applied.
(b) Gravel, soft laterite, kankar and cobble stone having maximum diameter in anyone
direction between 75 mm and 300 mm.
(c) Soling of road paths etc., and hard core.
(d) Macadam surfaces such as water-bound and bitumen/tar bound.
(e) Lime concrete, stone masonry in lime/cement mortar below ground level.
(f) Soft Conglomerate, where the stones may be detached from the matrix with pick axe.
(g) Generally any material which requires the close application of pick axe or scarifiers to
loosen and not offering resistance to digging, greater than that offered by the hardest
of any soil mentioned above.
19.1.2. Disintegrated Rock (D.I.R.) soft rock and medium hard rock includes,
(a) Ordinary rock comprising of lime stone, sand stone, hard laterite fissured rock,
conglomerate or other soft or disintegrated rock which may be quarried or split with
crow bars.
(b) Un-reinforced cement concrete which may be broken up with crow bars or pick axe and
stone masonry in cement mortar below ground level.
(c) Boulders which do not require blasting having maximum diameter in any direction of
more than 300 mm; found lying loose on the surface or embedded in river bed, soil,
talus, slope, wash, and terrace material of dissimilar origin.
(d) Hard laterite does not require blasting. It is to be classified under ordinary rock which
does not require blasting.
19.1.3. Hard Rock includes,
Any rock or cement concrete or RCC, excavation of which require the use of
mechanical equipment or chiselling.
Page 265 of 385
19.2. All soils
The Earth work excavation in all soils, including the ones mixed with boulders of up
to 30 cms size, includes excavation both by manual and machine excavation based
on location of excavation and space constraints. The quoted rates are applicable for
both manual and machine excavation, the location and extent of manual and machine
excavation should be as described below,

19.2.1. Manual excavation

The manual excavation for laying the sewers in pipeline trenches shall be carried out
as decided and directed by the Engineer In-charge, along the alignment of such
narrow roads and main roads where it is not possible for machine excavation and, at
excavations in deeper depths of more than 3m, providing all safety measures to
workmen at Operator‘s risk, also, manual excavation is to be adopted at the possible
locations of underground utilities to safeguard against damage.
19.2.2. Machine excavation
The machine excavation for laying the sewers in pipeline trenches shall be carried out
along the alignment of wide roads and in depths where there are no underground
utilities without causing any damage to public property, and inconvenience to public

19.2.3. Disintegrated Rock, Soft Rock and Soft Shale

This category includes excavation in disintegrated rock, soft rock, soft shale and in
medium rock comprising of lime stone, hard shale, schist, fissured rock, and all types
of laterite with varying densities and composition requiring chiseling which can be
cut by shovel and but without resorting to blasting.
19.2.4. Hard Rock
This category includes excavation in hard rock requiring hand and/or mechanical
chiselling. In case of difference in opinion between the classifications of rocks, the
decision of the Engineer shall be final and binding on the Operator.
19.2.5. Shoring and Bracing
a) As per Specifications and directions of the Engineer, the Operator shall supply, fix
and maintain necessary sheathing, shoring and bracing etc., in steel or wood, as may
be required to support the sides of the excavation, to protect workmen in the trench
and to prevent any trench movement which might any way injure or delay the work,
change the required width of the trench, make unsafe condition for adjacent
pavements, utilities, buildings or other structures above or below ground.
b) Sheathing, shoring and bracing shall be withdrawn and removed as the backfilling is
being done, except when the Engineer may agree that such sheathing, shoring and
bracing be left in place, at the Operator's request. In any case, the Operator shall cut
off any such sheathing at least 600 mm below the surface and shall remove the cut
off material from the trench.
c) All sheathing, shoring and bracing which is left in place under the foregoing
provisions shall be removed in a manner so as to, not endanger the completed work
or other structures, utilities or property, whether public or private.
Page 266 of 385
19.3. Excavation in Rock
Excavation in rock shall be carried out without resorting to any kind of blasting, to a
depth, 150 mm more than the bottom level of pipe and to a width equal to the
diameter of the pipe plus specified working space on either side as given in drawing /
as mentioned above. Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, rock excavation shall
be progressed at least by 20 m in advance of the pipe length proposed to be laid.
19.4. Limits of excavation.
The trench for laying of sewers and construction of manholes shall be excavated in
accordance with the relevant applicable Indian standard, as per the approved
drawings, or as directed by the Engineer. The width at bottom of trenches for sewers,
unless otherwise specified in the approved construction drawings, or directed and
approved by Engineer, for different diameters of pipes laid at different depths shall
be as given below,
a) For all diameters, up to an average depth of 1.20 m, width of trench in mm is
equal to diameter of pipe plus 300 mm.
b) For all diameters for depths above 1.20 m, width of trench in mm is equal to
diameter of pipe plus 400 mm.
c) Not with standing (a) and (b) the total width of trench should not be less than 0.75
meters for depths exceeding 0.90 meters.

The width at top of trenches for sewers shall depend on depth of sewer, location and
alignment of sewer, as per the approved construction drawings and directions of
Engineer. Unless other wise specified in the drawings or directed by Engineer, for
providing of sheet piling as per specifications in Bill of quantities, the top widths for
excavations up to 2 meters depth shall be equal to bottom width (i.e. vertical side
cuts.) and for depths beyond two meters depth, for all types of soils/rock, steps shall
be provided of 0.30 m width on either side of the trench at every lift of 2 meters and
as per the directions of Engineer. The quoted rates for excavations in accordance with
the above specifications shall include all shoring and strutting for all depths.
The depth of excavations shall limit to the specified gradients/reduced levels as per
the approved construction drawings at ends, considering the necessary beddings /
encasement / surround.
The Operator shall not excavate beyond the dimensions specified as above. Should
the excavation occur beyond the dimensions specified therein, because of the
negligence of the Operator, the Operator shall fill the excess space with granular
material or concrete as directed by the Engineer. Nothing extra shall be paid to the
Operator on account of this. The Operator shall quote the rates for excavation items,
limiting the trench widths as above for whatsoever depths encountered, including
necessary arrangements as required. Any extra claim and increase in quantity other
than the widths specified above, shall not be entertained or paid.
19.5. Trial pits
Trial pits shall be excavated by the Operator, as directed to do so, along the lines of
the trenches as shown on the drawings in advance of the excavations for the purpose
of satisfying himself as to the location of underground utilities, obstructions or soil
strata‘s and conditions. Trial pits shall be excavated preferably by manual

Page 267 of 385

 excavation. The Operator has to take the permission of the concerned Executive
Engineer, OWNER, before taking up the work.
It involves, Earth work excavation for trial pits in all kinds of strata and for all
depths, recording necessary details of underground utilities and kind of strata,
including depositing on bank excavated earth, including barricading, posting safety
sign boards, shoring, strutting, bailing out water, wherever necessary as directed with
all lead and lifts etc., complete. Any damage to the existing utilities unless otherwise
specified shall be repaired at Operator‘s own cost. The Precautionary measures shall
be taken by the Operator while making trial pits and shall inform the Engineer before
commencing such works. The Operator will be paid as per the item in BOQ on
account of this work.
19.6. Dewatering
Extra charges will be paid at quoted rates, for excavation in all classifications in
watery situation or foul conditions towards dewatering including overnight
recuperation for specified depth ranges with all lead and lifts etc., complete,
including cost of installation and running of dewatering system such as well point
system / any other system wherever required.
Dewatering shall be done in accordance with specifications. The Operator shall be
responsible for the adequate pumping, drainage and bailing out of water from the
excavation in case of inundation etc., of trenches. The sewer lines shall be laid above
normal ground water table level and as directed by the Engineer. Dewatering shall be
either continuous or intermittent using Diesel pump or any other method approved by
the Engineer. The method of dewatering shall depend on site condition and should
be furnished by the Operator and approved by the Engineer. The method of
dewatering shall be either well point system or sump pumping. The effectiveness of
each method will depend upon the nature of the soil, the proportions of the trench and
degree of lowering required. Pumping test may be necessary to determine which
method is Suitable.
If sump pumping is not practicable other control methods shall be considered and
should be approved by the Engineer. The trenches should be kept dry till the
completion of work, which includes excavation, pipeline laying, jointing, testing and
commissioning and backfilling. Precaution should be taken against the floatation of
the pipes.
The Operator shall conduct ground studies if found necessary and the cost for such
studies has to be borne by the Operator himself. The Operator shall be responsible for
the adequate pumping, drainage and bailing out of water met due to all causes from
the excavation for laying sewer lines, construction of manholes, wet wells and all
types of constructions. In case of failure to make such provisions or any other
provisions, which may result in unsuitable sub-grade conditions, the Operator shall
replace and repair the sub-grade as directed to the satisfaction of the Engineer, at his
own cost and responsibility. Should the Operator select to use a gravel sub-grade
with or without un jointed pipes with the gravel layers to facilitate flow of water to
pumps or other points of disposal, such gravel sub grade with or without conveying
pipes shall not be measured or paid as an extra item.

Page 268 of 385

19.7. Sump pumping
This method may be used in highly and moderately permeable soils such as gravels,
sand and gravel mixtures. This method is simple and cheap to install and used with
watertight trench sheeting to limit the volume of flow. To prevent the boiling in the
bottom of the trench the following precaution should be taken
 Drive sheeting deeper to lengthen drainage path
 Use open pipe surrounded in gravel as a sump.
 Move the sump to one side of the trench

To prevent removal of fines from soil causing loss of strength in the soil and
undermining of the trench bottom and side support

 Surround suction inlet with protected graded filter

 Increase flow rate through the soil by using open pipe surrounded with gravel.
The delivery side of the pump should be monitored by taking samples of water and
checking the proportion of fines being removed. If fines are being continuously
withdrawn or there are signs of trench instability, sump pumping should be stopped
and alternative methods to the considered.
19.8. Well pointing
In this method, well points are installed at regular intervals on one or both sides of
the trench and linked parallel to a header main connected to a pump. Well points are
usually installed at 0.6 to 2.0m centre to centre by jetting them in ground with dense
layers or cobbles & boulders it may be necessary to pre bore the layers. The
efficiency of the well points is increased by sanding in the well point and riser using
a column of sharp sand. This Method has an advantage of drawing water away from
the trench and in suitable conditions is effective in lowering the water by 4 to 6m. It
will also reduce the hydrostatic heads on the trench support system. It is of greatest
use, in sand, the heavy flows in permeable ground, such as gravels, the well points
should not to be so close together that the method becomes impractical. In clays the
rate of seepage is too small for the system to be properly effective. Silts can be
stabilized in certain conditions by using special procedures.
The well pointing shall be either single sided well point or double sided well point.
For higher depths double sided well point with multi stage shall be considered.
Should the Operator select to use a gravel sub-grade to facilitate flow of water to
pumps or other points of disposal, such gravel sub-grade shall not be measured or
paid for as an extra item. Operator should assess the availability of extra earth
required for refilling in case of shortage in any particular reach well before quoting
rates. Even in case the Operator resorts to mechanical excavation, the Operator
should take care of proper refilling, consolidation and disposal of surplus earth.
Disposal of ground water is to be away from the area of influence of the pipe laying
area Suitable temporary pipelines are to be laid to existing watercourses.
19.9. Slips and slides
The Operator is responsible for proper protection of excavations made by him from
any slips and slides. All slides and caving shall be handled, removed or corrected by
the Operator without any extra compensation at whatever time and under whatever

Page 269 of 385

 circumstances they may occur. The excavations shall be made good and brought to
necessary depth, width and levels without any extra cost. Special care should be
taken to protect the safety of the workmen, staff and public or whoever at the site.
19.10. Stacking of excavated material
Pursuant to specification in Bill of Quantities or directions of Engineer in-charge of
execution, the excavated material shall be stacked at suitable locations so as not to
cause any inconvenience to the public or traffic, with all safety measures in
accordance with IS 3764 with latest revisions and amendments. The excavated
material shall be placed away from the sides of the trench. The excavated materials
shall be stacked at a suitable distance, keeping in view the safety aspect of working
personnel due to sliding and slippage based on nature of soil and condition. The
Operator shall be solely responsible for the untoward incident caused due to his
negligence of stacking the excavated material. Under circumstances where in, sewers
have to be laid in narrow pathways, the excavated material shall be transported or
placed with all lifts & lead as detailed in bill of quantities to the nearby suitable place
or as decided by the Engineer and brought back after laying and jointing for refilling
of the trenches as per specifications under clause 19.12.
19.11. Barricading
The Operator shall Provide, erect and remove casurina pole three tier barricading
using poles of 7.50 to 10 cms. Dia. And 1.50m height above ground fixed vertically
at intervals of 2.0 to 2.5 mtrs. C/C and Horizontally at 0.50 mtrs, above ground level,
including fixing poles in the ground for a minimum depth of 0.30 mtr. and tied with
coir rope firmly including cost and conveyance of all materials, labour, lead and lift
charges complete. The work will be paid as per the item in the BOQ.
19.12. Carting and Re-Carting of Excavated earth
The carting of excavated earth, of all types and at all depths, from trenches is to be
carried out, for laying of sewers and construction of manholes in narrow roads and
other roads where there is a space constraint, and at locations directed by the
Engineer In-charge. where the trenches are to be backfilled with the same excavated
earth, the excavated earth shall be Carted to a lead distance detailed in bill of
quantities & stacking of earth at identified suitable site and re-carting back the
stacked earth to the same site by vehicle, including loading, unloading charges for to
& fro, with all lifts, labour, HOM of machinery etc. complete. Lead distance
indicated is one side distance only. Bidder shall quote the rate for to & fro lead
distance., Also, Disposing off the excess excavated Earth of manhole chambers &
pipeline trenches of all types to a lead distance detailed in bill of quantities by
vehicle, including neatly stacking, loading , unloading, with all lifts, labour, HOM of
machinery etc. complete
The responsibility of locating the site for stacking or disposal of excavated earth shall
be the responsibility of the Operator, in coordination with the OWNER.
Stacking/Disposal of earth shall not cause inconvenience to public or other agencies
and should not cause environmental problems. The location and extent of the above
specified work shall be taken up by the Operator, only after the approval and proper
directions by the concerned Engineer, OWNER. The work will be paid as per the
item in BOQ.
Page 270 of 385
19.13. Safety measures
Pursuant to Specifications in bill of quantities, relevant Indian standards or directions
of the Engineer, the Operator shall provide adequate safety measures. They shall
include:
(a) Barricading all sides of the open trenches.
(b) Red danger lights as can be easily visible from dusk to dawn at an interval of 20 m
and at all the road crossings.
(c) Traffic signals and display boards giving direction for diversion of traffic at the
appropriate places as may be directed by the Engineer.
(d) Adequately safe wooden plank / board or steel plate over the trenches at every 15
meters interval or less depending upon access requirement to commercial,
institutional and domestic properties to facilitate crossing by the public residing on
either side of the trench.
(e) Round the clock watch and ward maintaining all safety regulations at the site of
work and protecting the site from unauthorized intrusions.
(f) The work due to the above facilities/arrangements by the Operator will be paid for
the items in bill of quantities and the cost for the remaining shall be deemed to be
included in the relative items of work.

19.14. Progress of Excavation

(a) The Operator shall adjust excavation of trenches in such lengths that the pipes can be
laid in such exposed portion of the trench within 3 days / less than 3 days as per
criticality of site condition and directions of the Engineer.
(b)Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, the following limitations for lengths of
open trenches shall rule for a pipeline in one continuous reach.
(c)Not more than 50 m in built up area and 150 m elsewhere shall be opened in advance
of pipe laying.
(d)Not more than 50 m of pipeline left uncovered after pipe laying in built up areas and
not more than 150 m elsewhere.
19.15. Excavation for Manholes, Other Appurtenant and Structures.
(a) Excavation for Manholes and other appurtenant structures shall be done in
accordance with the applicable clause 19 of this Section. The Operator shall excavate
as required for all the structures with foundations to firm, undisturbed earth up to the
level of the underside of the structure.
(b) If the excavation is in rock, the Operator shall excavate all rock at least to the
minimum limits shown in approved drawings.
(c) The standard details for trenches and to the grade of the bottom of Manholes and
other structures are as per applicable clauses in this section and construction
drawings issued for the execution of work. Where the bottom of the structure is in
rock, it should be ensured that no rock shall project above the lower surface of the
concrete in such a manner so as to reduce the required thickness of concrete placed
simultaneously as an integral part of the foundation and to the outside of structure
foundation where structure is to be built.
(d) The Operator shall excavate the trench / pit to provide necessary working space on all
sides and for accommodating any sheathing, shoring or bracing etc.

Page 271 of 385

19.16. Works Included in Excavation
The following works as per specifications are also included in excavation and the
term 'Excavation' shall construe to mean all such items of work. The quoted rates
should include the same:

(a) Provision of side space or additional space in the trench / pit for working and /or
accommodating sheathing, shoring, bracing, etc.
(b) Supply, installation and removal after the work, all-sheathing, shoring and bracing
required, protecting the excavation where required or where such work is
recommended by the Engineer.
(c) The bidder shall verify the site conditions and wherever such dewatering is required
it is considered that the rates quoted for dewatering item of work are inclusive of
dewatering of surface and sub-surface water.
(d) Protection of excavations.
(e) Providing adequate safety measures.
(f) Additional work in connection with overhead wires and poles.
(g) Excavations for socket and collar hollows.
(h) Supplying and fixing of sight rails and boning rods in the trench to facilitate
measurement of work etc. complete
(i) Temporary approaches to roads, properties etc., affected by excavation at no extra
cost.
19.17. Sheet piling
(a) Trenching at locations along the alignments of Trunk sewers or other locations where
vertical cutting of trenches is necessary as directed by Engineer, Sheet piling shall be
provided as per the item in bill of quantities and the specifications in this section.

(b) The Operator shall Provide and install steel sheeting or sheet piling for both sides of
the trench for various depths detailed in bill of quantities, with mild steel sheets not
less than 6.5 mm thick, stronger knife edge, recessed spreader sockets, single or
double wall shields to be designed by the Operator to withstand all types of soils,
maximum depths upto 12 m, as approved by the Engineer including all materials,
equipment and labour charges for installing and removing the sheet piling at various
reaches of sewer line construction, including loading, unloading, transporting to the
suitable location etc complete as directed by the Engineer-in-charge.

(c) The location and extent of sheet piling shall be got approved by the Operator from
the concerned Engineer, OWNER prior to starting this work. Measurement for the
sheet piling work shall be taken and paid for, on one face of wall shield only. Sheet
piling will be measured for payment by the number of square meters of sheet piling
completed and accepted, as computed from the horizontal and vertical payment lines
shown on the plans or as ordered. The limits used for payment will be the actual
horizontal limit of temporary sheet piling installed and accepted, and the vertical
limit will be as measured from the bottom of the exposed face of the sheeting to the
top of the trench. No measurement will be made for end extensions.

Page 272 of 385

 19.18. Measurements
(a) The Earthwork excavation shall be measured net. Unit of measurement shall be in
cubic meters, and the measurements are limited to deci-meters (Two decimal places).
Dimensions for the purpose of payment shall be reckoned on the horizontal area of
the excavation at the base for foundation of the walls, columns, footings, tanks, rafts
or other foundations/structures to be built, multiplied by the mean depth from the
surface of the ground in accordance with the specifications and construction
drawings. Excavations in side slopes will not be paid for. Operator may make such
allowance in his rates to provide for excavation in side slopes keeping in mind the
nature of the soil and safety of excavation. No payment will be made for working
space except where clearly indicated in the drawing or is essential in the opinion of
the Engineer. Where concreting is proposed against the excavated sides, no such over
excavation will be permitted. In such cases over excavation shall be made good by
the Operator with concrete of the class as in the foundations at his own cost.
(b) Trench excavation for sewers shall be measured using the dimensions detailed in the
standard section shown on the construction drawings. Excavation beyond the widths
or depths required will not be paid for, any additional concrete or bedding material
required as a result of over excavation will be at the Operator‘s expense.
(c) Backfilling for trenches shall be measured and paid separately. Volume of rock
excavated shall be calculated on the basis of length, breadth and depth of excavation
indicated on the construction drawings and the limits of excavation clause of this
section. No payment will be made for excavation/over break beyond payment line
specified. Where such measurement is not possible as in the case of strata intermixed
with soil, excavated rock shall be properly stacked as directed by the Engineer and
the volume of rock stacked will be calculated on the basis of stack measurements
after making appropriate allowance for voids. The allowance to be made for voids
shall be decided by the Engineer.
(d) Excavation in paved roads, pavements and concrete shall be billed separately and will
be measured in cubic meter The quantities of paved roads and pavements will be
calculated from the length of the trench excavated measured between the centers of
two adjacent manholes multiplied by the standard width indicated on the drawings or
the applicable clause in this section for the particular diameter of pipe and the actual
measured depth of the road surfacing material. The quantities of concrete broken out
during excavation will be calculated from the actual measured quantities.

Section 20. Glazed Stoneware (GSW) Pipes

20.1. Manufacture of pipe
The Stoneware Pipes shall conform to IS: 651-2007 with latest amendment. The
method of manufacture of GSW pipes with rubber joints shall be such that the form
and dimensions of the finished pipes are accurate. The pipe shall be free from visible
defects such as fire cracks or hair cracks without any broken blisters.
The thickness of barrel and socket for various diameters of pipes shall be as specified
in IS: 651 / EN 295 as applicable. The push on type jointed, stoneware pipes of 1.0m
length shall have pre-fixed Rubber Gaskets confirming to EN: 681 fixed with

Page 273 of 385

 approved glue at manufacturing unit. Each pipe unit shall be of 0.6-1.0 m length,
exclusive of the internal depth of socket.
20.2. Testing of pipes at manufacturing unit
During manufacture, tests on Glazed stoneware pipes shall be carried out as per IS:
651 / EN 295 standards. The pipes shall be tested in accordance with clause 8.2 of
this Technical specification and with Clause 7 of IS: 651/ any other latest relevant
IS standard, and tested in accordance with the methods described in relevant IS
including the following,
1. Hydraulic test
2. Absorption test
3. Test for Acid Resistance
4. Test for Alkali Resistance
5. Crushing Strength test.

20.3. Marking
Marking shall be done conforming IS: 651 / EN 295 or any other relevant IS codes
approved by the Engineer. The following information shall be clearly marked on each
pipe,
a). Internal diameter of pipe.
b). Class of pipe.
c). Date of manufacture and
d). Name of manufacture or his registered trade-mark or both.
20.4. Carting & Handling
All Pipes and fittings/specials shall be transported from the factory to the work sites
at places along the alignment of pipeline as approved by Engineer in lengths not
more than the length of the transporting vehicle. Operator shall be responsible for the
safety of pipes and fittings/specials in transit, loading/unloading. Every care shall be
exercised in handling pipes and fittings/specials to avoid damage. While unloading,
the pipes and fittings/specials shall not be thrown down from the truck on to hard
surfaces. They should be unloaded on timber skids with steadying ropes and / or by
any other approved means. Padding shall be provided between coated pipes,
fittings/specials and timber skids to avoid damage to the coating. Suitable gaps
between pipes should be left at intervals in order to permit access from one side to
the other. As far as possible, pipes shall be unloaded on one side of the trench only.
The pipes shall be checked for any visible damage (such as broken edges, cracking or
spalling of pipe) while unloading and shall be sorted out for replacement. Any pipe,
which shows damage in the opinion of Engineer, shall be discarded and replaced by
new one without extra cost. Dragging of pipes and fitting/specials along road or
pipeline alignment shall be prohibited.
20.5. Trenching
Trenching includes all excavation which shall be carried out either by hand or by
machine and shall be carried out in accordance with all requirements of Earth work
excavations clause 19. Wherever a socket or collar of pipe or fitting / special occurs,
a grip is to be cut in the bottom of the trench or concrete bed to a depth of at least 75

Page 274 of 385

 mm below the bed of the pipe so that the pipe may have a fair bearing on its shaft and
does not rest upon its socket. Such grip shall be of sufficient size in every respect to
admit the hand all round the socket in order to make the joint, and the grip shall be
maintained clear, until the joint has been approved by Engineer.
20.6. Bedding
Before laying of GSW sewer pipes, necessary bedding (granular, concrete cradle,
concrete arch etc.) shall be provided in accordance with approved construction
drawings and as per detailed specifications 24.1 to 24.6 of this section

20.7. Laying of pipe

Laying of GSW pipes shall conform to the Code of Practice IS: 4127 / EN 295. Pipes
shall be laid underground with a minimum earth cover of 1m. Pipes shall be generally
laid in sections of 300 m or for the entire length of GSW portion of branch sewers
whichever is less. The stoneware pipes shall be laid with sockets facing up the
gradient, on desired bedding. All pipes shall be laid perfectly true, both to line and
gradient. At the close of each day‘s work or at such other times when the pipe is not
being laid, the end of the pipe should be protected by a close fitting stopper. Any
Pipes, fittings or materials placed / used, before there testing and approval shall be
removed and replaced with tested and approved material.
Wherever GSW Pipes are laid in depth‟s equal to or greater than 4.50 meters, the
GSW pipe shall be encased all-round with 1:1.5:3 concrete as per item in Bill of
Quantities, clause 24.1 to 24.6 specifications in this section and approved drawings.
The pipe encasement shall be done with all necessary care, so that the pipe does not
get damaged during concreting and it shall be the responsibility of the Operator to
replace the GSW pipes if damaged, without any extra cost.
20.8. Jointing of pipes
20.8.1. The jointing of GSW pipes shall be carried out by the following two methods as
described below, Jointing of GSW pipes shall be made by placing tarred gasket
of hemp yarn soaked in thick cement slurry round the spigot of each pipe which shall
be slip pedinto the socket of the previously laid pipe. The pipes shall then be adjusted
and fixed in the correct position. After adjusting, the gasket shall be caulked tightly,
so as to fill not more than 1/4th of the total depth of the socket. The remainder of the
socket shall be filled with stiff mixture of cement mortar in the proportion of 1:1.5
(1 cement: 1.50 fine sand). Finally, a fillet shall be formed round the joint with a
trowel forming an angle of 45degree with the barrel of the pipe.

20.8.2. All extraneous material shall be removed from the inside of the pipe and the joints
shall be cured for at least seven days.

20.8.3. The jointing of salt glazed stoneware (SGSW) pipes shall also be made with EPD
Mrubber rings (seals according to EN 681 and ASTM 425) as per Bill of Quantities
item of work and in accordance with procedure in standard EN 295. The GSW pipes
shall be confirming to IS 651 / 1992 (with fifth revision) in all respects. The rubber
seal joints pipe will not have grooves in interior of socket and exterior of the spigot.
Page 275 of 385
 The rubber gasket shall be prefixed at socket at the factory by the manufacturer and
will be rigidly fixed with appropriate glue. The rubber gasket will be fixed with glue
at the entrance of the socket and spigot end will be push fit to have leak proof joint.
20.9. Measurement of pipes
The length of the sewer pipes shall be measured between the inner surfaces of
consecutive manholes at the invert level of the pipes along the central line of pipeline
to the nearest centimeter.
20.10. Testing at work site
After laying and jointing of pipes is completed, the pipe line shall be tested at work
site as per all the requirements in clause 27 of this section and as approved
by the Engineer.

20.11. Backfilling
Backfilling shall be in accordance with requirements specified in clause 24.9 and
24.10 of this section for backfilling.

Section 21. REINFORCED CEMENT CONCRETE PIPES

21.1. Manufacture of pipe
The RCC pipes to be used for lateral, branch and trunk / outfall sewers shall be of
class NP-3, Spigot and Socket (S&S) type, RCC SPUN / VIBRATED CAST PIPES
(REINFORCED), with rubber gasket jointing, manufactured in Conformity with IS
458. All the Pipes shall be manufactured using Sulphate Resisting cement only.
The ends of the pipes shall conform to Clause 5.3 of IS 458 as applicable for S&S
joints. The rubber ring shall conform to IS 5382 and IS 12820 as applicable for sewer
lines and shall be of type ‗IA‘. The diameters of pipes shall be as required for sewers
as per designs and drawings.
The method of manufacture shall be such that the form and dimensions of the
finished pipes are accurate within the limits specified in relevant IS: 458. Pipes
manufactured in compliance with IS: 458 shall be either water cured or steam cured
in accordance with the relevant requirements of IS: 458.
The Internal diameter, wall thickness, length of barrel, reinforcement (longitudinal
and spiral), type of ends and minimum clear cover to reinforcement, strength test
requirements, tolerances on - overall length, internal diameter or dimensions of
sockets / spigots of pipes shall be as per the relevant clauses / tables of IS: 458.
Minimum clear cover to reinforcement shall be 15 mm. The tolerances regarding
overall length, internal diameter of pipes or socket and barrel wall thickness shall be
as per relevant clauses of IS: 458. Each pipe unit shall be in lengths of 2 m to 4 m
based on availability, ease in handling, transportation and laying.
The workmanship and finish for the pipe will conform to the relevant Indian standard
specification; Cleaning of pipes shall conform to relevant Indian Standard
specification.
21.2. Special coating for Inside Surface of RCC Pipes
The RCC pipes shall be provided with special coatings wherever there is possibility
of excess generation of hydrogen sulphide gas during transportation of sewage
Page 276 of 385
 through sewers. The location, length of coatings shall be as given in construction
drawings or as approved by the Engineer.

The work involves, Supply and application of Polymer based protective Elastomeric
coating / Lining with zero V.O.C. for complete inside surface of RCC sewers, with
minimum dry film thickness of 1mm, Acid resistant, Abrasive resistant, Adhesive to
concrete surface, Durable and pinhole / break free, with smooth surface after
application, complete as per the Clauses in this Section, including all labour, HOM
of machinery, with all lead lifts, taxes etc. complete. spray coating / Lining shall be
applied by approved and controlled mechanical spray method, for RCC sewers of
diameters 400mm to 800 mm prior to delivery of sewers to site or applied at site, as
approved by approving authority, including all surface preparation, testing, as per
directions of the Engineer in charge. Rate shall be inclusive of cost of all materials,
tools and plants, testing and inspection etc. complete, or
Polymer based protective Elastomeric smooth coating / Lining with zero V.O.C. by
spray method for complete inside surface of RCC sewers, with minimum dryfilm
thickness of 1mm, Acid resistant, Abrasive resistant, Adhesive to concrete surface,
Durable and pinhole / break free, smooth surface after application, complete as per
the Clauses in this Section, including all labour, HOM of machinery, with all lead,
lifts, taxes etc. complete, spray coating / Lining applied by approved method, for
RCC sewers of diameters equal to and greater than 900mm prior to delivery of
sewers to site or applied at site, as approved by approving authority, including all
surface preparation, testing, and directions of the Engineer in charge, Rate shall be
inclusive of cost of all materials, tools and plants, testing and inspection etc.
complete.

21.3. Specifications for Protective Coating to inside surface of RCC sewers

POLYMER BASED COATING:

The inside of RCC pipes (of dia 400mm & above) & manholes (if required) shall be
coated with an approved dual-component, solvent-free polymer protective coating of
minimum 1mm dry film thickness. The protective coating shall be spray-applied to
the inside of the pipes using suitable plural component spray equipment so as to form
a completely impermeable, pin-hole-free & seamless lining. It shall form a good
bond with host concrete surface, be resistant to acids & abrasion. It shall meet
the following properties.

A – ACID RESISTANCE
Acid & Chemical Resistance (to ASTM 3908- mod Change in weight (not
365d immersion) more than).
Sulphuric Acid 22% 0.07%
Hydrochloric Acid 10% 0.07%
H2S-120,000ppm (Sour Brine) 0.66%
Sodium Hydroxide 25% 0.07%
Sodium hypochlorite(sat sol) 0.66%

Page 277 of 385

 Salt water – 310g/l (Sat. Sol) 0.22%
Ammonium Hydroxide-20% nil
Nacl/water-solution -10% nil
Wastewater anaerobic digesters 0.37%
Wastewater API mo 1.1%
B – BOND
Bond / Adhesion to concrete (to ASTM D 4541) > 1.5 n/sq mm
D - ABRASION RESISTANCE

Abrasion resistance (to ASTM D 4060 with Taber

< 15 mg loss
CS17-1000/1000rev)
Shore D Hardness ( to ASTM D-2240 ) 45
C – DURABALITY

Volume solids % 100

Tear resistance (to Die Cast ASTM D 624 ) > 85 Kn/m
Tensile strength ( to ASTM D412) >20 n/sq mm
Elongation ( to ASTM D-412 ) > 425%

Water absorption( to ASTM D 570 (2hr @95 C) 0.16

Flash Point (Pensky martin) >93 deg C

a) The coating shall be suitable for long term service at any temperature within the
range between -10 Deg C and 100 Deg C and resistant to raw sewer, industrial
sewer, treated sewer, effluents, chemicals, sea water, abrasives. The coating shall not
be affected by high humidity or moisture during application.
b) All the coating materials including primer & finish coats shall be from a single
manufacturer of repute, certified to ISO 9002 standards having a minimum 10 years
experience in similar products & in projects of similar size and value as this project.
c) The material provided shall be tested in both liquid (lab-draw down films) and field
applied samples and shall meet the properties specified for the project and defined in
the approved manufacturer‘s product data sheet.
d) All pre-coating concrete repairs, coating and lining works shall be carried out only by
experienced & reputed Operator‘s who are authorized, approved, and certified
applicators of the approved coating manufacturer & certified by the manufacturer for
the type of application detailed in this project.
e) The Operator should submit, the approved coating manufacturer‘s detailed Method
Statement for Coating Application along with their Quality Assurance / Inspection &
Testing Plan to engineer in charge prior to commencement of coating activity.

21.4. Surface Preparation & Primer application

i. Prior to commencement of coating activity, all concrete surfaces to be coated shall be
free from oil, grease, loose particles, decayed matter, moss, curing compound residue
Page 278 of 385
 or algal growth. All such contamination and laitance must be removed by use of
abrasive sweep blasting, high pressure water jetting, or other approved manual/
mechanical means.

ii. Concrete element‘s surface irregularities, honeycombs spews must be removed and
repaired by a method approved by the engineer.

iii. Primer as recommended by the approved coating manufacturer shall be applied prior
to coating application & the correct over coating time intervals shall be followed as
per manufacturer‘s approved method statement of application.

iv. The coating system shall be spray applied & shall gel/set rapidly. It shall form a
uniform monolithic film without any layering.

v. The pipes shall be coated either at pipe factory or at other department-approved

coating yard prior to actual laying.

21.5. Testing

I. The finished coating shall be uniform, smooth & have a dry film thickness of
minimum 1000 microns, when tested with a standard dft gauge/ Elcometer.
II. The dry film thickness shall be measured at points as instructed & predetermined by
the engineer in charge by fixing SS strips. The coating shall be uniform, smooth &
pin hole free.

21.6. Personal Safety Requirements

a) The personnel at site shall strictly adhere to Standard guidelines during the chemical
coating activity, at all times. The approved coating manufacturer shall supply
complete standard requirement schedules for the personnel to follow, prior to start of
any coating application. The general requirements are:-
b) Observe the owners standard policy at all times and obey all written and verbal
instructions from site managers and representatives.
c) Wear all PPE at all times including Hard Hat, Safety glasses, Boots, Gloves and
masks as required.
d) When preparing and applying coatings and chemical materials all PPE must be worn
including Gloves, safety glasses and protective paper masks.
e) When using high pressure plural component spray equipment, all personnel working
in the application area must wear double filter breathers with OSHA or of atleast
equivalent make.

21.7. Physical & chemical properties & testing methods

Page 279 of 385

 TABLE A – PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

Property Allowable Standard Method

Tensile Strength Longitudinal 17.25 Mpa ASTM D 638
Transverse 17.25 Mpa
Elongation at break Longitudinal 225% ASTM D 638
Transverse 225%
Hardness 54-62 Din 535.5
Plasticier 0.4% ASTM D 1203
Permanence
Water Absorption 0.1% ASTM D 570
Water soluble 0.05% ASTM D570
matter
Porosity No pin holes Spark Tester 7 KV

TABLE B – CHEMICAL PROPERTIES

Chemical Agent Test Method Change in Weight

Not more than
Sodium Hypo–Chloride 1% ASTM D 543 0.20%
Ferric Chloride 1% (7 days at 20 C) 0.60%
Sodium Chloride 5% 0.15%
Sulphuric Acid 20% 0.12%
Nitric Acid 1% 0.20%
Sodium Hydroxide 5% 0.10%
Ammonium Hydroxide 5% 0.40%
Soap & Detergent Solution 2% 0.40%

21.8. Testing of pipes at manufacturing unit

During manufacture, tests on concrete shall be carried out as per IS: 456, IS 458 /
relevant IS with latest revisions and amendments.
The specimen of pipes shall be tested in accordance with with IS: 458 and tested in
accordance with the methods described in IS: 3597 including the following,
a) Hydrostatic test.
b) Three edge bearing test
c) Absorption test.

21.9. Marking
Marking shall be done as per IS: 458 or any other relevant IS codes approved by the
Engineer. The following information shall be clearly marked on each pipe,
a) Internal diameter of pipe.
b) Class of pipe.
c) Date of manufacture and
d) Name of manufacture or his registered trade-mark or both.
Page 280 of 385
21.10. Carting & Handling
Carting and handling of RCC pipes and fittings shall be in accordance with relevant
clause 20.4 of this section (GSW pipes specifications).

21.11. Trenching
Trenching includes all excavation which shall be carried out either by hand or by
machine and shall be carried out in accordance with all requirements of Earth work
excavations clause 19 . Wherever a socket or collar of pipe or fitting / special occurs,
a grip is to be cut in the bottom of the trench or concrete bed to a depth of at least 75
mm below the bed of the pipe so that the pipe may have a fair bearing on its shaft and
does not rest upon its socket. Such grip shall be of sufficient size in every respect to
admit the hand all round the socket in order to make the joint, and the grip shall be
maintained clear, until the joint has been approved by Engineer.
21.12. Bedding
Necessary bedding (granular, concrete cradle, concrete arch etc.) shall be provided in
accordance with approved construction drawings and specifications in the following
clauses 24.1 to 24.6 of this specifications before laying of RCC sewer pipes.

21.13. Laying of the pipe

Laying of concrete pipes shall conform to the Code of practice of IS: 783. Pipes shall
be laid underground with a minimum earth cover of 1m. Pipes shall be generally laid
in sections as per standard practices and as directed by the Engineer. The RCC pipes
shall be laid with sockets facing up the gradient, on desired bedding. All pipes shall
be laid perfectly true, both to line and gradient. At the close of each day‘s work or at
such other times when the pipe is not being laid, the end of the pipe should be
protected by a close fitting stopper.
All pipes, fittings and material shall be tested and approved by the Engineer before
being laid. Any pipes, fittings or material placed before they are tested and approved
shall be removed and replaced with tested and approved material. Before laying the
pipe, necessary bedding shall be provided wherever required as per Sub-Clauses 24.1
to 24.6 of this section.
21.14. Jointing of pipes
The pipe joints shall be flexible joints, jointed by rubber ring of type ‗IA‘, as per IS
783-1985. The sections of the pipe shall be jointed in such a manner that there shall
be as little unevenness as possible along the inside of pipe. Care should be taken
while jointing to provide the correct gap between the end of spigot and back of the
socket to ensure flexibility at each joint and correct location. The joints shall be
finished as directed by the Engineer.
The quality of rubber rings, tolerances, etc., shall be in conformity with IS 5382-1985
and latest revisions. After jointing, extraneous material, if any, shall be removed from
the inside of the pipe

Page 281 of 385

 21.15. Measurement of pipes
The length of the sewer pipes shall be measured between the inner surfaces of
consecutive manholes at the invert level of the pipes along the central line of pipeline
to the nearest centimeter.
21.16. Testing at work site
After laying and jointing of pipes is completed, the pipe line shall be tested at work
site as per all the requirements in clause 27 of this specifications and as approved by
the Engineer.
21.17. Backfilling
Backfilling shall be in accordance with requirements specified in clause 24.9 & 24.10
of backfilling.

Section 22. DUCTILE IRON (DI) PIPES

22.1. Manufacture of pipe

DI pipes and fittings (Class K7) shall be in accordance with IS: 8329 and IS: 9523.
Pipes and fittings shall be procured from reputed manufacturers with Engineer's
approval. Engineer shall at all reasonable times have free access to the place where
the Pipes and fittings are manufactured for the purpose of examining and testing the
pipes and fittings and for witnessing the test and manufacturing.
All tests specified either in this specification or in the relevant Indian Standards
specified above shall be performed by the Manufacturer / Operator at his own cost
and in presence of Engineer if desired. For this, sufficient notice before testing of the
pipes and fittings shall be given to Engineer
If the test is found unsatisfactory, Engineer may reject any or all pipes and fittings of
that lot. The decision of Engineer in this matter shall be final and binding on the
Operator and not subject to any arbitration or appeal. The pipes and fittings shall be
striped, with all precautions necessary to avoid warping or shrinking defects. The
pipes and fittings shall be free from defects. Any defect in pipes and fittings in the
opinion of Engineer shall be rejected and shall be replaced by new one.
In the case of spigot and socket pipes and fittings, the socket shall be without the
centre ring. In the case of flanged pipes, the flanges shall be at the right angles to the
axis of the pipe and machined on face. The boltholes shall be drilled and located
symmetrically off the centreline. The bolthole shall be concentric with the bore and
boltholes equally spaced. The flanges shall be integrally cast with the pipes and
fittings and the two flanges of the pipe shall be correctly aligned.
22.2. Materials
The materials used in the manufacture of pipes and fittings shall comply with
requirements specified in IS: 8329 and IS: 9523.
22.3. Dimensions and Tolerances
The internal diameter, thickness and length of barrel, dimensions of pipes and fittings
shall be as per relevant tables of IS: 8329/IS: 9523 for different class of pipes and
fittings. Each pipe shall be of uniform thickness throughout its length.
Page 282 of 385
 The tolerances for pipes and fittings regarding dimensions, mass, ovality and
deviations from straight line in case of pipes shall be as per IS: 8329/IS: 9523.
22.4. Coatings
22.4.1. General
Unless otherwise specified, DI pipes and fittings shall be coated with Bitumen in
accordance with relevant IS Specifications. All buried DI pipes and fittings shall also
have factory or site applied polythene sleeving. Coating shall not be applied to pipe
and fittings unless its surface is clean, dry and free from rust. Pipe coatings shall be
inspected at site and any damage or defective areas shall be made good to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
22.4.2. Bitumen coating
Bitumen coating shall be of normal thickness of 75 microns unless otherwise
specified. It shall be cold applied compound complying with the requirements of
relevant Indian standards, suitable for tropical climates, factory applied in accordance
with the manufacturer's instructions.
Damaged areas of coating shall be repainted on site after removing any remaining
loose coating and wire brushing any rusted areas of pipe.
22.4.3. Polythene Sleeving
Where polythene sleeving is specified to be applied in addition to bitumen coating, it
shall comply with ISO 8180. Site applied sleeving shall be stored under cover out of
direct sunlight and its exposure to sunlight shall be kept to a minimum. Pipes having
a factory applied sleeving must be stored in the same conditions. Joints in the
sleeving shall be properly overlapped and taped in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions to provide continuous sleeving.

22.4.4. Cement mortar lining

All pipes and fittings shall be internally lined with cement mortar in accordance with
relevant IS. The cement used shall be Sulphate Resisting Cement confirming to IS:
12330. No admixtures in the mortar shall be used without the approval of the
Engineer.

Pipe linings shall be inspected on site and any damage or defective areas shall be
made good to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Lining shall be uniform in thickness all along the pipe. The minimum thickness of
factory applied cement mortar lining shall be as per IS: 11906.

22.5. Testing of pipes at manufacturing unit

During manufacture, tests on pipes shall be carried out in accordance with clause 8.2
of this technical specification by the Third party inspecting agency.

22.5.1. Marking

Page 283 of 385

 Marking shall be done as per IS: 8329 and IS: 9523 or any other relevant IS codes
approved by the Engineer. The following information shall be clearly marked on each
pipe,

a) Internal diameter of pipe.

b) Class of pipe.
c) Date of manufacture and
d) Name of manufacture or his registered trade-mark or both.

22.5.2. Carting & Handling

Carting and handling of D.I. pipes and fittings shall be in accordance with the clause
20.4 . of this section (GSW pipes specifications).

22.5.3. Trenching
Trenching includes all excavation which shall be carried out either by hand or by
machine and shall be carried out in accordance with all requirements of -Earth work
excavations clause 19. Wherever a socket or collar of pipe or fitting / special occurs,
a grip is to be cut in the bottom of the trench or concrete bed to a depth of at least 75
mm below the bed of the pipe so that the pipe may have a fair bearing on its shaft and
does not rest upon its socket. Such grip shall be of sufficient size in every respect to
admit the hand all round the socket in order to make the joint, and the grip shall be
maintained clear, until the joint has been approved by Engineer.

Wherever D.I. pipes are laid over pillar supports for nala crossings etc. the pipes shall
be placed as per the construction drawings and as directed by the Engineer In-charge.

22.5.4. Bedding
The type of bedding (granular, concrete cradle, concrete arch etc.) shall be as per
approved construction drawings and specifications in the following clauses 24.1 to
24.6 of this section.

22.6. Laying of the pipe

Laying of DI pipes shall conform to the Code of practice of IS: 12288. Pipes shall be
laid as per the requirement in the drawing and as directed by the engineer. Laying of
pipes shall be as per IS specified in Bill of Quantities and approved construction
drawings. All pipes, fittings and material shall be tested and approved by the
Engineer before being laid. Any pipes, fittings or material placed before they are
tested and approved shall be removed and replaced with tested and approved
material. Before laying the pipe, necessary bedding shall be provided wherever
required. Polyethylene sleeves wounded pipes shall be used for water logged areas as
per specification and as directed by the Engineer.

22.7. Jointing of pipes

22.7.1. General
Page 284 of 385
 Jointing of DI pipes and fittings shall be done as per IS: 12288 and manufacturer's
recommendations. After jointing, extraneous material, if any, shall be removed from
the inside of the pipe. Rubber sealing rings/gaskets used for jointing shall conform to
IS: 638, IS: 12820 and IS: 5382.

22.7.2. Spigot and Socket joints

These shall have sockets, which are integral with the pipe and incorporate an
electrometric rubber ring gasket conforming to IS: [Link] gaskets/sealant used
for joints shall be suitable for water conveyance. In jointing DI pipes and fittings, the
Operator shall take into account the manufacturer's recommendations as to the
methods and equipment to be used in assembling the joints. In particular the
Operator shall ensure that the spigot end of the pipe to be jointed is smooth and has
been properly chamfered, so that the rubber ring as per IS: 12820 and IS: 5382 is
correctly positioned in line, before the joint is made. The rubber rings and any
recommended lubricant shall be obtained only through the approved supplier and as
directed by the Engineer.

22.7.3. Gaskets for Flanges

All gaskets used between flanges of pipes shall be of natural rubber conforming to
IS: 638 of thickness 3 mm suitable for waste water conveyance and as specified by
manufacturer.

22.7.4. Flanged joints

These shall be of PN 1.0 rating and shall comply with dimensions and drilling details
as specified in IS: 8329. These shall have isolation gaskets between the flanges,
isolation sleeves around all bolts and isolation washers under all bolt heads and nuts.
All material shall be supplied by a reputed manufacturer and shall be approved by the
Engineer.
Each bolt should be tightened a little at a time taking care to tighten diametrically
opposite bolts alternatively. The recommended bolting torque to be followed for
assembling flanges shall be as specified in manufacturer's instructions. The practice
of fully tightening the bolts one after another is highly undesirable. The bolts shall
be of mild steel unless otherwise specified. They shall be coated with coal tar epoxy
coating after tightening.

22.7.5. Measurement of pipes

The length of the sewer pipes shall be measured between the inner surfaces of
consecutive manholes or start to end points of laid alignment (at road crossings and
Nala Crossings) at the invert level of the pipes along the central line of pipeline to the
nearest centimetre.

22.7.6. Testing at work site

Page 285 of 385

 After laying and jointing of pipes is completed, the pipe line shall be tested at work
site as per all the requirements in clause 27 of technical specifications and as
approved by the Engineer.

22.7.7. Backfilling
Backfilling shall be in accordance with requirements specified in clause24..9 & 24.10
. of backfilling.

23.0. Corrugated HDPE pipes

Manufacture, factory testing and laying and jointing of Corrugated HDPE pipes
used for this contract shall be conforming to BIS 16908- part 2-2013. Earthwork
excavation, backfilling, etc. shall conform to relevant clauses applicable for
SWG pipes. Field testing shall conform to clause 27.

Section 24. BEDDING, ENCASING, SUPPORTS & BACKFILLING FOR

SEWERS.
24.1. BEDDING FOR THE SEWERS.
Bedding shall be provided all along the stretch of the pipeline as shown on the
approved construction drawings or as directed by the Engineer, which differs based
on the depth and nature of foundation over which the pipeline is laid. Pipe shall be
generally laid on murrum / gravel bedding as per approved construction drawings and
specifications. When rock is met with, along the alignment, sewers shall be
invariably provided with gravel / murrum bedding.
Wherever the pipeline crosses under the road, Concrete arch bedding shall be
provided in such situations. The various types of bedding, according to which the
Operator shall execute the work, are specified below.

24.2. Earth Bedding.

The trench excavations where the earth at foundation level of sewers is found to be of
good quality, suitable for laying of pipe and does not require any import of murram
/gravel etc. for foundation of sewers and as approved by the Engineer. Any extra
bedding material need not be provided; the excavation shall be carried out to the
exact gradient specified so that no making of the sub-grade by backfilling is required.
Filling and removing earth or similar materials beneath the allowable depth as above
to adjust with the grade will not be permitted except filling with compacted granular
bedding material or murrum as directed by the Engineer.
24.3. Gravel Bedding.
Wherever bottom of the trench at sewer foundation level at the specified gradient is
met with rock or found to be unsuitable as decided by the Engineer, the rock or earth
shall be removed up to minimum 150 mm below the bottom level of the pipe to a
minimum width as specified, equal to the width of the trench as per the approved
construction drawing and the resulting space shall be filled up with good quality
gravel/murrum and compacted to desired density as per approved drawings and item

Page 286 of 385

 in Bill of quantities. The granular material shall be filled in the trench up to the level
of ¼ the outer diameter of the pipeline above the bottom of trench, and well
compacted and as in the approved drawing. Unless otherwise directed by the
Engineer, rock excavation shall progress at least 20 m in advance of the pipe length
proposed to be laid.

The graded granular bed material used in bedding and surround shall consist of
durable gravel / murrum. Any imported bed and surround materials shall be as per the
approval of the Engineer and shall be supplied with certification, which gives details
of its content, source and grading. In all cases the soluble sulphate and chloride
content of the granular material shall not exceed 0.5% and 0.06% by weight
respectively. All graded material shall pass through test sieves to IS 460 (Part 1) in
the following proportions by mass:

Aperture Size % Passing

50 mm 100 %
37.5 mm 90 – 100 %
20 mm 35 – 70 %
14 mm 25 – 55 %
10 mm 10 – 40 %
5 mm 0–5%

24.3.1. The gravel/murrum shall be evenly spread over the full width of the formation and
compacted to 95% of maximum dry density to the specified gradient in accordance to
IS 2720: Part-7, a level slightly higher than level corresponding to the underside of
the pipe barrel to allow for settlement of the pipe to the correct level.
24.3.2. Following, placement and jointing of the pipe, further granular material shall be
placed in the trench, special care being taken to fill under the sides of the pipes to
ensure full contact with the barrel of the pipe. The granular material shall then be
placed and compacted evenly to the specified depth.
24.3.3. Field joints which have not been tested shall be left exposed for a minimum length of
150 mm each side of the joint. Trench supports shall be withdrawn gradually in
accordance with the progress of the fill with provision that such withdrawal shall not
prejudice the safety of the works. After each section of the pipeline has passed the
hydraulic test, the exposed joints shall be backfilled and compacted to the above
specification.
24.4. Concrete Arch / Cradle bedding and concrete encasement/surround
Where the pipes are laid on a soft soil or super imposed load over pipe sewer laid
exceeds the minimum crushing strength even after providing murrum/gravel bedding
or with maximum water table level, lying at the invert level of the pipe, or rising
above the invert level of the pipe but below the top of the barrel, or as per the
approved construction drawings or as directed by the Engineer, the pipe sewers shall
be bedded or surrounded in concrete to the specified gradient in accordance with the

Page 287 of 385

 specifications in this section and applicable relevant Indian Standard for laying of
sewers.

24.4.1. Before laying/placing of the bedding, all types of refuse, organic matter etc. shall be
removed to the satisfaction of the engineer and the bottom/sub-grade shall be to the
specified gradient, dimension and well compacted to the desired density. The pipes
shall be supported near each joint with proper supports to avoid any damage to the
joints while concreting. Concrete shall not be placed until the pipes have been
jointed, inspected and tested. All water in the trench must be bailed out prior to
taking up concreting work & the concrete shall be placed to ensure full contact with
the pipe barrel throughout its length. The concrete shall be made discontinuous at all
flexible pipe joints by a diaphragm of fibre board or other compressible material of at
least 20 mm thickness extending for the full area of the [Link] bottom of the
trench may be sloped on the sides or kerbed. The concrete grade shall be of [Link]
proportion for concrete cradle bedding and 1:1.5:3 proportion for concrete arch
bedding or concrete surround as on approved construction drawings. For concrete
arch bedding, the pipe shall be provided with approved gravel bedding to the desired
compaction below in layers, and concrete arch above as per drawing.
24.4.2. The materials used in the concreting works shall comply to the relevant Indian
standards and specifications in clause of specifications for general civil works. Dry
mix shall not be permitted and the slump for concrete for the arching shall not be
more than 25 mm. When concrete is to be placed over the pipe for arch portion or
surround, it shall be placed carefully so as not to damage or injure the joints or
displace the pipe. Back filling shall be done in a careful manner and at such time after
the concrete is set, so as not to damage the concrete. Joints shall be avoided as far as
possible under the roads.
Where pipes are laid below storm water drains, at road crossings and where the depth
of cover is less than 1.0m, and GSW pipes laid in 4.50m and below depths, the
pipeline shall be encased / bedded. The concrete encasement shall be of RCC/PCC as
specified.
24.5. Special bedding in poor sub grades
During the progress of work, if the sub grade is observed to be of poor quality which
is unsuitable for laying the pipe line and which is not the result of the Operator's
negligence, the Engineer may direct the Operator to strengthen the sub grade as per,
Specifications in Bill of Quantities and in the approved drawings. The strengthening
shall be done either by approved gravel, with depth not exceeding 300 mm and/or by
plain concrete of mix [Link] complying to the specifications in clause 43 for concrete.
or as directed by the engineer .
24.6. Measurements for Bedding.
For providing Gravel and Concrete cradle/arch/surround bedding in accordance with
above Clauses of this Section, the measurement for bedding actually used based on
the neat line dimensions of the trench and deducting the volume occupied by the pipe
will be considered.

Page 288 of 385

24.7. PIPE SUPPORT STRUCTURES.
24.7.1. Anchor, Thrust Blocks.
Anchor blocks shall be provided wherever required in the sewers and for gradients
steeper than 16% as per approved construction drawings or as directed by the Engineer
and thrust blocks shall be provided for both horizontal and vertical bends wherever
required in the rising main pipeline or gravity sewer works (In case of bends in house
service connections) wherever necessary to effectively transfer the hydrostatic thrust
developed to the surrounding ground. They shall be constructed at the locations shown
in the construction drawings and are of the respective dimensions shown therein
depending on the angle of the bends, and the pressures developed in the rising
main/gravity main. All the anchor/thrust blocks shall be of 1:1.5:3 proportion plain or
reinforced cement concrete. The surrounding virgin land of the anchor/thrust blocks
shall not be disturbed, to effectively transfer the load/thrust developed by/in the main.
The Operator should make his own arrangement for any dewatering or bailing out of
water.

24.7.2. Pedestals
Pedestals shall be constructed as per, specifications and construction drawings,
wherever needed, and as per the directions of the Engineer. Pedestals shall also be
provided for the stretches of the pipe, where the pipe is to be gradually brought above
the ground for crossing any obstructions as shown in the drawings. The concrete used
for pedestals shall be of 1:1.5:3 proportion RCC with materials and work complying
to specifications mentioned in clauses for standard specifications for civil works.

Pipe supports shall be placed at a distance of 2.5/5.0 m centre-to-centre depending

upon the pipe material and length of pipe available. The dimensions of pipe supports
for pipelines of various diameters shall be as shown in the concerned drawing and
shall have sufficient height above ground to be able to support the pipe and surround
up to a height of 200mm above the crown of sewer and minimum 150mm both the
sides of the sewer.

There shall be no joints at the location of the pipe supports. The joints shall be
located on any one side of the support, at a minimum distance from the face of the
support as given on drawings.
24.8. Measurements for Anchor, Thrust blocks and pipe supports
For providing Anchor, Thrust blocks and pipe supports in accordance with above
Clauses of this Section, the measurement shall be based on the neat line dimensions
of the structure and deducting the volume occupied by the pipe will be considered.

24.9. BACKFILLING OF TRENCHES AND AROUND FOUNDATIONS OF

STRUCTURES
24.9.1. General
Filling of the trenches for sewers shall not be commenced until the sewers are tested
and passed. The Operator shall use approved selected surplus soils from excavated

Page 289 of 385

 materials for backfilling in accordance with the requirements in relevant Clauses in
IS: 4127 and IS: 783 or with quarry dust as specified hereafter and as shown on
drawings. The excavated materials suitable for backfilling shall be stored not closer
than 600 mm from the edge of the trench and shall not obstruct any public utilities or
interfere with travel by local inhabitants or general public. Handling and storage of
excavated materials must meet with the regulations of the Local Government
Authorities.

24.9.2. The materials for backfilling are:

a) Excavated earth.
Backfilling for locations of trenches along roads of lesser traffic and interior roads
and valley portions, as decided and directed by the Engineer In-charge shall be done
by with the available earth obtained from excavation including watering and
consolidation to 95% proctor density by mechanical and manual means., complete
with all lead and lifts.

b) Quarry dust filling.

Backfilling for locations of trenches along main roads and all road crossings, as
decided and directed by the Engineer In-charge shall be done by with the Quarry dust
of size not exceeding 5.6mm including watering and consolidation to 95% proctor
density by mechanical and manual means., complete with all lead and lifts.

24.10. Method of Backfilling

On completion of the pipe laying operations in any section, for a length of about 100
m and while further work is still in progress, refilling of trenches shall be started by
the Operator with a view of restricting the length of open trenches. Pipe laying shall
closely follow the progress of trench excavation and the Operator shall not permit
unreasonably excessive lengths of trench excavation to remain open while awaiting
testing of the pipeline. If Engineer considers that the Operator is not complying with
any of the foregoing requirements, he may prohibit further trench excavation until he
is satisfied with the progress of laying, testing of sewers and refilling of trenches.
Trenches and excavated pits for structures shall be backfilled to original ground level
or to such other levels, as the Engineer may direct. All backfilling shall be carried out
in orderly manner expeditiously and consistent with good workmanship. Mechanical
vibrators/equipments shall be used for compaction only after the back fill has reached
its final level as required by the Engineer as the backfill top shall form the base for
restoration road works. Backfill material put into the trenches/pits for backfilling,
shall unless otherwise specified be compacted and built up as to minimize future
settlement. For this, care shall be exercised in selecting backfill material free from
large hard clay lumps, especially in cramped areas directly adjoining the walls of
structures.
Care shall be taken not to injure or disturb the pipes, joints and coatings, after the
pipe is properly bedded, jointed and inspected and all measurements for the location
of Junctions are properly recorded by the Engineer and sufficient time is allowed for
the joint materials or cement concrete or mortar to set. Backfilling around and over

Page 290 of 385

 the pipe, conduit, or structure shall be taken up uniformly on all sides and in the
sequence and manner specified hereinafter, with care to avoid the displacement or
damage to the pipe, conduit or structure. Trenches and pits should be carefully
guarded till backfilling.

For the purpose of backfilling, the depth of trench shall be divided into the following
three zones measured from bottom to top of trench, as follows:

Zone A: From bottom of trench or top of the concrete, when concrete bedding is provided, to
the level of the centre line of the pipe.
Zone B: From the level of the centre line of the pipe to a level 300 mm above the top of the
pipe.
Zone C: From a level 300 mm above the top of the pipe to the top of the trench.

Backfilling in Zone A shall be done by hand with fine earth from excavated material
as approved by the Engineer placed in layers of 80 mm and compacted by tamping.
The backfilling material shall be deposited in the trench for its full width of each side
of the pipe, fittings and appurtenance simultaneously.

Backfilling in Zone B shall be done by hand or approved mechanical methods,

special care being taken to avoid injuring or moving the pipe. The type of backfill
material to be used and the method of placing and consolidating shall be as approved
by Engineer to suit individual locations.

Backfilling in Zone C shall be done by hand or approved mechanical methods.

Unless other wise specified backfilling by hand shall be done in layers of 300mm,
each layer well compacted before laying the next layer.

As necessary to attain compaction to 95% of the maximum dry density as per part-7,
of IS: 2720, the backfill material shall be moistened by sprinkling with water to
optimum moisture content. After placing each layer of backfill material, the layer
shall be thoroughly and uniformly compacted by means of mechanical or hand
tampers. The compacting equipment and the manner of its use shall be subject to the
approval of the Engineer. After the backfill material is placed in Zone A and Zone B
as specified above, the remaining portion i.e., Zone C of the trench may be machine
backfilled. Small pebbles of size less than 50 mm, if any, shall be so distributed
throughout the mass, that all interstices are solidly filled with fine material. Machine
backfill shall be so conducted that the material deposited in the trench shall not fall
directly on top of the pipe from such a height as might result in damage to the pipe
joints or alignment. If the trench is subjected to conditions, which might cause
flotation of the pipe before sufficient backfill has been placed; the Operator shall take
the necessary precautions to prevent floatation of the pipe, conduit or structure.
Before final acceptance of the work, additional tamped earth shall be added to restore
the settled trench surface to the required level of the adjacent earth surface or to the
base of crushed rock wearing surface or to the finished earth base.

Page 291 of 385

 As per the applicable clauses in this Specifications, if from the excavated soil,
enough backfill material is not available, imported, selected and approved backfill
material from the borrow pits shall be placed for backfill. The Operator shall include
the above under backfilling rates. Also for backfilling of trenches, where the
excavation is in the rock, refilling shall be made with the surplus soft soil with all
lead and lifts. Accordingly, the same shall be taken into account by the Operator
while quoting the rates for backfill.

Should any subsidence take place either in the filling of the trenches or near about it
during the works, the Operator shall make good the same at his own cost.
24.11. Disposal of Surplus Excavated Material
The excavated material, which is in surplus to the requirements after backfilling shall
be removed/disposed off as directed by the Engineer with all lifts to a lead distance
detailed in bill of quantities, from the site. For this, payment will be made as per the
item in BOQ. The landfill site is to be identified by the Operator and got approved by
the Engineer in charge of Execution. No surplus or excess material shall be disposed
in a stream / channel nor in any place where the pre-construction surface drainage
may have to be provided, without written permission of the Engineer.

24.12. Measurements
Backfilling complied to the specifications in this section and in bill of quantities will
be measured net in cubic meters, limiting to the dimensions of excavation in clause
19.4 and deducting the volume occupied by the sewers, bedding, encasement etc as
applicable. The payment for backfilling will be made only after the Operator has
cleared the road / pathway, of the soil and construction material debris, etc., due to
the trench excavations and sewer line works to the satisfaction of the Engineer
Incharge.

Section 25. Ancillary STRUCTURES – MANHOLES, DROP MANHOLES

AND VENTILATING SHAFTS
The Operator shall construct Wire cut brick, RCC-Manholes, Drop arrangements
with HDPE pipes, Cast iron Ventilating shafts, Valve Chambers, at the locations
shown on approved construction drawings, as directed by the Engineer as per the
specification in the applicable Indian standards mentioned and as mentioned
hereafter. The materials used and construction procedure adopted for the ancillary
structures shall comply to the specifications as mentioned below and clause in
standard specifications for civil works.

25.1.1. Excavation
Earth work excavations for the Manholes, Drop arrangements and C.I. Ventilating
shaft arrangements etc. shall be carried complying to specifications in clause 19 and
specifications in bill of quantities.
25.1.2. Backfilling

Page 292 of 385

 Backfilling for sewer ancillary structures shall be in accordance with requirements
specified in clause 24.9 and 24.10 of Backfilling.
25.2. Manholes
Manholes shall be built at every change of alignment, gradient or diameter, at the
head of all sewers and branches, at every junction of two or more sewers as shown on
the drawings complying to IS: 4111 Part1-1967 and latest revisions and as per
specifications in this section or as directed by Engineer. Sulphate resisting cement
confirming to IS: 12330 shall be used for all the items of works for manholes. The
shape of the manholes generally is circular with conical shape at top for Brick
manholes, unless specifically stated as on drawings.
The Operator shall be wholly responsible for giving suitable connections at the
junctions of sewer lines with the manholes. The minimum depth of manhole shall be
one meter or as in construction drawings or as directed by Engineer.

For House service connections directly to manholes, 110/160mm PVC pipes shall be
placed during construction of manholes as per specifications in Clause 26. and items
in BOQ, if the provisional pipes for House service connections are not placed due to
the negligence of the Operator, the Operator has to redo the total work of dismantling
of manhole shaft and placing of the pipes etc. at his own cost.

The Manholes have been divided into different categories based on depth, diameter
and material of construction. Any manholes required to be provided extra, at the
locations shown by the Engineer, shall be provided by the Operator, for which
payment shall be made at the quoted rates.

25.2.1. Wire cut Brick Manholes

25.2.2. Construction
The work shall be executed in accordance with the approved construction drawings
and specifications involving,

a). Providing and constructing of [Link] Cement Concrete foundation using approved
quality aggregates of 40mm and downsize with an offset of 150mm all round the
chamber.

b). Providing and constructing wire cut brick masonry in C.M 1:4 proportion using
modular wire cut bricks of class designation 75 of approved quality and confirming
to IS : 1077 with a tapering top portion as per approved construction drawings and
providing cement mortar plaster in CM 1:3 proportion, 12mm thick inside and
outside except for the conical surface outside, where the thickness of plaster shall be
20mm thick. Samples of bricks shall be tested as per IS : 3495 by the Operator.
Bricks rejected by the Engineer shall be removed from the site within 24
[Link] of Brick works shall be in accordance with IS 2212:1962 and
latest revisions.

Page 293 of 385

 c). Providing and constructing benching with Cement Concrete [Link] to the dimensions as
on drawings with 1:6 slope in the concrete towards the central drain, plastered with
CM 1:3 proportion, 20mm thick and finished with smooth coat of neat cement and
fixing of inlet and outlet sewers in the walls with the internal periphery protected
with an arch of [Link] Cement Concrete with graded metal of 10mm to 20mm size.

d). Supplying and fixing of, 3 mm thick plastic (as per IS: 10910) encapsulated over
12mm dia. Fe-415 steel (as per IS: 1786) bar footsteps staggered at 300mm apart and
providing and fixing of heavy duty circular steel fibre reinforced concrete (SFRC)
manhole frame and covers of 560 mm diameter conforming to IS 12592 and the
payment for providing of SFRC heavy duty manhole frame and covers shall be paid
separately as per quoted rate for the item in bill of quantities.

e). The channel for the manhole shall be constructed in cement concrete of M15 grade.
Both sides of the channel shall be taken up to the level of the crown of the outgoing
sewer. They shall be benched up in concrete and rendered in cement mortar (1:1) of
20 mm thickness and formed to a slope of 1 in 12 towards the channel.

f). The manhole construction work includes curing, pouring tar over MH frame and
cover, cost of tar, engraving manhole number and flow direction on the inner surfaces
etc., with all lead and lifts, finishing etc complete. The cement used for the
construction of masonry works and internal & external plastering works of manholes
shall be of sulphate resisting cement only confirming to IS:12330.

25.2.3. Testing
All Brick Manholes shall be tested as per relevant provisions in CPHEEO Manual &
relevant IS with latest revisions & amendments and specifications in clause 27 of
Testing and commissioning.

25.2.4. Measurement & payment

The depth of manhole shall be measured from the top of cover to the invert level of
the deepest outgoing sewer from the [Link] quoted rate for the Manholes for
various depths as per the specifications and drawings shall include the cost of
sulphate resisting cement, bedding concrete, benching concrete, wire cut brick
masonry, plastering, foot steps, fixing SFRC manhole frame with cover, dewatering
to keep the manhole dry until final testing etc complete.
The Rates for any fractional variation (increase or decrease) in the depth of the
manhole on decimetre basis, shall be paid as per actuals, by adding the difference in
rates between the immediately preceding and succeeding depths of such fractional
depth of manhole on linear basis.

For Example: To pay 1.22M depth manhole:

Rate for 1M depth Manhole excluding manhole frame & cover and including
encapsulated foot steps rate Rs. X.

Page 294 of 385

 Rate for 2 M depths Manhole excluding manhole frame & cover and including
encapsulated foot steps rate Rs. Y.
Therefore rate for 1.22M depth Manhole
= Rs. X + (Y-X)/1.00 x 0.22.

Note: For the depths of manholes less than the lowest depths of Bill of Quantities
item, the preceding manhole depth shall be taken as zero with zero value to arrive at
the rate
25.3. RCC Manholes
25.3.1. Construction
The construction of RCC manholes shall be by Cast In-situ of Circular in shape or
approved type Pre-Cast RCC, constructed using form vibrators of standard type,
using SRC Cement confirming to IS: 12330. The type of manhole to be constructed
shall be as approved by OWNER, Operator shall take prior approval for the Design
and Process of manufacture of the Pre-cast RCC manholes, the type of vibration for
compaction of concrete for pre-cast manholes shall be invariably of form or table
vibrator type.

The work of Cast In-situ RCC manholes includes,

a). Providing and constructing of [Link] Cement Concrete foundation using approved
quality aggregates of 40mm and downsize with an offset as given in the drawings.

b). Providing and laying granite jelly cement concrete 1:1.5:3 for beds of manholes etc.,
using 20mm and down size jelly including laying, tamping, etc. for a depth, as per
drawings, with water proof compound for top plaster in CM 1:3 curing and smooth
finishing for exposed faces with necessary centering and form work etc., complete as
per specification, drawing and as directed by the Engineer.

c). Providing and laying cement concrete of 1:1.5:3 proportion for vertical walls using
20mm and down size jelly including laying, tamping, mixing of required quantity of
water proof compound for every one bag of cement for plastering in CM 1:3 curing
and smooth finishing for exposed faces with necessary centering and form work etc.,
complete as per specification, drawing and as directed by the Engineer.

d). Providing and constructing benching with Cement Concrete 1:1.5:3 to the dimensions
as on drawings with 1:6 slope in the concrete towards the central drain, plastered with
CM 1:3 proportion, 20mm thick and finished with smooth coat of neat cement and
fixing of inlet and outlet sewers in the walls with the internal periphery protected
with an arch of 1:1.5:3 Cement Concrete with graded metal of 10mm to 20mm size.

e). Providing and laying cement concrete of grade 1:1.50:3 proportion with 12mm to
20mm I.S.I gauge of approved gradation hard broken granite/aggregate including
cost and conveyance of all materials with wood or steel shuttering form work
including machine mixing , centering form work, scaffolding, tamping , vibrating ,

Page 295 of 385

 curing and smooth finish with CM 1:3, 12mm thick for inside surface for RCC
Covering Flat Slab with all lead and lifts, etc. complete as per drawing, specification
and as directed by the Engineer.

f). Providing, Supplying and fabricating of TMT (Fe-500) reinforcement steel of all sizes,
including straightening, cutting, bending, hooking, lapping and/or welding wherever
required, placing in position, tieing with binding wire of approved quality and gauge
including the cost of binding wire and anchoring to adjoining members wherever
necessary including all laps and wastages etc., with all lead and lifts, complete as per
design, specification and directed by Engineer.

g). Supplying and fixing of, 3 mm thick plastic (as per IS: 10910) encapsulated over
12mm dia. Fe-415 steel (as per IS: 1786) bar footsteps staggered at 300mm apart and
providing and fixing of heavy duty circular steel fibre reinforced concrete (SFRC)
manhole frame and covers of 560 mm diameter conforming to IS 12592 and the
payment for providing of SFRC heavy duty manhole frame and covers shall be paid
separately as per quoted rate for the item in bill of quantities.

h). The RCC Manhole cost includes all materials, steel, curing, pouring tar over MH
frame and cover, cost of tar, engraving manhole number and flow direction on the
inner surfaces etc., with all lead and lifts, finishing etc complete. The cement used for
the construction of RCC manhole and internal & external plastering works of
manholes shall be of sulphate resisting cement only, confirming to IS:12330.

The work of construction of Pre-cast RCC manhole includes,

a). Providing & laying mechanically mixed cement concrete of M-15 grade with stone
aggregate (with 20 mm nominal size graded stone aggregate) in benching, Neat
cement punning over PCC benching, as given in the drawings.

b). Construction of approved type vibrated Pre-Cast RCC Manhole Chambers

constructed using Sulphate resistant Cement & form vibrator of standard type for
Circular Manhole Chambers of various internal dia (as indicated in BOQ) at bottom
and 0.50 dia at top made up of pre-cast monolithic base, modular riser and top cone
in M- 30 grade concrete placed & aligned to provide vertical sides, with O ring
rubber gasket at each joint, water tight & adjustment rings over top cone, complete
and all connections shall have, a water tight seal between the pipe and the manhole
complete as per standard design & drawing.

c). Making connection of drain or sewer line with existing manhole including breaking in
to and making good the walls, floors etc. with CC [Link]. Finishing with CM 1:3
with a floating coat of neat cement and making necessary channels for drain etc. as
per specification, drawing and as directed by the Engineer.

d). Providing, Supplying and fabricating of TMT (Fe-500) reinforcement steel of all sizes,
including straightening, cutting, bending, hooking, lapping and/or welding wherever

Page 296 of 385

 required, placing in position, tieing with binding wire of approved quality and gauge
including the cost of binding wire and anchoring to adjoining members wherever
necessary including all laps and wastages etc., with all lead and lifts, complete as per
design, specification and directed by Engineer.

e). providing MS Foot rests (PVC encapsulated) and fixing in manhole with CC Block of
[Link] (1 cement : 3 coarse sand : 6 graded stone aggregate of 20 mm nominal size) of
size 20x20x10 cm with 20mm square bar foot rest, and providing and fixing of heavy
duty circular steel fibre reinforced concrete (SFRC) manhole frame and covers of 560
mm diameter conforming to IS 12592 and the payment for providing of SFRC heavy
duty manhole frame and covers shall be paid separately as per quoted rate for the
item in bill of quantities.

f). The RCC Manhole cost includes providing danger lighting & use of sight rails &
boning roads shoring & strutting wherever required, including sand bedding,
watering, curing, cost of all materials, labour, supply & fabrication of steel, pouring
tar over MH frame and cover, cost of tar, engraving manhole number and flow
direction on the inner surfaces etc., with all lead and lifts, finishing etc complete. The
cement used for the construction of RCC manhole and internal & external plastering
works of manholes shall be of sulphate resisting cement only, confirming to
IS:12330.

25.3.2. Testing
All RCC Manholes shall be tested as in specifications in clause 27 of Testing and
commissioning .
25.3.3. Measurement & payment
The depth of manhole both for Cast In-Situ / Pre-Cast RCC manholes shall be
measured from the top of cover to the invert level of the deepest outgoing sewer from
the manhole. The quoted rate for the Manholes for various depths as per the
specifications and drawings shall include the cost of sulphate resisting cement,
bedding concrete, benching concrete, RCC floor & roof slab, shaft walls, plastering,
footsteps, fixing SFRC manhole frame with cover, dewatering to keep the manhole
dry until final testing etc complete.

The Rates for any fractional variation (increase or decrease) in the depth of the
manhole on decimetre basis, shall be paid as per actuals, by adding the difference in
rates between the immediately preceding and succeeding depths of such fractional
depth of manhole on linear basis.

For Example: To pay 1.22M depth manhole:

Rate for 1M depth Manhole excluding manhole frame & cover and including
encapsulated foot steps rate Rs. X.
Rate for 2 M depths Manhole excluding manhole frame & cover and including
encapsulated foot steps rate Rs. Y.
Therefore rate for 1.22M depth Manhole

Page 297 of 385

 = Rs. X + (Y-X)/1.00 x 0.22.

Note: For the depths of manholes less than the lowest depths of Bill of Quantities
item, the preceding manhole depth shall be taken as zero with zero value to arrive at
the rate.

25.4. Drop Manholes

In a manhole, wherever the difference between the invert level of downstream sewer
and the invert level of the upstream sewer is greater than 60 cm, a drop manhole shall
be provided at that position. The locations and construction of the drop manholes
shall be provided as on drawings.
HDPE Grade PE-100 pipes confirming to PN 6 as per IS:4984 with latest revisions
and amendments suitably supported with MS fasteners at 300 mm c/c. for diameters
pipe line as per Bill of Quantities, construction drawings and as directed by Engineer,
specials conforming to IS: 1729 shall be used for providing the drop in the manhole
& a suitable expander/reducer T-Joint at the top with incoming sewer and 45 degree
bend at the bottom with HDPE specials to the direction of flow in the receiving
sewer, encasing the pipe with cement concrete of [Link] proportion including
necessary centering and form work, vibrating, curing, including cost and conveyance
of all materials, labour with all lead and lifts, etc., complete as per specification and
as in construction drawing. The benching concrete in the manhole should surround
the joint of the terminating bend and a neat channel shall be made in the benching
concrete to direct the flow to the receiving sewer. A continuation of the incoming
sewer should be built through the shaft wall to form a rodding and inspection eye,
which should be provided with half blank flange as on drawing.
The drop manhole arrangements shall be tested along with sewer lines.
25.5. Vent shafts
CI Vent shafts shall be erected at places as on construction drawings or as directed by
Engineer and as per Bill of Quantities. The work includes providing and fixing 150mm
diameter, Cast Iron pipe for ventilating shaft of 5 meters high with specials and cowl
and with suitable grips in C.C. [Link] pillar using 10mm to 20mm graded hard
granite/trap/basalt or any other approved metal with 15 cms thick C.C. around up to 1.22
mtrs above the GL and with a foundation base of 90x90x90 cms plastered with 12 mm
thick CM 1:3 to all exposed faces and linking the shaft to the manhole by means of 15
cm dia GSW pipes and specials, jointing with tar dipped hemp 1:1 1/2 CM caulking,
curing with all lead and lifts etc., complete for all materials earth work excavation and
refilling in all strata, and disposal of surplus earth as directed with all lead and lifts etc.
complete.(Sulphate resistant cement shall be used).

SECTION 26. HOUSE SERVICE CONNECTIONS (HSC) AND EXISTING SEWERAGE SYSTEM
SURVEY

26.1. House Service Connections

House service connections shall be provided to collect sewage from individual
houses as per approved drawings, specifications and items in Bill of Quantities.

Page 298 of 385

 For connecting sewers directly to Manholes PVC pipes shall be used and for
connecting sewers directly to the Sewer (i.e. online connection) GSW pipes and
specials shall be used as on drawings and as decided upon by the Engineer in-charge.

The survey for house service connections from the Nearest Manhole or sewer line as
decided by the Engineer, to the property boundary shall be finalized before taking up
the work. All the property connections/ House Service Connections (HSC) shall be
done simultaneously while sewers are laid in a particular road/ area/ zone.

26.1.1. House Service Connection to Manholes

The Location of House service connections directly to manholes shall be as decided
by the Engineer In-charge. The work involves placing of required number of
110/160mm PVC Pipes, of length 200mm more than the shaft wall thickness on both
sides, at time of construction of manholes, at a depth of about 1m below ground level
or as directed by the Engineer In-charge including providing and laying granite or
basalt or trap jelly cement concrete of proportion [Link] for bed and surround of PVC
pipe in wall shaft and making the joint water tight.

After completion of the manhole construction, and for providing House service
connection up to the property boundary 110mm dia 6 ksc PVC pipes or 160mm dia 6
ksc PVC pipes are to be laid and jointed with required slope, after excavation from
property boundary to outside of manhole, and a 900 Bend with cleaning eye and cap is
fixed for the pipe, inside the manhole as per specifications and drawings. The items
shall include all labour, lead and lifts and handling charges as per Bill of Quantities
PVC pipe joints are to be made with suitable solvents as per relevant IS Code.

26.1.2. House Service Connection to Sewers (Online connections)

For House service connections directly to lateral sewers, the connections are divided
into shallow depth and deeper depths as shown on drawings. The work shall be
executed as per details on drawings and items in bill of quantities, and it involves
earthwork excavations as per BOQ specifications, providing, laying and jointing of
GSW Junctions, GSW pipes, of specified sizes. The pipes, specials and laying shall
confirm to IS 651:1992, IS 4127 with latest amendments and specifications in BOQ.

The cement used for jointing shall be of Sulphate Resisting Cement confirming to IS
12330-1988 with latest amendments.

26.2. Location and Protection of Existing Public and Private Utilities

Prior to excavation, the Operator shall contact all concerned authorities such as
Power distribution companies, ULB, police, telecommunications, forest
department, etc and householders in roads where work is to take place and inform
them of the nature of the work and its likely duration. Information should be
obtained from utilities companies about the location of their utilities, preferably in the
form of record drawings, and the Operator should carry out utilities tracing using
electronic equipment to verify the positions of utilities. Trial excavations should also
Page 299 of 385
 be carried by hand to further confirm locations of utilities. The Engineer will only
permit trench excavation to proceed when he is satisfied that adequate efforts have
been made to establish the alignments and depths of existing utilities

Any damage to water supply utility connections which may occur during execution
of House service connections, even after taking all necessary precautions by the
Operator shall be paid as per rates quoted for the specified item indicated in Bill of
Quantities.

The damaged water supply house connections shall be restored with MDPE pipes
including Encasing the MDPE Pipe with 40mm dia., MDPE Pipe at sewer crossings
etc, The cost includes encasing the MDPE Pipe with 40mm dia. MDPE Pipe with all
works complete as directed by the Engineer In-charge for items under heading
―Miscellaneous works‖ in bill of quantities. The decision in this matter made by the
Engineer in charge of work / concerned Engineer of OWNER shall be final and
binding upon the Operator. For damaged soak pits and not to cause inconvenience to
the public, the soak pits damaged during excavation shall be restored as per items in
bill of quantities. However for any damage to other service utilities, the Operator
shall make good the same at his own cost. No extra payment towards this will be
made.
26.3. Existing sewerage system Survey
It is anticipated that in the existing sewerage system, leaving the portion executed by
OWNER, the system is not maintained properly and the system may not be
functioning properly at certain locations. Hence the level survey of the existing
sewerage system executed by the agencies other than OWNER has been included in
this tender. It is the intended to retain portion of existing system which is properly
functioning and suitable to be included into proposed network.
The contract covers, Conducting Level Survey of Existing UGD system by
Collecting ground levels, invert level of sewers, Size and type(MOC) of Sewers and
at every manhole, including depth of manhole and measuring length in between
manholes and safely closing the manhole cover, preparation and submission of
Drawings in AutoCAD with all particulars in complete manner as per specification
and as directed by the Engineer in charge.(The Manholes and sewers will be de-silted
and cleared using sewer cleaning machine by OWNER, Levels shall be carried by the
Operator, from the nearest Bench mark given by OWNER).

OWNER will cross verify the adaptability of existing sewer network with the
proposed network, and decision will be given to retain or reject the part or whole of
the existing sewer network and the Operator shall carry out the same in accordance
with the items in the Bill of quantities and as directed by Engineer. For laying of new
sewers in place of damaged and unserviceable existing sewers, the earthwork
excavation shall be measured including existing damaged sewers under all soils
classification, the new sewer lines in place of damaged one‘s, dismantling of existing
damaged manholes and reconstruction of the same shall be done as per items in
BOQ. The diversion of sewage for in service sewer lines and manholes, if required
during this work will be done by the OWNER.
Page 300 of 385
 The Operator shall collect all necessary specified details required for developing
sewer network plan for providing the existing system network plan in Auto Cad. And
also incorporate the same in the ―AS BUILT DRAWINGS‖ of executed new works.
Payment: - payment to Operator on completion of this item of work complying to
the specifications above will be paid as per quoted rate and unit of measurement is
meters.

Section 27. TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

27.1. Testing at site
All sewers and appurtenances shall be tested before commissioning and trial run as
per the specifications in this section. After laying and jointing of sewer pipes and
before backfilling the trenches, the complete length of the sewer is to be checked for
water tightness and the sole responsibility of arranging the necessary equipments and
apparatus lies with the Operator at his own cost. Any damage during testing shall be
Operator‘s responsibility and shall be rectified by him free of cost. Water for testing
shall be arranged by the Operator at his own cost.

27.2. Water Test for Sewers

After laying and jointing of sewer pipes and before backfilling the trenches, the
complete length of the sewer is to be checked for water tightness. Owner may exempt
water test for lateral sewers, where house service connections are to be connected
immediately.

The procedure for testing is as detailed below,

a) Each section of sewer shall be tested for water tightness from manhole to manhole To
prevent change in alignment and disturbance after the pipes have been laid, it is
desirable to backfill the pipes up to the top keeping at least 90cm length of the pipe
open at the joints in case of longer length pipes.

b) In case of concrete and stoneware pipes with cement mortar joints, pipes shall be
tested three days after cement mortar joints have been made. It is necessary that the
pipelines are filled with water for about a week before commencing the application of
pressure to allow for the absorption by pipe wall.

c) The sewers are tested by plugging the upper end with a provision for an air outlet
pipe with stop cock.. The water is filled through a funnel connected at the lower end
provided with a plug. After the air has been expelled through the air outlet, the stop
cock is closed and the water level in the funnel is raised to 2.50m above the invert at
the upper end. Water level in the funnel is noted after 30 minutes and quantity of
water required to restore the original water level in the funnel is determined. The
pipeline under pressure is then inspected while the funnel is still in position. There
shall not be any leaks in the pipe or the joints (small sweating on the pipe surface is
permitted). Any sewer or part there of that does not meet the test shall be emptied and
repaired or re-laid as required and tested again.

Page 301 of 385

 d) The leakage or quantity of water to be supplied to maintain the test pressure during
the period of 10 minutes shall not exceed 0.2 lit/mm dia. of pipe per kilometer length
per day.
e) Ex filtration test for detection of leakage shall be carried out at a time when the
ground water table is low.

f) For concrete, R.C.C. pipes of more than 600mm dia. the quantity of water inflow can
be increased by 10% for each additional 100mm of pipe dia.

g) After completion of the test all temporary seals shall be removed, the test water shall
be drained out / pumped out and the line cleaned properly.

27.3. Test for Straightness and obstruction

As soon as a stretch of sewer is laid and tested, before commissioning the cleanliness
of the pipeline is to be checked by the following tests as applicable and as decided by
the Engineer.
27.3.1. Torch & Mirror Test
In this method of testing, a torch will be held one end of the pipeline inside a manhole
and its image through the pipeline will be reflected and seen on a mirror held at the
opposite end of the pipeline, inside the next manhole. Any obstruction / debris / major
mis-alignment will not give a clear image in which case the pipeline will again be
cleaned / rectified and the tests re-done.

27.3.2. Ring Test

In this method of testing two steel/ wooden rings of suitable thickness and design
shall be fixed facing each other at a distance of 2 feet or more. The block of rings
shall be inserted from one end of the pipeline, inside manhole and pulled by a rope
fixed to the block from the other end of the pipeline, inside the next manhole. The
rings shall be of dia 75 mm less than the inside diameter of pipe under testing. The
rope used for pulling the ring block may be inserted in the pipeline by suitable
means. Any construction / debris / major misalignment will prevent the ring to pass
through the pipeline in which case the pipeline will again be cleaned / rectified and
the test redone, and no extra payment will be made. Alternately upon the approval of
the Engineer, the sewer may be tested by inserting at the high end of the sewer, a
smooth ball of a diameter 13 mm less than the pipe bore. In the absence of
obstruction, such as yarn or mortar projecting through the joints, the ball should roll
down the invert of the pipe and emerge at the lower end. Any construction / debris /
major misalignment that prevents the ball to pass through the pipeline in which case,
the pipeline shall be again cleaned / rectified and the tests redone, and no extra
payment will be made.
27.3.3. Water Test for Manholes
The entire height of Brick and RCC manhole shall be tested for water-tightness by
closing both the incoming and outgoing ends of the sewers and filling the manhole

Page 302 of 385

 with water. A drop in water level not more than 50mm per 24 hours shall be
permitted. In case of high subsoil water it should be ensured that there is no leakage
of ground water into the manhole by observing the manhole for 24 hours after
emptying it.

27.3.4. Test Records

Complete test records shall be maintained for all tests carried out for sewers both
during construction and after being in service. The tests carried out as in
specifications, approved QAP shall be documented in the formats as approved by the
Engineer and shall be carried out in the presence of the Engineer or his representative
and shall be certified by the Engineer or his representative and the Operator. All
completed Test records/documents shall be submitted to the Engineer before
submission of bills.

27.4. Commissioning
After satisfactory completion of works and Testing of the sewer lines and
appurtenances as per specifications in above clauses, the system shall be
commissioned for trial run and operation.

Section 28. Final Finishing

The Operator will ensure that the entire structure along with all its installations is in
finished and in new and fully operative condition when handed over. He shall have
repaired and removed all signs of damage that might have been done during the
course of construction of manholes and laying of sewers. He shall also see that the
entire exterior has been finished properly and the entire site is cleared of all extra
construction material, debris, and excavated soil. This shall have to be done to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.

Section 29. As Built Drawings

The Operator shall submit to the Engineer within two months of actual completion of
the work, ―As Built‖ Drawings as specified below and operation and maintenance
instructions for the whole of the Works. These Drawings shall be accurate and
correct in all respects, shall be submitted to, and approved by the Engineer.
Completion Drawings as below on two prints and one polyester film shall be supplied
by the Operator, along with a soft copy in CD. These drawings shall be developed in
Auto CAD. Drawing shall be of standard size as below,

i). Strip Plans and L-sections of Under Ground Drainage system showing pipe work in
package area on scale as per standard practices to the satisfaction of the Engineer,
showing sewer alignments, levels, appurtenances, sizes and material of pipe etc.
complete.
ii). Structural Drawings showing reinforcement details of all the components covered
under this contract as per standard practices.

Page 303 of 385

Section 30. Sewer crossings By Trench-less Method across
National Highways / State Highways / Railway
crossings / at any other Specified Locations
All works for Road and Railway crossings by Trench less method i.e. by Pipe
Ramming /Manual pipe jacking shall be carried out as per specifications in this
section mentioned below and for details and specifications not included in this
section shall be carried out as per ―Standard contract clauses for Trench less
Contracts‖ and ―Standard Guidelines for Trench less contracts‖, 2008.

Section 31. Design & Submittals

31.1.1. Design
The Operator shall be responsible for the design of the pipes used for the trenchless
method including all joints, for the design of the thrust and reception pits including
support and thrust wall and for the design of the jacking system in general. His
design will be reviewed by the Engineer but this will not relieve him of his
responsibility for the adequacy of the design.

31.1.2. Submittals
In addition to the applicable requirement of this Specification, the following shall be
submitted by the Operator and approved by the Engineer prior to commencement of
any works;

1) Programme or work with resource and equipment allocation.

2) Design Calculations:

a) Pipes including jacking and frictional forces in the axial direction and earth, traffic
and surcharge loading in the vertical direction and the pipes resistance to these loads.
Also allowable deflections at joints to limit damage to the joint from eccentric
loading under thrust and sealing limits,

b) Thrust and reception pits to resist external soil and water pressures and stresses
resulting from jacking machine. Drawings showing on plan and sections, the method
of supporting excavations and equipment layout shall be included. All calculation
shall be certified/ signed by a qualified Engineer.

31.1.3. Method Statement which shall include:

a) List of equipment and resources.

Page 304 of 385

 b) Detailed step by step procedure describing how work will be carried out including
clear definition of responsibilities and authority.
c) Support of existing services and adjacent structures.
d) Safety arrangement for compliance with safety requirements.
e) Locking pipe in position during insertion of next pipe.
f) Sealing thrust and reception pits during exiting and entering of pipe.

Section 32. Railway Crossings

For Railway Crossings, The Operator has to decide the following issues. Check the
profile of track and the strength of the bridge, longitudinally and laterally, the type
strata and evolve a complete system from starting and completion with due
interaction with owners, Southern Railway (SR) Authorities. The system shall be so
evolved that there shall not be any hindrance to any day-to-day activities taking place
in the area. He shall spell out likely danger, difficulty, and hindrance and suggest &
provide suitable remedial measures to obviate them, keeping authorities in
confidence. Suitable sign boards shall be designed and exhibited at proper places in
local and English language to keep users informed of the guidance, notice etc.,

Section 33. Site Investigation

After award of the Contract, the Operator shall be responsible for all necessary
geotechnical site investigations, including ground water level monitoring, which he
considers necessary but as a minimum at the proposed access pit locations, and
central median. The Operator‘s site investigation programme shall be submitted to
the Engineer for review. The results of such investigations shall be submitted to the
Engineer and shall include recommendation for pipe laying, excavation support and
soil stabilization if required.

The Operator shall be responsible for obtaining existing utility structures information
after Conducting Ground Penetrating Radar Survey in a corridor of 4-6 meter width
to detect buried utilities like pipes, cables etc. in such corridor, Marking of the
detected utilities on the map of corridor with information of locations and depths to
the top of various utilities detected. Work to be conducted using 500MHz and
300MHz antenna for best possible resolution and penetration.

33.1. Utility Service structures

The Operator shall replace at his own cost towards damage of any utility service
structures during the excavation and rehabilitate if necessary at his own cost.

Page 305 of 385

Section 34. SPECIAL CONDITIONS FOR PIPE RAMMING
(PR)
34.1. Description
This method involves the forming of a bore from a drive pit, by driving a steel casing
with an open end using a percussive hammer or pushing device that serves as a
casing for carrier (sewer pipes). In this process of horizontal ramming of steel pipe
involves an open steel pipe string being jacked dynamically with the aid of modified
displacement hammer or a horizontal ram from the starting shaft though the subsoil
to the target shaft. The soil core entering the pipe is removed continuously, at suitable
intervals or after completion of jacking.

34.2. Materials
a). Pipe

Pipe used in this method includes an external casing pipe (also called jacking pipe)
and may include an interior carrier pipe.

b). Allowable Forces

Considerable ramming / jacking forces may be required to install pipe using this
method.

i) Casing pipe shall be obtained from one manufacturer. Pipe shall be specifically
designedand certified for Horizontal auger boring by the pipe manufacturer.

ii) The allowable jacking strength capacity of casing pipe shall be capable of
withstanding the maximum jacking forces imposed by the operation. The specified
allowable jacking capacity of the casing pipe shall be 3 times greater than the
maximum jacking forces imposed by jacking operations as identified by theoretical
calculations.

iii) Steel casing pipe shall have minimum yield strength of 35,000 psi.

34.3. Casing Pipe

a). Casing pipe shall be used within the entire roadbed influence area. The roadbed
influence area is defined as the subsurface area located under the road and shoulder
surface, between each shoulder point or back of curb; and continues transversely
outward and downward from each shoulder point or back of curb on a 1 on 1 slope

b). Casing pipe materials shall be steel.

c). Only new casing pipe shall be used.

Page 306 of 385

d). Casing pipe shall normally be constructed without any longitudinal seams. However,
longitudinally welded casing pipe is allowed for 1.2 m or larger diameter pipes when
a certified welder performs all the welding.
e). Casing pipe shall have smooth interior and exterior walls to reduce jacking force and
prevent casing rotation.

f). The inside diameter (ID) of the casing pipe shall be at least 150 mm larger than the
largest out side diameter (OD) of the carrier pipe to allow the carrier pipe to be
inserted or removed subsequently without disturbing the casing or the roadbed.

g). Casing pipe shall be round. Steel casing pipe shall have roundness tolerance, so that
the difference between the major and minor outside diameters shall not exceed 1% of
the specified nominal outside diameter, or 6 mm, whichever is less.

h). Casing pipe shall have square and machine beveled ends. The pipe end maximum out
–of –square tolerance shall be 1 mm, (measured across the diameter).

i). Casing pipe shall be straight. The maximum allowable straightness deviation over
any 3m length of steel casing pipe is 3 mm.

j). Pipe shall be without any significant dimensional or surface deformities. All pipes
shall be free of visible cracks, holes, foreign material, foreign inclusions, blisters, or
other deleterious or injurious faults or defects. Any section of the pipe with a gash,
blister, abrasion, nick, scar, or other deleterious fault greater in depth than ten percent
(10%) of the wall thickness, shall not be used and shall be immediately removed
from the site.

k). Any of the following defects warrants pipe rejection:

i). Concentrated ridges, discoloration, excessive spot roughness, and pitting

ii) Insufficient or variable wall thickness

iii). Pipe damage from bending Crushing, stretching or other stress

iv). Pipe damage that impacts the pipe strength, the intended use, the internal diameter
of the pipe and internal roughness characteristics

v). Any other defect of manufacturing or handling.

l). Casing pipe shall be provided with inside two coats of food grade epoxy painting
over one coat of epoxy primer and outside two coats of anti-corrosive red oxide
primer of approved quality.
m) The casing pipe shall be tested for seepage test after completion.

Page 307 of 385

34.4. Carrier Pipe
Carrier Pipe material is of either Ductile iron or RCC NP-3. The carrier pipe shall be
inserted into the casing pipe in conjunction with the casing spacers.
The work includes, Supplying & Conveying of different diameters k-7 Class,
Ductile Iron carrier Pipes detailed in bill of quantities, confirming to IS 8329 with
latest amendments and conveying to work site lowering and placing horizontally
into casing pipe with all necessary arrangements, true to line and level and perfect
linking at joints, testing and commissioning, including cement mortar lining of
thickness as per IS using sulphate resisting cement confirming to IS 12330, loading
and unloading at both destinations and cuts of pipes wherever necessary including
jointing of DI pipes and specials with rubber gaskets including cleaning the socket
and spigot ends with soap solution and applying soft soap to the spigot and socket
ends before insertion of rubber gaskets, jacking and fixing in perfect conditions
including cost of soap solution, soft soap, waste etc. and giving necessary hydraulic
test to the required pressure as per ISS with all lead and lifts including cost of
jointing materials etc., complete (Operator will make his own arrangements for
procuring water for testing)

Supplying of different diameters S&S RCC SPUN / VIBRATED CAST PIPES

(REINFORCED) of NP-3 class detailed in bill of quantities, conforming to IS
458:1988 with latest amendments using Sulphate resistant cement, and conveying to
worksite, rolling and lowering into trenches, laying true to line and level including
loading and unloading at both destinations and jointing of pipes & specials including
cost of specials including perfect linking of joints with jack to correct position
including cost of jointing materials ie., rubber rings confirming to IS : 5382 for S&S
RCC pipes with all lead and lifts as directed and giving necessary hydraulic test as
per ISS and testing & commissioning etc., complete. (Operator will make his own
arrangements for procuring water for testing)

34.5. Construction
34.5.1. Minimum Allowable Depth
The minimum allowable depth of PR installed pipe under the road and shoulder
surface should be usually twice the nominal diameter (OD) or 1 m or the minimum
allowable depth as per the project requirement, whichever is higher.
In location where the road surface is super elevated, the minimum depth of the bore
shall be measured from the lowest side of the pavement surface.

34.5.2. Equipment
Equipment used for this method shall have the basic operations of boring, removing
tailings, and jacking pipe.

Page 308 of 385

34.5.3. Method
The starting shaft shall be excavated to accommodate the steel pipe sections to be
jacked and the ram. Steel support profiles shall be placed to direct the movement. If a
long jacking is necessary string fabrication shall be done at site.

34.5.4. Access Pits

a) Location

A minimum distance of 6 m, from the edge of the paved shoulder or curb to the face
of any access pit, equipment, and supplies, shall be maintained in areas posted at 50
kmph or less; otherwise, a minimum distance of 9 m shall be maintained.

b). Sheeting and Bracing

Sheeting and bracing shall be required whenever any part of the access pit excavation
is located within the roadbed influence area. Steel sheet pilling shall be furnished and
installed. An additional earth retention structure shall be required above and below
the bore hole on the drilling face of all access pits to prevent loss of material during
construction.

c) Protection

i). At the discretion of Engineer, and depending on the pit distance from the road
embankment, traffic barriers may be required to be installed adjacent to access pit
locations according to the owner‘s plans. If instructed, temporary beam guardrail
shall also be installed according to the current owner‘s specifications.

ii). Fencing barriers shall be installed adjacent to access pits, open excavations,
equipment and supplies with suitable fencing and plastic drums to prohibit pedestrian
access to the work site. Equipment shall not be used as fencing to protect access pits.

iii). The Operator shall construct and operate safe access pits according to all applicable
regulatory requirements.

34.5.5. Overcut Allowance

Overcut is the annular space between the excavated hole and the outside diameter of
the casing pipe. No overcut shall be allowed in case of pipe Ramming.

34.5.6. Water tight Joints

Water tight pipe joints are required to ensure the integrity of the roadbed. Pipe shall
be constructed to prevent water leakage or earth infiltration throughout its entire
length.

Page 309 of 385

 A watertight specification for each type of pipe material can be obtained through
each pipe material industry. Necessary reference must be made to the appropriate
industry specification for more detailed information.

34.6. SPECIAL CONDITIONS FOR MANUAL PIPE JACKING

Manual pipe jacking involves forming entry and exit pits, lowering of pipe segment
aligning, laying, jointing of product pipe line through jacking process from the
jacking pit.

34.6.1. Scope of Work

The scope of work includes all labour, materials and equipments and to perform all
the work necessary to design and construct pipe lines crossing under paved roads,
railway crossing using Manual pipe jacking. Construction shall be by using
appropriate equipment and Operator shall propose the location of all working shafts
having due regard to existing services, minimizing disruption to traffic and pedestrian
movement. Locations shall be approved by the engineer prior to the commencement
of construction. The Operator shall obtain approval of his method statement from the
Engineer before commencement of the work.

34.6.2. Design
The Operator shall be responsible for the design of the pipes used for the trenchless
method including all joints for the design of thrust and reception pits including
support and thrust wall for the design of the jacking system in general. His design
will be reviewed by the Engineer but this will not relieve him of his responsibility for
the adequacy of the design.

34.6.3. Submittals
In addition to the applicable requirements of this specification, the following shall be
submitted by the Operator and approved by the Engineer prior to commencement of
any works;

1) Programme of work with resource and equipment allocations.

2) Additional soil investigations
3) Design calculations for the non disruptive method

a) Pipes including jacking and friction forces in the axial direction and
earth, traffic and surcharge loading in the vertical direction and pipes
resistance to these loads. Also allowable deflections at joints to limit damage
to the joint from eccentric loading under thrust and sealing limits.
b) Thrust and reception pits to resist external soil and water pressures and
stresses resulting from jacking machine. Drawing showing on plan and
sections the method of supporting excavations and equipment layout shall be
included. All calculations shall be certified / signed by a qualified Engineer.

Page 310 of 385

 4) Materials specifications and product data.
5) Method statement shall include

a) List of equipment and resources

b) Detailed step by step procedure describing how work will be carried out
including clear definition of responsibilities and authority
c) Support of existing services and adjacent structures
d) Safety arrangement for compliance with safety requirements.
e) Arrangements for dealing with ground water taking due regard to
controlling the loss of materials and preventing settlement around pits pit
pipe interface and tunnel face
f) Dealing with different ground conditions
g) Locking pipe in position during insertion of next pipe
h) Sealing thrust and reception pits during exiting and entering of pipe
i) Control of overbreak
j) grout mix design and method of grouting

34.6.4. Casing Pipe

a). Casing pipe shall be used within the entire roadbed influence area. The roadbed
influence area is defined as the subsurface area located under the road and shoulder
surface, between each shoulder point or back of curb; and continues transversely
outward and downward from each shoulder point or back of curb on a 1 on 1 slope

b). Casing pipe materials shall be steel.

c). Only new casing pipe shall be used.

d). Casing pipe shall normally be constructed without any longitudinal seams. However,
longitudinally welded casing pipe is allowed for 1.2 m or larger diameter pipes when
a certified welder performs all the welding.

e). Casing pipe shall have smooth interior and exterior walls to reduced jacking force
and prevent casing rotation.

f). The inside diameter (ID) of the casing pipe shall be at least 150 mm larger than the
largest out side diameter (OD) of the carrier pipe to allow the carrier pipe to be
inserted or removed subsequently without disturbing the casing or the roadbed.

g). Casing pipe shall be round. Steel casing pipe shall have roundness tolerance, so that
the difference between the major and minor outside diameters shall not exceed 1% of
the specified nominal outside diameter, or 6 mm, whichever is less.

h). Casing pipe shall have square and machine beveled ends. The pipe end maximum out
–of –square tolerance shall be 1 mm, (measured across the diameter).

Page 311 of 385

 i). Casing pipe shall be straight. The maximum allowable straightness deviation over any
3m length of steel casing pipe is 3 mm.

j). Pipe shall be without any significant dimensional or surface deformities. All pipes
shall be free of visible cracks, holes, foreign material, foreign inclusions, blisters, or
other deleterious or injurious faults or defects. Any section of the pipe with a gash,
blister, abrasion, nick, scar, or other deleterious fault greater in depth than ten percent
(10%) of the wall thickness, shall not be used and shall be immediately removed
from the site.

k). Any of the following defects warrants pipe rejection:

i). Concentrated ridges, discoloration, excessive spot roughness, and pitting

ii) Insufficient or variable wall thickness

iii). Pipe damage from bending Crushing, stretching or other stress

iv). Pipe damage that impacts the pipe strength, the intended use, the internal
diameter of the pipe and internal roughness characteristics

v). Any other defect of manufacturing or handling.

l). Casing pipe shall be provided with inside two coats of food grade epoxy painting
over one coat of epoxy primer and outside two coats of anti-corrosive red oxide
primer of approved quality.

m). The casing pipe shall be tested for seepage test after completion.

34.6.5. Carrier Pipe

Carrier Pipe material is of either Ductile iron or RCC NP-3. The carrier pipe shall be
inserted into the casing pipe in conjunction with the casing spacers.

The work includes, Supplying & Conveying of different diameters k-7 Class,
Ductile Iron carrier Pipes detailed in bill of quantities, confirming to IS 8329 with
latest amendments and conveying to work site lowering and placing horizontally
into casing pipe with all necessary arrangements, true to line and level and perfect
linking at joints, testing and commissioning, including cement mortar lining of
thickness as per IS using sulphate resisting cement confirming to IS 12330, loading
and unloading at both destinations and cuts of pipes wherever necessary including
jointing of DI pipes and specials with rubber gaskets including cleaning the socket
and spigot ends with soap solution and applying soft soap to the spigot and socket
ends before insertion of rubber gaskets, jacking and fixing in perfect conditions
including cost of soap solution, soft soap, waste etc. and giving necessary hydraulic
test to the required pressure as per ISS with all lead and lifts including cost of

Page 312 of 385

 jointing materials etc., complete (Operator will make his own arrangements for
procuring water for testing)

Or Supplying of different diameters S&S RCC SPUN / VIBRATED CAST PIPES

(REINFORCED) of NP-3 class detailed in bill of quantities, conforming to IS
458:1988 with latest amendments using Sulphate resistant cement, and conveying to
worksite, rolling and lowering into trenches, laying true to line and level including
loading and unloading at both destinations and jointing of pipes & specials including
cost of specials including perfect linking of joints with jack to correct position
including cost of jointing materials ie., rubber rings confirming to IS : 5382 for S&S
RCC pipes with all lead and lifts as directed and giving necessary hydraulic test as
per ISS and testing & commissioning etc., complete. (Operator will make his own
arrangements for procuring water for testing)

34.6.6. Quality Assurance

The pipe line installation by manual pipe jacking shall be executed by firms having a
record of at least three years of successful trouble free execution of similar works

34.6.7. Delivery Storage and Handling

All materials shall be properly protected so that no damage or deterioration shall
occur during a prolonged delay

34.6.8. Site Investigation

Soil conditions and ground conditions shall constitute the Operator‘s risk. After
award of the contract the Operator shall be responsible for carrying out all
geotechnical site investigation including ground water level monitoring which he
considers necessary but as a minimum at the proposed access pit locations and central
median. The Operator‗s site investigation programme shall be submitted to the
engineer for review. The results of such investigation shall be submitted to the
engineer and shall include recommendations for pipe laying, excavation support and
soil stabilization if required.

34.6.9. Health and Safety

The Operator shall adopt safe working practices for pipe jacking in accordance with
appropriate standards. Only authorized persons shall be allowed access to the site.
The Operator shall provide a safety officer suitably experienced in tunneling
operations and with adequate authority to control and implement safe working
practices.

The Operator shall make suitable arrangements for accommodating his personnel at
the site including the following as a minimum:

1) Telephone service.
2) Approved gas detectors.

Page 313 of 385

 3) First aid kit.
4) One vehicle.

The excavated pits shall have a separate cage type ladder bay complete with ladder in
addition to any other bay or bays required for the construction of the works.

The pits shall be fenced off on all sides with close steel panels at least 1.8m in height
and equipped with safety warning lights. The panels (maximum space between
100mm) shall be joined by steel rods supported on concrete blocks.

Adequate lighting and ventilation shall be provided to the pits and electricity shall be
supplied at no greater than 110/220 volts.

34.6.10. Skilled Operators and Supervision

All operators in the employment of the Operator shall be skilled and experienced in
their respective trades and in particular shall be fully skilled in shaft sinking and
manual pipe jacking.

The pipe manufacturer has to guarantee that this pipe and its material are suitable for
its intended use.

Standard pipes shall be a minimum in length subject to the installation method used.
Where required, pipes shall incorporate lubricant injection holes spaced equally
around the circumference. Concrete pipes with a liner shall only be permitted to have
lubricant injection holes in the concrete. Lubrication holes shall be clear of joints and
shall be plugged on completion of the work. The liner shall be made good and
continuous. Pipes may incorporate lifting holes and fixing holes for securing
temporary apparatus. All such holes shall be threaded to enable plugs to be screwed
into the sockets to withstand any external water pressures.

Joints which shall be used in conjunction with a resilient packing, shall be capable of
accepting repeated annular deflections of up to 10 without.

i) damage to pipe or loss of structural strength.

ii) The ingress or egress of water or lubricant under the maximum operational or
test pressures.

iii) The ingress of soil / groundwater on to the bearing surfaces.

The joint design for concrete pipes shall be such that the areas available for
transmitting the maximum permitted thrust force will be sufficient to ensure that with
an annular deflection of 10 and with resilient packing material in place the maximum
Page 314 of 385
 pressure applied to the joint bearing surface will not exceed 23.5 N/mm2 for drives in
excess of 100 metres and up to 150 metres in length.

Unless independently authenticated test results acceptable to the Engineer are

available, two consecutive axial loading tests incorporating a 10 angular deflection
with the application of double the maximum permissible thrust force (or, if greater, of
the greatest thrust force that the proposed thrust equipment can apply) shall have
been successfully conducted without any visible crushing, cracking or spalling of the
pipe being evident, before any pipes will be accepted for use. The test shall be
extended to record the loading at which any visible signs of failure become evident,
and shall be carried out in an approved manner to simulate actual working conditions.
Pipes which have been submitted to the proof load test will not be permitted in the
Works.

Where the Operator elects to construct certain sections within larger diameter pipes
and grout the annular space, the external pipe may be of steel with full
circumferential weld. The steel pipe and the grout shall be regarded as sacrificial and
the inner pipe shall be designed as a stand alone pipe, capable of withstanding
installation and grouting forces and soil, traffic and groundwater loads subject to the
method.
34.7. Grout
34.7.1. As Slurry replacement:
The grout shall consist of Portland cement and water as determined by geotechnical
data and directed by the Engineer. It‘s normal strength shall be at least 20 N/mm2.
admixtures shall be used only if tests have shown to the satisfaction of the Engineer
that their use improves the properties of the grout, e.g. by increasing workability or
slightly expanding the grout.

34.7.2. As Annular Space Filling

A low strength, non shrink grout or foam concrete shall be used and placed at low
pressures. The density of the mix shall be in the range 900 – 1200 kg/m3 and the free
water / cement ratio not greater than 0.6.

The carrier pipe and joints shall be protected from the possible adverse physical or
chemical – effect of grout. Compressible material shall be wrapped around pipe.

The internal pipe shall be filled with water to avoid floatation forces, hydration
temperatures and to resist forces during grouting. A 5m high free vented standpipe
should be used.

Page 315 of 385

 A free venting standpipe of not less than 100mm dia. Shall be installed on the grout
injection feed to restrict grouting pressures to a maximum of 1 bar.

34.8. Thrust and Reception Pits

The dimensions of thrust and reception pits shall be limited to the minimum required
to construct the Works.

Thrust and reception pits shall be constructed within a sheet pile cofferdam or caisson
if the ground conditions dictate. The pit bottom shall be sealed with concrete. Entry
and exit sealing rings shall be provided.

The Operator shall determine the excavated dimensions of the drive and reception
shafts as required to suit the site conditions. Minimum shaft dimensions shall be used
at all locations where utilities, roads or trees exist adjacent to the required shaft
locations.

Excavations shall be supported according to type of pit as specified below:

Type „A” Thrust and reception pit in all types of soils except rock, with high groundwater able
and with the excavation secured by precast reinforced concrete caisson.

The caisson bottom shall be sealed with a concrete plug which shall be placed
underwater and designed to resist water uplift as well as forces from the jacking
equipment to be installed in the pit. All the joints between caisson rings shall be
sealed with the joint sealant and the caisson grouted from outside in order to make in
water tight. A reinforced concrete wall shall be provided in the thrust pit to resist the
jacking force. A properly braced concrete wall shall be provided in the thrust and
reception pits in order to install the entry and the exit rings.

Type „B‟ Same as Type ‗A‘ but the excavation is secured by inter – locked steel sheet piles.
The sheet piles shall be braced by suitable steel framing welded to the sheet piles. No
struts shall be used for bracing. The first set of bracing shall be at 0.5m from the
ground surface.

Type „C‟ Same as Type ‗A‘ but in dry conditions.

Type „D‟ Same as Type ‗B‘ but in dry conditions.

Type „E‟ Same as Type ‗A‘ except that the pit is partially in soil and partially in rock. The
portion in soil is secured by caisson as in Type ‗A‘ where as the portion in the rock
can be unsupported. Special precautions shall be taken to seal the interface between
the caisson and the rock so that it is water and soil tight.

Type „F‟ Same as Type ‗E‘ except that excavation in soil is secured by sheet piles instead of a
caisson.

Page 316 of 385

Type „G‟ Same as Type ‗E‘ but in dry conditions.

Type „H‟ Same as Type ‗F‘ but in dry conditions.

Type „I‟ The thrust and reception pits are in rock in an area of high groundwater table. The
excavation can be unsupported. A reinforced concrete wall shall be provided in the
thrust pit to resist the jacking force. Properly braced concrete walls shall be provided
in the thrust and reception pits in order to install the entry and exit rings.

Type „J‟ Same as Type ‗I‘ except in dry conditions.

The pits shall be completely dry prior to commencing and throughout Jacking works.
Dealing with groundwater where required shall be conducted in a slow manner.
Standby facilities shall be provided.

The thrust wall shall be perpendicular to the proposed line of thrust. The thrust wall
shall be sufficient to accept repeatedly the maximum permitted thrust force without
undue movement. It will not be permissible to thrust directly off any permanent part
of any shaft, chamber or pumping station unless this is specifically designed to
withstand the thrust reaction.

Thrust wall shall not be joined to the jacking rig base concrete.
The maximum permissible thrust force.

i) 50% of the sum of the maximum forces recorded at the rigs used to construct
the tail tunnel, or
ii) If the over break to the tail tunnel has been grouted up, 100% of the sum of
the maximum forces recorded at the rigs used to construct the tail tunnel.

Any tail tunnel which has been used as a reaction surface shall pass the specified
water tightness test at a time not less than 14 days after the load has been removed.

The design of thrust wall and any other associated Temporary Works shall be such as
to prevent damage to any part of the Permanent Works or any immediately adjacent
service or structure.

Any void between the soil face used to provide a reaction to the thrust force and the
thrust wall shall be filled completely with grout.

The Operator shall take any measures necessary to prevent damage or deterioration
of the soil reaction face during the construction of the Temporary and Permanent
Works from whatever possible cause, such ingress of water, softening, corrosive soil
or loss of fines from a granular soil.

Page 317 of 385

34.9. Pipe Installation within Sleeves
Pipe sections shall be placed and joined individually within the sleeve or mounted on
guide rails or trolleys in such a manner as to transmit the pulling / pushing forces
through the carriage and not through pipe.

34.10. Thrust System

The rig shall distribute the thrust to the pipes via a thrust ring and packing. The jacks
shall apply the thrust to the thrust ring by means of a symmetrical distribution. Inter –
jack stations shall be used where frictional resistance or other causes would otherwise
result in unacceptable thrust forces.

If used, spacer blocks shall be true and free form any distortions.

All thrust rings shall be true and free from any distortions and sufficiently stiff so as
to transfer the load from the jacks uniformly to the packing.

Other than at the shield, each group of jacks shall be interconnected to ensure that an
evenly distributed load is applied to the thrust ring. Each jack shall incorporate a load
cell.

At the rig and at intermediate stations automatic thrust recording equipment

monitoring load cells incorporated in each jack is to be provided together with a
pressure metering device. Other continuous records including cutter torque, rate of
progress, slurry progress, pitch, roll, slurry slow, earth face pressure, etc. shall be
provided.

Copies of these records clearly stating the units measured shall be submitted daily to
the Engineer.

The thrust force shall not exceed the maximum permissible thrust force as
determined by the Operator, based on calculations submitted by the Operator and
approved by Engineer and on consideration of the behavior of the pipe joint at the
maximum permitted angular deflection of 0.5 with the maximum permissible bearing
stress in conjunction with the stress / strain relationship obtained form the packing
compression tests.

34.11. Lubrication Holes

Where lubrication holes are required, these shall be threaded to enable plugs to be
screwed into the socket and withstand the external pressure. Non – return valves shall
be fitted where opening a hole would permit ground loss. Lubrication holes shall be
plugged watertight on completion, lining or coating shall be made good. The pressure
of the lubricant shall be maintained until it is replaced by grout.

Page 318 of 385

 34.12. Grouting
Upon completion of a section, if grouting is required or specified, the grout shall be
pumped through all lubrication holes. The pressure and quantity of grout injected
shall be calculated b the Operator and approved by the Engineer. Grouting shall
commence at the lower holes and shall be carried out systematically working from
one end of pipe jack to the other. Where injection holes can be opened without loss of
ground, grout shall be pumped through the lower injection holes until it emerges
from the upper holes.

Grouting progress shall be continuously monitored to ensure no over pressurization.

Upon completion of the pipeline, the Operator shall continue to monitor the
settlement point elevations regularly during the maintenance period and report to the
Engineer on a monthly basis. If the specified limits are exceeded then the Operator
should report immediately and submit a proposal to rectify the road surface and
prevent further settlement.

Section 35. INSPECTION

a). PRE – INSPECTION PLAN REVIEW

a). Review geotechnical and soil reports.

b). Ensure MDOT facilities and nearby utility information are shown on the plans
and profile and that the proposed alignment does not interfere with them.

c). Note the minimum cover above the top of the pipe and below the pavement
surface, or ground elevation (for longitudinal installation outside the influence of the
roadway) is ____ m.

d). Note proposed pipe characteristics:

Pipe material ___________________________

Pipe Diameter_________________________mm,
Pipe wall thickness _____________________mm,
Over – cut diameter ______________________mm,
Back ream dia. Increase ___________________mm,

e). Ensure that the appropriate penetration angle and curvature rate are identified.

f). Review contingency plan.

g). Review job site layout including: distance from access pits to roadbed, proposed
sheeting and bracing, materials storage and fabrication area, safety devices (barrels,
guardrail etc.) and dewatering pit locations.

Page 319 of 385

 h). Review steel pipe coating requirements.

i). Note unique or special items / circumstances: ______________

b) CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION

a). Verify traffic control is consistent with the permit requirements, and the permits are
available on-site.

b). Verify job site layout is consistent with the approved plans, especially the alignment
of the pipe and machine.

c). Verify continuous monitoring records indicate bearing and grade of the leading edge
of the pipe is consistent with the approved plans, dewatering effort is satisfactory,
soil volume removed is consistent with projection, and that workers understand the
contingency plan.

d) Verify pipe characteristics are consistent with permit requirements.

e) Verify steel pipe is new with smooth interior and exterior surfaces, is used within the
entire influence area of the roadbed, has clean and square ends, joints are watertight,
defective pipe is not used, and damaged pipe is removed.
Verify each end of the pipe is sealed with a cap, restoration is completed, and attach
Inspector‘s Daily Report (IDR).

Permit No. _____________________________________________

Inspector: ______________________________________________
Date: _________________________________________________

Section 36. Other Related works

36.1. Settlement/Heaving Monitoring

The trench less method of pipe laying shall be performed in a manner that will
minimize the movement of the ground in front of, above, and surrounding the
ramming/jacking operation: and will minimize subsidence of the surface above and in
the vicinity of the ramming. The ground shall be supported in a manner to prevent
loss of ground and keep the perimeter and face of the boring stable at all times,
including during shutdown periods.

Potential settlement shall be monitored at each edge of right of way, each shoulder
point, each edge of pavement, the each edge of each lane (or centerline for two lane
roads), and otherwise at 15m intervals along the pipe centerline.

Page 320 of 385

 A survey shall be performed one day prior to initiating this operation at each required
monitoring location. A similar survey shall then be performed at each location, on a
daily basis, until the permitted activity has received a final inspection. This survey
establishes the pre-existing and post construction conditions, and the amount of
settlement. All survey readings shall be recorded to the nearest one-hundredth (0.01)
of a meter. Whenever possible, trench less pipe installations shall not be installed
directly under a pavement crack. Digital photograph of a pavement condition shall
also be taken prior and after the pipe installation.

All operations shall stop immediately whenever monitored points indicate a vertical
change in elevation of 12mm or more, or any surface disruption is observed. The
Operator shall then immediately report the amount of settlement to the Engineer with
all records.

36.2. Ground Water Control

Dewatering shall be conducted wherever there is high ground water table level to
prevent flooding and facilitate the operation. The water table elevation shall be
maintained at least 600mm below the bottom of the casing at all times. When needed,
dewatering may be initiated prior to any excavation and will be paid as per the item
in bill of quantities.

Minor water seepage or pockets of saturated soil may be effectively controlled

through bailing or pumping. This control shall be accomplished without removing
any adjacent soil that could weaken or undermine any access pit, its supports, or
other nearby structure.

Larger volume of ground water shall be controlled with one or more well points or
with staged deep wells. Well points and staged deep well pumping system shall be
installed and operated without damaged to property or structures, and without
interference with the rights of the public, owners of private property, pedestrians,
vehicular traffic, or the work of other Operator‘s. Any pumping methods of de-
watering and control of ground water and seepage shall have properly designated
filters to ensure that the adjacent soil is not pumped along with the water. Well
diameter, well spacing and the pump‘s pumping rate, shall provide adequate draw
down of the water level. Wells shall be located to intercept ground water that
otherwise would enter the access pit excavation and interfere with the work. Upon
removal of a well, the hole shall be filled and grouted.

Existing storm sewer shall only be used to discharge water from the dewatering
operation in accordance with a permit obtained from the appropriate storm sewer
owner. Filters of sediment control devices shall be required to ensure that the existing
system is not adversely affected by construction debris or sediment.

If grouting is used to prevent ground water from entering the area of the access from
pit, the grouting shall be installed without damage to property or structures and
Page 321 of 385
 without interference with the rights of the public, owners of private property,
pedestrians, vehicular traffic, or the work of other Operator.

Whenever a significant amount of unexpected groundwater enters an access pit, and a

catastrophic pit failure is imminent, the pit shall be backfilled immediately, until the
groundwater level is at least 600 mm below the bottom of the casing.

36.3. Boring failure

Should anything prevent complete of this operation, the reminders of the pipe shall
be constructed by the methods approved by the Engineer. Abandonment of any
component of the installation shall be allowed as approved by the Engineer. If
obstruction is encountered which prevents completion of installation of pipes, pipe
remain shall be taken out of service and immediately filled with flowable fill.
36.4. Contamination
When an area of contaminated ground is encountered, all operations shall stop
immediately, and shall not proceed until approved by the Engineers. Any slurry shall
be tested for contamination and disposed off, in a manner, which meets local, State
and/ of federal requirements.
36.5. Bulk head
Casing ends shall be enclosed or bulk headed with a 1:.1.5.:3 proportion concrete, or
approved alternate to seal the ends to prevent water leakage or earth infiltration. The
concrete shall extend longitudinally into the pipe end opening to create a minimum
300 mm thick bulk head barrier, or as required by permit. Engineers may allow
rubber bulkheads in special situations.

36.6. Work site Restoration

a). Access pits and excavation shall be backfilled with suitable material, and in a method
approved by Engineer.
b). The disturbed grass surface area shall be top soiled, seeded, fertilized, mulched, and
anchored according to the current owners specifications. If a final site restoration is
not completed within 5 days after completion of the operation, the installation of
temporary soil erosion and sedimentation control measures shall be provided.
c). upon completion of the work, the Operator shall remove and properly dispose off all
access materials and equipments from the work site.
d). The permit, including the surety requirements, shall remain in effect for a minimum of
one year after completing the work to monitor for settlements of the pavement and
/or slope.
36.7. Payments
The payment for the works under Trench less method of pipe laying by Pipe
Ramming/Manual pipe Jacking method will be made after executing according to the
above specifications as per the relevant items in BOQ. All costs for works executed
under the above specifications that are apart from the items in bill of quantities, shall
be included in the item for installation of Casing Pipe by ramming / Manual pipe
jacking method, No extra claim in this regard is entertained.

Page 322 of 385

 36.8. Interface between contracts
The Operator shall under take the end connections at the interface points only after
the pipe line as passed the Hydraulic tests on completion. After completing the end
connections the Operator shall lay the bed and surround and backfill the trench in the
normal manner.

Section 37. Reinstatement of roads

The road restoration / reinstatement shall be carried out after completion and
necessary testing of all the Works and only after approval of the Engineer.

Operator shall make good of the road surface to the original grade, level and
specifications as per Bill of Quantities. Trenches shall be backfilled in layers as per
clause mentioned in this section, well watered and well compacted before road
restoration to avoid settlement of restored strip. In case any settlement of the road
restoration strip, the Operator has to rectify the surface by redoing the restoration
work at no extra cost to the owner as per Bill of Quantities. Road restoration shall be
done as per the requirements of the concerned local authorities, requirements
specified in this section of Technical specifications, applicable IRC guidelines and as
directed by the Engineer. The replacement of road structures shall be carried out as
soon as practicable and in conformity with IRC guidelines after backfilling has been
completed. Suitable excavated road pavement which complies with the requirements
of the Engineer may be used at the sub-base levels. Compaction shall be carried out
with approved mechanical compacting equipments.

The edges of the trench shall be cut to form a straight line consistent with fixed width
of trench. A vertical joint shall be formed between the new work and the existing
road surface and shall be painted with hot bitumen or rich cement slurry as the case
may be, as approved by the Engineer. The joint between the base course and wearing
course shall be stepped 75 mm.
The finished levels of the completed reinstatement shall conform with the adjoining
carriageway surface. Reinstatement of the wearing courses shall match as nearly as
practicable the colour or other characteristics of the existing surface.

37.1. WATER BOUND MACADAM SUB – BASE / BASE.

37.1.1. Scope
This work shall consist of clean, crushed aggregates mechanically interlocked by
rolling and bonding together with screening, binding material where necessary and
water laid on properly backfilled pipeline and manhole trenches and finished in
accordance with the requirements of these specifications and as directed by the
Engineer.
The scope involves Providing, laying , spreading and compacting stone aggregates of
specific sizes to Water Bound Macadam specification including spreading in uniform
thickness, hand packing, rolling with 3 wheeled steel/vibratory roller 8-10 tones in
stages to proper grade and camber, applying and brooming requisite type of
Page 323 of 385
 screening/binding materials to fill up the interstices of coarse aggregates ,watering
and compacting to the required density with all lead & lifts etc complete with the
following two layers of materials each compacted to 75 mm thick,

(i). Materials (Refer table 400 - 7, 8 & 9) Using Screening Crushable type such as
Moorum or Gravel Grading-II (Clause: 404 of MORT & H).
(ii).Material (Refer table 400 - 7, 8 & 9) Using Screening Crushable type such as
Moorum or Gravel Grading-III (Clause: 404 of MORT & H).

37.1.2. Materials
(a) Coarse aggregates - Coarse aggregates shall be either crushed or broken stone,
crushed slag, over burnt (Jhama) brick aggregates or any other naturally occurring
aggregates such as kankar and laterite of suitable quality. Materials other than
crushed or broken stone and crushed slag shall be used in sub-base courses only. If
crushed gravel / shingle is used, not less than 90 per cent by weight of the
gravel/shingle pieces retained on 4.75 mm sieve shall have at least two fractured
faces. The aggregates shall conform to the physical requirements set forth in Table
400-6. The type and size range of the aggregate shall be specified in the contract or
shall be as specified by the engineer. If the water absorption value of the coarse
aggregate is greater than 2 per cent, the soundness test shall be carried out on the
material delivered to site as per IS: 2386 (Part 5).

(b) Crushed or broken stone - The crushed or broken stone shall be hard, durable
and free from excess flat, elongated, soft and distinguished particles, dirt and other
deleterious material.
Table 400-6, Physical requirements of coarse aggregates for water bound
macadam for sub– base courses.

Test Test Method Requirements

1 * Los Angeles Abrasion IS:2386 40 percent (Maxi.)
value
Or IS:2386 (Part-4) or 30 percent (Maxi.)
*Aggregate impact value IS;5640**
2 Combined Flakiness and IS:2386 (Part - 1) 30 percent (Maxi.)
Elongation indices
(Total)***

* Aggregate may satisfy requirements of either of the two sets.

** Aggregates like brick metal, kankar, laterite etc. which get softened in presence of
water shall be tested for Impact value under wet condition in accordance with IS :
5640.
*** The requirement of flakiness index and elongation index shall be enforced
only in the case of crushed broken stone and crushed slag.

(c) Crushed slag - Crushed slag shall be made from air-cooled blast furnace slag. It
shall be of angular shape, reasonably uniform in quality and density and generally
Page 324 of 385
 free from thin, elongated and soft pieces, dirt or other deleterious materials. The
weight of crushed slag shall not be less than 11.2 KN per m3 and the percentage of
glossy material shall not be more than 20. It should also comply with the following
requirements:
(i) Chemical stability To comply with requirements of appendix of BS
: 1047
(ii) Sulphur content Maximum 2 per cent
(iii) Water absorption Maximum 10 per cent

(d) Over-burnt brick aggregates - Brick aggregates shall be made from over burnt
bricks or brick bats and be free from dust and other objectionable and deleterious
materials.

(e) Grading requirement of coarse aggregates - The coarse aggregates shall

conform to one of the Grading given in Table 400 – 7 as specified, provided;
however, the use of Grading No. 1 shall be restricted to sub-base courses only.
Table 400 – 7, Grading requirements of coarse aggregates
Gradation Size range I.S. Sieve designation Percent by weight
passing
1 90 mm to 45 mm 125 mm 100
90 mm 90-100
63 mm 25-60
45 mm 0-15
22.4 mm 0-5
2 63 to 45 mm 90 mm 100
63 mm 90-100
53 mm 25-75
45 mm 0-15
22.4 mm 0-5
3 53 to 22.4 mm 63 mm 100
53 mm 95-100
45 mm 65-90
22.4 mm 0-10
11.2 mm 0-5

Note: The compacted thickness for a layer with Grading 1 shall be 100 mm while
for layer with other grading i.e., 2 & 3, it shall be 75 mm.

(f) Screenings - Screenings to fill voids in the coarse aggregate shall generally
consist of the screen material as the coarse aggregate. However, where permitted,
predominantly non-plastic material such as murrum or gravel (other than rounded
river borne material) may be used for this purpose provided liquid limit and plasticity
index of such material are below 20 and 6 respectively and fraction passing 75
micron sieve does not exceed 10 per cent.

Page 325 of 385

 Screenings shall conform to the grading set forth in Table 400-8. The
consolidated details of quantity of screenings required for various grades of stone
aggregates are given in Table 400 – 9. The table also gives the quantities of
materials (loose) required for 10 m2 for sub-base base compacted thickness of
100/75 mm. The use of screenings shall be omitted in the case of soft aggregates
such as brick metal, kankar, laterites, etc. as they are likely to get crushed to a certain
extent under rollers.

Grading Size of IS Sieve Per cent by

classification Screenings designation weight passing
the IS sieve
A 13.2 mm 13.2 mm 100
11.2 mm 95-100
5.6 mm 15-35
180 mm 0-10
B 11.2 mm 11.2 mm 100
5.6 mm 90-100
180 mm 15-35
37.2. Table 400 – 8, Grading for screenings

Table 400 – 9, Approximate quantities of coarse aggregates and screenings

required for 100 / 75 mm compacted thickness of water bound macadam (wbm)
sub-base / base course for 10 m2 area
Classif Size Compact Screenings
ication Range thickness
Loose Crushable type such as
Stone screening
Qty. murram or gravel
Grading For WBM Grading Loose
classificat sub-base/ classification Qty.
ion and base course and size
size (loose Qty)
Gradin 90mm 100 mm Type 0.27 to 0.30 Not Uniform 0.30 to
g-1 to 1.21 to 1.43 A13.2 m3 0.2 m3
45mm m3 mm
Gradin 63mm 75 mm Type A 0.12 to 0.15 - do - 0.22 to
g -2 to 45 0.91 to .7m3 13.2 mm m3 0.24 m3
mm
Type B 0.20 to 0.22
- do - - do - - do - 11.2 mm m3 - do - - do -

Gradin 53mm - do - - do - 0.18 to 0.21 - do - - do -

g-3 to m3
22.4
mm

Page 326 of 385

 (g) Binding material - Binding material to be used for water bound macadam as a
filter material meant for preventing gravelling, shall comprise of a suitable material
approved by the engineer having a Plasticity Index (PI) value of less than 6 as
determined in accordance with IS : 2720 (Part 5).

The quantity of binding material where it is to be used will depend on the type of
screenings. Generally, the quantity required for 75 mm compacted thickness of water
bound macadam will be 0.06 – 0.09 m3 / 10m2 and 0.08 – 0.10 m3/ 10 m2 for 100
mm compacted thickness.

The above mentioned quantities should be taken as a guide only, for estimation of
quantities for construction etc.

Application of binding materials may not be necessary when the screenings used are
of Crushable type such as murrum or gravel.

37.3. Construction operations

(a) Preparation of base - The surface of the sub-grade /sub-base/base to the
specified lines and cross fall (camber) shall be made free of dust and other
extraneous material. Any ruts or soft yielding places shall be corrected in an
approved manner and rolled until firm surface is obtained if necessary by sprinkling
water. Any sub-base /base / surface irregularities, where predominant, shall be made
good by providing appropriate type of profile corrective course (levelling course) to
applicable clause of these specifications.

As far as possible, laying water bound macadam course over an existing thick
bituminous layer may be avoided since it will cause problems of internal
drainage of the pavement at the interface of two courses. It is desirable to
completely pick out the existing thin bituminous wearing course where water
bound macadam is proposed to be laid over it. However, where the intensity of rain
is low and the interface drainage facility is efficient, water bound macadam
can be laid over the existing thin bituminous surface by cutting 50 mm x 50 mm
furrows at an angle of 45 degrees to the centre line of the pavement at one meter
intervals in the existing road. The directions and depth of furrows shall be such that
they provide adequate bondage and also serve to drain water to the existing granular
base course beneath the existing thin bituminous surface.

(b) Inverted choke - If water bound macadam is to be laid directly over the sub-
grade, without any other intervening pavement course, a 25 mm course of screenings
(Grading B) or coarse sand shall be spread on the prepared sub-grade before
application of the aggregates is taken up. In case of a fine sand or silty or clayey
subgrade, it is advisable to lay 100 mm insulating layer of screening or coarse sand
on top of fine grained soil, the gradation of which will depend upon whether it is
intended to act as a drainage layer as well.
Page 327 of 385
As a preferred alternative to inverted choke, appropriate geo-synthetics performing
functions of separation and drainage may be used over the prepared subgrade as
directed by the engineer. Section 700 shall be applicable for use of geo-synthetics.

(c) Spreading coarse aggregates - The coarse aggregates shall be spread uniformly
and evenly upon the prepared sub-grade/sub-base/base to proper profile by using
templates placed across the road about 6 m apart, in such quantities that the thickness
of each compacted layer is not more than 100 mm for Grading 1 and 75 mm for
Grading 2 and 3, as specified in clause 37.1.2 ., Wherever possible, approved
mechanical devices such as aggregates spreader shall be used to spread the
aggregates uniformly so as to minimize the need for manual rectification afterwards.
Aggregates placed at spread in one or more layers by any approved means so as to
achieve the specified results.

The spreading shall be done from stockpiles along the side of the roadway or directly
from vehicles. No segregation of large or fine aggregates shall be allowed and the
coarse aggregate as spread shall be of uniform gradation with no pockets of fine
material.

The surface of the aggregates spread shall be carefully checked with templates and
all high or low spots remedied by removing or adding aggregates as may be required.
The surface shall be checked frequently with a straight edge while spreading and
rolling so as to ensure a finished surface as per approved drawings.

The coarse aggregates shall not normally be spread more than 3 days in advance of
the subsequent construction operations.

(d) Rolling - Immediately following the spreading of the coarse aggregate, rolling
shall be started with three wheeled power rollers of 80 to 100 KN capacity or tandem
or vibratory rollers of 80 to 100 KN static weight. The type of roller to be used shall
be approved by the engineer based on trial run. Except on super-elevated portions
where the rolling shall proceed from inner edge to the outer, rolling shall begin from
the edges gradually progressing towards the centre. First the edge/ edges shall be
compacted with roller running forward and backward. The roller shall then move
inward parallel to the centre line of the road, in successive passes uniformly lapping
preceding tracks by at least one half width.

Rolling shall be discontinued when the aggregates are partially compacted with
sufficient void space in them to permit application of screenings. However, where
screenings are not to be applied, as in the case of crushed aggregates like brick metal,
laterite and kankar, compaction shall be continued until the aggregates are
thoroughly keyed. During rolling, slight sprinkling of water may be done, if
necessary. Rolling shall not be done when the sub-grade is soft or yielding or when it
causes a wave-like motion in the sub-grade or sub-base course.

Page 328 of 385

The rolled surface shall be checked transversely and longitudinally, with templates
and any irregularities corrected by loosening the surface, adding or removing
necessary amount of aggregates and re-rolling until the entire surface conforms to
desired cross fall (camber) and grade. In no case shall the use of screenings be
permitted to make up depressions.
Material which gets crushed excessively during compaction or becomes segregated
shall be removed and replaced with suitable aggregates.

(e) Application of screenings - After the coarse aggregate has been rolled to as per
above specification, screenings to completely fill the interstices shall be applied
gradually over the surface. These shall not be damp or wet at the time of application.
Dry rolling shall be done while the screenings are being spread so that vibrations of
the roller cause them to settle into the voids of the coarse aggregates.

The screenings shall not be dumped in piles but be spread uniformly in successive
thin layers either by the spreading motions of hand shovels or by mechanical
spreaders, or directly from tipper with suitable grit spreading arrangement. Tipper
operating for spreading the screenings shall be so driven as not to disturb the coarse
aggregate.

The screenings shall be applied at a slow and uniform rate (in three or more
applications) so as to ensure filling of all voids. This shall be accompanied by dry
rolling with mechanical brooms, hand-brooms or both. In no case screenings shall be
applied fast and thick as to form cakes or ridges on the surface in such a manner as
would prevent filling of voids or prevent the direct bearing of the roller on the coarse
aggregate. These operations shall continue until no more screenings can be forced
into the voids of the coarse aggregate. The spreading, rolling, and brooming of
screenings shall be carried out in only such lengths of the road which could be
completed within one day‘s operation.

(f) Sprinkling of water and grouting - After the screenings have been applied, the
surface shall be copiously sprinkled with water, swept and rolled. Hand brooms shall
be used to sweep the wet screenings into voids and to distribute them evenly. The
sprinkling, sweeping and rolling operation shall be continued, with additional
screenings applied as necessary until the coarse aggregate has been thoroughly
keyed, well-bonded and firmly set in its full depth and a grout has been formed of
screenings. Care shall be taken to see that the base or sub-grade does not get
damaged due to the addition of excessive quantities of water during construction.

In case of lime treated soil sub-base, construction of water bound macadam on top of
it can cause excessive water to flow down to the lime treated sub-base before it has
picked up enough strength (is still ―green‖) and thus cause damage to the sub-base
layer. The laying of water bound macadam layer in such cases shall be done after the
sub-base attains adequate strength, as directed by the engineer.
(g) Application of binding material - After the application of screenings in
accordance with the above clause, the binding material where it is required to be

Page 329 of 385

 used shall be applied successively in two or more thin layers at a slow and uniform
rate. After each application, the surface shall be copiously sprinkled with water, the
resulting slurry swept in with hand brooms, or mechanical brooms to fill the voids
properly, and rolled during which water shall be applied to the wheels of the rollers if
necessary to wash down the binding material sticking to them. These operations
shall continue until the resulting slurry after filling of voids, forms a wave ahead of
the wheels of the moving roller.

(h) Setting and drying - After the final compaction of water bound macadam
course, the pavement shall be allowed to dry overnight. Next morning hungry spots
shall be filled with screenings or binding material as directed, lightly sprinkled with
water if necessary and rolled. No traffic shall be allowed on the road until the
macadam has set.
The engineer shall have the discretion to stop hauling traffic from using the
completed water bound macadam course, if in his opinion it would cause excessive
damage to the surface. The compacted water bound macadam course should be
allowed to completely dry and set before the next pavement course is laid over it.

37.3.1. Reconstruction of defective macadam

The finished surface of water bound macadam shall conform to the tolerance of
surface regularity as prescribed in the relevant IS standards. However, where the
surface irregularity of the course exceeds the tolerances or where the course is
otherwise defective due to sub-grade soil mixing with the aggregates, the course to
its full thickness shall be scarified over the affected area, reshaped with added
material or removed and replaced with fresh material as applicable and re-
compacted. In no case shall depressions be filled up with screenings or binding
material.

37.3.2. Arrangement for traffic

During the period of construction, the arrangement of traffic shall be done by the
Operator in accordance with the applicable clause of this section.

37.3.3. Measurements for payment

Water bound macadam shall be measured as finished work in position in cubic

metres as per Bill of Quantities item of work.

37.4. PRIMING OF BASE COURSE WITH BITUMINOUS PRIMERS

37.4.1. Scope
This specification relates to the operation of priming an absorbent base course,
preparatory to a subsequent bituminous treatment, through application of a low
viscosity bituminous material by spraying. The specification is intended to
indicate what is considered to be a good practice for priming and shall apply unless
modified by special provisions to take into account any unusual conditions.

Page 330 of 385

 The scope involves, Providing and applying primer coat with bitumen emulsion on
prepared surface of granular Base of low porosity such as WBM including clearing of
road surface and spraying primer at the rate of 0.75 kg/sqm using mechanical means.
As per MORTH specification clause No. 502 complete in all respects with all lead &
lifts etc complete.

37.4.2. Materials
The bituminous primer to be used should be such that it can penetrate into the base
course to perform its intended function.

37.4.3. Types of primer

Table 11.2.1 can be used as guidance for choice of primer on different types of
surfaces.

Type of Emulsion Cut-back Road tar

Surface
Low porosity Not MC-0 RT-1 or RT-2
suitable
Medium SS or MS MC-1 orSC-1 MC-2 or SC-2 RT-2 or RT-3
porosity
High porosity MS MC-3 or RC-1 RT-3 or RT-4

The primers shall conform to IS: 8887 – 1978 (for cationic emulsions), IS: 217-1961
(for cut-backs), and IS: 215-1981 (for road tars), as applicable.

37.4.4. Viscosity
For selecting the appropriate type of primer out of the materials indicated in Table 1,
the atmospheric temperature during application should be given consideration. Also,
within the range of viscosity specified, the primer for use may be selected keeping in
view the level of porosity of the surface to be treated.

37.4.5. Quantity of primer

The primer shall be applied at the rate of 0.75 kg/sqm.

37.5. Construction
a. Weather and seasonal limitations
Cut-back and road tar primers shall not be applied on wet surface or during dust
storm or when the weather is foggy or rainy. Bitumen emulsion can be applied on
wet surface. However, emulsions shall not be applied during dust storm or when it is
actually raining.
Atmospheric temperature during priming should be above 10 C.

b. Equipment
Page 331 of 385
All equipment required for the execution of work should be in good working
condition at site.

c. Preparation of base course surface

The base course surface to be primed shall be swept clean and free from dust. All
loose materials and other foreign matter on the surface shall be removed completely,
if necessary by using power blowers or sweepers.

Large irregularities, potholes, depressions, etc. shall be repaired prior to priming.

Minor depressions may be ignored until the surface is primed. After which these
might be patched with a suitable premixed material prior to the subsequent
bituminous treatment.

The underlying surface shall be dry prior to priming. Except that in the case of
bitumen emulsions, it may be desirable to dampen the surface slightly in order to
obtain better penetration of the primer.

Pre-wetting should be done by water spraying, using equipment capable of uniform

application of water over the entire surface. The spraying may be taken up 2 to 12
hours before priming, in such quantity that the surface during priming is damp but
not saturated with water. Traffic shall be kept off the prepared areas prior to priming.

d. Application of primer
After the base to be primed has been prepared as described above, the primer shall be
uniformly applied over the surface using mechanical sprayers. Rate of application of
primer shall correspond to the quantities given in clause 37.4.5
The spraying should preferably be carried out using sprayer mounted on distributor
truck or with hand sprayer using mechanical pump. The use of hand-held containers
such as watering cans, perforated buckets etc., is unacceptable and should not be
permitted under any circumstances. Quantity should be checked periodically using
Tray Coating Test or any other suitable means.

Temperature of application of primer should be high enough to permit the primer to

be sprayed effectively through the jets of the spray bar and to cover the base course
surface effectively.

e. Curing

The primed surface shall be allowed to cure fully. No traffic shall be allowed over
the primed surface during this period and in any case not before 24 hours if the
primer is a cut-back bitumen and 6 hours in the case of bitumen emulsion. Any pool
of excess cut-back primer, which has not been completely absorbed by any part of the
base course surface during the curing period, should be carefully swept over the
adjacent surface, and then a light sand blotter course applied. The amount applied
should be just sufficient to blot up the excess bitumen and prevent it being picked up
under traffic. If an excess of bitumen residue is found on the primed surface after

Page 332 of 385

 bitumen emulsion has broken, a very light sand dusting may be applied to soak up the
surplus material.

All loose sand should be swept from the base course surface prior to any
subsequent bituminous treatment.

37.6. Tack Coat

All specifications in the clause 37.4 shall apply to this item of work and the
specific scope of work involves Providing and applying tack coat with bitumen
emulsion using emulsion pressure distributor at the rate of 0.375 kg/sqm on the
prepared granular surface cleaned with mechanical broom such as WBM surface as
per MORTH specification clause No. 503 complete in all respects with all lead &
lifts etc complete for old surfaces at vertical and horizontal joints.

37.7. Specifications for single coat bituminous surface dressing (20mm thick
pre-mix bituminous surfacing).
37.7.1. Scope
This specification is intended to indicate what is considered to be good practice for
construction of single coat bituminous surface dressing and shall apply unless
modified by special provisions to take into account unusual conditions. The work
specified consists of a wearing surface composed of a single application of
bituminous material covered with one application of cover material of size as
specified below, applied on a previously prepared base or pavement.
The specific scope involves, Providing, laying and rolling of open-graded
premix surfacing of 20 mm thickness composed of 13.2 mm to 5.6 mm aggregates
either using penetration grade bitumen 80/100 or cut-back or emulsion to required
line, grade and level to serve as wearing course on a previously prepared base,
including mixing in suitable plant, laying and rolling with a smooth wheeled roller 8-
10 tonne capacity, finished to required level and grades. Mechanical method using
Penetration grade Bitumen and HMP of appropriate capacity, as per MORTH
specification No.511 complete in all respects. (Bitumen 1.46kg/sqmt. Metal = 0.027)
with 40-60 TPH hot mix with all lead & lift etc complete.

37.7.2. Materials
a. Bituminous materials - The bituminous materials shall be of grade 80/100 or cut-
back conforming to the requirements as specified and provided for in the proposal
and satisfy the related specification, issued by the Indian Standards Institution (vide
I.S.I Standards 73-1961,215-1961,217-1961 and 454-1961).

b. Cover materials
(i). General requirements - The cover material shall consist of crushed stone,
crushed slag crushed gravel (shingle) or other stones, as specified, and shall have
clean, strong, durable, and fairly cubical fragments free from disintegrated pieces,
salt, alkali, vegetable matter, dust and adherent coatings. The aggregate shall

Page 333 of 385

 preferably be hydrophobic in nature and of low porosity.

(ii). Physical requirements - The aggregate shall satisfy the requirements given in
Table 11.4.1.

Table 11.4.1

Sl. No. Property Value Method of test

Abrasion value, using Los Angeles

Machine or Max. 35% IS: 2386 (Part IV)
1
Aggregate impact value Max. 30% - do -
2 Flakiness index Max. 25% IS: 2386 (Part I)
3 Stripping value Max. 25% IS: 6241
4 Water absorption (except in case of slag) Max. 1% IS: 2386 (Part III)
Soundness: Loss with sodium sulphate – 5
5 Max. 12% IS: 2386 (Part V)
cycles (in case of slag only)
Unit
6 weight or bulk density (In case of slag only)Min. 1120 kg per m3 IS: 2386 (Part III)

Where all these conditions cannot be satisfied, it is left to the Engineer-in-charge to

allow reasonable tolerances.

Size - The size of chippings to be used shall depend on whether the treatment is for
the first coat or for the subsequent or renewal coat and shall be as per the size
specified below. For single application of the aggregate, it is desirable to keep the
grading of the various sizes as specified in Table 11.4.2.
Table 11.4.2

Sieve designation nominal size of

Specification
aggregate
I For surfacing water-bound macadam – 100 percent passing through 20 mm
first coat square mesh sieve and retained on 10
mm square mesh sieve
II For subsequent or renewal coats 10 mm 100 percent passing through 12.5 mm
square mesh sieve and retained on 6.3
mm square mesh sieve.
Note – It is essential to sieve the aggregates through proper size sieves to ensure the size stipulatedin
the specifications. The sieve sizes indicated above are as per IS: 460 – 1962.

37.7.3. Construction methods

a. Weather and seasonal limitations - Preferably, the surface dressing work shall be
carried on only when the atmospheric temperature in shade is 16°C or above. No
bituminous material shall normally be applied when the surface or the cover material
Page 334 of 385
is damp, when the weather is foggy or rainy or during dust storm, except, in case of
emulsions, the surface should be slightly damp.

b. Equipment - All equipment necessary for the proper construction of work shall be
on the site of the work in good condition.

c. Preparation of road surface - The underlying course on which surface dressing is

to be laid shall be prepared, shaped and conditioned to a uniform grade and section as
specified. Any depressions or pot-holes shall be properly made up and thoroughly
compacted sufficiently in advance. The defective parts should be clearly cut out and
the patches of new material put in, and not put on the existing surface.

Where the existing surface shows signs of "fatting-up", such position should be
rectified. It is important that the surface be dry and thoroughly cleaned immediately
before applying the binder. The surface should be swept clean free of caked earth and
other foreign matter cleaned first with hard brushes, then with softer brushes and
finally blowing off with sacks or gunny bags to remove the fine dust. The base shall
be applied with Tack coat as per clause 37.6 uniformly preferably by a mechanical
sprayer.

d. Application of bituminous material - After the surface to be treated has been

prepared, as specified above, bituminous material shall be sprayed uniformly over the
dry surface preferably using mechanical sprayers. The binder shall be applied at a
temperature appropriate to the type of binder and equipment used. The premix open
graded surfacing consisting of aggregates 13.2mm to 5.60mm shall be applied to an
uniform thickness as per applicable IS standards to get the final compacted thickness
of 20mm.

e. Rolling cover materials - Immediately after the application of the cover materials
as described, the entire surface shall be rolled with a 8 to 10 tonne smooth wheeled
road roller. The rolling shall begin at the edge and proceed lengthwise, over the-area
to be rolled lapping not less than one third of the roller tread and proceed towards the
centre. When the centre is reached, the rolling shall then start at the opposite side
and again proceed towards the centre. In the super-elevated portions, the rolling
should proceed from the inner to the outer edge. While the rolling is in progress,
additional aggregate shall be spread by hand in whatever quantities may be required
to fill irregularities and to prevent picking up of the aggregate by the roller. Rolling
shall be continued until the particles are firmly embedded in the bituminous materials
and present a uniform closed surface. Excessive rolling which results in the crushing
of the aggregate particles shall be avoided.

f. Finishing - The finished surface shall be uniform and conform to the lines, grades
and typical cross sections shown in the specifications.

g. Opening to traffic - When straight run bitumen or road tar is employed as the

Page 335 of 385

 binder, the finished surface shall be thrown open to traffic on the following day but if
in special circumstances, the road is required to be opened to traffic immediately
after rolling, speed of the traffic shall be limited to 16 km per hour till the following
day.
Where cutback bitumen and emulsion is employed, the finished surface shall be kept
closed to the traffic until it has sufficiently cured to hold the cover aggregates in
place.
Controlling of traffic shall be done by some suitable device, such as barricading and
posting of watchmen, etc.

37.7.4. SEAL COAT.

The scope of work involves Providing and laying seal coat sealing the voids in
bituminous surface laid to the specified levels, grade and cross fall using Type A seal
coat as per MORTH specification clause No. 513 complete in all respects with all
lead & lift etc complete.(Bitumen = 0.98 kg/sqmt. Metal =0.009).

37.8. SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION OF CONCRETE ROADS

37.8.1. Scope

This is intended to indicate what is considered to be good practice for the

construction of cement concrete road pavements, including preparation of the
subgrade and sub -base underneath these pavements. This does not however cover the
requirements of fully mechanized constructions.

The scope involves providing specified thickness of [Link] proportion cement concrete
as base course and specified thickness of 1:1.5:3 proportion cement concrete as
wearing course as per approved construction drawings and specifications.

37.8.2. Materials
a. Ordinary Portland Cement - This should comply with the requirements of IS -
8112 with latest revisions (Specification for Ordinary Portland Cement)

b. Aggregates

General - Aggregates should comply with IS - 383 -1970 "Specification for Coarse
and Fine Aggregates from Natural Sources for Concrete (Second Revision)" with
special reference to the additional requirements stipulated for use in road works
excepting in the case of Los Angeles Abrasion Test limit.

The Los Angeles Abrasion Test limits shall be not more than 35 per cent and 50 per
cent for concrete wearing course and sub -base course respectively. ln addition, the
limits of deleterious material shall not exceed the requirements set out in IS - 515 -
1959 ―Specification for Natural and Manufactured Aggregates for Use in Mass
Concrete." Weathered rock should not be used. In order to make good concrete, it is

Page 336 of 385

 important to avoid crushed aggregate of poor shape. Very angular, flaky, elongated or
splintery aggregates give a harsh mix of low workability. Maximum size of aggregate
should not exceed l/4th of the pavement slab thickness. In case of pavements having
reinforcement, maximum size of aggregate should also not exceed l/4th of minimum
clear spacing between reinforcing bars.

c. Coarse aggregates

Continuous grading - Continuously graded coarse aggregate should be furnished in

at least two separate sizes with separation at 20 mm I.S. sieve when combined
material graded from 40 to 4.75 mm is specified, and at 25 mm I.S. sieve when
combined material graded from 50 to 4.75 mm is specified.

d. Fine aggregate - Fine aggregate shall preferably be natural sand. Crushed stone
sand may also be used satisfactorily in concrete. The fine aggregate shall conform to
IS: 383 -1970, the permissible percentage passing limits on 300 and 150 -micron
sieves shall be 15 -55 per cent and 0 -20 per cent respectively instead of 15 -50
percent and 0 -15 per cent as stipulated in IS Specification. Crushed sand is usually
more angular in shape than naturally occurring sand, and for this reason may tend to
make the mix a little harsher. In some cases, it may prove advantageous to use a
mixture of naturally occurring sand and crushed stone sand if the former is not
obtained in adequate supply or where its grading is poor. Bulking due to presence of
moisture in the fine aggregate should be accounted for when volumetric batching is
employed.

e. Water - Water used in mixing or curing of concrete shall be clean and free from
injurious amounts of oil, salt, acid, vegetable matter or other substances harmful to
the finished concrete. It shall meet the requirements stipulated in clauses of IS: 456 -
2000 "Code of Practice for Plain and Reinforced Concrete". Potable waters are
generally
considered satisfactory for mixing or curing.

f. Dowel and tie bars - Dowel and tie bars shall be plain round steel bars conforming
to the requirements of IS: 432 -1966.

g. Premoulded joint filler - Premoulded joint filler shall be of the thickness shown
on the drawings within a tolerance of 1.5 mm. It shall be 25 mm less in depth than
the thickness of the slab, within a tolerance of 3 mm and of the full width between
road forms. Holes to accommodate dowel bars shall be accurately bored or punched
out. The joint filler shall comply with the requirements of IS: 1838 -1961
"Specification for Preformed Fillers for Expansion Joint in Concrete, Non -extruding
and Resilient Type (Bitumen -impregnated Fiber)."

37.8.3. Water content and workability

The water content per batch of concrete should be maintained constantly except for
suitable allowances to be made for free moisture and absorption by aggregates
Page 337 of 385
 determined from time to time during construction. Adjustments for workability shall
be made by variations in the ratio of the coarse to fine aggregate or improving upon
their grading without change in cement content or water -cement ratio. The slump of
the concrete mix for pavements compacted by vibration should not be more than 25
mm, preferably between 0 and 12 mm, and that by manual compaction not more than
50 mm. No price adjustment would be permissible for variations in the gradations of
the aggregates or in the ratio of coarse to fine aggregates necessitated from
adjustment at site.

37.8.4. Tools, equipment and appliances

37.8.5. General
All tools, equipment and appliances necessary for proper preparation of sub-grade,
laying of sub -base and batching, mixing, placing, finishing and curing of concrete
shall be at the project site in good working condition and shall have been inspected
by the engineer before the paving operations are permitted to start. Throughout the
construction of the project, the construction agency shall maintain all necessary tools,
equipment and appliances in first class working condition to ensure proper execution
of the work. Arrangements shall also be made for requisite number of stand -by units
in the event of break -downs during construction.

37.8.6. List of tools, equipment and appliances

A list of tools, equipment and appliances required for the different phases of concrete
road construction is given below.
This list pertains to semi -mechanised type of construction only, as practised most in
this country.

(a) Subgrade and sub -base compaction -

(i) Compaction equipment (three wheeled or tandem roller, pneumatic roller,
vibratory roller
or sheep -foot roller)
(ii) Watering devices (water lorries, bhisties/water carriers or watering cans),

(b) Preparation of sub -bass for concreting and formwork

(i) Scratch templates or strike boards
(ii) Bulk -heads
(iii) Pick axes, shovels and spades
(iv) Formwork and iron stakes
(c) Concrete manufacture
(i) Shovels and spades
(ii) Sieving screens
(iii) Weigh batcher
(iv) Aggregate measuring boxes (only where volume batching of aggregates is
permitted as
a special case)
Page 338 of 385
 (v) Water pump
(vi) Water measures
(vii) Concrete mixer
(d) Transportation, laying and compaction of concrete
(i) Wheel barrows/iron pans
(ii) Wooden bridges
(iii) Spades
(iv) Concrete vibrators (both internal and screed board types)
(v) Wooden hand tampers
(e) Finishing operations - surface and joints
(i) Wooden bridges
(ii) Floats (longitudinal and long -handled wooden floats)
(iii) Templates
(iv) Three -meter long straight edges including one master straight edge
(v) Graduated wedge gauges
(vi) Mild steel sections and blocks for making joint grooves
(vii) Edging tools including double -edging tools
(viii) Canvas belts
(ix) Long handled brooms
(x) Diamond cutter (when making saw -cut joints)
(xi) Grinder (for grinding local high spots)
(f) Curing
(i) Hessian cloth burlap or polyethylene sheeting
(ii) Watering devices as in a (ii) (for ponding operation)
(g) Cleaning and sealing of joints
(i) Iron raker
(ii) Coir brush
(iii) Cycle pump/pneumatic air blower
(iv) Kerosene stove
(v) Thermometer
(vi) Transferring pot
(vii) Painter's brush
(viii) Pouring kettle
(ix) Scraper

37.9. Sub –base

Plain cement concrete of [Link] proportion for specified thickness as in construction
drawing shall be laid in accordance with the respective specification in Bill of
Quantities and the surface finished to the required lines, levels and cross -section.
37.10. Forms
Steel forms - All side forms shall be of mild steel unless use of wooden sections is
specially permitted. The steel forms shall be mild steel channel sections of depth
equal to the thickness of the pavement. The sections shall have a length of at least 3
m except on curves of less than 45 m radius, where shorter sections may be used.
When set to grade and staked in place, the maximum deviation of the top surface of

Page 339 of 385

 any section from a straight line shall not exceed 3 mm in the vertical plane and 5 mm
in the horizontal plane. The method of connection between sections shall be such
that the joint formed shall be free from difference in level, play or movement in any
direction. The use of bent, twisted or worn -out forms will not be permitted. At least
three stake pockets for bracing pins or stakes shall be provided for each 3 m of form
and the bracing and support must be ample to prevent springing of the forms under
the pressure of concrete or the weight or thrust of machinery operating on the forms.

The supply of forms shall be sufficient to permit their remaining in place for 12 hours
after the concrete has been placed, or longer if necessary in the opinion of the
engineer.

Wooden forms - Wooden forms may be used only when specifically permitted in
the drawing with the exception that their use is herein approved for all curves having
radii of less than 45 m. Wooden forms shall be dressed on one side. They shall
have minimum base width of 100 mm for slab thickness up to 200 mm and a
minimum base width of 150 mm for slabs over 200 mm thick. Their depth shall be
equal to the thickness of the pavement. These forms when used on straight shall have
a minimum length of 3 m. Forms shall be held by stakes set at intervals not
exceeding 2 m. Two stakes, one on each side, shall be placed at each joint. The
forms shall be firmly nailed or secured to the side stakes, and securely braced at
joints, where necessary, so that no movement will result from the pressure of the
concrete or the impact of the tamper and during finishing work. Wooden forms shall
be capped along the inside upper edge with 50 -mm angle iron well recessed and kept
flush with the face of the wooden forms.

Setting of forms - The forms shall be jointed neatly and shall be set with exactness
to the required grade and alignment. Both before and after the forms are placed and
set the sub grade or sub -base under the forms shall be thoroughly tamped in an
approved manner. Sufficient rigidity shall be obtained to support the forms in such a
position that during the entire operation of compacting and finishing of concrete they
shall not at any time deviate more than 3 mm from a straight edge 3 m in length.
Forms, which show a variation from the required rigidity or alignment and levels
shown in the drawing, shall be reset or removed, as directed. The length and number
of stakes shall be such as to maintain the forms at the correct line and grad -e. All
forms shall be cleaned and oiled each time before they are used. Forms shall be set
for about 200m ahead of the actual placing of concrete.

37.11. Joints
General - The location and type of joints shall be as shown in the drawing. The edge
of the slab at all joints shall be rounded off with an edging tool having a radius of 6 
1mm. The concrete along the face of all joints and around all tie bars and dowels
shall be compacted with an internal vibrator inserted in the concrete and worked
along the joint and around all tie bars and dowels to ensure a concrete free from
honeycombing.

Page 340 of 385

 Types of joints - There are three general types of joints. These are –

(i) Expansion joint - Such joint provides the space into which pavement can expand thus relieving
compressive stresses due to expansion and inhibiting any tendency towards buckling
of concrete slabs.

(ii) Contraction joint - Such joint relieves tensile stresses in the concrete and prevents formation of
irregular cracks due to restraint in free contraction of concrete. Contraction joints also
relieve stresses due to warping.

(iii) Warping joint - Such joint relieves stresses due to warping. These are commonly used for
longitudinal joints dividing the pavement into lanes.

In addition, construction joints are provided whenever construction operations

require them. These are full depth joints and may belong to any of the above types.
All joints shall be carefully installed in accordance with the location and details given
on the plans. The details of different types of joints are shown in Appendix B.

37.11.1. Transverse joints

General - Transverse joints can be expansion, contraction or construction joints and
shall be placed as indicated on the drawing. They shall make a right angle with the
centre line of the pavement and surface of the sub -base/subgrade. Contraction and
expansion joints shall be continuous from edge to edge of the pavement through all
lanes constructed at the same or different times.

a. Transverse expansion joints - These shall extend over the entire width of the
pavement. They shall be of the dimensions and spacing as shown on the construction
drawing.

Dowel bars (see Supplementary Note N. 4) as per dimensions, location and spacing
shown on the drawing are required at expansion joints to transfer wheel loads to the
adjacent slab. For slabs of thickness less than 150 mm no dowel bars may be
provided (IS: 6509 -1972). The pre-moulded expansion joint filler, a compressible
material used to fill the gap between adjacent slabs at expansion joint shall conform
to IS: 1838 -1961.

The height of the filler board shall be such that its top is 25 mm below the surface of
the pavement. The dowel bars shall be held accurately in position during the
placement, compaction and finishing of concrete at and near the expansion joint.
This and the protection of the joint groove during construction may be achieved by
means of sufficiently strong bulkheads (as per IRC: 43 -1972) with holes drilled
along the centre line to accommodate the dowel bars and a mild steel section (as per
IRC - 43 -1972) respectively. The latter shall be oiled or greased before placing in
position to avoid bonding with concrete. The top and bottom edges of the bulkheads
and mild steel section shall be shaped to correspond to the camber of the pavement at
the joint. If considered convenient, two -piece split bulkheads may also be used.
Page 341 of 385
 When dowel bars are provided, bulkheads shall be used in pairs, one at the joint
location, and the other some distance away to hold the projecting ends of the dowel
bars to maintain their alignment. For cases where dowel bars are not provided, one
single bulkhead without holes will be adequate.

The bulkheads shall be securely staked in place at right angles to the centre line and
surface of the pavement with sufficient stakes to hold them in the specified position.

After the concrete has sufficiently hardened the mild steel metal section shall be
removed carefully without disturbing the edges. The edges shall then be rounded
with an edging tool. For facilitating removal of the mild steel section as well as
edging operation, the top of the section may be flared on both sides with the required
curvature of a rounded edge.

Under no circumstances shall any concrete be left above the expansion 'joint filler or
across the joint at any point. Any concrete spanning the ends of the joint next to the
forms shall be carefully cut away after the forms are removed.

b. Transverse contraction joints - These shall be placed as shown on the drawing

and shall be of the weakened plane or "dummy" groove type. They shall be
constructed by forming in the surface of the slab a slot not less than 6 mm wide and
having a depth equal to one -third to one -fourth the depth of the pavement at the
thinnest part of its section. This slot may be formed in a manner approved by the
engineer such as by pushing into the concrete a flat bar or the web of a "T" bar using
a suitable vibratory device, removing the bar, and keeping the slot open. It shall be
ensured that no spalling of concrete occurs while removing the bar. The edges of the
joint shall be rounded with an edging tool before the concrete hardens.

c. Transverse construction joints - These shall be placed whenever placing of

concrete is suspended for more than 30 minutes. Excepting in the case of emergency,
construction shall always be suspended at the regular site of expansion or contraction
joints. If the construction joint is located at the site of an expansion joint, regular
expansion joint shall be provided; if at the site of a contraction joint or otherwise, the
construction joint shall be of butt type with dowels.

At all construction joints, bulkhead shall be used to retain the concrete and care shall
be taken in striking off and finishing the surface to the top face of the bulkhead.
When work is resumed, the surface of concrete laid subsequently, shall conform
to the grade and cross -section of previously laid pavement, and a straight edge 3m in
length shall be used parallel to the centre line, to check any deviation in the surface of
the two sections. Any deviation from the general surface in excess of 3 mm shall be
corrected.
37.11.2. Longitudinal joints
These shall be of the plain butt type and shall be formed by placing the concrete
against the face of the slab concreted earlier. The face of the slab concreted earlier,
shall be painted with bitumen before placing of fresh concrete.
Page 342 of 385
 Tie bars shall be used at longitudinal joints and they shall be of the dimensions and at
spacing shown in the construction drawing. Tie bars shall be supported so as not to
be displaced during construction operations. Tie bars shall be bonded in the slabs
across longitudinal joints, and whilst casting the first slabs, they may be bent so that
one end of them lies along the forms. After removal of the forms, bars shall be
straightened so that they extend into the concrete placed on the other side of the joint.

37.12. Construction
a. Storage and handling of cement
Cement shall not be stored for a long time and should be used normally within six
months of its date of receipt. Even during this period of storage it is essential that
cement shall be protected from moisture by storing it in suitable sheds. Storage shed
with a concrete floor laid on a well -drained foundation may be satisfactory. Cement
in bags shall be stored on boards raised above the floor level for the purpose of
ventilation, and the bags shall not touch the walls of the shed. Different
consignments should be separately stacked and used in order in which they have been
received. When bulk supply cement is used, special storage facilities such as covered
hopper bins will be required. Supply of cement should be co-coordinated with its
consumption so that it is not stored right through the rainy season, when normally
concreting is discontinued. Cement having lumps which have been caused due to
improper storage or by pressure due to over -loading of bags shall not be considered
for use unless these lumps can be easily powdered with pressure between fingers.
Before such cement is used, representative sample containing also the lumps in fair
proportion shall be taken and tested as per IS - 269 -1976, 8112 -1976, 1489 -1976,
455 -1967 or 8041E -1976 as the case may be, to fulfill the minimum requirements.

b. Storage and handling of aggregates

The location and preparation of sites, minimum size of stack and the methods
adopted for dumping and stacking to prevent segregation of coarse and fine material
shall be subject to the approval of the engineer. Aggregates from different sources
and/or of different grading shall not be stacked together. Each separate size of coarse
aggregate shall be stacked separately. The storing of aggregates upon the
carriageway or shoulders shall not be permitted.

If aggregates are stored in conical stacks, segregation will be increased by the rolling
of the coarser particles down the sides of the stacks. To avoid this, stacks should be
built up in approximately horizontal layers. Dry fine aggregate segregates and gets
blown away easily it may be helpful to moisten it. To assist in controlling the
water/cement ratio, large fluctuations in the moisture content of aggregates may be
reduced by storing the bulk of the material well in advance of use. For this purpose,
all washed aggregates shall be stacked for draining at least 12 hours before being
batched. It is also a good practice to reserve the bottom 150 -300 mm or so of the
stacks as a drainage layer. Where this cannot be done, the aggregates should not be
placed on the ground. In such case, somewhat raised planks, metal sheets or concrete
Page 343 of 385
base should be provided and laid to slopes.

The aggregates shall be handled from the stacks and fed into the mixer in such a
manner as to secure the stipulated grading of the material. Aggregates that have
become mixed with earth or other foreign material shall not be used. They shall be
washed clean before use.

c. Batching of materials

All batching of materials shall be by weight or volume as approved by the Engineer.

the proportion of ingredients shall be as specified in the item of work in Bill of
Quantities, The Engineer may permit the use of fractional bags of cement provided
they are accurately weighed and are handled in a manner meeting with his approval.
Water may be measured by volume. It should, however, be borne in mind that weigh
batching is definitely much more desirable than volume batching. If batching by
volume is permitted, as a special case, separate measuring boxes shall be provided for
the different aggregates. The boxes shall be of strong construction provided with
handles for convenient lifting and loading into the mixer. They shall be of such size
that it should be possible to measure out the requisite quantity of aggregate per batch
in whole box or by multiples thereof and capable of being lifted by two men. Each
box shall be provided with a straight edge of required length for striking off after
filling. If so directed by the engineer, improved facilities such as tipping boxes of
accurate capacity working on run -out rails arranged for direct delivery into the
hopper of the mixer shall be provided by the construction agency. In volume
batching, suitable allowance shall be made for the hulking of fine aggregate due to
the presence of water. For this purpose the bulking shall be determined as per
relevant Indian Standard Specification.

d. Mixing

General - The mixing of concrete shall be done in a batch mixer of approved type,
which will ensure a uniform distribution of materials throughout the mass, so that the
mix is uniform in colour and homogeneous. All concrete shall be mixed in
quantities for immediate use.
The mixer shall be equipped with approved water -measuring device capable of
accurate measurement of water required per batch. The mixer shall preferably be
equipped with a mechanically operated pump for filling the mixer tank.
The mixer, if so specified, shall be equipped with an approved timing device which
will automatically lock the discharge lever during the full time of mixing and release
it at the end of the mixing period; the device shall also be equipped with a ball,
adjusted to ring each time the lock is released. If the timing device gets broken, the
mixer will be permitted to be used while the same is being repaired, provided an
approved time -piece equipped with minute and second bands is provided. Each
batch shall be mixed for at least one and a half minutes. Spilling of the materials at
either end of the mixer shall be corrected by reducing the size of the batch and in no
case shall the volume of the mixed material per batch exceed the manufacturers

Page 344 of 385

 guaranteed capacity of the mixer. The type, size and number of mixers shall be so
chosen as to provide the required output without overloading. The mixing speed of
the drum shall not be less than 15 revolutions per minute nor the peripheral speed of
the drum greater than 60 m per minute. The batch of cement, fine aggregate and
coarse aggregate shall be fed into the mixer simultaneously with the water being
introduced either at the same time or before the dry materials. The entire contents of
the drum shall be discharged before any materials are placed therein for the
succeeding batch.

The skip shall be so maintained and operated that each batch will be completely
discharged into the mixing drum at the loading of the mixer. The mixer shall be
cleaned at suitable intervals while in use.

Pick -up and throw -over blades in the drum of the miner which are worn down 20
mm or more in depth shall be replaced with new blades.

(i). Time of mixing - The mixing of each batch will continue not less than one and half minute after
all the materials are discharged into the mixer.

(ii). Re-tempering - The re-tempering of concrete i.e. remixing with or without additional cement,
aggregate or water shall not be permitted.

37.13. Control of workability and strength

a. Workability of concrete - The workability of concrete shall be checked by
performing "slump test" or "compacting factor test" in accordance with IS ; 1199 -
1959 ―Method of Sampling and Analysis of Concrete." The frequency of testing
shall be one test per 10 m3 of concrete and the permissible tolerances from the
specified value for workability shall be -

Slump ± 12 mm
Compacting factor ± 0.03

Where variations beyond the permitted tolerances are observed, necessary adjustment
shall be made keeping the water cement ratio same.
b. Strength of concrete - The strength of concrete shall be determined either by
compressive or flexural strength tests (preferably the latter, since concrete pavements
are designed on the basis of flexural strength of concrete) depending on the facilities
available. For this purpose, during the progress of the work, cube/beam samples
shall be cast for testing at 7 and 28 days. Sampling and testing shall be done in
accordance with IS - 1199 -1959 ―Method of Sampling and Analysis of Concrete"
and IS - 516 -1959 "Method of Test for Strength of Concrete" respectively. The
minimum frequency of samples shall be 3 cube/beam samples for each age of 7 and
28 days for every 30 m3 of concrete.

On a paving job, the strength of concrete should be continuously monitored to ensure

that the desired strength is achieved. In certain -cases, because of change in the
Page 345 of 385
 source of cement or control or climatic factors, the strength may show some
variations, which would require re -designing of the mix.

37.14. Transporting and placing of concrete -

The concrete shall be mixed in quantities required for immediate use and shall be
deposited on the sub -base to the required depth and width of the pavement section,
in successive batches and in continuous operation without the use of intermediate
forms or bulk -heads between joints. Care shall be taken to see that no segregation of
materials results whilst the concrete is being transported from the mixer to the place
where it is deposited. The usual method of transport of concrete in India is in pans as
head loads or in small wheel barrows. The spreading shall be as uniform as possible
to avoid re-handling of the concrete. Where, however, a certain amount of re -
distribution is necessary, it shall be done with shovels and not with rakes. While
being placed, the concrete shall be tamped with suitable tools for slab thicknesses of
12.5 cm and less so that formation of voids or honeycomb pockets is prevented. The
concrete shall be particularly well placed and tapped against the forms and along all
joints, For higher thicknesses an internal vibrator shall be employed in lieu of
rodding of the concrete. To effect adequate compaction, the concrete shall be placed
with appropriate surcharge over the final slab thickness. The amount of surcharge
will depend on the mode of placement of concrete and shall be determined by trial.
In general, the required surcharge is about 20 per cent of the required slab thickness.
Any portion of the batch of concrete that becomes segregated while depositing it on
sub-grade shall be thoroughly mixed with the main body of the batch during the
process of spreading. In case of unavoidable interruption, a full depth transverse
joint shall be made at the point of stoppage of work provided the section on which
the work has been suspended is about 2 to 3 hours long. In placing of concrete for
two course construction, necessitated by either positioning of the reinforcement, a
richer mix for the wearing surface, or when thickness of the concrete is beyond 20
cm, the bottom layer of concrete shall be struck off to the required levels by a
vibrating screed working on the side forms with notches corresponding to the depth
of the top course of concrete.
The vibrating screed should have a vibrating unit mounted on it similar to that of the
screed used for compaction of the final surface of concrete. The time lag between
laying of the two courses shall not exceed the initial setting time of cement.

37.15. Placement of steel

a. Reinforcement - Reinforcing steel shall be free from dirt, scale or other foreign
matter and rust of such degree or development as to impair bond of the steel with the
concrete. The width of fabric sheets or bar mats shall be such that when properly
placed into the work the extreme longitudinal bars or wires of the sheets or mats will
be located not less than 50 mm and not more than 100 mm from the edges of the slab.
Except for dummy joints, the length of fabric sheets or bar mats shall be such that
when properly placed into the work, the reinforcement will be clear of transverse
joints by not less than 50 mm and not more than 100 mm as measured from the centre
of the Joint to the ends of longitudinal bars or wires of the sheet or mat.
Page 346 of 385
 While overlapping the sheets or mats in either direction, the overlap shall be at least
equal to the spacing between the bars or wires in the respective direction or 40 times
the diameter of the bar or wire, whichever is more.

Whilst using reinforcement in one layer, the concrete shall be placed in two stages.
The initial layer shall be uniformly struck off to a depth corresponding to the
reinforcement shown in the drawings and lightly compacted by a screed to obtain
uniform levels. The reinforcing fabric sheet or bar mat shall then be placed on the
compacted layer of concrete and remaining depth shall be filled in with concrete
thereafter.

In doing this operation, the initial layer of concrete shall be struck off to the entire
width of the slabs and of sufficient length to permit sheet or mat of reinforcement to
be laid full length without further manipulations of the reinforcement. Displacement
of the reinforcement during concreting operations shall be prevented.

b. Load transfer devices - dowels - Transverse expansion joints shall be equipped

with dowels of the dimension and at the spacing and location indicated on the
drawing. They shall be firmly supported in place, accurately aligned parallel to the
sub-grade/sub -base, parallel to each other and parallel to the centre line of the
pavement, by means of appropriate dowel supports. The dowel supports shall ensure
that the dowels are not displaced during construction. The permissible tolerances in
dowel bar alignment in both vertical and horizontal directions shall be 1 mm in
100 mm for dowels of 20 mm and smaller diameters and 0.5 mm in 100 mm for.
dowels of diameter greater than 20 mm. One -half of each dowel shall be painted
with a thin film of bitumen and equipped with a tight fitting metal sleeve of the
dimensions shown on the drawing to provide space for the dowel when pavement
expands and the join closes. This sleeve shall be partly filled with cotton waste to
prevent it being pushed too far on the dowel during construction.

These sleeves are not required on dowels, if used, in dummy contraction or

construction joints.

c. Tie bars - Tie bars provided in longitudinal joints of plain butt type to prevent
opening of such joints shall be bonded to the adjacent slabs on both sides of the
longitudinal joint. They are installed by providing appropriate (drilled) holes in the
side forms depending on the size and spacing of bars. They are bent aside
temporarily to avoid obstruction to construction traffic and straightened later at the
time of laying of slab in the adjacent lane.

37.16. Compaction and finishing

37.16.1. Compaction - The pavement shall be compacted either by means of a power-driven
pavers-cum -finisher or by a vibrating screed along with internal vibrators where the
slab thickness is more than 12.5 cm. For lesser thicknesses vibrating screed may be

Page 347 of 385

 supplemented with manual rodding. For areas where the width of the slab is very
small as at the corner of street junctions, etc. compaction with wooden hand tampers
may be adopted subject to the approval of the engineer. In no case, however, hand
compaction shall be permitted for slab thicknesses beyond 10 cm. All compaction
shall be done in accordance with the following requirements –

(i) Where hand tamping is permitted as a special case –

(i) Concrete with surcharge, as soon as placed, shall be struck off uniformly and
screeded, to such level above the base that when compacted and finished, the
pavement shall conform to the grade and cross -section indicated by the plans. The
entire surface shall then be tamped and the tamping operation continued until a close
knit dense surface is obtained.

(ii) The tamper shall rest on the side forms and shall be drawn ahead with a sawing
motion, in combination with a series of lifts and drops alternating with lateral shifts,
the aim of this operation being compaction and screeding to the approximate level
required. Subsequent tamping should advance about 75 mm at a time in the direction
in which the work is proceeding, and in the final stages tamping should be closer,
about 12 mm at a time until a level and dense surface is obtained.

(iii) Segregated particles of coarse aggregate which collect in front of the tamper or
screed shall be thrown outside the forms or thoroughly mixed by hand with the un
compacted mass of concrete already placed. Under no circumstances shall such
segregate particles be carried forward and pushed on to the base in front of the mass.

(iv) Compaction by tamping or screeding shall be carried on till the mortar in the mix just
works up to the surface. Care shall be exercised and the operation of tamping so
controlled as to prevent an excess of mortar and water from being worked on to the
top. Repeated operation other than to secure the necessary compaction and to
eliminate voids shall be avoided.

(v) Immediately after the tamping or screeding has been completed and before the
concrete has hardened, While the concrete is still in a plastic stage, the surface shall
be inspected for irregularities with a profile checking template and any needed
correction made by adding or removing concrete followed by further compaction and
finishing.

37.16.2. Floating - As soon as practicable after the concrete has been compacted, its surface
shall be smoothened by means of a longitudinal float, operated from a foot -bridge.
The longitudinal float shall be worked with a sawing motion, while held in a floating
position parallel to the carriageway centre line and passed gradually from one side of
the pavement to the other. Movements ahead along the centre line of the carriageway
shall be in successive advances of not more than one half the length of the float.

Page 348 of 385

[Link]. Straight-edging - After the longitudinal floating has been completed and excess
water has disappeared, but while the concrete is still plastic, the slab surface shall be
tested for trueness with a 3 m straight edge. The straight edge shall be held in
successive positions parallel to the road centre line in contact with the surface and the
whole area gone over from one side of the slab to the other. Advance along the road
shall be in successive stages of not more than one -half length of the straight edge.
Any area of depression found shall be scooped to a depth of 4 -5 cm, filled
immediately with freshly mixed concrete, struck, compacted, and re-finished. High
areas shall be cut down and refinished. The straight edging and re-floating shall
continue until the entire surface is found to be free from observable departures from
the straight edge and the slab has the required grade and camber.

The slab surface shall be retested for trueness, before the concrete begins to set, with
the 3 m long master straight edge and the graduated wedge gauge.

The straight edge shall be placed on the surface in successive positions, parallel to
the carriageway centre line. Irregularities shall be measured with the help of the
wedge gauge moved transversely at various points until it touches both the straight
edge and the concrete surface.

At any point tested the concrete shall not show a departure greater than 3 mm from
the true surface. If at any place the departure exceeds this value not more than 3
passes of the vibrating screed shall be allowed and the surface tested again in the
specified manner. If the irregularity still exceeds the limit aforesaid, the concrete
shall be removed to a depth of 50 mm or up to the top surface of the reinforcement, if
any. The area of concrete to be removed shall be demarcated by the length of the
straight edge in the position of measurement across the full width of the slab. Where
the point of measurement in default is less than 4.5m from the nearest transverse
expansion joint, the whole area upto the joint shall be removed to the required depth.
The concrete so removed shall not be re -used in the carriageway. Fresh concrete
shall be placed, compacted and finished in the manner already described in these
specifications and shall again be subject to test for accuracy of finish.

The foregoing procedure shall be adopted at each shifting of the straight edge and the
whole area shall be gone over from one side of the slab to the other. The straight edge
shall advance Longitudinally in successive stages of not more than one -half the
length of the straight edge.
No extra payment shall be made for the removal of the rejected concrete and or
laying fresh concrete.

Although the concrete may be removed immediately following measurement of the

irregularity and while it is still wet, this shall not mean any waiver from complying
with the requirements of this clause, if for any reason the concrete to be removed has
already hardened.
After straight edging of the surface, it shall be finished by brooming in the manner
described as mentioned in the following paragraphs.

Page 349 of 385

 37.16.3. Brooming - After belting and as soon as surplus water if any has risen to the surface,
the pavement shall be given a broom finish with an approved long handled steel or
fiber broom conforming to the stipulations laid down in JRC - 43 -1972. The
broom shall be pulled gently over the surface of the pavement from edge to edge.
Adjacent strokes shall be slightly overlapped. Brooming shall be' perpendicular to
the centre line of the pavement and so executed that the corrugations thus produced
will be uniform in character and width, and about 5mm deep. Brooming shall be
completed before the concrete reaches such a stage that the surface is likely to be torn
or unduly roughened by the operation. The broomed surface shall be free from
porous or rough spots, irregularities, depressions and small pockets, such as may be
caused by accidentally disturbing the particles of coarse aggregate embedded near the
surface.

37.16.4. Curing of concrete - Immediately after the finishing operations have been completed
the entire surface of the newly laid concrete shall be covered against rapid drying,
and cured. Failure to provide sufficient cover material of the stipulated type or
inadequate supplies of water for curing shall be adequate cause for immediate
suspension of concreting operations.

[Link]. Initial curing - After completion of the finishing operations, the surface of the
pavement shall be entirely covered with wet hessian cloth, burlap or jute mats. The
coverings used shall be of such length (or width) that when laid will extend at least
500 mm beyond the edges of the slab, shall be so placed that the entire surface and
both the edges of the slab are completely covered. They shall be placed as soon as
the concrete has set sufficiently to prevent marring of the surface. Prior to their
being placed, the coverings shall be thoroughly wetted with water and placed with
the wettest side down. They shall be so weighed down as to cause them to remain in
intimate contact with the surface covered. They shall be maintained fully wetted and
in position for 24 hours after the concrete has been placed, or until the concrete is
sufficiently hard to be walked upon without suffering any damage. To maintain the
coverings wet, water shall be gently sprayed so as to avoid damage to the fresh
concrete. If it becomes necessary to remove the coverings for any reason, the
concrete slab shall not be kept exposed for a period of more than half an hour.
Worn coverings or coverings with holes shall not be permitted. Coverings reclaimed
from previous use other than curing concrete shall be thoroughly washed prior to use
'for curing purposes, if the covering is furnished in strips, the strips shall be laid to
overlap at least 150 mm.
Covering shall be placed from suitable wooden bridges (IRC -43 -1972). Walking on
freshly laid concrete to facilitate placing coverings shall not be permitted.

[Link]. Final curing - Upon the removal of the covering the slab shall be thoroughly wetted
and then cured by one of the following methods of final curing -
(a) Curing with wet earth - Exposed edges of the slab shall be banked with a

Page 350 of 385

 substantial berm of earth. Upon the slab shall then be laid a system of transverse and
longitudinal dykes of clay about 50 mm high, covered with a blanket of sandy soil
free from stones to prevent the drying up and cracking of clay. The rest of the slab
shall then be covered with sufficient sandy soil so as to produce a blanket of earth not
less than 40 mm depth after wetting. The earth covering shall be thoroughly wetted
while it is being placed on the surface and against the sides of the slab and kept
thoroughly saturated with water for 14 days and thoroughly wetted down during the
morning of the 15th day and shall thereafter remain in place until the concrete has
attained the required strength and permission is given to open the pavement to traffic.
When such permission is granted, the covering shall be removed and the pavement
swept clean. If the earth covering becomes displaced during the curing period, it
shall be replaced to the original depth and re -saturated,

37.16.5. Removing forms - Forms shall not be removed from freshly placed concrete until it
has set, or at least 12 hours, whichever is later. They shall be carefully removed in
such a manner that no damage is done to the edges of the pavement. After the forms
have been removed, the slab edges shall be cleaned and any limited honey -combed
areas pointed up with 1 -2 cement sand mortar, after which the sides of the slab shall
be covered with earth to the level of the top of the slab for final curing Slabs with
excessive honey -combing as a result of inadequate compaction shall be removed
between nearest transverse joints.

37.16.6. Concreting during monsoon months - When concrete is being placed during
monsoon months and when it may be expected to rain, sufficient supply of tarpaulins
or other waterproof cloth shall be provided along the line of work. Any time when it
rains, all freshly laid concrete, which has not been covered for curing purposes, shall
be adequately protected by means of tarpaulins or other waterproof cloth. Any
concrete damaged by rain shall be removed and replaced.
37.16.7. Concreting in hot weather - As placing of concrete in air temperatures above 40°C,
or above 35°C combined with relative humidity below 25 percent and/or wind
velocity higher than 10 km/hour, is attended with defects like loss of workability
through accelerated setting, formation of plastic shrinkage cracks, etc., it is
recommended that unless adequate precautions are taken, no concreting shall be done
in conditions more severe than the above. The procedures recommended for
adoption in case of hot weather concreting is given in IRC - 61 -1976 ―Tentative
Guidelines for the Construction of Cement Concrete Pavements in Hot Weather."
Brief details of the procedure are given below -Aggregates, cement and water shall
be protected from the direct sun and mixing operations shall also be carried out in
shade. In addition portable shelters shall be provided to protect the concrete during
placing and finishing operations. This may be in the form of gable frames to cover
the full length of the concrete pavement laid in a day. The surfaces of the formwork
and subgrade coming in contact with concrete shall be moistened prior to placing of
the concrete to prevent absorption of mixing water.
Since the setting time of concrete is considerably reduced under such temperatures,
labour force shall be reinforced to minimise the time between mixing and placing of
Page 351 of 385
 concrete. The protective cover shall be adequate to exclude exposure of the concrete
directly to the sun and also eliminate contact with drying winds. Prior to removal of
the portable shelters, the hardened concrete shall be covered with wet hessian or
burlap or the like followed by one of the usual methods of curing like ponding, etc.
In addition, the moist curing period shall be extended to 4 weeks.

37.16.8. Work on gradients - The progress on gradient of all operations of placing,

compacting and finishing of concrete should proceed from the lower to the higher
reaches. The concrete mix shall be stiffer than that used on level reaches.
37.16.9. Protection of concrete - Suitable barricades shall be erected and maintained and
watchmen employed to exclude traffic from the newly constructed pavement for the
period herein prescribed, and these barriers shall be so arranged as not in any way to
interfere with or impede traffic on any lane intended to be kept open and necessary
signs and lights shall be maintained clearly indicating any lanes open to the traffic.
Where, as shown on the plans or indicated in the special provisions, it is necessary to
provide for traffic across the pavement, suitable and substantial crossings to bridge
over the concrete shall have to be provided. Such crossings, as constructed, shall be
adequate for the traffic and approved by the Engineer.
Any part of the pavement damaged by traffic or other causes occurring prior to its
final acceptance shall be repaired or replaced in a manner satisfactory to the
Engineer. The pavement shall be protected against all traffic usage including that of
construction -traffic.

37.16.10. Sealing of joints - After the curing period is over and before the pavement is opened
to traffic, the temporary seal and all other intruded materials in the transverse
expansion and contraction joints as well as longitudinal joints shall be removed
completely and the groove; filled with the approved joint sealing compound as per
IRC - 57 -1974 "Recommended Practice for Sealing of Joints in Concrete
Pavements‖. The joint opening shall be thoroughly cleared of all foreign matter
before the primer followed by sealing material is placed. If necessary, the foreign
matter shall be blown out by compressed air pressure. All contact faces of the joint
shall be cleaned with a wire brush to remove loose material and shall be surface dried
before the primer is applied.

37.16.11. Opening to traffic - In general, traffic shall be excluded from the newly constructed
pavement for a period of 28 days where Ordinary Portland Cement, Portland Blast
Furnace Slag Cement and Portland Pozzolona Cement are used, or for a period of 7
days where Rapid Hardening Cement is used. In all cases, before the pavement is
opened to traffic it shall be cleaned and the joints shall be sealed.

Specific Civil/Structural Work Requirement

Page 352 of 385

Section 38. General Civil Specifications
The following civil specifications shall be applicable for providing and executing all
such items which are not mentioned in foregoing paras but are necessary to be
provided and for the items in bill of quantities which are mentioned above but require
some elaboration. No extra cost shall be paid for such items. It should clearly be
understood by the Operator that all civil specifications mentioned here below shall be
treated as part of the technical specifications already mentioned. The specific
requirement of different items of work involved in the construction, completion and
commissioning of the system as a whole, shall be provided in accordance with the
requirement given in these civil specifications.

38.1. Site Clearance

Before taking up construction, site shall be cleared of all jungles, bushes and
unwanted vegetation growth. After completion of plant, the entire site area shall be
cleared of all left over material and debris. The work shall be carried out in
accordance with the specifications in bill of quantities and payment shall be as per
quoted rates for the respective items.

38.2. Sections for excavation for all underground structures and pipe lines
Operator shall prepare sectional drawings showing the details of excavation for all
underground structures and pipe lines, in all kinds of soils, boulders, soft and hard
rock etc., based on test results of soil testing and investigation reports complying to
specifications in clause 19 for earthwork excavations and shall submit to the
Engineer for review and approval, prior to starting of the work. If during excavation
any change in section is considered necessary for reasons of safety of workers, the
Engineer will issue directions for compliance by the Operator. The Operator shall
comply with the Engineer‘s directions without any extra charge or payment.

38.3. Form Work

Formwork, shuttering, centering, scaffolding etc., shall be of steel plates or plywood,
lined with MS-sheets and for scaffolding steel tubular shall be used. Joints should be
sufficiently tied to prevent loss of cement slurry from the concrete. All forms,
shuttering shall be levelled, aligned, and thoroughly cleaned, before they are used for
concreting. Formwork shall be removed after specified days of curing with the prior
written permission of the Engineer. The surface of RCC after removal of formwork /
shuttering shall be smooth and even and without honeycombing or undulations.

38.4. Procedure and Materials used in concrete works.

The procedure for concrete works shall be in accordance with the specifications in
the bill of quantities, specifications in this section and complying to standard
practices in IS:456-2000 with latest amendments, all concrete works shall be
executed in accordance with standard practices, including volumetric batching using
boxes of standard size, concrete mixers with hopper, compaction using vibrators and
according to the directions of the Engineer In-charge of works.

Page 353 of 385

 Aggregates

All aggregates, fine and course used in concreting works shall comply to the
standards laid down in IS: 456-2000 with latest amendments and specifications in
applicable clauses in this section.

Water
The water used in all concreting works shall be of potable quality and tested before
usage in the construction works and shall be confirming to IS: 456-2000.

Cement

The cement used shall be of sulphate resisting cement confirming to IS: 12330 as
specified and where ever the concrete is coming in contact with sewage. For other
concreting works like encasing pipe, pedestals and other structures where there is no
contact with sewage, it shall be OPC confirming to IS:8112 with latest amendments
and revisions.

Minimum clear cover over Reinforcement

Minimum clear cover over the steel reinforcement shall be 50mm for the members
contact with soil/ground water. For other faces the clear cover over the reinforcement
shall be as per latest IS Codes.

Tested Steel

Only tested and approved steel shall be used for reinforcement in RCC works, and
the Operator shall produce the test certificates to the Engineer. The type of steel used
shall be of TMT of grade of steel Fe: 500 confirming to relevant IS.

38.5. Restoration of Storm water drains & other miscellaneous works.

The storm water drains and cover slabs damaged during execution of works which is
not due to the negligence of the Operator as decided by the Engineer shall be restored
as per the items in bill of quantities. The specifications in this section are deemed to
govern the applicable items in the bill of quantities. All masonry works, concrete
works shall be in accordance with relevant IS as mentioned in section 6 and or as
directed by the Engineer. Other repairs works under heading ―Miscellaneous works‖
in bill of quantities shall be executed in accordance with the specifications and as
directed by the Engineer, the finished item of work shall give neat appearance and
should serve the intended purpose of the component to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.

Page 354 of 385

Section 39. Design Submissions:
Complete detailed design /hydraulic calculations & drawings of foundations and
superstructure together with general arrangement drawings and explanatory sketches
shall be submitted to the Owner. Separate calculations for foundations or
superstructures submitted independent of each other shall be deemed to be
incomplete and will not be accepted. Though no GA drawings of all units are
required along with the bid, a schematic layout /GAD shall be submitted along with
the bid. The design considerations described herewith establish the minimum basic
requirements of plain and reinforcement concrete structures, masonry structures and
structural steel works. However, any particular structure shall be designed for the
satisfactory performance of the functions for which the same is being constructed.
The Operator shall also take care to check the stability of partly.

39.1. Design Standards

All designs shall be based on the latest International or Indian Standard (IS)
Specifications or Codes of Practice. The design standards adopted shall follow the
best modern engineering practice in the field based on any other international
standard or specialist literature subject to such standard reference or extract of such
literature in the English language being supplied to and approved by the Owner or
Owner‘s Representative. In case of any variation or contradiction between the
provision of the IS Standards or Code and the specifications given with the submitted
bid document, the provision given in the Specification shall be followed.

39.2. Design Loadings

All buildings and structures / underground structures shall be designed to resist the
worst combination of the following loads/stresses under test and working conditions
these include dead load, live load, wind load, seismic load, stresses due to
temperature changes, shrinkage and creep in materials, dynamic loads and uplift
pressure.
39.2.1. Dead Load: This shall comprise all permanent construction including walls, floors,
roofs, partitions, stairways, fixed service equipment and other items of machinery. In
estimating the loads of process equipment all fixtures and attached piping shall be
included, but excluding contents shall be considered. The following minimum loads
shall be considered in design of structures:
[Link] Parameter Load
1 Weight of water 10.0 KN /m3
2 Weight of soil (irrespective of strata available at 20.0 KN/m3
site and type of soil used for filling etc) However,
for checking stability against uplift, actual weight
of soil as determined by field test shall be
considered
3 Weight of plain concrete 24.0 KN/m3
4 Weight of reinforced concrete 25.0 KN/m3
5 Weight of brickwork (exclusive of plaster) 22.0 KN/m3

Page 355 of 385

 6 Weight of plaster to masonry surface 18.0 KN/m3
7 Weight of granolithic terrazzo finish or rendering 24.0 KN/m3
screed, etc
8 Weight of sand (filter media) 25.0 KN/m3

39.2.2. Live Load: Live loads shall be in general as per IS 875. However, the following
minimum loads shall be considered in the design of structures.
[Link] Location Live Load
1 Floor supporting Pumping Machinery 1000 kg/sq.m
2 Storage, Maintenance Bay, Air Blower 750 kg/sq.m
3 Platform, Staircase, Corridors, Walkways 500 kg/sq.m
4 Toilet 200 kg/sq.m
5 Roof Slab 150 kg/sq.m

In the absence of any suitable provisions for live loads in IS Codes or as given above
for any particular type of floor or structure, assumptions made must receive the
approval of the Owner‘s Representative prior to starting the design work. Apart from
the specified live loads or any other loads due to material stored any other equipment
load or possible overloading during maintenance or erection/construction shall be
considered and shall be partial or full whichever causes the most critical condition.
39.2.3. Wind Load: Wind loads shall be as per IS: 875- 2002 Part-III.
39.2.4. Dynamic Load: Dynamic loads due to working of plant items such as pumps,
blowers, compressors, switchgears, traveling cranes, etc shall be considered in the
design of structures.
39.2.5. Other Loads: In addition to earth pressure and water pressure etc., the surcharge of 1
Ton/sq.m shall be taken into account in the design for channels, tanks, pit etc.
39.2.6. Earthquake Load: This shall be computed as per IS: 1893 – 2000.
39.3. Joints
Movement joints such as expansion joints, complete contraction joints, partial
contraction joints and sliding joints shall be designed to suit the structure as per
relevant IS code provisions. Expansion joints of suitable gap at intervals not more
than 30 m shall be provided in walls, floors and roof slabs of water retaining
structures.
Construction joints shall be provided at right angles to the general direction of the
member. The locations of construction joints shall be decided on convenience of
construction. To avoid segregation of concrete in walls, horizontal construction joints
are normally to be provided at every 2 m height, GI 18 guage/PVC water stops of
suitable type and minimum 230 mm width, 6 m thick shall be used for walls and base
slabs.

39.4. Waste Water Retaining Structures

Liquid retaining/conveying structures including the members covering the same
(such as roof of a chamber, channel etc.) shall be designed by uncracked method of
Page 356 of 385
 design as per BIS: 3370 and 6494. Basement RC walls and slabs below ground shall
also be designed by uncracked method of design as liquid retaining structures. Shear
shall be checked by working stress method as per BIS: 456. Minimum temperature
and shrinkage reinforcement shall be 0.3% in each direction.
All underground or partly underground liquid containing structures shall be designed
for the following conditions:
 Liquid depth up to full height of wall: no relief due to soil pressure from outside
to be considered.
 Structure empty (i.e. empty of liquid, any material, etc) full earth pressure
including saturated condition and surcharge pressure wherever applicable to be
considered.
 Structures shall be designed for uplift in empty conditions as per water table
indicated in the geotechnical report or high flood level, whichever is maximum. No
reduction factor for the uplift force shall be considered.
 The dead weight of the empty structures should provide a safety factor of not less
than 1.2 against uplift pressures during construction and in service.
 Wall shall be designed under operating conditions to resist earthquake forces
from earth pressure mobilization and dynamic water loads;
 Underground or partially underground structures shall be checked against
stresses developed due to any combination of full and empty compartments with
appropriate ground/uplift pressures from below to base slab
 The walls and base slabs shall be designed for saturated earth/water pressure
corresponding to high flood level or finished plot level whichever is higher.
 For design purpose, sub soil water level is to be considered as 2 meter below the
average natural ground level.

39.5. Foundation
 The minimum depth of foundations for all structures, equipment‘s buildings and
frame foundations and load bearing walls shall be as per IS: 1094.
 The earth fill above virgin ground level till formation level shall be taken as a
surcharge load and shall be added in the loads coming on foundations appropriately
 Care shall be taken to avoid the foundations of adjacent buildings or structure
foundations, either existing or not within the scope of this Contract Suitable
adjustments in depth, location and sizes may have to be made depending on site
conditions. No extra claims for such adjustments shall be accepted by the Owner.
 Special attention is drawn to danger of uplift being caused by the ground water
table
 Plinth level of all structures/top of tanks shall be at least (1000) mm above high
flood level.

39.6. Design Requirements

The following are the design requirements for all reinforced or plain concrete
structures:

Page 357 of 385

 All blinding and leveling concrete shall be minimum 100 mm thick in concrete
grade M15 for Building & 150 mm thick in concrete grade M 30 for Water Retaining
Structures as per IS -3370 (Part- 1)-2009 latest version..
 All structural reinforced concrete shall be with a maximum 25 mm aggregate size
for footings and base slabs and with a maximum 20 mm aggregate size for all the
Water Retaining Structures & other structural members.
 All liquid retaining structures shall be designed as per IS: 3370. The minimum
grade of concrete shall be M30 using Sulphate resistant Cement.
 All Buildings, Pipe Pedestals, Thrust Block, Pump Foundation & other structures
shall be designed as per IS-456. The minimum grade of concrete shall be M20.
 The maximum free water cement ratio shall not exceed 0.5 for all liquid retaining
structures.
 The amount of reinforcement in each of the two directions at right angles within
each surface zone should not be less than the minimum specified as IS:3370 or
IS:456 which ever is applicable for the type of structure.
 Use of pressure relief valves to reduce uplift pressure due to ground water table
shall not be allowed.
 All buildings shall have a minimum 1.0 m wide, 100mm thick plinth protection
paving in M15 grade concrete or stone slabs/tiles. All plinth protection shall be
supported on well-compacted strata.
The following minimum thickness shall be used for different reinforced concrete
members irrespective of design thickness.
[Link] Civil Member Width(mm)
1 Walls for liquid retaining structures 200
2 Base Slab of liquid retaining structures 350
3 Wall foundation (At Junction of Base Slab & 400
Wall) of liquid retaining structures
4 Roof Slab of liquid retaining structures 150
5 Walls of Launders 150
6 Base slab of Launders 125
7 Floor slabs including roof slabs, walkways 100
canopy slabs
8 Walls of cables/pipe trenches, underground 125
pits, etc
9 Footing – Edge Thickness 250
10 Footing – At the Face of Column 450
11 Column 230 (width) 300
(depth)
12 Parapets, chajja 100
13 Precast trench cover 75
14 Beam 230 (width) 300
(depth)

MINIMUM COVER TO MAIN REINFORCEMENT

Page 358 of 385

 [Link]. Member Details Cover (mm)
1 Slab Free Face 20

Face in contact with 30

earth
2 Beam Top /Bottom 40

Side 30

Face in contact with 40

earth
3 Column and pedestal Super Structure 40

Face in contact with 40

earth
4 Retaining wall, Basement Free side 30
and Pit wall
Face in contact with 30
earth
5 Liquid Retaining Structure Face in contact with 40
liquid
Face in contact with 40
earth
Free face 40

6 Foundation Bottom 60

Top 60

Minimum Bar Diameter

[Link] Member Diameter (mm)

1 Major Foundation 10
2 Block Foundation Main Bars 8
3 Block Foundation – Tie Bars 8
4 Minor Foundation (Local Foundation etc.) 8
5 Column, Pedestal – Main Bars 12
6 Column, Pedestal – Ties 8
7 Beam – Main Bars 12
8 Beam – Anchor Bars 10
9 Beam – Stirrups 8
10 Slab – Main Bars 8
11 Slab – Distribution Bars 8
12 Wall – Main Bars 10
13 Wall – Distribution Bars 8

Page 359 of 385

 [Link] Member Diameter (mm)
14 Minor elements such as chajjas, Lintel Beams etc 8

Bar Spacing

Minimum Maximum
[Link] Member
(mm) (mm)
1 Foundations 125 200
2 Slabs 100 300
3 Stirrups for Beams 100 300
4 Ties for Columns, Pedestals 100 300
5 Walls 100 300
• Bar spacing shall be provided in multiple of 25 mm.

Section 40. MATERIALS IN GENERAL

The term ―materials‖ shall mean all materials, goods and articles of every kind
whether raw, processed or manufactured and equipment and plant of every kind to be
supplied by the Operator for incorporation in the Works.
Expect as may be otherwise specified for particular parts of the works the provision
of clauses in ―Materials and Workmanship‖ shall apply to materials and
workmanship for any part of the works. All materials shall be new and of the kinds
and qualities described in the Contract and shall be at least equal to approved
samples.
As soon as practicable after receiving the order to commence the works, the Operator
shall inform the Owner‘s Representative of the names of the suppliers from whom he
proposes to obtain any materials but he shall not place any order without the approval
of the Owner‘s Representative which may be withheld until samples have been
submitted and satisfactorily tested. The Operator shall thereafter keep the Owner‘s
Representative informed of orders for and delivery dates of all materials.
Materials shall be transported handled and stored in such a manner as to prevent
deterioration damage or contamination failing which such damaged materials will be
rejected and shall not be used on any part of the Works under this contract.
40.1. Cement
The Cement shall be Sulphate Resistant Cement grade-53 in all water retaining
structures and OPC 53 grade cement for other structures, confirming to the relevant
B.I.S. codes and approved by the Owner‘s Representative. Manufacturers Test
Certificate shall have to be furnished. Minimum cement consumption for RCC M20
shall be considered as 350 kg/cum and for RCC M25 shall be 380 kg/cum. mixing of
fly ash in the concrete shall not be considered. Approved Manufacturers of Cement
of reputed firm with ISO certification shall be used
40.2. Reinforcement Steel
Reinforcement Steel shall confirm to BIS Specification 432-1966 (with up to date
revision) and B.I.S. Specification 1786-1985 (with up to date revision). All
Reinforcement Steel will be TMT Grade approved by the Owner.
Page 360 of 385
 Minimum Cement Content
The minimum cement content for each grade of concrete shall be as per table below.
Grade of Minimum Cement Content in Concrete
[Link].
Concrete (Kg/m3 of finished concrete)
1 M15 240

2 M20 300

3 M25 300
4 M30 320

Please refer IS code 456 –(latest version)

Section 41. SAMPLES AND TESTS OF MATERIALS

The operator shall submit samples of such materials as may be required by the Owner
and shall carry out the specified tests directed at the site or at the supplier‘s premises
or at the laboratory approved by the Owner or the Owner‘s Representative. Samples
shall be submitted and tests carried out sufficiently early to enable further samples to
be submitted and tested if required by the Owner.
The operator shall give the Owner seven days‘ notice in writing of the date on which
any of the materials will be ready for testing or inspection at the supplier‘s premises
or at a laboratory approved by the Owner. Owner or the Owner‘s Representative shall
attend the test at the appointed place within seven days of the said date on which the
materials are expected to be ready for testing or inspection according to the Operator,
failing which the test may proceed in his absence unless instructed by the Owner‘s
Representative to carry out such a test on a mutually agreed date in his presence.
The operator shall in any case submit to Owner within seven days of every test such
number of certified copies (3) of the test results as the Owner‘s Representative may
require.
Approval by the Owner‘s Representative as to the placing of orders for materials or
as to samples or tests shall not prejudice any of the Owner‘s Representative powers
under the Contract. The provisions of this clause shall also apply to materials
supplied under any nominated sub-contract.

Section 42. ORIENTATION

The works shall be laid out within the confines of the site in order to be compatible
with the existing infrastructural facilities, inlet and outlet pipe work/channels and
nearby water bodies. Underground services requiring to be relocated in order to
accommodate the proposed site layout shall be relocated by the operator to
alignments approved by the Owners Representative.

42.1. Buildings and Structures

All the building and structure works shall generally comply with the following
Owner‘s Requirements unless otherwise specified elsewhere:
All building works shall be of reinforced concrete framework.

Page 361 of 385

All external walls shall be in 230 mm thick brick masonry built in cement mortar
(1:5). Transoms and mullions of 115 mm x 230 mm size with four numbers 6 mm
bars and 6 mm links at 150 mm c/c shall be provided to form panels not exceeding
3,500 mm x 3,500 mm in size. All internal partition walls except for toilets shall be in
230 mm thick brick masonry built in cement mortar 1:5 with transoms and mullions
as in (b) above. Toilet partition walls shall be in 115 mm thick brick masonry built in
cement mortar 1:4 and shall have transoms and mullions as in (b) above and shall
form panels not exceeding 1,200 mm x 1,200 mm in size.
Finishes to concrete liquid retaining structures shall be:
a. F1 - External surfaces, buried
b. F2 - External surfaces exposed and up to 300 mm below ground level
c. F2 - Internal surfaces
Finishes to other concrete structures shall be:
a. F1 – Buried
b. F1 - Exposed, where plastering is specified
c. F2 – Exposed
All internal masonry surfaces finish shall have 12 mm thick plain faced cement
plaster in cement mortar (1:4) with neat cement finish on top. Over this, one coat of
primer and two coats of plastic emulsion paint of approved quality and shade shall be
provided.
All external masonry and concrete with rough board finish shall have 20 mm thick
sand faced cement plaster in two coats, base coat 12 mm thick in cement mortar 1:4
and finishing coat 8 mm thick in cement mortar 1:4. Waterproofing compound of
approved make and quality shall be added to the cement mortar in proportions as
specified by the manufacturer.
All external surfaces above ground level shall have one coat of primer and two coats
of waterproof cement based paint of approved quality and shade. A coat of silicone
water repellent paint shall also be applied thereon.
Toilet areas, walls and ceilings, shall have one coat of primer and two coats of plastic
emulsion paint. Toilet floor slab shall be filled with brick bat coba (broken bricks in
lime) and provided with waterproofing as per the specifications of an approved
specialist waterproofing company. The finished floor level in toilet areas shall be 25
mm below general finished floor level elsewhere in the building.
The flooring in all areas except toilets and staircases, pumping stations, chlorination
building, centrifuge building, workshop, store room D.G. room shall be in 250 mm x
250 mm x 20 mm thick marble mosaic tiles of approved make unless otherwise
specified, shade and pattern and placed in cement mortar 1:4 to give overall thickness
of 50 mm. Half tile skirting shall also be provided in these areas.
The flooring in the pumping stations, chlorination building, centrifuge building,
workshop, [Link] shall be 60mm thick cement flooring with metallic concrete
hardener topping, under layer of 42mm thick cement concrete [Link] (1 cement : 2
coarse : 4 graded stone aggregate 16mm thick nominal size) and top layer of 18mm
thick metallic concrete hardener consisting of mix 1:2 (1 cement : 2 stone aggregate
6mm nominal size) by volume & mixed with metallic hardening compound of
approved quality @ 3 kg/m2 including cement slurry and rounding off edges.

Page 362 of 385

 The flooring in Operator‘s room, loading/unloading bay, MCC cum Panel room shall
be in 25mm thick Kota stone slab of approved shade and pattern and placed over 20
mm thick base of cement mortar 1:4 to give overall thickness of 45 mm. Half tile
skirting shall also be provided in these areas.
Toilet areas shall have 450 mm x 450 mm x 25 mm thick polished Kota stone tiles
placed in cement mortar 1:4 to give an overall thickness of 50 mm. 2100 mm high
dado, in 150 mm x 150 mm x 6 mm thick glazed tiles (approved make, shade and
pattern) placed in cement mortar 1:3 shall also be provided in these areas.
The flooring along with skirting in administration cum laboratory building shall be
20 mm thick mirror polished, machine cut granite slab of approved shade and pattern
placed in cement mortar (1:4). 150mm high skirting shall be provided in these areas.
Granite stone shall be provided for laboratory platforms fixed over double
sandwiched cuddappa support as directed and the edges of granite is to be embedded
into the wall.
The toilet facilities shall include at least:
a. 3 Nos. Water closets with white porcelain Orissa pan minimum 580 mm long
with low level flushing cistern of 10 litres capacity.

b. 4 Nos. urinals of sizes 600 mm x 400 mm x 300 mm flat back type in white
porcelain separated by a marble partition of size 680 mm x 300 mm.

c. 3 Nos. wash basins of size 510 mm x 400 mm in white porcelain with inlet,
outlet and overflow arrangements.

d. 3 Nos. mirror of size 400 mm x 600 mm wall mounted type fitted over wash
basins.

e. 2 Nos. plastic liquid soap bottles

f. 2 Nos. chromium plated brass towel rails minimum 750 mm long.

g. All stopcocks, valves and pillar cocks shall be heavy duty chromium plated
brass.

h. All fittings such as `P‘ or `S‘ traps, floor traps, pipes, down take pipes etc.

The sewage from toilet blocks shall be led to the wet well of terminal sewage
pumping station if present or included under this contract or to the closest gravity
sewer.
All staircases shall have 25 mm thick chequered mosaic tiles for treads and 25 mm
thick plain mosaic tiles for risers of approved make and shade and half tile skirting
set in cement mortar in 1:4 to give an overall thickness of 50 mm.
All concrete stairs shall have aluminum nosing over 2 mm thick rubber strip of width
same as nosing for the full length of the tread. Nosing shall be fixed with countersunk
screws. Stairways shall be provided to permit access between different levels within
buildings. Staircase shall be minimum 1000mm wide unless specified otherwise.

Page 363 of 385

 Staircases in general shall not be steeper than 40°. Staircases having space constraints
may be steeper than 400. The maximum vertical run for a single flight of stairs shall
be 3.0 M.
All roof tops and overhead tanks shall be made accessible with ladder provision.
Vertical step ladders fitted with landing point extensions will be permitted where
considered appropriate by the Engineer to access areas not frequently visited.
Steel staircases shall be constructed of standard channel stringers with M.S. grating
treads 25mm thick with non skid nosing. Steel Ladders shall be minimum 600mm
wide and shall not exceed 6m of straight run. The ladders shall be painted with epoxy
paint.
All hand railing shall be provided with G.I ―C‖ Class Pipe confirming to latest Indian
standards. The minimum height of hand railing shall be 1m.
The reinforced concrete roofs shall be made waterproof by application of an
approved roof polythene / bitumen membrane / brick bat coba. The finished roof
surface shall have adequate slope to drain quickly the rain water to R.W down take
inlet points.
All roof floors shall have minimum 750 mm height solid concrete block parapet wall
where accessible is provided and shall have minimum 300 mm height solid concrete
block parapet wall where accessible is not provided.
For roofing drainage, cast iron or uPVC rainwater down takes with C.I. bell mouth or
u PVC bend and C.I. or uPVC grating at top shall be provided. For roof areas up to
40 sq m minimum two nos. 100 mm diameter down take pipes shall be provided. For
every additional area of 40 sq m or part thereof, at least one no. 100 mm dia. down
take pipe shall be provided.
Top surfaces of chajjas and canopies shall be made waterproof by providing a screed
layer of adequate slope or application of an approved roof membrane and sloped to
drain the rain water.
Building plinth shall be minimum 450 mm above average finished ground level
around building or high flood level whichever is more.
All doors, windows, rolling shutters shall have lintels above. Chajja protection to
lintels on external walls shall be such as to prevent the rain water splashing into the
building. Chajja projection of minimum 750 mm for rolling shutters, 600 mm for
doors and 450 mm for windows shall be provided to prevent the rain water splashing
into the building. Chajja shall be projected 150 mm on either side from size of
doors/windows/rolling shutters. All windows and ventilators shall have 25 mm thick
Kota stone sills bedded in cement mortar (1:3).
All doors and windows shall be painted with two coats of synthetic enamel paint over
a priming coat (ready mixed Zinc Chromate Yellow primer of approved brand and
manufacturer confirming to I.S.: 127-106, 341 and 340).
All doors, windows and ventilators shall be made of aluminum confirming to latest
version of IS: 1948. All fixtures for doors, windows and ventilators shall also be of
aluminum. Aluminum grills shall be provided in all the windows. Doors shall be in
two panel and both panels shall be glazed/unglazed. Minimum weight of aluminum
doors & windows shall be as follows
1. Single Glazed Window : (Weights indicated shall be aluminum)
 Open able Outer Frame: Weight 0.70 kg/Rmt

Page 364 of 385

 Shutter Frame: Weight 0.97 kg/Rmt
 Intermediate Mullion: Weight 0.97 kg/RMt.
 Beading: Weight 0.31 kg/Rmt
 Fixing Louvers windows/ventilators
 Outer Frame: Weight 0.46 kg/Rmt
2. Double Glazed Window
 Outer Frame: Weight 0.72 kg/Rmt
 Shutter Frame: Weight 0.97 kg/ Rmt
 Intermediate Mullion: Weight 0.98 kg/ Rmt
 Beading: Weight 0.31 kg/ Rmt
3. Sliding Windows
 Bottom & Top Frame: Weight 0.70 kg/m
 Shutter Frame: Weight 0.42 kg/m
 Interlocking Section: Weight 0.47 kg/m
4. Aluminum Door
 Outer Frame: Weight 2.508 kg/Rmt
 Shutter Frame: Weight 2.508 kg/Rmt
 Bottom Stile: Weight 2.508 kg/Rmt
 Glazing shall be 5.5 mm thick glass.
a) Openings of the windows & ventilators shall be minimum 25% of the external
wall area.
b) Ventilator shall be provided where height of floor is more than 3m.
c) All windows and ventilators shall have wire mesh. Frame of doors, windows and
ventilators shall be of aluminum of standard rolled section. Doors, Windows and
Ventilators shall be of size as per schedule to be submitted by the Operator for
approval of Engineer. The minimum size shall be as per below:
 a. Door of opening size 1.2m x 2.1m
 b. Door of opening size 0.75m x 2.1m for toilets
 c. Glazed widows of minimum size 1.2m x 1.2m
 d. Ventilators of minimum size 0.6m x 0.6m
d) All concrete channels and ducts used for conveying liquid shall have inside finish
of type F2. The width of concrete channels shall not be less than 500 mm. All open
channels shall be provided with Stainless Steel Type 304 hand railings or concrete
walls to a minimum height of 1 m from the access surface elevation. All concrete
surfaces of structures conveying raw sewage or primary effluent shall be protected
with Epoxy Coating as specified in Clause 43.11.
e) Kerbs to be provided below the hand railing on the catwalks/pathways should be
as per relevant sections of Factory Act. It shall not be less than 150mm.
f) All exposed surfaces of inserts embedded in concrete shall be painted with two
coats of enamel paint over one coat of red oxide zinc chrome primer. Surfaces in
contact with concrete shall not be painted.
g) All structural steel members shall be painted with two coats of enamel paint over
one shop and one field coat of red oxide zinc chrome primer.
h) The design of buildings shall reflect the climatic conditions existing on site.
Process buildings shall as far as is possible permit the entry of natural light , and the

Page 365 of 385

 use of glazed panelling shall be kept to a minimum and preference given to wall
openings protected by weather canopies.
i) Emergency exit doorways shall be provided from all buildings in order to comply
with local and international regulations .Stairways and paved areas shall be provided
at the exit points.
j) Toilet blocks in process buildings and control blocks shall be provided with a
sink with two drinking water taps of 20 mm size with adequate inlet and outlet
connections.
k) All the walkways in shall have minimum 1 m width and shall be covered with
mosaic tiles.
l) Hand railings shall be made up of G.I ―C‖ Class Pipe confirming to latest Indian
standards.
m) For structures containing water or process liquid, the top of the wall shall be at
least 0.5m higher than the maximum water surface level calculated at high flood level
and peak plant flow. The top level of internal plant roads and approaches shall be at
least 0.5m above the site High Flood Level.
n) If the High flood level is more then Ground Level then road shall be constructed
on the earthen embankment. Earthen embankment shall be constructed with side
slope of atleast 2 horizontal to 1 vertical. Stone pitching shall be provided at both
sides of the embankment as per IS: 8237. Top width of embankment shall be taken as
6.0m. Top level of embankment shall be 0.5m above high flood level. Excavated
earth from the plant can be used for embankment construction and if required, extra
earth can be borrowed from the borrow pit as approved by Engineer.

42.2. Site Drainage

The operator shall provide a site drainage system. The system shall comprise of the
following:
 Storm Water Drainage
 Foul Drainage (if any)

42.2.1. Storm Water Drainage

(a) Storm water drains adjacent to the existing and proposed roads (under this Contract)
shall be sized for a rainfall intensity of 50 mm/hr, allowing for 100% runoff. Drains
adjacent to roads shall be in stone masonry in CM (1:4) of appropriate thickness,
topped with 75 mm thick M10 concrete and internally flush pointed in cement mortar
(1:4), 20 mm thick. The minimum width of drain shall be 450mm.
(b) The storm water drainage system shall also be designed to cater the run-off from the
existing plot areas and structures, if necessary depending upon the site topography.
42.2.2. Foul Drainage
(a) The foul drainage system shall accept discharge from toilets, washrooms, offices
and the laboratory. The foul drainage system shall be conveyed to the nearest public
sewer wherever exist or to a pumping station or a new soak pit followed by septic
tank shall be constructed.

Page 366 of 385

42.3. Cable and Pipe work Trenches
(a) Cable and pipe work trenches shall generally be constructed in reinforced concrete.
However, 500 mm x 500 mm size or smaller trenches, not on fill may be constructed
in 200 mm thick solid cement concrete blocks over 150mm thick M 15 PCC base.
The trenches will be 20mm thick plastered internally with cement mortar (1:4) and
externally in cement mortar (1:3).
(b) All floor cut-outs and cable ducts, etc. shall be covered with M20 precast concrete
covers (Heavy Duty) or MS grating as per direction of Engineer in outdoor areas and
M.S. chequered plates, suitably painted of adequate thickness in indoor areas. All
uncovered openings shall be protected with hand railing. The pipe, cable trenches
shall be suitably sloped to drain off rainwater to a suitable location.
(c) Layout of trenches outside the buildings shall allow space for construction of future
trenches where necessary with due consideration for planning for future
developments. This aspect shall be brought to the notice of the Engineer while
planning the works.
42.4. Pipes and Ducts
(a) R.C.C ducts for drainage shall have minimum 1 metre pre-cast cover (M20 concrete,
Heavy duty) while laid under roads. Access shafts of size not less than 600 mm x
1000 mm shall be provided.
(b) All drains (except storm water drains adjacent to roads) shall be covered and
designed structurally for appropriate loads.
42.5. Landscaping
(a) The site shall be landscaped once the works are substantially complete. Landscaping
area shall be marked in the layout plan of Sewerage Network.
(b) Landscaping shall include planting of suitable trees and development of lawn/grassed
areas. Landscaping in general shall meet ecological and environmental conditions of
the site. Road widths shall determine the size of the tree height and spread to be
selected for planting. Trees suitable for local conditions shall be selected as approved
by the Engineer. Medicinal and fruit trees shall be avoided. Landscaping shall be
maintained in good condition till the completion of the contract.
42.6. Tree Planting
(a) Pits dug a few days in advance of actual planting shall be allowed to weather and be
filled with top soil mixed with manure. Size of the pit shall be as per standard
requirement. Only one tree shall be planted in each pit. A guard made of bamboo
with wire mesh or bricks or M.S. ring as approved by Engineer, shall be provided.

Page 367 of 385

Section 43. CONCRETE

43.1. General
Applicable provisions of Conditions of Contract shall govern work under this section.
All concrete work, plain or reinforced shall be carried out in strict accordance with
this specification and any working drawing or instructions given from time to time to
the operator. The operator‘s rates shall allow for wastage in all materials as well as
for all tests of materials and for concrete. No concrete shall be cast in the absence of
the Owner‘s representative or any other person duly authorized by him. The
operator‘s Engineer shall personally check that both the formwork and reinforcement
have been correctly placed and fixed, and shall satisfy himself that all work
preparatory to the casting is completely ready, before calling the owner‘s
representative for final inspection and approval and for which purpose at least 24
hours‘ notice shall be given by the operator. The Indian Standards wherever referred
to herein shall be the latest edition of such Standards.
Cement
Cement shall be ordinary Portland cement as per I.S. 269 or Sulphate Resistance
Cement as per IS 12330. Cement tests shall have to be carried out at operator‘s
expense as and when directed.
Aggregate
The fine and coarse aggregate shall conform to IS: 383 & IS: 456. The necessary test
indicated in IS – 383 and IS – 456 shall have to be carried out to ensure the
acceptability and shall meet prior approval of the Owner.
Reinforcement
The reinforcement conforming to latest relevant Indian Standards shall be of tested
quality. It shall also comply with relevant part of IS. 456. All the reinforcement shall
be clean and free from dirt, oil, paint, grease, mill scale or loose or thick rust at the
time of placing. The reinforcement shall be bent to the shapes shown on the drawings
prior to placing and all bars must be bent cold. The Steel shall be placed in such a
way that it is rigidly held in position while concrete is being cast. The correct
clearance from the form shall be maintained by either precast mortar blocks or by
metal supporting chairs to be supplied by the operator free of charge. The
intersections of rods crossing one another shall bound together with soft pliable wire
No. 16 S.W.G. at frequent intervals so that reinforcement will not be displaced during
the process of depositing concrete. The loops of binding wire should be tightened by
pliers.
Water
Water shall conform to IS: 456, clean and free from alkali, oil or injurious amounts of
deleterious material. As far as possible, the water should be of such quality that is
potable. If any chemical analysis of the water is necessary and ordered the same shall
be got done at approval laboratory at the operator‘s expense.
43.2. Concrete Proportioning
The concrete proportion shall be as indicated on the approved drawings and shall
conform to IS: [Link] minimum cover to main reinforcement shall be 25 mm or the

Page 368 of 385

 diameter of the bar whichever is greater. In the case of surfaces exposed to corrosive
action as in sumps, the cover shall be increased up to 50 mm as directed.
Type of joints, spacing of joints, use of all jointing materials and other features
pertaining to the provision of movement joints in liquid retaining structures shall be
got approved prior to commencement of construction. All reinforced concrete work
shall be thoroughly and efficiently vibrated during laying by use of vibrators.
For liquid retaining structures M:30 grade (SRC) shall be used, the same shall be
deemed to be satisfactorily watertight if the external faces show no signs of leakage
and remain apparently dry over the period of observation of 7 days after allowing a
period of 7 days for absorption after filling. Covered tank, where all faces are not
accessible for inspection, shall be kept filled with water for 7 days and thereafter the
drop of water over the next 7 days shall not exceed totally a depth of 12.5 mm per
day. Approved corrective measures, if necessary, shall be undertaken by the Operator
at his own expense. The operator shall use appropriate water proofing compound
during the process of pouring of concrete in required proportion.
43.3. Workmanship
All concreting work shall be carried out according to the IS: 456 ‗Indian Standard
Code of Practice for Plain and Reinforced Concrete for general Building
Construction‘. It should, however, be note that for Over 60 m3 of concrete placed or
for every one day‘s work a minimum of 6 (six) cubes shall be cast for test purposes
and tested at the operator‘s expense in an approved laboratory.
43.4. Formwork
The formwork shall conform to IS: 456.
43.5. Curing
The concrete shall be cured according to IS: 456 or as directed.
43.6. Concrete Finish:
The concrete surface on removal of form work shall be such that no finishing is
necessary if however the surface is not satisfactory, the operator shall if so instructed,
remove unwanted projecting parts by chipping and smoothen the surface with cement
rendering at his own expense.
43.7. Construction Joints / Water Stops
These shall be in accordance with IS: 456 or as shown on the approved drawings.
The centering for forming, the construction joint shall be firmly fixed and adequately
slotted for reinforcement extending beyond the joint. If any concrete has set, care
shall be taken not to disturb the reinforcing steel in casting the second half of a
member with a construction joint and thereby crack the concrete previously placed.
The PVC joints shall be of the ‗rebated‘ or ‗keyed‘ type and shall have a minimum
width of 300 mm inclined ‗feather‘ or ‗straight joints‘ shall not be permitted. The
Joints/Water stops shall be got approved by the Engineer before their placement into
the structure.
43.8. Expansion Joints
Expansion joints shall be provided at positions shown on the approved drawing or as
directed and shall comply strictly with the details shown on construction drawings.
Reinforcement shall not extend across any expansion joint and the break between the
Page 369 of 385
 two sections MUST be complete. Unless otherwise specified, the gap shall be filled
with an elastic joint filler consisting of the following ingredients (by weight),
preheated to a temperature of 190 (375 F).
a) Very find sand 60%
b) Hot bitumen emulsion 33%
c) Cement 5%
d) Fine chopped hemp 2%
43.9. Operator’s Supervision
The operator shall provide constant and strict supervision of all the item of
construction during progress of work, including the proportioning and mixing of the
concrete and bending and placing of reinforcement. Before any important operation
such as concreting or stripping of formwork is begun, adequate notice shall be given.
43.10. Laying Cement Concrete in Foundations & Under Floors
Before laying the concrete, the bottom and sides of the trench up to the proposed
height of the concrete shall be moistened. The concrete shall be tamped immediately
after laying.
43.11. Protective Epoxy Paint Treatment:
Epoxy Paint of standard specifications manufactured/purchased from a reputed firm
approved by IS shall be applied to the outside Concrete surface and all mild steel
works within the sewage pumping station. The coverage capacity of layers shall be at
125 Microns D.F.T. 7.60 sq. mt. /Litre.
43.12. Chases, Holes, Recesses and Inserts:
All chases, holes and recesses for foundation bolts, various services and other
requirements must be formed as shown on the drawings or as directed by the
Owner‘s Engineer during the execution of the work, without extra charge. The
operator shall fix all necessary inserts in the concrete for support of hangers for pipes
and cables, ceiling clamps for lights and fans or for duct etc. If any of the inserts are
to be supplied by other agencies not extra payment will be made to the Operator for
placing the inserts position.
43.13. Load Testing of Structures
Load tests shall be carried out in accordance with IS: 456, if required by the
Executive Engineer.

Section 44. BRICK WORK

44.1. General
Applicable provisions of Conditions of Contract shall govern the work under this
section. The operator shall build the whole of brickwork shown on the drawings with
first-class bricks in cement mortar. The Indian Standard wherever referred to herein
shall be the latest edition of such Standards.

Page 370 of 385

44.2. Materials

Bricks The bricks used shall generally conform to IS: 1077

Cement The cement used shall conform to IS: 269
Sand The sand used shall conform to IS: 1344
Water The water used shall be clean and free from injurious
amounts of deleterious materials. As far as possible, the
water should be of such quality that it is potable

44.3. Mortar Proportion

Unless otherwise specified, the proportions of cement-sand-mortar by volume for
various classes of work shall be as under:
Type of work Cement Sand
Ordinary brickwork for building 1 5
Brickwork in pillars 1 4
Half-brick thick or brick-on edge partition wall 1 4

44.4. Workmanship
The cement and sand shall be thoroughly mixed dry in specified proportions. Water
shall then be added by a sprinkler just sufficient to make a stiff and workable paste.
The mortar shall be used within half an hour of mixing. The mortar, which is unused
within half an hour of mixing, shall be removed from the site.
44.5. Brick-work
All the bricks shall be kept in water till they are completely soaked & only
thoroughly soaked bricks shall be used in the work. The operator shall set out & build
all brickwork to the respective dimensions, thickness and height, as shown on the
drawings.
The operator shall build all brickwork uniformly, no one portion being raised more
than 1 meter above another at one time. The operator shall keep wet all brickwork for
at least 10 days after laying. The surface of unfinished work shall be cleaned and
thoroughly wetted before joining new work to it.
In curved brickwork, the bricks shall be dressed to shape obtain joints redial to the
curve. The joints shall not exceed 12 mm in thickness and should extend the full
thickness of the curved brickwork.
44.6. Damp-proof Course
Damp-proof course shall be provided at positions where ever necessary. In masonry
walls of buildings, it shall normally be placed above the external ground level. It
shall be laid for the full width of solid walls and shall be prepared as specified.
A layer of cement concrete [Link] (cement: sand: coarse aggregate) mix, and of
specified thickness shall be provided. If a damp-proof course requiring the use of

Page 371 of 385

 bitumen felt is specified, bitumen used shall conform to IS: 1322 and workmanship
shall conform to IS: 1609. All exposed surface of the damp-proof course shall be
finished fair and smooth. The external edge shall be chamfered if specified, and shall
be finished flush with masonry surface.

Section 45. FLOORS AND PAVEMENTS

45.1. General
Applicable provisions of Conditions of Contract shall govern work under this section.
The Indian Standards wherever referred to herein shall be the latest edition of such
standards.
45.1.1. Types of Floors and Pavements
The principal types of floors and pavements considered in this specification are as
under:
a) Cast-in-situ artificial stone flooring (plain)
b) Natural stone slab flooring
c) Pre-cast artificial stone flooring (Plain/Textured)
45.2. Materials
45.2.1. Cement
Ordinary Portland cement and white and colored cement shall conform to IS: 269.
45.2.2. Lime
Where lime is required to be used, it shall conform to IS: 712 and slaking of lime
shall be done according to IS: 1635.
45.2.3. Aggregates
The aggregates shall conform to IS: 383. Fine aggregates shall range in size from 1.5
mm to 6 mm. unless specified otherwise. Not more than 5 percent of grains shall pass
IS sieve 15 (0.151 mm mesh) and not more than 10 per cent shall pass IS sieve 30
(0.296 mm mesh). Coarse aggregate shall all pass through 19 mm mesh, unless
specified otherwise and shall be graded as directed. The coarse aggregate for concrete
pavements for approaches and driveways shall all pass through 25 mm ring and shall
be formed by mixing 80% of 25 mm to 12 mm size and 20% of 12 mm to 6 mm size.
The above proportion shall be altered to suit workability if so approved.
45.2.4. Natural Stone Slabs
The stone slabs if used shall be best quality obtainable from Neemuch, Kotah,
Shahabad, Tandur or other places as specified and shall be hard, even durable,
uniform in color and free from cracks, flakes and other defects. No stone shall be
thinner at its thinnest part than 25 mm. unless otherwise specified; the stones shall be
300 mm x 300 mm in size dressed square and with straight edges. The top surface of
stones shall be smooth or polished as specified and edges dressed to a true fir or
chisel dressed as directed.
45.2.5. Water
Water shall be clean and free from injurious amounts of deleterious materials. As far
as possible, water shall be of potable quality.

Page 372 of 385

 45.3. Cast in situ Artificial Stone Flooring
Grey and colored artificial stone is to be composed of 4 parts of fine stone chips 12
mm and below 2 parts of sand and properly screened to one part of cement. The
topping in all cases and to consist of clean and fine sand and cement (2:1) and
sufficient skin thickness to be kept and finally trowelled with neat cement finish
perfectly smooth to satisfaction. In the case of dados and skirting the total thickness
is to be 19 mm of which the bottom layer is to be 12 mm and the toping 6 mm thick
in all cases both the layers are to be laid simultaneously without hiatus so that it will
in effect be one complete layer; the mixing be made in two different lots.
45.4. Natural stone slab flooring
The stone slabs shall be evenly and firmly bedded to the required level and slopes as
directed. Unless otherwise specified, the thickness of joints shall not exceed 6 mm for
unpolished stone slabs and 1 mm for polished stones. The joints shall be raked out to
an adequate depth and pointed flush or slightly sunk, as directed, with cement-sand
mortar of 1:2 proportions. The stone slabs shall be laid to pattern which shall be
approved prior to ordering the stones. The flooring shall be kept wet with wet sand or
water for at least seven days. The flooring shall be well washed and shall be perfectly
clean and free from all mortar stains etc. when completed

Section 46. PLASTERING AND POINTING

46.1. General
Applicable provisions of Conditions of Contract shall govern work under this section.
The Indian Standards wherever referred to herein shall be the latest edition of such
Standards.
46.2. Cement Plaster Materials
o Cement : Cement shall confirm to IS: 269.
o Sand : Shall confirm to IS: 1542.

Other materials, tools and Accessories, they shall confirm to relevant IS codes listed
above and to the requirements specified in IS: 1661.
46.2.1. Proportioning and thickness of Cement Plasters:
The proportions of materials, number of coats and thickness of each coat shall be as a
specified or as directed.
46.2.2. Workmanship
Unless otherwise specified, all plasterwork shall be carried out as per IS: 1661 ―Code
of Practice for Cement and Cement-Lime Plaster Finished on Walls and
Ceilings‖.Special finishing textures to the plaster shall be executed according to
Clause 16 of IS: 1661 and/or as directed.
46.2.3. Curing
After the completion of the work, the pointed face shall be kept well wetted for at
least for 10 days in the case of Cement Pointing.

Page 373 of 385

Section 47. PAINTING AND GLAZING
47.1. General
Applicable provisions of Conditions of Contract shall govern work under this section.
The Indian Standards wherever referred to herein shall be the latest edition of such
standards.
Painting of Iron and Steel Work
Painting of iron and steel work shall generally be carried out as per IS: 1447 (Part I).
47.2. Preparation of Surfaces:
The surface to be painted shall be cleaned free of dirt, oil rust, mill scale and be
thoroughly dry before painting. Cleaning, degreasing, and descalling wherever
necessary shall be carried out as specified in IS: 1477 (Part I) and the method adopted
for surface preparation shall have prior approval.
47.2.1. Primer Coat:
Unless otherwise specified, the primer coat for steel and iron work shall be of Red
Lead paint, conforming to IS: 102. The Red Lead primer shall be applied by means of
approved brushes. The Red Lead paint shall be allowed to dry sufficiently hard
before the application of the succeeding coat A red lead painted surface shall not
however be left exposed permanently, as it is liable to heavy chalking. The primer
coat shall be applied as specified in IS: 1477 (Part-I) and the number of coats shall be
as necessary for as directed.
47.2.2. Finish Coat
The type of intermediate and finish coat and the number of coats to be applied shall
be as necessary or as directed. Intermediate and finish coats may be oil bound
bituminous, aluminum or other types of paints. Aluminum conforms to IS: 165. The
intermediate and finish coats for structural steel work, sheet metal work and cast iron
work shall be applied as specified in IS: 1477 (Part-I).
47.3. Glazing Materials
47.4. Glass
All glass used in the work shall be best quality glass free from specks, bubbles,
smokes, wanes, air holes and other defects, Unless other-wise specified, sheet glass
shall be transparent and of the following weights. For panes up to 600 mm x 600 mm
in size, glass weighing not less than 7.97 kg/sq.m. shall be used for panes 750 mm x
750 mm to 900 mm x 900 mm size, the weight of glass shall be 9.76 kg/sq.m. Unless
other-wise specified, for sizes of glass above 900 mm x 900, plate glass shall be used.
47.4.1. Putty
Putty for use on wooden frames shall conform to IS: 419 and on metal frames to IS:
420.
47.4.2. Workmanship
All glass be cut according to the sizes required as per drawings. Glazing of metal
doors, windows and ventilators shall conform to IS: 1081 and glazing of timber
doors, windows, and ventilators shall conform to IS: 1003, unless specified

Page 374 of 385

 otherwise. For glazing wooden doors and windows, the wooden frame, particularly
the rebate, shall be well oiled to prevent oil from putty being sucked in by wood.
The Operator shall thoroughly clean all glass and replace all putty or glass damaged
during the work.

Section 48. MISCELLANEOUS STEEL AND IRON WORK

48.1. General
Applicable provisions of Conditions of Contract shall govern work under this section.
The Indian Standards wherever referred to herein shall be the latest edition of such
Standard.
48.2. Iron Grills
The grills for Windows, verandahs, balconies, etc. shall be of mild steel or wrought
iron as specified for the work. The design of grills and shapes and sizes of various
components shall be as approved. The edges, angles and corners shall be clean and
true to shape. The joints shall be mechanically inter-locked and overlapping areas
spot welded in such a way that the grill is rigid.
Where moulded grills are specified, the moulded work shall be as approved, and shall
have clean, straight and sharply defined profiles. The operator shall do the necessary
cutting, fitting, drilling, tapping, scribing etc. required to fix grills to adjacent
surfaces. The grills shall be fixed plumb, in line and level. Unless otherwise
specified, grills shall be painted with two coats of red lead paint conforming to IS:
102 before they are fixed.

48.3. Rolling Shutters

Rolling shutters, where specified shall be of the size to suit the openings and shall be
positioned as shown on the drawings and/or as directed.
The rolling shutter shall be fabricated from 18 B.G. Steel and machine rolled with 75
mm rolling contras with effective bridge depth of 12 mm lath sections, interlocked
with each other and ends locked with malleable cast iron. The guides shall be either
rolled or pressed deep channel sections 75 mm deep and 25 mm wide fitted with
necessary fittings and fixtures.
The suspension shaft shall be formed from solid drawn seamless tubes 60 mm O.D.
of wall thickness of 25 mm in 3 segments coupled 2 with 2 pairs C.I. dog-tailed
flange coupling forming one complete unit eliminating deflection in the center to a
minimum.
The springs shall be imported high tensile English flat springs 50/60 mm breadth and
1.6/1.8 mm thickness hardened and tempered. These shall be fitted inside the
fabricated housing on either ends, which counterbalance the shutter curtain. The ball
bearings shall be double row self aligning ball bearing fitted inside C.I. housing fixed
on side brackets holding the suspension shaft at either end
.The suspension of the curtain shall be belted in specially fabricated cages formed
from MS flats, and plates all are welded. The hood cover shall be made of 20 gauge
G.P. sheets with necessary stiffeners and framework to prevent sag, the bottom lock
plate shall be made of 3 mm thick M.S. plate and 95 mm wide reinforced with

Page 375 of 385

 angle/T iron of suitable section with 6 mm dia. [Link] interlocked with last stride
of curtain.
The locking arrangement shall consist of hasp and staple on the bottom plate,
lockable from both sides. Unless otherwise specified, for overall area of rolling
shutters up to 9 sq. m. pull and push type hand-operated shutters shall be used, for
area between 9 and 12 sq. m. Pull and Push type shutters shall be provided with ball
bearings; for area larger than 12 sq. m. , Mechanical Gear type shutters shall be
supplied.

48.4. Collapsible Gates

Collapsible gates shall be of the size and type as specified by the Owner‘s Engineer.
The gates shall be manufactured out of M.S. channel pickets of size 20 mm x 10 mm
and flats 20 mm x 6 mm. The top runner flat shall be at least 50 mm x 12 mm in
section. The bottom guide shall consist of a channel or two angles of specified size
laid in the flooring to guide the free movement of the gate. The gate shall move in the
guide channel on rollers of adequate size fixed at the top and bottom of the gate as
specified. The gate shall be painted with one coat of red lead paint conforming to IS :
102 before fixing in position.

Section 49. WOODWORK AND JOINARY

49.1. Wood:
All wood required to be used, shall be dry, well-seasoned, Bulsar teak wood and shall
be free from knots, cracks or any other kind of defects frames for doors and windows.
49.2. Jointing Materials:
All nails, screws, fixtures shall be of standard quality as approved by the Owner.

49.3. Cutting Edges:

Cutting edge for well to be fabricated as per the drawing approved by Owner‘s
engineer The structural steel to be used, should confirm to IS: 226-1961 and IS:
2062-1962. The steel shall be free from defects as mentioned in IS: 226-1962 and
shall have a smooth uniform finish. Material shall be free from loose mile scale,
rusting or other defects affecting its strength and durability. The test certificates shall
have to be submitted for the structural steel used in cutting edge.
ILLUMINATION:
All internal and external areas shall be provided with lighting. The illumination levels
to be achieved shall be as follows:

AREA LUX

Office and labs 300 Lux

Switchgear Room 200 Lux

Page 376 of 385

 Control Room 300 Lux

Pump House 200 Lux

DG set room 200 Lux

Chemical and general store 150 Lux

Chemical Plant room 200 Lux

Other indoor areas 100 Lux

Outdoor plant from and 50 Lux

Building entrance 100 Lux

Indoor Plant Area 200 Lux

Outdoor Plant Area 50 Lux

Transformer Area 100 Lux

Roads 10 Lux

Fluorescent luminaries shall be used primarily for internal lighting. High pressure
vapour or metal halide type luminaries shall be used in indoor application where their
use is appropriate. If mercury or metal halide is used in indoor then they should be
supplemented with fluorescent luminaries to assure that minimum illumination levels
are maintained following momentary power dips. All other internal areas shall be lit
with fluorescent luminaries. Where specific recommendations of lux level are not
covered above, illumination level in such areas shall be finalized in consultation with
Owner.
Owner shall be required to measure levels of illumination after completion of lighting
installation work and short fall in illumination level shall be made good by the
Operator. Complete set of calculations showing, room, index, copy MF shall be given
during detailed engineering.
Switches / sockets of piano type shall be used in general and in offices of staff,
control room, MMI room, decorative modular switches shall be used. Suitable fans
shall be provided in rooms/ plant areas as per standards. For exhaust fans it must be
provided in panel rooms, pump rooms, chemical rooms, stores, toilets and at least 20
air changes per hour must be maintained.

The following type of lighting fixtures shall be proposed:

a) Decorative type 2x36W fixtures for fluorescent luminaries inside office/
administrative buildings and control rooms.

Page 377 of 385

b) Corrosion resistant fixture with canopy made of FRP for fluorescent luminaries for
corrosive areas like chlorine handling or chemical store or area with corrosive
smell/gases etc.
c) Industrial type vitreous enameled fixture for fluorescent luminaries inside 415V
switchgear, MCC room and pump house.
d) In outdoor process areas, lighting fixtures shall be sodium vapour type subjected to
minimum of IP protection class.
e) All outside lights as plant field lights, building outside lights, flood lights etc. which
are to be switched on only during night hours should be controlled through photo
cell/ clock switch installed at a central place. All lights shall have minimum IP65
protection class.
f) Street lighting wiring shall be through buried underground.
g) All bulb fittings (except fluorescent lamps) will have screw type caps.
h) For outdoor lighting, the lighting feeder shall be operated through a contactor,
controlled by photocell/ clock switch and shall also have a manual by pass switch.
Luminaries shall be installed to permit ease of maintenance i.e. it shall not be
necessary to shut down plant in order to carryout maintenance or to access luminaries
located over areas of water etc. The Operator shall provide all equipment necessary
to carryout maintenance on the lighting installation and demonstrate its operation to
the satisfaction of Owner
Indoor lighting circuit will be arranged in such a way that 50% lighting can be put off
in each room through switches. All lighting circuits will be wired with [Link].
Stranded copper wire or through 2.5 [Link]. armoured cable laid in cable trays. Sub
circuit from switch to fixture could be wired with1.5 [Link]. stranded copper wire in
MS conduits or armoured copper cable of similar size provided total voltage drop in
any lighting distribution board to last lighting point shall not exceed 2%. All lighting
circuits will have separate neutral, separate earth from Lighting Distribution Board.
For illumination of roads, outdoors areas where operation of equipment or units
required and sub station area, lighting fixtures of appropriate type (such as street
lighting type, flood lighting type, post top lanterns etc.) incorporating high pressure
sodium vapour lamps shall be proposed. Street light poles shall not have less than
7500 mm height above the finished road level and the arm shall not project more than
1200 mm along the road width. Poles of bigger heights may also be used if some
outdoor areas are to be illuminated. Poles of 4 / 4.5 Mtrs using post top lantern may
be used in gate office walk way or in front of office area. Complete area, streets,
lanes, boundary shall be covered with street lighting.
Receptacles (Lighting & Small Power) :
a) Decorative and industrial type units of above shall be proposed in all plant areas,
offices, stores, workshop, plant room and they shall be located at least two numbers
in each room. Distance between two receptacles shall not be more than 8 – 10 mtr.
All small 5 amps 5 pin lighting & small power sockets shall be wired by multi
stranded copper wire of 2.5 sq. mm laid in rigid MS conduits along with earth wire
of1.5 [Link] flexible copper wire or equivalent size armoured cables. All wiring shall
be coded with Red, Yellow, Blue & Black as per the phase used. If required, wiring
can be done alternatively through armoured copper cables of similar size laid in MS
perforated trays of minimum 2.0 mm thick.

Page 378 of 385

 b) Three phase power receptacles (convenience outlets) suitable for operation of 415V,3
Phase 4 wire, 50 Hz power supply shall be proposed. In indoor areas one such unit
shall be provided to cover areas of 20 meter radius (or at least one in each room
housing plant items ) and in outdoors areas on such unit shall be provided at 50 meter
interval. Actual requirement of such units shall be finalized by MMC during detailed
engineering. One three phase receptacle shall be provided near entrance of each
building for utilities like welding.
c) Single phase 15 Amp 5 Pin / 6 Pin receptacles will be provided in each room and in
halls they will be provided in such a way that with 15 meter cord we should reach
every place in building. These shall be wired with 4 sq. mm copper earth wire in MS
rigid conduits along with 2.5 sq. mm earth wire. Not more than two sockets shall be
looped in one circuit. Alternatively they can also be connected through armoured
cable of 4 sq. mm running in appropriate cable trays.
Separate lighting panels and lighting distribution boards shall be installed and they
shall not take tapping for power from motor control centers or power distribution
boards.

Section 50. Section IV Electro Mechanical Works

50.1. Technical Specifications for Electrical Works: All works shall be carried out in
accordance with the requirements of:
i. IE Rules
ii. State Electricity Board
iii. Rules and regulations of Local authorities, and
iv. The standards in this specification

The Operator is responsible for applying and obtaining necessary statutory approvals
and shall ensure workmanship of good quality and shall assign qualified supervisor /
engineers and competent labour who are skilled, careful and experienced in carrying
out similar works.

50.2. IS codes for electrical Works:

IS : 10418 Specification for drums of electric cables

IS : 2633 Methods of testing weight, thickness and uniformity of coating on hot
dipped galvanized articles
IS : 209 Specifications for Zinc

Code No. Title

IS : 2062 Steel for general structural purposes

IS : 808 Dimensions for hot rolled steel beam, column channel and angle
sections

Page 379 of 385

 IS : 816 Code of practice for use of metal arc welding for general
construction in mild steel
IS : 2629 Hot deep galvanising of iron & steel
IS : 2633 Methods of testing uniformity of coating
IS : 4759 Hot dip zinc coatings on Structural steel and other allied
Products
Code No. Title
IS2026/BS17 Power Transformer
1/IEC76
IS3639 Fittings and Accessories
IS1180 Auxiliary Transformer
IS6600/BSCP Loading of oil immersed transformer
.1010/IEC354
IS335/BS Transformer Oil
148/IEC296
IS2099/BS22 Bushings for > 1000V, AC
3/IEC137
IS7421 Bushings for  1000V, AC
IS13947 (Part Degree of Protection
1) / IEC947-1
IS3637 Buchholz Relay
IS Insulation Materials for Electrical Machinery
1271/BS2757
/IEC85
IS 3202/ Climate Proofing
BSCP1014/
IEC354
IS 1886 Installation & Maintenance of Transformers
IS 2705 Current Transformers
I.S. 3043 – Earth Pits
1987.
General Specification for Electrical works Part VII (DG Sets)
published by CPWD.

50.3. Specifications for mechanical equipment: Mechanical equipment: will be

required for following units
1. Screen channels, mechanically
cleaned fine screens.
2. Sluice gates
3. Grit chambers with mechanical grit
removal equipment
4. Parshall
flumes

Page 380 of 385

 5. Various sizes of
interconnecting piping.
6. Fire-fighting equipment as per state Government department of
Fire services.

All mechanical equipment such as screens, degritting devices, sluice gates, etc
which comes into contact with sewage shall be fabricated in non corrosive
materials and metallic parts in contact with sewage shall conform to Stainless steel.
All walkways s h a l l b e i n R C C o r s t a i n l e s s s t e e l with s t a i n l e s s
s t e e l handrails. Provide appropriate explosion proof construction and devices
at any enclosed locations components where incoming sewage is exposed to
atmosphere.
Mechanical screens shall be operated w i t h Shaftless screw conveyors t o
t r ansfer screenings to the screw compactor to dewater and compact the
screenings. The screen will be controlled by a timer as backup to level control, so
that, the cleaning mechanism can run at a set interval.
The deposited grit will be removed from the grit chambers by appropriate and
efficient removing mechanism. Grit removal shall be accompanied with a grit
classifier and grit washing system to ensure the grit is free from organic matter
before disposal.
Parshall flumes downstream of each grit chamber structure shall be required
where an ultrasonic flow meter will be installed for measuring and adding the
total flow of raw sewage entering the site.
Isolation weir gates and bye pass shall be required to control and/or isolate flow
to any one units
50.4. IS codes for mechanical equipment:
IS 6280 – 1971 – Sewage Screens
IS 8413 – 1982 – Biological Treatment Equipment – Part II and its modifications
IS 10037 – Part I – 1981 & Part II & III – 1983 – Sludge dewatering equipments
IS 10261 – Requirements for settling tank for waste water
IS 105533 – Part I, II, III – Chlorination Plants
IS 5600 – 1970 - Sewage and Drainage Pumps
IS 6279 – 1971 – Grit Removal devices
The list is not exclusive and the operator shall be responsible to follow the
appropriate standards:
Instrumentation, Control and SCADA System
A Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) system will be installed
in the Sewage Pumping station networked to the PLC and shall acquire,
display, monitor and issue remote control actions for maintaining the pumps.
The S C AD A system shall also originate custom performance reports for
management reporting.

Page 381 of 385

 Section- V TRAINING AFTER COMMISSIONING & DEFECT
LIABILITY PERIOD

Section 51. TRAINING OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL

The Operator shall be responsible to provide practical training in all aspects of the
operation, maintenance, and facilities to all personnel selected by the Owner, who
will ultimately be responsible for the operation, maintenance and repair of the system
and its facilities after defects liability period.
For this purpose, the Operator shall provide a comprehensive training program for the
Owner‘s personnel during the entire period of the trial run, and for as long thereafter
as may be reasonably required to ensure that the designated personnel are adequately
trained to take up their responsibilities.
All costs for the Operator‘s personnel and the training facilities required for the
training during trial run period, and any incidental training expenses, shall be borne
by the Operator.

Section 52. TRIAL RUN OF THE SYSTEM

0After commissioning of works, the Operator shall maintain the works for 3 (three)
months to demonstrate satisfactory performance to the Engineer prior to taking over
by the Owner. The cost of electricity, if required for operation & maintenance of
works during the period of this trial run will be borne by the Owner. The cost towards
Operator‘s Engineer and other operating personnel during the said period of trial run,
along with cost of tools and spare parts which are required for operation and
maintenance of the works and equipment during the trial run period shall be borne by
the Operator and shall be included in the quoted bid price. In the event that the
system or any of the facilities do not satisfactorily achieve the required performance
standards during this period, the trial run period shall be extended until such time as
the Operator has satisfactorily rectified any deficiencies as may be necessary to
satisfy the performance requirements. No additional compensation will be paid to the
Operator for such extension.

Page 382 of 385

 Schedule 11 [DELETED]
Special Conditions of Contract

Project MOU between the Central Government, State Government and

the ULB and State Guarantee on Payments

SURVEY, REVIEW THE DESIGNS, REDESIGN WHERE NECESSARY AND

BUILD NEW SEWERAGE NETWORK OF ABOUT 180 KM LENGTH AND
ALL APPURTENANT STRUCTURES, AND OPERATION &
MAINTENANCE OF SEWERAGE NETWORK FOR A PERIOD OF 10
YEARS AT BEUR IN PATNA, STATE OF BIHAR, INDIA.

Page 383 of 385

Page 384 of 385
 Schedule 12

Allowed and Suggested alignments / Locations for design of the Sewerage

Network

SURVEY, REVIEW THE DESIGNS, REDESIGN WHERE NECESSARY AND

BUILD NEW SEWERAGE NETWORK OF ABOUT 180 KM LENGTH AND
ALL APPURTENANT STRUCTURES, AND OPERATION &
MAINTENANCE OF SEWERAGE NETWORK FOR A PERIOD OF 10
YEARS AT BEUR IN PATNA, STATE OF BIHAR, INDIA.

Page 385 of 385